Tarraco
Owner’s manual
5FJ012720BE
Inglés
5FJ012720BE (07.20)
SEAT Tarraco Inglés (07.20)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.20
Vehicle identification da a
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of eceipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Introduction
Thank you f
or your trust choosing a SEAT v
e-
hicle.
With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy
a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology
and top quality features.
We recommend reading this Instruction Man-
ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle
so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily
driving.
Information about handling is complemented
with instructions regarding the operation and
maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure
its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we
want to give you valuable advice and tips to
drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting
the environment.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.
SEAT, S.A.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety infor-
mation concerning the passenger's
fr
ont airbag
›››
page 33, Fitting and us-
ing child seats.
About this manual
This manual describes the f
eat
ures of the ve-
hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of
the features described below will be intro-
duced in the future or will only be available in
certain markets.
Some of the features described here are
not included in all the types or variations
of the model and they can be varied or
modified based on technical or marketing
requirements without it being considered
misleading advertising.
Some details on the drawings may vary from
its vehicle and must be interpreted as a
standard representation.
The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,
backwards) in this manual refer to the travel
direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-
ted.
The audiovisual material is only meant to
help the users better understand some fea-
tures of the vehicle. It is not a replacement for
the instruction manual. Access the instruction
manual to see the complete information and
warnings.
The features marked with an asterisk
are included by default only in certain
versions of the model, supplied as op-
tional only for certain versions or only of-
fered in certain countries.
Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-
sence of this symbol does not guarantee
that the term is not a trademark.
It indicates that the section continues on
the next page.
You can access the information in this manual
using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
information, which is detailed in the corre-
sponding chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about safet
y and warn you about
possible accident or injury risks.
CAUTION
Texts after this symbol indicate possible
damage to the v
ehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about the prot
ection of the environ-
ment.
®
Note
Texts after this symbol contain addition-
al information.
Digital instruction manual
The digit
al v
ersion of the manual can be
found on SEAT's official website:
Fig. 1 SEAT website
●
scan the QR code
›
›
›
Fig. 1
●
OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manuals-offline
.html
and select your vehicle.
Related videos
The oper
ation of some of the v
ehicle's fea-
tures can be shown as an instruction video:
Fig. 2 SEAT website
●
scan the QR code
›
›
›
Fig. 2
●
OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manuals-offline
.html
choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.
Note
Video instructions are only available in
cert
ain languages.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Gener
al vie
ws of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Correct sitting position of vehicle occu-
pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 17
How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 20
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PreCrash system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Information, assistance and emergency
call service* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 51
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Instruments and warning/control
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 137
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Net partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Auxiliary heating and ventilation* . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Infotainment operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
voice control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Radio/Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Navigation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5
Table of Contents
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-
bo
x* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Gear
-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
SEAT Drive Profiles* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Drive assist sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . 238
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Side Assist with Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Stabilisation and brake assistance sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 274
Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* . . . . . . 274
Parking aid parking and manoeuvring
(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Peripheral view system (Top View Cam-
era)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . 293
Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Electrically unlocking trailer hook* . . . . . . . . . 304
Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Engine management and emissions control
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 339
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Accessories and modifications to the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 347
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 350
Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Information about the EU Directive
2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Indications about the technical data . . . . 355
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Levels control
–
Oil
›
›
›
page 317
–
Brake fluid
›››
page 322
–
Battery
›››
page 323
Bonnet
–
Unlocking lever
›››
page 315
–
Open/close
›››
page 315
A
B
Towing the vehicle
–
T
o
wline anchorage
›››
page 57
–
Tow-start
›››
page 55
C
Driving assistance sensors
›
›
›
page 237
Front multifunction camera
Rear-view cameras “Area View”
Front camera “Area View”
Front radar
Parking aid sensors
Park assist sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Rear lid
–
Opening fr
om outside
›
››
page 104
–
Emergency opening
›››
page 107
Towing the vehicle
–
Towline anchorage
›››
page 57
–
Tow-start
›››
page 55
Opening and closing
–
Doors
›››
page 101
–
Central locking
›››
page 92
–
Emergency lock
›››
page 102
A
B
C
Fuel tank
–
Fuel capacit
y
›
››
page 355
–
Open/Close cap
›››
page 307
Action in the event of a puncture
–
Anti-puncture kit
›››
page 44
–
Wheel change
›››
page 46
D
E
Driving assistance sensors
›
›
›
page 237
Rear view camera
Parking aid sensors
Rear radars
Park assist sensor
1
2
3
4
8
General views of the vehicle
Overview (left hand drive)
Electric windows
›
›
›
page 107
Central locking
›››
page 92
Exterior mirror adjustment
›››
page 123
Open bonnet lever
›››
page 315
Headlight switch
›››
page 113
Turn signal and main beam lever
›››
page 115
Cruise control
›››
page 241
Warning lamps
›››
page 82
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Wipers and rear window wiper
›
›
›
page 121
Driver information system
›››
page 80
Infotainment system
›››
page 84
Front passenger airbag disconnection
display
›››
page 28
Fuses
›››
page 59
Steering wheel adjustment
›››
page 15
Starter button
›››
page 215
Air conditioning
›››
page 155
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Hazard warning lights
›
›
›
page 118
16
9
General views of the vehicle
Overview (right hand drive)
Open bonnet lever
›
›
›
page 315
Infotainment system
›››
page 84
Front passenger airbag disconnection
display
›››
page 28
Turn signal and main beam lever
›››
page 115
Cruise control
›››
page 241
Warning lamps
›››
page 82
Wipers and rear window wiper
›››
page 121
1
2
3
4
5
6
Driver information system
›
›
›
page 80
Headlight switch
›››
page 113
Central locking
›››
page 92
Exterior mirror adjustment
›››
page 123
Electric windows
›››
page 107
Fuses
›››
page 59
Hazard warning lights
›››
page 118
Air conditioning
›››
page 155
Starter button
›››
page 215
Steering wheel adjustment
›››
page 15
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
General views of the vehicle
Interior view
Folding the third row of seats
›
›
›
page 140
Access to the third row of seats
›››
page 132
Isofix anchors
›››
page 34
Headrest adjustment
›››
page 128
Seat belts
›››
page 17
Panoramic roof
›››
page 109
1
2
3
4
5
6
Interior mirror
›
›
›
page 123
Disconnecting the front passenger front
airbag
›››
page 28
Armrest
›››
page 136
Electronic parking brake
›››
page 267
Seat adjustment
›››
page 126
7
8
9
10
11
11
Safety
Safety
Saf
e driving
Advice about driving
Saf
ety first!
WARNING
●
This manual contains impor
tant informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle,
both for the driver and the passengers. The
other sections of the on-board documenta-
tion also contain further information that
you should be aware of for your own safety
and for the safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation
is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-
pecially important when lending or selling
the vehicle to another person.
Before driving
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, al
w
ays note the following points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Make sure all luggage is secured
›››
page 137.
–
Make sure that no objects can interfere with
the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors
properly according to your size.
–
Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats
always have the headrests in the in-use po-
sition
›››
page 128.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests
according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
›››
page 31.
–
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position
›››
page 13.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly
›››
page 17.
Factors influencing safety
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your passengers.
–
Al
w
ays pay attention to traffic and do not
get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, traffic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take breaks
regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
Driving under the influence of alcohol,
drugs, medication or narcotics may r
esult
in severe accidents and even loss of life.
●
Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics
may significantly alter perception, affect
reaction times and safety while driving,
which could result in the loss of control of
the vehicle.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
passengers in danger
. In the e
vent of an acci-
dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
12
Safe driving
risk of injury. The following points cover part
of the saf
et
y equipment in your SEAT
1)
:
●
three-point seat belts,
●
belt tension limiters for the front and rear
side seats,
●
belt tensioners for the front and rear side
seats,
●
Belt height adjustment for the front seats
●
front airbags,
●
knee airbags,
●
side airbags in the front seat backrests,
●
head-protection airbags,
●
“i-Size” anchor points for child seats in the
rear side seats and front passenger seat with
the “i-Size” system,
●
height-adjustable front headrests,
●
rear headrests with in-use position and
non-use position,
●
adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Correct sitting position of
vehicle occupants
Correct position on the seat
Fig. 3
The correct distance between the driver
and the st
eering wheel must be at l
east 25 cm
(10 inches).
Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions
The correct sitting positions for the driver and
passengers ar
e sho
wn below.
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the correct sitting position,
contact a specialised workshop for help with
any special devices. The seat belt and airbag
can only provide optimum protection if a cor-
rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-
mends taking your car in for technical serv-
ice.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident or sudden
braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the
following positions:
Valid for all vehicle occupants:
●
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head, or
»
1)
Depending on the version/market.
13
Safety
as close as possible to the same level as the
t
op of your head and under no cir
cumstances
below eye level. Keep the back of your neck
as close as possible to the headrest
›››
Fig. 4.
●
Short people must lower the headrest com-
pletely, even if your head is below its upper
edge.
●
Tall people must raise the headrest com-
pletely.
●
Always keep your feet in the footwell while
the vehicle is in motion.
●
Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly
›››
page 20.
The following also applies to the driver:
●
Given that the vehicle is equipped with ad-
justable headrests, move the headrest as
close as possible to the rear of the head.
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com-
pletely against it.
●
Move the steering wheel so it is at least
25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum
›››
Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands
on both sides, on the outer part, with your
arms slightly bent.
●
The steering wheel must always point to-
wards the chest and never towards the face.
●
Move the seat in such a way that you can
step on the pedals with your knees slightly
bent and with a distance between the knees
and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-
ches)
›››
Fig. 3.
●
Adjust the height of the seat so that you
can reach the top of the steering wheel.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell so
that you have the vehicle under control at all
times.
For the passenger, the following applies:
●
Given that the vehicle is equipped with ad-
justable headrests, move the headrest as
close as possible to the rear of the head.
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com-
pletely against it.
●
Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-
mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-
board check translation). If you are sitting
closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot
protect you properly.
Number of seats
The vehicle has 5 or 7 seats, depending on
the f
eat
ures. All seats are equipped with a
safety belt.
No one taller than 1.60 m should sit on the
third row of seats.
5 seats 7 seats
Seats in the
front
2 2
Seats in the
second row
3 3
Seats in the
third r
ow
– 2
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position may in-
crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
vring, in case of collision or accident and if
the airbags deploy.
●
Before starting the car, all passengers
must be sitting in a correct position and
stay like that for the entire journey. This al-
so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.
●
The maximum amount of people in the
vehicle is the same as the amount of seats
with seat belts.
●
For children, always use a certified pro-
tection system, certified and suited for their
weight and height
›››
page 31.
●
While driving, always keep your feet in
the footwell. Never place them over the
seat or the dashboard, for example, or out-
side the window. Otherwise the airbag and
seat belt may offer insufficient protection
and also increase the risk of injury in the
event of an accident.
14
Safe driving
WARNING
Risk of suffering severe head injuries If peo-
ple t
aller than 1.60 m travel in the third row,
they may receive severe head injuries in
the event of an accident.
●
Never travel with anyone taller than 1.60
m on the third row.
●
When closing the rear lid, always be
mindful of the passengers of the rearmost
seats.
Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-
tion
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,
the risk of se
v
ere or lethal injuries increases.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect
sitting positions substantially reduce the pro-
tective function of seat belts and, therefore,
increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju-
ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe-
cially heightened when a deploying airbag
strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed
an incorrect sitting position. The driver is re-
sponsible for all people, particularly children,
inside the vehicle.
The following list contains examples of incor-
rect sitting positions that could be dangerous
for all vehicle occupants.
When the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the
rear.
●
Never lean against the dash panel.
●
Never lie on the rear seats.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
●
Never place your feet on the bench or on
the backrest of the seat.
●
Never travel in a footwell.
●
Never sit on the armrests.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Never travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position increases
the risk of sev
ere or fatal injuries in the
event of accidents and sudden braking or
manoeuvres.
●
All occupants must sit correctly during
the journey and wear the seat belt correct-
ly.
●
Occupants of the vehicl
e that are not sit-
ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or
are not at a proper distance of the airbag
risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,
especially if the airbags deploy and strike
them.
Steering wheel position adjust-
ment
Fig. 5
Lever in the lower left side of the steering
column.
Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and
only when the v
ehicl
e is stationary.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 5
1
lever down, move the
st
eering wheel t
o the desired position and lift
the lever back up until it locks.
»
15
Safety
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
ment function and an incorrect adjustment
of the st
eering wheel can result in severe or
fatal injury.
●
After adjusting the steering column, push
the lever
›››
Fig. 5
1
firmly upwards to en-
sure the st
eering wheel does not acciden-
tally change position while driving.
●
Never adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust
the steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion, stop safely and make the proper
adjustment.
●
The adjusted steering wheel should be
facing your chest and not your face so as
not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-
tection in the event of an accident.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
to reduce injuries when the driver's front
airbag deploys.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position or in any other manner
(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In
such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,
you may sustain injuries to your arms,
hands and head.
Pedal area
P
edal
s
–
Ensure that you can always press the ac-
celer
ator, brake and clutch pedals unim-
paired to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals
›››
.
Only use fl
oor mats which l
eave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-
ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be
pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the
vehicle.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
Restricting pedal oper
ation can lead to
critical situations while driving.
●
Nev
er lay or fit floor mats or other floor
coverings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area
and impair pedal operation.
16
Seat belts
Seat belts
The whys and wher
ef
ores of
seat belts
Control lamps
It lights up red
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.
The control lamp lights up t
o r
emind the
driver to fasten their seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
●
Fasten your seat belt securely.
●
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
●
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight
›››
page 31.
When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed
exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the
seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened
while driving, a warning sound will be heard
for a few seconds. The warning light will also
flash .
The lamp goes out when the driver and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the
ignition switched on.
Rear seat belts fastened display*
Fig. 6
Instrument panel: left rear seat occu-
pied and corr
esponding seat belt f
astened dis-
play.
Depending on the model version, when the
ignition is s
wit
ched on, the seat belt status
display
›››
Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in-
forms the driver whether the passengers in
the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.
It indicates that the corresponding seat
is empty.
A green light indicates that the seat is
occupied and the occupant is wearing
the seat belt.
A red light indicates that the seat is oc-
cupied and the occupant is not wearing
the seat belt. In this case, the seat belt
control lamp will also light up in red and,
if driving over 25 km/h (15 mph), a warn-
ing sound will be emitted for a few sec-
onds.
If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while
driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt
status is displayed for approximately 30 sec-
onds. The indication can be hidden by press-
ing the
button on the dash panel.
The protective function of seat
belts
Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will
not be thr
o
wn forward in the event of sudden
braking.
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the pr
oper position. They al
so help prevent
uncontrolled movements that may result in
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of
the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
»
17
Safety
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
siv
e saf
ety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driving
around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury and
improving the chances of survival when in-
volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
is not exceeded.
Important safety instructions for
the use of seat belts
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
this section.
–
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat belts are w
orn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even chil-
dren) to share the same seat belt.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,
etc.) because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged
or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as
an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the
proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-
ducing their capacity to protect.
●
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not
be blocked with paper or other objects, as
this can prevent the latch plate from en-
gaging securely.
●
Nev
er use seat belt clips, fastening rings
or similar items to alter the position of the
belt webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to
the connections, belt retractors or parts of
the buckle could cause severe injuries in
the event of an accident. Therefore, you
must check the condition of all seat belts
at regular intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an
accident and have been stretched must be
replaced by a specialised workshop. Re-
newal may be necessary even if there is no
apparent damage. The belt anchorage
should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
the retractors may not work properly.
18
Seat belts
Head-on collisions and the laws of
physics
Fig. 8
A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown
f
orw
ard violently.
Fig. 9
The unbelted passenger in the rear seat
is thr
o
wn forward violently, hitting the driver
who is wearing a seat belt.
The effects of the laws of physics in the case
of a head-on collision ar
e easy t
o explain: the
moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-
ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on
both the vehicle and its passengers.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of
the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher
they are, the more energy there is to be “ab-
sorbed” in the event of an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),
for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-
gy is multiplied by four.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
our example do not have their seat belts fas-
tened, in the event of a collision the entire
amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In
a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are
thrown forward and will make violent contact
with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-
screen or whatever else is in the way
›››
Fig. 8.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants
›››
Fig. 9.
19
Safety
How to properly adjust your
seat belt
F
ast
ening and unfastening the seat
belt
Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt
int
o the buckl
e.
Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-
cupants in the position that most pr
ot
ects
them in the event of an accident or sudden
braking
›››
.
F
ast
ening the seat belt
Fasten your seat belt before each trip.
●
Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly
›››
page 13.
●
Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
an upright position
›››
.
●
Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-
bing e
v
enly across your chest and lap. Do
not twist the seat belt when doing so
›››
.
●
Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the
corr
esponding seat
›
››
Fig. 10.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
Releasing the seat belt
Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle
has come to a standstill
›››
.
●
Press the red button on the buckle
›
›
›
Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from the
buckle.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim will not be damaged.
WARNING
●
The seat belt cannot offer its full pr
otec-
tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-
right position and the seat belt is worn cor-
rectly, according to your size.
●
Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
den braking.
●
The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,
can cause severe injuries if the belt moves
from hard areas of the body to soft areas
(e.g. the stomach).
20
Seat belts
Correct seat belt position
Fig. 12
Correct seat belt and headrest posi-
tions, vie
w
ed from front and the side.
Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.
Seat belts offer their maximum protection in
the e
v
ent of an accident and reduce the risk
of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when
they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if
the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat
belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op-
timum position to ensure the airbag provides
the maximum protection. The seat belt must
therefore always be worn and the webbing
correctly positioned.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe
or even fatal injuries
›››
page 13, Correct sit-
ting position of vehicle occupants.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind
the shoulder.
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-
bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up
any slack.
In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt
must lie evenly across the chest and as low
as possible over the pelvis, never across the
stomach and must be worn properly at all
times during the pregnancy
›››
Fig. 13.
Adapting the position of the belt webbing
to your size
The seat belt can be adapted using the fol-
lowing equipment:
●
Front seat belts with height adjustment.
●
Front seat height adjustment.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can
cause sev
ere or fatal injuries in the event of
an accident.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-
ably on the torso
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie
across the pelvis, never across the stom-
ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-
fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if
necessary to take up any slack.
●
For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over
the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”
the stomach
›››
Fig. 13.
●
Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-
tened.
●
Once the seat belt is positioned correct-
ly, don't pull it away from your body with
your hand.
●
Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or
fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.
●
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings
or similar instruments to alter the position
of the belt webbing.
Note
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maint
aining the correct position of the
»
21
Safety
belt webbing, contact a specialised work-
shop for help with any special de
vices to
ensure the optimum protection of the seat
belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking
your car in for technical service.
Seat belt height adjustment
Fig. 14 Next to the front seats: belt height ad-
just
er
.
Using the height adjusters for the front seats
and the out
er seats of the second r
ow, the
position of the seat belts can be adjusted in
the shoulder area according to the height of
the occupant:
●
Keep the guide device pressed down in the
direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 14.
●
Move the guide device up or down until the
seat belt lies over the centre of your shoulder
›››
page 20.
●
Release the guide device.
●
Pull the belt sharply to check that the de-
vice is engaged securely.
WARNING
Never adjust the belt height while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Seat belt tensioners
Ho
w the seat belt t
ensioner works
The seat belts for the front seats and the side
r
ear seats on the second r
ow
1)
are equipped
with belt tensioners.
The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,
although only in severe head-on, lateral and
rear-end collisions.
This retracts and tightens the seat belts, re-
ducing the forward motion of the occupants.
The belt pre-tensioners work in combination
with the airbag system. In case of overturn,
the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the
head airbags are deployed.
Reversible seat belt tensioning
In specific driving situations, a reversible ten-
sioning of the seat belts might take place
›››
page 23. For example:
●
in the event of sudden brakes
●
in the event of oversteering or understeer-
ing
●
in the event of minor collisions
Note
●
If the seat belt tensioners ar
e triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it
is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components
of the system are scrapped. Specialised
workshops are familiar with these regula-
tions, which are also available to you.
Maintenance and disposal of seat
belt t
ensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that ar
e inst
alled in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence
1)
Depending on version/market.
22
Seat belts
may be that, in the event of an accident, the
belt t
ensioners function incorr
ectly or may
not function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to the
specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
●
Improper use or r
epairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners
may fail to trigger or may trigger in the
wrong circumstances.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-
tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other re-
pair work, must be performed by a special-
ised workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be
changed if they have been activated.
For the sake of the environment
Airbag modules and belt tensioners may
contain per
chlorate. Observe the legal re-
quirements for their disposal.
PreCrash system*
Ho
w it w
orks
The PreCrash system is an assistance system
that actives a series of measur
es to protect
the occupants of the vehicles in potentially
risky situations, but which cannot prevent a
collision.
It only works completely if no special driving
profile is selected and if there are no operat-
ing anomalies.
Basic features
Depending on the legal provisions of the
country and the features of the vehicle, in crit-
ical situations (e.g. in certain cases of emer-
gency braking or loss of control of the vehicle
by the driver) the following functions can be
activated separately or at the same time
when the vehicle is travelling faster than ap-
proximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
●
Reversible tensioning of front seat belts that
are f
astened.
●
Operation of the hazard warning lights.
●
Automatic closing of the windows until they
are just cracked open and, depending on the
equipment, of the sunroof.
●
In the event of overturning, depending on
the equipment, activation of the belt tension-
ers.
Depending on how critical the driving situa-
tion is, the belts are either tightened individu-
ally, or both belts at the same time.
In addition to Front Assist
In vehicles with Front Assist
›››
page 245,
within the limits of the system, information is
assessed on the risk of collision with the vehi-
cle in front. The functions of the PreCrash
system may also be activated if there is a
high likelihood of a rear-end collision, or dur-
ing the activation of Front Assist.
Activation of the PreCrash system
The PreCrash system can be partially deacti-
vated by deactivating the traction and / or
stability control, depending on the equip-
ment. When these vehicle safety controls are
switched on (by default, every time the igni-
tion is turned on), the system is fully activated.
Driving profile selection settings
In vehicles with driving profile selection,
PreCrash adapts to suit the special vehicle
configuration of the corresponding profile
›››
page 232.
Limited operation
The PreCrash system is not available or only
has limited availability in the following situa-
tions:
»
23
Safety
●
When the ASR and/or the ESC ar
e discon-
nect
ed.
●
When driving in reverse.
●
When the airbag control unit is not operat-
ing properly.
●
When there is a fault in the system itself, in
the ESC or in the Front Assist.
Problems and solutions
If the PreCrash is not working correctly, the
message System unavailable or System
with limited features is shown perma-
nently on the dashboard display. Have the
system checked by a SEAT workshop.
WARNING
The PreCrash system cannot overcome the
limits imposed by the laws of physics; it on-
ly w
orks within the limits of the system.
Risks that compromise safety are never jus-
tified by the use of this system. The system
is not a replacement for driver awareness
and cannot prevent a collision.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-
ditions.
●
The system is not always able to recog-
nise objects.
●
The system may not react to people or
animals or objects that cross length-wise
or that are hard to detect.
●
Metallic ob
jects (e.g. fences) or other el-
ements of the public road or adverse
weather conditions can hinder its operation
and thus its ability to detect collision risk.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps that light
up or the messages shown on the dash-
board.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead
t
o an accident and cause injuries.
●
Ne
ver change settings on the Infotain-
ment System while driving.
Airbag system
Brief intr
oduction
Why is it so impor
tant to wear a
seat belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
prot
ection, the seat belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work
effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it
is most important to properly wear the seat
belts at all times, not only because this is re-
quired by law in most countries, but also for
your safety
›››
page 17, The whys and
wherefores of seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
24
Airbag system
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
airbag. In this case
, the infl
ating airbag may
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.
This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors for triggering the
airbag are the type of accident, the angle of
impact and the vehicle speed.
Whether or not the airbags are activated de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
head-protection airbags will not be triggered.
Take into account that the visible damage in
a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter
how serious, is not a determining factor for
the airbags to have been activated.
WARNING
●
Wearing the seat belt incorr
ectly or as-
suming an incorrect sitting position can
lead to critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain
critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-
gered. Children up to 12 years old should
alw
ays travel on the rear seat. Never trans-
port children in the vehicle if they are not
restrained or the restraint system is not ap-
propriate for their age, size or weight.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-
ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-
erly
›››
page 17.
Description of the airbag system
The airbag system offers additional protec-
tion f
or the occupants in combination with the
seat belts.
The airbag syst
em comprises the follow-
ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):
●
Electronic control unit
●
Front airbags for driver and passenger
●
Knee airbag for the driver
●
Side airbags
●
Head airbag
●
Airbag control lamp on the instrument
panel
›››
page 26
●
Key-operated switch for front passenger
airbag
●
Control lamp for disabled/enabled status
of the front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on
›››
page 26,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on,
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only pro-
vide maximum pr
otection if the occupants
are seated correctly
›››
page 13.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-
tem, have the system checked immediately
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise
there is a danger that during a collision, the
»
25
Safety
system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousands of a second, to pr
ovide additional
protection in the event of an accident. A fine
dust may develop when the airbag deploys.
This is normal and it is not an indication of fire
in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
tory and activ
ates the respective restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though the
accident may cause extensive damage to the
car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous head-on collisions:
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
●
Knee airbag for the driver.*
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous side-on collisions:
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut;
●
an emergency call is started*
›››
page 42.
Operation of the airbags
Airbag system control lamps
It lights up on the combi-instru-
ment
Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .
Have the system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
It lights up on the dash panel
Fault in the airbag system.
Have the syst
em checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
Front passenger front airbag deactivated.
Check if the airbag should be k
ept deactivated
It lights up on the dash panel
Front passenger front airbag activated.
The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds
after the ignition is switched on
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
ew seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system
control lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-
cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner system
›››
. Have the system
26
Airbag system
checked immediately by a specialised work-
shop
.
If the fr
ont passenger airbag is deactivated,
the warning lamp re-
mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that
the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front
passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp
does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the
control lamp on the instrument panel,
there is a fault in the airbag system
›››
. If
the contr
ol l
amp is flashing, there is a fault in
the disabling of the airbag system
›››
. Have
the syst
em check
ed immediately by a speci-
alised workshop.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner syst
em, the airbags and seat
belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to
trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.
●
The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-
taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the
system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
●
Do not mount a child seat in the front
passenger seat or remove the mounted
child seat! The front passenger front airbag
may deploy during an accident in spite of
the fault.
CAUTION
Always pay attention to any lit control
lamps and t
o the corresponding descrip-
tions and instructions to avoid damage to
the vehicl
e or harm to the occupants.
Front airbags
Fig. 15
Driver airbag located in steering
wheel
.
Fig. 16 Front passenger airbag located in
dash panel
.
The driver's front airbag is housed in the
st
eering wheel and that of the fr
ont passen-
ger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identified
by the word “AIRBAG”.
The airbag covers fold open and remain at-
tached to the steering wheel
›››
Fig. 15 and
the dash panel
›››
Fig. 16when the driver and
front passenger airbags, respectively, are
triggered.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants ad-
ditional protection for the head and chest in
the event of a severe frontal collision
›››
.
Their special design all
o
ws the controlled es-
cape of the propellant gas when an occu-
pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the
head and chest are protected by the airbag.
After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-
ciently to allow visibility.
WARNING
●
The deployment space betw
een the front
passengers and the airbags must not in
any case be occupied by other passenger,
pets and objects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
27
Safety
Activate and deactivate front pas-
senger fr
ont airbag*
Fig. 17
Switch for activating and deactivating
the fr
ont passenger airbag.
Fig. 18
Dash panel: control lamp for the deac-
tiv
ation of the fr
ont passenger front airbag.
Deactivate the front passenger front airbag
only if you hav
e t
o use a rear-facing child
seat in the front passenger seat.
SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the
rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the
front passenger airbag.
When the front passenger airbag is deacti-
vated, this means that only the front passen-
ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other
airbags in the vehicle remain activated.
Deactivate and activate the front passen-
ger front airbag
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Open the door on the front passenger side.
●
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
›››
Fig. 17. About 3/4 of the key should enter;
this is as far as it will go.
●
Turn the key gently to change its position to
(deactivate) or to (activate). If you have
difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the
key as far as it will go.
●
Close the front passenger door.
●
When deactivating the airbag, switch the
ignition on and check that the control lamp
with the lettering re-
mains lit in the middle of the dash panel
›››
Fig. 18.
●
When reactivating the airbag, check that
when the ignition is switched on, the
control lamp does not light up and the
lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns
off.
WARNING
●
The driver of the v
ehicle is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
●
Always switch off the ignition before dis-
abling the front passenger airbag! Failure
to do so could result in a fault in the airbag
deactivation system.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disa-
bling switch as it could get damaged or en-
able or disable the airbag during driving.
●
If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,
reactivate it as soon as possible so that it
can fulfil its protective function.
28
Airbag system
Knee airbag*
Fig. 19
On the driver side: location of the knee
airbag
Fig. 20
On the driver side: airbag action radius
f
or the knees.
The knee airbag is located on the driver side
bel
o
w the dash panel
›››
Fig. 19. Airbags are
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
The area framed in red (deployment area)
›››
Fig. 20 is covered by the knee airbag
when it is deployed. Objects should never be
placed or mounted in this area.
WARNING
●
The knee airbag is deployed in fr
ont of
the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-
ment areas of the knee airbags free.
●
Never not fix objects to the cover or in the
deployment area of the knee airbag.
●
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a
distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-
tween your knees and the location of the
this airbag. If your physical constitution
prevents you from meeting these require-
ments, make sure you contact a special-
ised workshop.
Side airbags*
Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat.
The side airbags are located in the driver's
seat and fr
ont passenger seat backr
ests
›››
Fig. 21.
The locations are identified by the text “AIR-
BAG” in the lower region of the backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-
bags system gives additional protection for
the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision and, depending on the
features, also in the event of the vehicle over-
turning
›››
.
In a side collision, the side airbags r
educe the
risk of injury t
o passengers to the areas of the
body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal protection, the seat belts also hold
the passengers in the event of a side collision;
this is how these airbags provide maximum
protection.
WARNING
●
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you l
ean
forward, or are not seated correctly while
the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater
risk of injury if the side airbag system is
triggered in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide
their maximum protection, the prescribed
sitting position must always be maintained
with seat belts fastened while travelling.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly
measure the pressure increase on the
»
29
Safety
interior of the doors, due to air escaping
through the ar
eas with holes or openings in
the door panel.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels
have been removed or if the panels have
not been correctly fitted.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-
ers in the door panels have been removed,
unless the holes left by the loudspeakers
have been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are
closed or covered if loudspeakers or other
equipment are fitted inside the door pan-
els.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deploy-
ment space between them and the airbags,
or allow children or other passengers to
travel in this position. It is also important
not to attach any accessories (such as cup
holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged.
In this case, the side airbags would not be
triggered.
●
Under no circumstances should protec-
tive covers be fitted over seats with side
airbags unless the covers have been ap-
pro
ved for use in your vehicle. Because the
airbag deploys from the side of the back-
rest, the use of conventional seat covers
would obstruct the side airbag, seriously
reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat uphols-
tery or around the seams of the side airbag
units must be repaired immediately by a
specialised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag com-
ponents for other repairs (such as removal
of the front seat) should only be performed
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,
faults may occur during the airbag system
operation.
Head-protection airbags*
Fig. 22
Location of head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on
both sides in the int
erior abo
ve the doors
›››
Fig. 22 and are identified with the text “AIR-
BAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
occupants additional protection for the head
and upper body in the event of a severe side
collision
›››
.
The ar
ea fr
amed in red is covered by the
head-protection airbag when it is deployed
›››
Fig. 22 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-
jects should never be placed or mounted in
this area
›››
.
In the e
v
ent of a side collision the head-pro-
tection airbag is triggered on the impact side
of the vehicle.
30
Transporting children safely
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk
of injury t
o passengers in the fr
ont and rear
side seats facing the impact.
WARNING
●
In order f
or the head-protection airbags
to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be
maintained with seat belts fastened while
travelling.
●
For safety reasons, the head-protection
airbag must be disabled in those vehicles
fitted with a screen dividing the interior of
the vehicle. See your technical service to
make this adjustment.
●
There must be no other persons, animals
or objects between the occupants of the
outer seats and the deployment space of
the head-protection airbags so that the
head-protection airbag can deploy com-
pletely without restriction and provide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore,
sun blinds which have not been expressly
approved for use in your vehicle may not be
attached to the side windows
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on
coat hangers.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the head-pr
otection airbag
system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such
as removal of the roof lining) should only
be performed by a specialised workshop.
Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-
bag system operation.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of
the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-
ation of the side and head-protection air-
bags neither the doors nor the door panels
should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting
loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-
aged, the airbag system may not work cor-
rectly. All work carried out on the front door
must be done in a specialised workshop.
Transporting children
saf
ely
Saf
ety for children
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident statistics, w
e recommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 19. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-
ways use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see
www.seat.com).
»
31
Safety
These systems have been especially de-
signed and appr
o
ved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
SEAT recommends securing the child seats
shown on the website as described below:
●
Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-
el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg (RO-
MER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX BASE /
PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE).
●
Child seats in the direction of travel (group
1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUO PLUS
+ TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I-SIZE).
●
Child seats directed towards the front of
the vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX
(ROMER KIDFIX XP).
●
Child seats directed towards the front of
the vehicle (group 3): safety belt and ISOFIX
(ROMER KIDFIX XP).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note
›››
page 33.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
Child seats group classification
Fig. 23
Examples of child seats.
Use only child seats that are officially ap-
pr
o
ved and suitable for the child.
These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or
ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
Child seats by weight group
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Age group Weight of the child
Group 0 Up to 10 kg
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg
Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
pr
o
ved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129
standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129
test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right
child seat for your model and age group at
SEAT dealers.
Child seats by approval category
Child seats may have the approval category
of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific
(all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-
Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).
●
Universal: child seats with universal appro-
val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no
need to consult any list of models. In the case
of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child
seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether
belt.
●
Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,
in addition to the standard requirements of
32
Transporting children safely
universal approval, requires safety devices to
l
ock the chil
d seat, which require additional
testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-
proval include a list of vehicle models for
which they can be installed.
●
Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
requires a dynamic test of the child seat for
each vehicle model separately. Child seats
with vehicle-specific approval also include a
list of vehicle models for which they can be
installed.
●
i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must
meet the requirements set out in the ECE-
R129 standard in relation to installation and
safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you
which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-
cle.
Fitting and using child seats
Fig. 24 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun
visor
Fig. 25 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the
passenger side door
Warnings about fitting a child seat
T
ak
e the following general warnings into ac-
count if you are going to fit a child seat. They
are valid for all child seats regardless of their
attachment system.
●
Please read and follow the child seat man-
ufacturer's operating instructions.
●
The child seat should preferably be fitted to
the rear seat behind the front passenger seat
so that the child can exit the vehicle on the
pavement side.
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts to the child seat naturally, without
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt
height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
ing child seats.
●
To correctly use a child seat in the back,
the front backrest must be adjusted so that
there is no contact with the child seat in the
back in the case that it goes opposite to the
direction of the car. In the case of front facing
restraint systems, the front backrest must be
adjusted so that there is no contact with the
child's feet.
●
If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
led, in which the method of attachment to the
car is through the seat belt and support
bracket, it should never be installed in the
central rear seat as the ground clearance is
lower than in other places and the support
bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
ciently stable.
●
For a correct assembly of the children's
seat on the second row, adjust or dismount
the headrest, in order to prevent contact with
the chair.
●
When fitting a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat, the seat must be moved back-
wards as far as possible and placed in the
»
33
Safety
highest position. The backrest must also be
put in a v
ertical position
1)
.
Impor
tant information about the front pas-
senger front airbag
A sticker with important information about the
passenger airbag is located on the passeng-
er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side
door frame
›››
Fig. 24.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag
›››
page 24.
●
Objects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag
›››
in Front airbags
on page 27.
The passenger side fr
ont airbag, when ena-
bl
ed, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch
›››
page 28.
When transporting children, use a child seat
suitable for the age and size of each child
›››
page 32.
WARNING
●
If a child seat is secur
ed to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project
it with great force against the door, the roof
or the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing back-
wards on the front passenger seat unless
the front passenger front airbag has been
disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to
the child! However, if necessary, the front
passenger front airbag must be deactiva-
ted
›››
page 28. If the passenger seat has a
height adjustment option, move it to the
highest, most upright position. If you have a
fixed seat, do not install any child restraint
system in this location.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a
key lock switch to deactivate the airbag,
the vehicle must be taken to a technical
service. Do not forget to reconnect the air-
bag when an adult wants to sit in the front
passenger seat.
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicl
e without being properly secured, or
to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-
ling. In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-
cle occupants.
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or in the vehicle.
●
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to
the abdominal and neck areas during a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-
dent.
●
When a child seat is mounted in the rear
seats, the door child-proof lock should be
activated
›››
page 103.
Attachment systems
Depending on the country, different attach-
ment syst
ems ar
e used for safely installing
child seats.
1)
Compliance with current national legislation
and the manufact
urer's instructions is required
when using or installing child seats.
34
Transporting children safely
Attachment systems overview
●
ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a st
andar
dised attach-
ment system allowing quick and safe attach-
ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-
tachment establishes a rigid connection be-
tween the child seat and the car body.
The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,
called connectors. These connectors are fit-
ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
between the seat cushion and the backrest
of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-
FIX attachment systems are used mainly in
Europe
›››
page 36. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
tachment may have to be supplemented with
a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
●
Automatic three-point seat belt. When-
ever possible, it is preferable to attach the
child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than
attaching them with an automatic three-point
seat belt
›››
page 40.
Additional attachment:
●
Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided
over the back of the rear seat and attached
to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points
are located at the back of the rear seat back-
rest on the boot side
›››
page 39. The rings
for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked
with an anchor symbol.
●
Support bracket: some child seats rest on
the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.
The support bracket prevents the child seat
from tipping forward in the event of impact.
Child seats fitted with a support bracket
should only be used in the passenger seat
and side rear seats
›››
. For the assembly of
this t
ype of seat you shoul
d also consult the
list of approved vehicles for this assembly,
available in the instructions for child restraint
systems.
Recommended systems for attaching
child seats
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
follows:
●
Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-
site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support
bracket or i-Size.
●
Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
FIX and Top Tether.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the support bracket can
cause serious or fat
al injury.
●
Make sure the support bracket is correct-
ly and safely installed.
35
Safety
Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system
Fig. 26 Side seats of the second row: ISOFIX/i-
Size securing rings.
Fig. 27 Front passenger seat: ISOFIX securing
rings.
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily
and saf
ely on the r
ear side seats of the sec-
ond row of seats and the front passenger
seat with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system.
Each of the side rear side seats of the second
row of seats and the front passenger seat has
two “ISOFIX” fastening rings. In some vehicles,
the rings are secured to the seat frame. The
“ISOFIX” rings are located between the back-
rest and the seat cushioning of the rear seat
›››
Fig. 26 and of the front passenger seat
›››
Fig. 27.
The Top Tether rings are located on the rear
part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-
hind the seat backrest or in the boot)
›››
Fig. 28. For the front passenger seat, the
ring is below the backrest
›››
Fig. 29.
To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-
FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table
below.
36
Transporting children safely
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Weight group
Size
class
a)
El
ectrical
equipment
Front passenger seat Second row of seats:
Third row of
seats
b)
airbag enabled airbag disabled side centre
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL IL X X
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 X IL IL X X
D ISO/R2 X IL IL X X
C ISO/R3 X IL IL X X
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 X IL IL X X
C ISO/R3 X IL IL X X
B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X
B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X
A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X IL IL X X
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X IL IL X X
IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.
IL
: It is suit
able for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's
vehicle list into account.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.
a)
The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class
accor
ding t
o size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.
b)
Third row not available for all versions.
»
37
Safety
Vehicle i-Size positions
Front passenger seat Second row of seats:
Third row of seats
a)
airbag enabled airbag disabled side centre
X i-U i-U X X
i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification.
X: P
osition not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.
a)
Third row not available for all versions.
Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-
Size” syst
em
You must follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
●
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings
›››
Fig. 26 and
›››
Fig. 27 until the
child seat is heard to engage securely. If the
child seat is equipped with Top Tether anchor
points, secure it to the correspondent ring
›››
page 39. Follow the child seat manufac-
turer’s instructions.
●
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure
that it is properly anchored.
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether
attachment system are available from Tech-
nical Services.
WARNING
The retaining rings are designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
child seats.
●
Nev
er secure other child seats that do
not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-
tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-
tening rings - this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
securing rings.
38
Transporting children safely
Top Tether* securing belts
Fig. 28
Side seats of the second row: adjust-
ment and assembly accor
ding t
o the Top Tether
belt.
Fig. 29 Front passenger seat: adjustment and
assembly accor
ding t
o the Top Tether belt.
Child seats with the Top Tether system come
with a str
ap f
or securing the seat to the vehi-
cle anchor point and provide greater re-
straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce for-
ward movements of the child seat in a crash,
to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from
hitting the inside of the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-
ted seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.
Securing the retainer strap
●
Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining
strap.
●
Position the belt under the headrest (de-
pending on the instructions of the seat itself,
lift or remove the headrest if necessary)
›››
Fig. 28 /,
›››
Fig. 29 /.
●
Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest
›››
Fig. 28 ,
›››
Fig. 29 .
●
Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
●
Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
er's instructions.
●
Push the lock and release it from the an-
choring support.
»
39
Safety
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
increase the risk of injury in the e
vent of a
crash.
●
Nev
er tie the retainer strap to a hook in
the luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other
items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or
the upper ones (Top Tether).
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
If you want to fit a universal approval catego-
ry (U) child seat in your v
ehicle, you must
check that the seat is approved for your vehi-
cle. You will find any necessary information
on the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-
bel. The following table shows the different
fitting options.
Weight group
Front passenger seat
a)
Second row of seats:
Third row of seats
b)
airbag enabled airbag disabled
c)
side centre
d)
Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U X
Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U X
Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U X
Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF X
Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF X
X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.
U: Suit
abl
e for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.
UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.
a)
Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.
b)
Third row not available for all versions.
c)
Seats without height adjustment shoul
d be pl
aced in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.
d)
For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat or the third row.
40
Transporting children safely
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts t
o the chil
d seat naturally, without
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt
height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
ing child seats.
●
Put the seat belt in place and pass it
through the child seat according to the in-
structions of the child seat manufacturer.
●
Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
●
Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle
until you hear the engagement click.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured
in the vehicl
e with a restraint system suita-
ble for age, weight and size.
●
Read and always observe information
and warnings concerning the use of child
seats
›››
page 33.
41
Emergencies
Emergencies
Self
-help
Inf
ormation, assistance and
emergency call service*
How it works
Fig. 30
On the roof console: voice service
contr
ol
s
Depending on the equipment, there is a con-
tr
ol on the r
oof console.
By pressing the buttons , and
›››
Fig. 30, you can run the following voice
services:
●
information call
●
assistance call
●
emergency call service.
A built-in control unit establishes the connec-
tion.
When a voice service is activated, a connec-
tion is established with a phone line.
Control lamp
The control has a warning lamp
›››
Fig. 30
(arrow). It shows the following statuses:
●
Off: the eCall service is not available.
●
Flashes red, approx. 20 seconds after
switching on the ignition: the eCall service
is off.
●
Lights up red: system failure. The eCall
service is available with certain restrictions.
SEAT suggests going to a specialised work-
shop.
●
Lights up green: the eCall service is avail-
able. The system works correctly.
●
Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice
connection.
Information call
1)
With the information call, a call is made to
SEAT, S.A. customer service.
Breakdown call
1)
With the assistance call you can directly re-
quest specialised help in the event of a
breakdown.
Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is
transmitted, e.g. your current location.
Emergency call service
1)
If an emergency call is conducted manually
or activated automatically in the event of an
accident with an airbag triggering, informa-
tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast,
e.g. the current location of the vehicle
›››
page 350.
If the call is public, the person on the other
end of the line uses the language of the
country in which you are located.
If the call is private, the person on the other
end of the line will assist you in the language
you have configured in the Infotainment sys-
tem. If the configured language is not availa-
ble, English will be used.
Diversion to 112 emergency number
In some situations where the emergency call
service is limited or cannot be carried out, an
emergency call is made to 112.
1)
Only available in certain countries.
42
Self-help
The following conditions may cause the
emer
gency call service t
o function in a limi-
ted manner or the call to be diverted to the
112 emergency number:
●
The emergency call is made from an area
with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as
well as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build-
ings, garages, underground walkways, moun-
tains and valleys.
●
In areas with sufficient mobile telephone
and GPS coverage, the mobile telephone
network of the telecommunications operator
in question may not be available.
●
In some countries, the emergency call serv-
ice may not be available due to legal rea-
sons. There is no valid license for the use of
the emergency call service.
●
The components of the vehicle required for
the emergency phone call are damaged or
do not get enough power.
●
In some countries, the emergency call serv-
ice may not be available and depending on
the location of the vehicle, the control lamp
LEDs, and even the operation of the different
types of calls, could have a specific behav-
iour.
Note
Breakdown service and information calls
can incur an additional cost on your tel
e-
phone bill.
Emergency equipment
V
ehicl
e tool kit
Fig. 31 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-
gage compartment: v
ehicl
e tool kit.
The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor
panel in the luggage compartment. T
o ac-
cess the v
ehicle tools
›››
page 138.
The tool kit includes:
Adapter for the anti-theft bolt*
Towing eye, removable
Wheel spanner*
Crank handle for jack
Jack*
Hook for extracting the central wheel
trims*
Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the
handl
e f
or screwing and unscrewing the
wheel nuts
Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional extras.
WARNING
When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set
and spare wheel ar
e loose in the interior
they can be violently thrown in case of a
sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-
cially in accidents, causing serious injury.
●
Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre
mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-
rary spare wheel are safely secured in the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can
cause injury or accidents.
●
Never work with inappropriate or dam-
aged tool
s.
Note
The jack does not generally require any
maintenance
. If required, it should be
greased using universal type grease.
8
43
Emergencies
Tyre repairs
T
MS (T
yre Mobility System)*
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)
will reliably seal punct
ures caused by the
penetration of a foreign body of up to about
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign
objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
you must again check the tyre pressure
about 10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if the
vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-
miliar with the procedure and you have the
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
should seek professional assistance.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
●
In outside temperatures below -20°C
(-4°F).
●
In the event of cuts or perforations in the
tyr
e greater than 4 mm.
●
If you have been driving with very low pres-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
●
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
date.
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
gerous, especially when filling the t
yre at
the roadside. Please observe the following
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-
rounding traffic to fill the tyre.
●
Ensure the ground on which you park is
flat and solid.
●
All passengers and particularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work
area.
●
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you
are familiar with the necessary procedures.
Otherwise, you should seek professional
assistance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-
porary emergency use only until you can
reach the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre
mobility set as soon as possible.
●
The sealant is a health hazard and must
be cleaned immediately if it comes into
contact with the skin.
●
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of
the reach of small children.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the elec-
tronic parking brake and put it in gear when
using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce
the risk of involuntary movement of the ve-
hicle .
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same perf
ormance pr
operties as a conven-
tional tyre.
●
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph).
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-
ing any legal r
equirements.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased
at SEAT dealerships.
Note
Take into account the separate instruction
manual of the tyr
e mobility set* manufac-
turer.
44
Self-help
Anti-puncture kit contents*
Fig. 32
Standard representation: anti-punc-
t
ur
e kit contents.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the fl
oor co
vering in the luggage compart-
ment. It includes the following components
›››
Fig. 32:
Valve insert remover
A sticker to be adhered to the instrument
cluster, within the driver's visual field, to
remind that the maximum advisable
speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Air compressor (depending on the ver-
sion, the model may vary).
ON/OFF switch
1
2
3
4
5
Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated
in the infl
at
or tube).
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
toring system (it can also be integrated in
the inflator tube).
Tube for inflating tyres
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover
1
has a gap at
the l
o
wer end for a valve insert. The valve in-
sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11
.
Sealing and inflating a tyre
Sealing the tyre
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the
›
›
›
Fig. 32
1
tool to remove the insert.
Pl
ace it on a cl
ean surface.
●
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
›››
Fig. 32
10
.
●
Screw the inflator tube
›
›
›
Fig. 32
3
into
the seal
ant bottl
e. The bottle's seal will break
automatically.
●
Remove the lid from the filling tube
›››
Fig. 32
3
and screw the open end of the
t
ube int
o the tyre valve.
6
7
8
9
10
11
●
With the bottl
e upside do
wn, empty all of
the contents into the tyre.
●
Remove the bottle from the valve.
●
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
ing the tool
›››
Fig. 32
1
.
Infl
ating the t
yre
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
›››
Fig. 32
8
into the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air bleed screw is closed
›
›
›
Fig. 32
6
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Insert the connector
›
›
›
Fig. 32
9
into the
v
ehicl
e's 12-volt socket
›››
page 153.
●
Turn the air compressor on with the
ON/OFF switch
›››
Fig. 32
5
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it rea-
ches 2.
0 t
o 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).
A maximum of 8 minutes.
●
Disconnect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If the indicated pressure still cannot be
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
»
45
Emergencies
and request assistance from an authorised
t
echnician.
●
Disconnect the air compr
essor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Attach the sticker
›››
Fig. 32
2
to the instru-
ment clust
er
, within the driver's visual field.
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››
page 46.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compres-
sor and the inflat
or tube may become hot.
●
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
●
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube
or hot air compressor on flammable mate-
rial.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 operational minut
es to avoid
overheating! Before switching on the air
compressor again, let it cool for several mi-
nutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw the inflator tube
››
›
Fig. 32
5
again
and check the pressur
e on the gauge
6
.
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and l
ower:
●
Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be
sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
››
›
.
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kP
a) and higher:
●
Set the t
yre pressure to the correct value
again.
●
Carefully resume your journey until you
reach the nearest specialised workshop with-
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-
sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kP
a) and lower.
●
Seek specialist assistance.
Changing a wheel
What t
o do first
●
Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and
in a safe pl
ace as far away from traffic as
possible.
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
●
Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.
●
Automatic transmission: Mov
e the selector
lever to position P.
●
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle.
●
Have the vehicle tool kit
›››
page 43 and
the spare wheel* ready
›››
page 336.
●
Observe the applicable legislation for each
country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
etc.).
●
All occupants should leave the vehicle and
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
roadside crash barrier).
WARNING
●
Alw
ays observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car
with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-
cle from moving.
46
Self-help
Wheel bolt caps*
Fig. 33
Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.
Removal
●
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools
›
›
›
Fig. 31)
over the cap until it clicks into place
›››
Fig. 33.
●
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
The caps protect the wheel nuts and should
be remounted after changing the tyre.
The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a
special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking
bolts and is not for use with standard wheel
nuts.
Anti-theft wheel nuts
Fig. 34
Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and
adapt
er
.
Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt
●
Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.
●
Insert the special adapter
›
›
›
Fig. 34
1
(ve-
hicl
e t
ools
›››
page 43) onto the anti-theft
wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.
●
Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto
the adapter as far as it will go.
●
Remove the wheel bolt
›››
page 47.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the an-
ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a saf
e
place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a
new adapter, you can obtain it from the
SEAT Official Service, indicating the code
number.
Loosening wheel nuts
Fig. 35
Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.
Fig. 36
Wheel change: tyre valve
1
and the
corr
ect position f
or the anti-theft wheel locking
bolt
2
or
3
.
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the
car t
o l
oosen the wheel nuts.
Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn
before raising the vehicle with the jack.
»
47
Emergencies
If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push
on the end of the wheel wr
ench with your
f
oot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and
take care not to slip during this operation.
Loosening wheel nuts
●
Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go
›››
Fig. 35.
●
Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the
bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
wise
›››
.
Impor
t
ant information about wheel nuts
Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-
cially matched during construction. There-
fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct
wheel nuts with the right length and heads
must be used. This ensures that wheels are
fitted securely and that the brake system
functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not even
use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same
model.
In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft
locking bolt must be threaded onto positions
›››
Fig. 36
2
or
3
, taking the tyre valve’s po-
sition as r
ef
erence
1
. Otherwise it will not be
possibl
e t
o mount the hubcap.
WARNING
If the wheel nuts are not properly tight-
ened, they could come l
oose while driving
and cause an accident, serious injury and
loss of v
ehicle control.
●
Use only wheel nuts which correspond to
the rim in question.
●
Never use different wheel nuts.
●
Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,
free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-
sible to screw them easily.
●
To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only
use the wheel wrench that came with the
car from the factory.
●
The wheel nuts should only be loosened
slightly (about one turn) before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
●
Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or
to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts
have been tightened to the prescribed tor-
que, they could come loose while driving.
●
Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel
rims with bolted ring trims.
●
If wheel nuts are tightened below the
prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could
come loose while driving. If tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads
can be damaged.
Raise the vehicle
Fig. 37
Jack position points.
Fig. 38
Cross member: positioning the jack on
the v
ehicl
e.
●
Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
gr
ound. If necessary use a l
arge, strong
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ping
›››
.
48
Self-help
●
Find the support point on the strut (sunk
en
ar
ea) closest to the wheel to be changed
›››
Fig. 37.
●
Turn the jack* crank handle, located below
the strut support point, to raise it until the
tab
1
›
›
›
Fig. 38 is below the housing provi-
ded.
●
Align the jack* so that tab
1
“grips” onto
the housing pr
o
vided on the strut and the mo-
bile base
2
is resting on the ground. The
base pl
at
e
2
should fall vertically with re-
spect t
o the support point
1
.
●
Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is
slightly lift
ed off the gr
ound.
WARNING
The factory-supplied jack* is only de-
signed for changing wheel
s on this model.
On no account attempt to use it for lifting
heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in-
jury.
●
Make sure that the jack* remains stable.
If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*
could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-
sultant risk of injury.
●
Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-
plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,
even those approved for other SEAT mod-
els could slip, with the consequent risk of
injury.
●
Only mount the jack* on the support
points designed for this purpose on the
strut, and always align the jack correctly. If
you do not, the jack* could slip as it does
not have an adequat
e grip on the vehicle:
risk of injury!
●
You should never place a body limb such
as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that
is solely supported by the jack.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehi-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!.
●
Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one
side or the engine is running.
●
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised. The vehicle may come loose from
the jack due to the engine vibrations.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be raised on the
crossbar
. Only place the jack* on the
points designed for this purpose on the
strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
Removing and installing a wheel
Fig. 39
Wheel change: loosen wheel nuts with
the sock
et in the handl
e of the screwdriver.
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
nuts and r
aising the v
ehicle with the jack.
When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may
hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-
son, please take care and get a second per-
son to assist you.
Taking off the wheel
●
Using the hexagonal socket in the wheel
brace
›››
Fig. 39, unscrew the slackened
wheel nuts and place them on a clean sur-
face.
●
Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box
spanner and place them on a clean surface.
●
Take off the wheel.
»
49
Emergencies
Putting on the spare wheel
Check the dir
ection of r
otation of the tyre
›››
page 50.
●
Place the spare wheel or temporary spare
wheel into position.
●
Replace the wheel bolts and tighten slight-
ly using the hexagonal socket on the end of
the wheel brace.
●
To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts
use the corresponding adaptor.
●
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
●
Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the
wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-
agonal pairs (not in a circle).
●
Fit the wheel caps
›››
page 47.
The wheel nuts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-
ting the wheel.
Tightening torque of the wheel nuts
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af-
ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor-
que checked immediately with a torque
wrench that is working perfectly.
Before checking tightening torque, have any
rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re-
placed and clean the wheel hub threads.
Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to
the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have
been tightened to the prescribed torque, they
could come loose while driving.
WARNING
The hexagonal socket in the wheel brace
should be used f
or turning wheel nuts only.
Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel
nuts.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern have
been designed t
o oper
ate best when rotating
in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre
sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on
tyres with directional tread. Always observe
the indicated direction of rotation in order to
guarantee optimum grip and help avoid
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction
of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the
tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is
of particular importance when the road sur-
face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-
sible or remount it with the correct direction
of rotation.
Works after changing a wheel
●
Alloy wheels: repl
ace the wheel bolt caps.
●
Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .
●
Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
●
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-
gage compartment
›››
page 137.
●
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
●
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-
tor
, adjust the pressure and store it in memory
›››
page 335.
●
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
que wrench
›››
page 50. Meanwhile, drive
carefully.
●
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible.
50
Self-help
Changing the windscreen
wiper bl
ades
Wiper service position
Fig. 40
Wipers in service position.
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
The wiper arms can be r
aised when the wip-
ers ar
e in service position
›››
Fig. 40.
●
Close the bonnet
›››
page 314.
●
Switch the ignition on and off.
●
Press the windscreen wiper lever down-
wards briefly
›››
page 121
4
.
Bef
or
e driving, always lower the wiper arms.
Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-
screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-
tion.
Note
●
The windscreen wiper arms can be
mo
ved to the service position only when
the bonnet is properly closed.
●
You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over the
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of
ice.
Changing the wiper rear wiper
blades
Fig. 41 Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 42 Changing the rear wiper blade
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
st
andar
d with a layer of graphite. This layer is
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.
If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of
the water as it is wiped across the windscreen
will be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-
ularly. If the wipers scrape across the
glass, they should be changed if they are
damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty
›››
.
If this does not pr
oduce the desir
ed results,
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper
arms might be incorrect. They should be
checked by a specialised workshop and cor-
rected if necessary.
Damaged windscreen wiper blades should
be replaced immediately. These are availa-
ble from qualified workshops.
»
51
Emergencies
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper
arms
●
Place the windscreen wipers in the service
position
›
›
›
page 51.
●
Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's
fastening point.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
●
Raise the wiper arms.
●
Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the windscreen wiper blades.
●
If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or
damp cloth may be used
›››
.
Changing the windscr
een wiper bl
ades
●
Lift and unfold the wiper arms.
●
Press and hold release button
›››
Fig. 41
1
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-
r
ection of the arr
ow.
●
Fit a new wiper blade of the same length
and design on to the wiper arm and hook it
into place.
●
Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
Changing the rear window wiper blade
●
Lift and fold the wiper arm.
●
Turn the blade slightly
›››
Fig. 42 (arrow
A
).
●
Hol
d do
wn the release button
1
while gen-
tly pulling the bl
ade in the dir
ection of arrow
B
.
●
Insert a new blade of the same l
ength and
t
ype in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-
rection to the arrow
B
and hook into place
butt
on
1
.
●
Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.
WARNING
Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-
duce visibility and incr
ease the risk of acci-
dent and serious injury.
●
Always replace damaged or worn wind-
screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-
ger clean the windscreen properly.
CAUTION
●
Damaged or dirt
y windscreen wipers
could scratch the glass.
●
If products containing solvents, rough
sponges or sharp objects are used to clean
the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-
aged.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
the wipers in service position
›››
page 51.
CAUTION
●
To pr
event damage to the bonnet and the
wiper arms, only leave them in the service
position.
●
Before driving, always lower the wiper
arms.
Jump start
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cr
oss section.
If the engine f
ails to start because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
tions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm
2
for petrol engines and at least
35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
●
The vehicl
es must not touch each other,
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the on-board network.
52
Self-help
Jump start: description
Fig. 43
Diagram of connections for vehicles
without St
art
-Stop system.
Fig. 44
Diagram of connections for vehicles
with St
art
-Stop system.
Jump lead terminal connections
S
wit
ch off the ignition of both vehicles
›››
.
1.
Connect one end of the r
ed
jump lead to
the positive
+
terminal of the vehicle
with the fl
at batt
ery
A
›
›
›
Fig. 43.
Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hicl
e pr
oviding assistance
B
.
In v
ehicl
es without a Start-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
to the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
pr
o
viding the current
B
›
›
›
Fig. 43.
In vehicles with a Start-stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-
id piece of met
al in the engine bl
ock, or
to the engine block itself
›››
Fig. 44.
Connect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bol-
t
ed t
o the engine block or to the engine
block itself of the vehicle with the flat
battery. Do not connect it to a point near
the battery
A
.
P
osition the l
eads in such a way that
they cannot come into contact with any
moving parts in the engine compart-
ment.
Starting
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
2.
3.
4a.
4b.
5.
6.
7.
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes
until the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
Before you remove the jump leads,
switch off the dipped beam headlights if
they are switched on.
Turn on the heater blower and heated
rear window in the vehicle with the flat
battery. This helps minimise voltage
peaks which are generated when the
leads are disconnected.
When the engine is running, disconnect
the leads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-
minals.
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
onds, switch off the starter and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
●
Please not
e the safety warnings referring
to working in the engine compartment
›››
page 314.
●
The battery providing assistance must
have the same voltage as the flat battery
»
8.
9.
10.
11.
53
Emergencies
(12V) and approximately the same capaci-
ty (see imprint on batt
ery). Failure to com-
ply could result in an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the
batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!
Even after the battery has thawed, battery
acid could leak and cause chemical burns.
If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-
rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-
plosion. Failure to comply could result in an
explosion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from
the other vehicle directly to the negative
terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-
ted from the battery could be ignited by
sparks. Danger of explosion.
●
Never attach the negative cable to fuel
system components or the brake lines in
the other vehicle.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the
vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could
result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise electricit
y could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
Tow start and towing
Introduction
Tow-starting means starting the engine of
the v
ehicle while another pulls it.
Towing means one vehicle pulling another
that is not roadworthy.
Always consider the legal provisions relating
to tow-starting and towing.
For technical reasons, towing a vehicle
with a discharged battery is not allowed.
The jump start should be used instead
›››
page 52.
If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access
system, towing is only allowed with the igni-
tion on!
The 12-volt vehicle battery drains if the vehi-
cle is towed with the engine switched off and
the ignition connected. Depending on the
battery charge status, the drop in voltage
may be so large, even after just a few mi-
nutes, that no electrical device in the vehicle
may work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In
vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the
steering wheel coul
d lock
›››
.
WARNING
A vehicle with no power should never be
to
wed.
●
During towing, never switch off the igni-
tion with the starter button. Otherwise, the
electronic lock of the steering column
could suddenly get blocked and it would be
impossible to steer the vehicle. This could
cause an accident, serious injury and loss
of control of the vehicle.
●
If during towing the vehicle runs out of
power, stop towing immediately and re-
quest the assistance of specialist person-
nel.
WARNING
Vehicle handling and braking capacity
change considerably during t
owing. Please
observe the following instructions to mini-
mise the risk of serious accidents and in-
jury:
●
As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
–
You should depress the brake much
harder as the brake servo does not op-
erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid
crashing into the towing vehicle.
–
More strength is required at the steer-
ing wheel as the power steering does
not operate when the engine is switch-
ed off.
54
Self-help
●
As the driver of the t
owing vehicle:
–
Accelerate with particular care and
caution.
–
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
–
Brake earlier than usual and more
smoothly.
CAUTION
●
T
o av
oid damaging the vehicle, for exam-
ple the paint, remove and replace the lid
and towing eye carefully.
●
Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and damage it during towing.
Instructions for tow-starting
Vehicle's should not generally be tow-
st
ar
ted. The jump start should be used in-
stead
›››
page 52.
For technical reasons, towing the following
vehicles is not allowed:
●
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
●
If the 12-volt vehicle battery is discharged,
because in vehicles with the Keyless Access
locking and ignition system the steering re-
mains locked and the electronic parking
brake cannot be deactivated nor can the
electronic lock of the steering column be re-
leased if they are activated.
●
If the battery is flat, it is possible that the
engine control units may not operate correct-
ly.
However, if the vehicle must absolutely be
tow-started (in the case of manual gear-
boxes):
●
Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.
●
Keep the clutch pressed down.
●
Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-
ing lights of both vehicles.
●
Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutch.
●
Once the engine starts, press the clutch
and disengage the gear to avoid colliding
with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
●
When to
w-starting, unburnt fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and damage
it.
●
Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m
in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam-
age to the catalytic converter.
Note
The vehicle can only be tow-started if the
electr
onic parking brake and, if appropri-
ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-
umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no
power supply or there is an electric system
fault, the engine must be tow-started to de-
activate the electronic parking brake and
the electr
onic lock of the steering column.
Towing instructions
Towing requires some expertise and experi-
ence, especially when using a t
ow rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the difficulties
involved in towing. For this reason, inexper-
ienced drivers should abstain from towing.
During towing, it should be ensured that no
impermissible tractive forces or shocks are
generated. When towing on an unpaved
road, there is always a risk of overloading and
damaging the anchorage points.
During towing, the towing vehicle can signal
the change of direction even with the hazard
warning lights turned on. To do so, at the
same time, the turn signal lever must be oper-
ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the
hazard warning lights will go off. When the
turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-
tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-
matically reactivated.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
●
Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is
not block
ed, and the electronic parking brake
may be deactivated and the turn signals and
wash/wipe operated.
»
55
Emergencies
●
Mor
e str
ength is required at the steering
wheel as the power steering does not oper-
ate when the engine is switched off.
●
You should depress the brake much harder
as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid
hitting the towing vehicle.
●
Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.
●
Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a
tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A
tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is
not available.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid
damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to
use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-
ilarly elastic material.
Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to
the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-
vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted
if it has been specially designed to be instal-
led on a tow hitch
›››
page 297.
When the vehicle has to be towed:
Check whether the vehicle may be towed
›››
page 56, Cases where towing the ve-
hicle is not permitted.
The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
wheels on the road; it can also be towed with
either the front or rear wheels lifted off the
road.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-
lector lever in the N
›››
page 221 position.
●
Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at
speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
The vehicle must not be towed further than
50 km (30 miles).
●
If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with
automatic transmission are only allowed to
be towed with the front wheels suspended.
Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive
(4Drive)
Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be
towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-
cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-
pended, the engine must be switched off,
otherwise the transmission may be damaged.
Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-
mitted
●
If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-
cant.
●
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-
propriate, the electronic parking brake can-
not be deactivated or the electronic lock of
the steering column released.
●
If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-
elled.
●
When, for example, after an accident, the
smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering
operation cannot be guaranteed.
When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:
●
Observe legal requirements.
●
Keep in mind the instructions in the manual
on towing vehicles.
CAUTION
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-
cant in the automatic tr
ansmission the car
may only be towed with the driven wheels
lifted clear of the road, or transported on a
special car transporter or trailer.
Note
The vehicle can only be towed if the elec-
tronic parking br
ake and the electronic
lock of the steering column are
56
Self-help
deactivated. If the vehicle has no power
supply or there is an el
ectric system fault,
the engine must be tow-started
›››
page 52
to deactivate the electronic parking brake
and the electronic lock of the steering col-
umn.
Front towline anchorage
Fig. 45 On the right side of the front bumper:
r
emo
ve the cover.
Fig. 46 On the right side of the front bumper:
to
wline anchorage in position.
The housing of the removable towline an-
chor
age is on the right side of the fr
ont bump-
er underneath a cover
›››
Fig. 45.
The towing eye should always be kept in the
vehicle.
Bear in mind the instructions for towing
›››
page 55.
Fitting the towline anchorage
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
›››
page 43.
●
Remove the cover by pressing down on its
base and leave it hanging from the vehicle
›››
Fig. 45.
●
Screw the towing eye in the housing by
turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise
›››
Fig. 46
›››
. Use a suitable object
that can completely and securely tighten the
t
o
wing eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
●
Insert the upper flange of the lid into the
opening of the bumper and press the lower
side of the lid until it is inserted into the bump-
er.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be completely
and firmly tightened. Otherwise
, it could be
released while towing and tow-starting.
57
Emergencies
Rear towline anchorage
Fig. 47
On the right side of the rear bumper:
r
emo
ve the cover.
Fig. 48 On the right side of the rear bumper:
t
o
wline anchorage in position.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the
right side of the r
ear bumper behind a lid
›
››
Fig. 47.
Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing
bracket do not have any housing for the
screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case,
the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal-
led and used for towing
›››
page 297,
›››
.
Bear in mind the instructions f
or t
owing
›››
page 55.
Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-
out a factory-equipped towing bracket)
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
›››
page 43.
●
Press the bottom side of the lid
›››
Fig. 47 to
unclip it.
●
Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-
hicle.
●
Screw the towline anchorage into the hous-
ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise
›››
Fig. 48
›››
. Use a suitable object
that can compl
et
ely and securely tighten the
towing eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
●
Insert the upper flange of the lid into the
opening of the bumper and press the lower
side of the lid until the upper flange is inserted
into the bumper.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
●
The to
wing eye must always be com-
pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it
could be released while towing and tow-
starting.
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a
towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow
with a tow bar if this has been specially de-
signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an
unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow
hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-
stead, a tow rope should be used.
58
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Intr
oduction
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical components. Lik
ewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system
can give serious el
ectrical shocks, causing
burns and even death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in
the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current cir
cuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-
perage (same colour and markings) and
size
.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-
ple or similar.
CAUTION
●
T
o pr
event damage to the vehicle’s elec-
trical system, before replacing a fuse al-
ways turn off the ignition, the lights and all
electrical elements.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they
can damage the electrical system.
Note
●
One component may have mor
e than one
fuse.
●
Several components may run on a single
fuse.
●
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter.
Fuses inside the vehicle
Fig. 49
On the dashboard on the driver's side
(l
eft
-hand drive): fuse box cover.
Fig. 50
glove compartment (right hand drive):
fuse bo
x access.
»
59
Emergencies
Opening and closing the fuse box situated
bel
o
w the dash panel (left-hand steering
wheel)
●
Open the storage compartment on the
driver side
›››
Fig. 49.
●
In this case, empty the storage compart-
ment.
●
Press the locking lid
›››
Fig. 49
1
upwards,
in the dir
ection of the arr
ow, and at the same
time open the storage compartment even
more and remove it until the fuse box is ac-
cessible.
●
To attach the storage compartment, insert
it in the openings of the dashboard and press
it until you hear it click on both sides. Close it.
Fuses behind the glove compartment
(right-hand steering wheel)
●
Open the glove compartment and, if nec-
essary, empty it.
●
Move the braking element
›››
Fig. 50
1
into
the support hol
e f
acing downwards and re-
move it to one side.
●
Press the end axes
›››
Fig. 50
2
upwards,
in the dir
ection of the arr
ows, and at the same
time open the glove compartment even more.
●
To mount the glove compartment, place it
in the correct position. Insert the braking ele-
ment into the hole of the base and move it
upwards until you hear it click. Carefully
press the glove compartment to the front,
against the resistance of the end axes
›››
Fig. 50
2
.
Identifying fuses bel
o
w below the dash-
board by colours
Colour Amp rating
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
CAUTION
●
Alw
ays carefully remove the fuse box
covers and refit them correctly to avoid
problems with your vehicle.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to
avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and
humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-
age to the electrical system.
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 51
In the engine compartment: fuse box
co
v
er.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
●
Open the bonnet
›
›
›
page 314.
●
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse
box cover
›››
Fig. 51.
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
Push the locking tabs down until they click
audibly into place.
60
Fuses and bulbs
Replace a blown fuse
Fig. 52
Image of a blown fuse.
Preparations
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-
cal equipment.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
›
›
›
page 59,
›››
page 60.
Recognise a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
›››
Fig. 52.
●
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
blown.
To replace a fuse
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size.
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
Fuse placement
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same col
our and markings) and
size.
Fuses in the vehicle interior
No. Consumers/Amps
1 Adblue (SCR) 30
4
DWA warning horn, on-board
computer
7.5
5
Gateway 7.5
6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5
7
Air conditioning and heating con-
trol panel
, back window heating,
auxiliary heating, rear heating
10
8
Diagnosis, electronic parking
br
ak
e switch, light switch, reverse
light, interior lighting, driving
mode, lit-up door sill, light/humid-
ity/rain sensor, curve lighting con-
trol unit
7.5
9 Steering column control unit 7.5
10 Radio display 7.5
11 On-board computer control unit 40
No. Consumers/Amps
12 Infotainment radio 20
13 Driver seat belt pre-tensioner 25
14 Air conditioner fan 40
15 Steering column release 10
16
GSM signal reception and stabili-
sation, mobile phone int
erface,
USB connections control unit
7.5
17
Dashboard, OCU navigation in-
terf
ace
7.5
18
Surroundings camera and rear
camera contr
ol unit
7.5
19 Kessy 7.5
20 SCT 1.5 L engine vacuum pump 7.5/15
21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15
22 Trailer 15
23 Electric sunroof 20
24 On-board computer 40
25 Left doors 30
26 Heated seats 30
27 Interior light 30
28 Trailer 25
31 Electrical lid control unit 30
»
61
Emergencies
No. Consumers/Amps
32
Control unit for parking aid, front
camera and r
adar
10
33 Airbag 7.5
34
Reverse switch, climate sensor,
electr
ochromic mirror, electrome-
chanical brake
7.5
35 Diagnosis connector 7.5
38 Trailer 25
39 Right doors 30
40/1 12V socket 20
41 Passenger seat belt pre-tensioner 25
42 Central locking 40
43 Digital sound control unit 30
44 Trailer 15
45 Electric driver's seat 15
47 Rear window wiper 15
49 Starter motor 7.5
51 Rear AC 25
52 Driving mode. 15
53 Heated rear window 30
Fuse arrangement in engine compartment
No. Consumers/Amps
1 ABS/ESP control unit 25
2 ABS/ESP control unit 40/60
3 Engine control unit (petrol/diesel) 15/30
4
Engine sensors, electric fans,
pressur
e regulator, flow rate me-
ter, spark plug relay (diesel), PTC
relays
7.5/10
5 Engine sensors 10
6 Brake light sensor 7.5
7 Engine power supply 7.5/10
8 Lambda probe 10/15
9 Engine 10/20
10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20
11 PTC 40
12 PTC 40
13
Automatic transmission oil cool-
ing pump
30
15 Horn 15
16 Ignition coil relay (2.0 petrol) 20
17
Engine control unit, ABS/ESP con-
tr
ol unit, primary r
elay
7.5
18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 7.5
No. Consumers/Amps
19 Front windscreen washer 30
21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15
22 Engine control unit 7.5
23 Starter motor 30
24 PTC 40
36 Left headlight 15
37 Parking heating 20
38 Right headlight 15
Note
●
In the vehicl
e, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These
should only be changed by a specialised
workshop.
●
Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
pear in the following tables.
●
Some of the equipment listed in the ta-
bles below pertain only to certain versions
of the model or are optional extras.
●
Please note that the above lists, while
correct at the time of printing, are subject
to change.
62
Fuses and bulbs
Bulbs
Changing bulbs
Full-LED headlights
Your v
ehicle is equipped with full-lead head-
light systems.
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam
and route light) with light emitting diodes
(LEDs) as a light source.
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an
authorised workshop to have it replaced.
Side turn signals
The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-
grated in the exterior mirrors.
In case of failure, go to an authorised work-
shop to have them replaced.
Additional brake light
Taking into account that it consists of LED
bulbs, the change should be made at a tech-
nical service centre.
63
Operation
Fig. 53 Instruments and controls.
64
Controls and displays
Operation
Contr
ol
s and displays
Interior view
Overview
Door handle
Central l
ocking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Control lever for:
–
Turn signal
s and main beam
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
–
Cruise control system (GRA) and
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 243
–
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . 81
Steering wheel with horn and
–
Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
–
On-board computer controls . . . . . 80
–
Controls for radio, telephone,
navigation and speech dialogue
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
–
Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 224
Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital
Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Control lever for:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
–
Windscr
een wipers and w
asher . . . 121
–
Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Front passenger airbag disconnec-
tion display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Depending on the equipment, glove
compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
–
CD player* and/or SD card*
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Switch for switching off the front
passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Thermal seat controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Depending on the equipment, con-
trols for:
–
Manual AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
–
Automatic AC (Climatronic) . . . . . . . 156
Gear lever for:
–
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
–
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Area for:
–
USB type-C port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
–
12 volt socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
–
Connectivity Box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
–
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Depending on the equipment, but-
tons for:
–
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
–
P
arking aid syst
em (Park As-
sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
–
Park Pilot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
–
Peripheral view system (Top View
Camera) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Rotating control (Driving Experience
button) for driving profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 267
Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-
cess closing and start-up sys-
tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Steering column adjustment lev-
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Location of the knee airbag . . . . . . . . . 29
Storage compartment / fuse box . . . 59
Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Button to open rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Control for the electric adjustment
of the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Note
●
Some of the equipment listed in this sec-
tion is only fitt
ed on certain models or are
optional extras.
●
The arrangement of switches and con-
trols on right-hand drive models* may be
»
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
65
Operation
slightly different from the layout shown in
››
›
page 64. However, the symbols used to
identify the controls are the same.
Instruments and warn-
ing/contr
ol l
amps
Instrument panel
Introduction
After switching the engine on with a 12-volt
battery that is heavily dischar
ged or newly
changed some system settings (such as the
time, the date, the personalised comfort set-
tings and the programming) might be altered
or deleted. Check and correct these settings
once the battery is sufficiently charged.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trol
s when driving.
●
To reduce the risk of accident and injury,
only make adjustments to the instructions
on the screen of the instrument panel and
to the instructions on the screen of the Info-
tainment system when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
66
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)
Fig. 54 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument
panel (classic vie
w).
Details of the instruments:
Engine cool
ant t
emperature display
›››
page 78
Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-
nute the engine is running
›››
page 77.
Gear engaged or position of the selec-
tor lever currently selected
Screen display
›››
page 68
Speedometer
Digital speed display
Fuel gauge
›››
page 77.
Information Profile
›››
page 67.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument
panel digit
al with monochr
ome screen in col-
our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi-
ble using the button
of the multifunction
st
eering wheel. By sel
ecting different infor-
mation profiles, indications other than the
classic circular instruments can be displayed,
such as navigation data, multimedia informa-
tion or travel data.
The 3 views are:
●
Classic
●
Dynamic
●
Navigation (without information profiles)
All views will display information on the
screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-
cle status, navigation
1)
and driving aids
1)
.
In the Classic and Navigation views it is pos-
sible to customise the information displayed
under Information profiles
›››
Fig. 54
8
.
Inf
ormation pr
ofiles
The INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option (infotain-
ment button > View > Instrument
cluster) can be used to choose between
the different options for viewing information to
be displayed in the SEAT Digital Cockpit.
»
1)
Depending on the version.
67
Operation
Classic View
The r
e
volutions per minute and speedometer
needles appear along the entire length
›››
Fig. 54.
View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*
1)
Personalisation of the information that ap-
pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of
these items of information can be displayed
at the same time, but the user chooses which
to display, and in what order, by moving the
finger vertically over the dials.
Depending on the version, the Views can be
memorised by exiting the menu or keeping
the View button pressed.
●
Consumption. Graphic representation of
the current consumption and digital display
of the average consumption.
●
Audio. Digital display of the current audio
playback.
●
Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-
tude above sea level.
●
Compass. Digital display of the compass.
●
Information about the final destination.
Digital display of the remaining travelling
time, distance to the destination and the esti-
mated time of arrival.
●
Operating range. Digital display of the re-
maining range.
●
Travel time.
●
Route guidance.
●
Journey. Digital display of the distance
travelled.
●
Assistance systems. Graphic representa-
tion of different assistance systems.
●
Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec-
ted.
●
Navigation. Graphical representation of
the navigation with arrows.
It may vary based on the features, the num-
ber and the contents of the selectable infor-
mation profiles..
Navigation map in the SEAT Digital
Cockpit*
Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital
Cockpit can displ
ay a det
ailed map. To do
this, select the Navigation option in the
menu menu on the instrument panel
›››
page 70.
Depending on the features or the navigation
map, it can be shown in the SEAT Digital
Cockpit or on the infotainment system or on
both at the same time. If it is displayed only in
the infotainment system, the SEAT Digital
Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma-
noeuvres.
Transfer of navigation map
The map is transferred from the infotainment
system to the SEAT Digital Cockpit and vice
versa using the map transfer button.
Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu,
you can transfer the map back to the info-
tainment system.
Status display
Possible indications on the instrument
panel displ
ay
Diff
erent pieces of information can be dis-
played on the screen of the instrument panel,
depending on the features of the vehicle.
●
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
●
Warning and information messages
●
Odometer
●
Time
›››
page 77
1)
Pre-set information depending on the selected
“Driving mode”.
68
Instruments and warning/control lamps
●
Indications of the r
adio and navigation sys-
t
em
●
Indications of the phone
●
Outside temperature
●
Indications of the compass
●
Selector lever positions
●
Gear-change recommendation
›››
page 229
●
Display of travel data (multifunction dis-
play) and menus for different settings
›››
page 70
●
Service interval display
›››
page 79
●
Speed warning
›››
page 71
●
Speed warning for winter tyres
●
Start-Stop system status display
›››
page 219
●
Signs detected by the traffic signal detec-
tion system
›››
page 74
●
Active cylinder management (ACT®) status
indication
›››
page 235
●
Low consumption driving
●
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
●
Driver assistance system display
›››
page 237
●
Copyright
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-
ing, the instrument panel display shows if any
of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are
opened and, in some cases, it is also indica-
ted by an audible warning. The display may
vary according to the type of instrument pan-
el fitted.
Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutch
gearbox)
The current position of the selector lever is
shown on the side of the lever and on the in-
strument panel display. When the lever is in
the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in
some cases, the gear engaged in each case
is shown on the instrument panel display .
Outside temperature indicator
If the outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal
symbol” on the outside temperature dis-
play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-
til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C
(+43 °F)
›››
.
When the v
ehicl
e is stationary, when the aux-
iliary heater is switched on or when driving at
very low speeds, the outside temperature in-
dicated may be higher than the actual tem-
perature due to the heat produced by the en-
gine.
The margin of measurement ranges from
-45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).
Gear-change recommendation
While driving, the instrument panel of certain
vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-
tion for saving fuel
›››
page 229.
Odometer
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-
tance travelled since the last time it was reset
to zero.
●
Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-
ment system or the multifunction steering
wheel
›››
page 71.
Speed warning for winter tyres
If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is
displayed on the instrument panel
›››
page 70.
The speed warning can be set in the Infotain-
ment system, by using the function button
> SETTINGS > Driver assistance
›››
page 88.
Indications of the compass
Depending on the equipment, when the igni-
tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-
cates the direction in which you are driving
with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.
»
69
Operation
When the Infotainment system is on and there
is no r
out
e guidance active, the graphic rep-
resentation of a compass is also shown.
Low consumption driving *
Depending on the equipment, when the vehi-
cle is moving is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster display when the vehicle is in an
economical consumption status due to active
cylinder management (ACT®)*
›››
page 235.
Copyright
Legal text about the property rights and
copyrights of the instrument cluster.
WARNING
Even when the outside temperature is high-
er than free
zing temperature, some roads
and bridges could be frozen.
●
The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that
there may be a risk of freezing.
●
At outside temperatures above +4 °C
(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the
“ice crystal symbol” is not on.
●
The outside temperature sensor takes a
guideline measurement.
Note
●
There ar
e different instrument panels and
therefore the versions and instructions on
the display may vary. In the case of dis-
plays without warning or information texts,
faults are indicated exclusively by the con-
trol w
arning lamps.
●
Some indications on the instrument panel
screen may be concealed by a sudden
event, e.g. an incoming call.
●
Depending on the equipment, some set-
tings and instructions can be carried out or
displayed on the infotainment system as
well.
●
If there are several warnings at the same
time, the symbols will be displayed one af-
ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-
bols will stay on until you remove the
cause.
●
If when switching on the ignition warnings
are shown about existing faults, it might not
be possible to change the settings or show
the information as described. In this case,
go to a specialised workshop and request a
repair.
Instrument panel menus
The number of menus and information items
av
ail
able will depend on the vehicle’s elec-
tronics and features.
A specialised workshop can programme or
modify additional functions, according to the
vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership for this.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is stationary.
■
Driving data
›››
page 71
■
Assist systems.
■
Front Assist On/Off
›››
page 245
■
ACC (only display)
›››
page 248
■
Lane Assist On/Off
›››
page 254
■
Travel Assist On/Off
›››
page 256
■
Side Assist On/Off
›››
page 260
■
Navigation.
■
Audio.
■
Telephone.
■
Vehicle status.
›››
page 72
Service Menu
In the Service menu various settings can be
adjust
ed depending on the f
eatures.
Open the Service menu
To open up the Service menu, select the
Range information profile while in the Driv-
ing data menu, and keep the
key press-
ed on the multifunction st
eering wheel f
or ap-
proximately 4 seconds. When it is released,
the Service menu will be displayed. Now
you can browse through the menu using the
keys on the multifunction steering wheel as
usual.
70
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Restart the service interval display
Sel
ect the
Service menu and follow the in-
structions on the screen of the instrument
panel.
Restart the oil service
Select the Restore Oil service menu and
follow the instructions on the instrument pan-
el display.
Restart journey data
Select the Reset trip menu and follow the
instructions on the instrument panel display
to reset the value.
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
Select the menu Engine code. The identify-
ing letters of the engine will be shown on the
instrument cluster display at the bottom left.
Setting the clock
Select the Time menu and set the correct
time by turning the right thumbwheel of the
multifunction steering wheel.
Driving data indicator (multifunc-
tion display)
The display of the travel data (multifunction
display) sho
ws different values about the
journey and the consumption.
Change from one display to another
●
Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
tion steering wheel
›››
page 80.
Changing memory
●
While in Travel data > General infor-
mation press on the multi-function st
eer-
ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo-
ries
1)
:
Since start: The memory is deleted if
the journey is interrupted for more than 2
hours.
Since refuelling: Display and stor-
age of the journey data and the con-
sumption values collected. When refuel-
ling, the memory is deleted.
Long-term: This memory contains trav-
el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and
59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,
or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or
–
–
–
9999.9 km. When one of these values is
exceeded (varies depending on the ver-
sion of the instrument panel), the memo-
ry is deleted.
Delete journey data presets
●
Select the memory that you wish to erase.
●
Keep the button on the multi-function
steering wheel pressed for approximately 2
seconds.
Select the instructions
In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi-
cle settings, you can display different travel
data
›››
page 88.
Current consumption: The current
fuel consumption display operates
throughout the journey, in litres/100 km;
and with the engine running and the ve-
hicle stopped, in litres/hour.
Average consumption: The average
fuel consumption is displayed after driv-
ing for approximately 300 metres.
Travelling time: This indicates the
hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig-
nition was switched on.
»
–
–
–
1)
This will show all data on the display at the
same time: distance tr
avelled, average con-
sumption, average speed and autonomy.
71
Operation
Range: Appr
o
ximate distance in km that
can still be travelled if the same driving
style is maintained.
AdBlue range or : Approximate
distance in km that can still be travelled
with the current level of the AdBlue®
tank with the same driving style. The in-
dication appears from a range of less
than 2,400 km and cannot be deactiva-
ted.
1)
Distance: Distance covered in km (m)
after switching on the ignition.
Average speed: The average speed
will be shown after driving for approxi-
mately 100 metres.
Digital speed display: Current
speed displayed in digital format.
Setting a speed warning
●
Select the display Warning at --- km/h
or Speed warning at --- mph.
●
Press the
button on the multi-function
st
eering wheel t
o memorise the current
speed and activate the warning.
●
Activate: set the desired speed within 5
seconds by rotating the wheel on the multi-
function steering wheel. Next, press the
button again or wait several seconds. The
speed is st
or
ed and the warning activated.
–
–
–
–
–
●
Deactivate: press the
button. The stored
speed is del
et
ed.
The warning can be adjusted for speeds be-
tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h
(155 mph).
Display Oil temperature
The engine reaches its operating tempera-
ture when, under normal driving conditions,
the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F)
and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required
from the engine and the outside temperature
is high, the engine oil temperature may in-
crease. This does not present any problem as
long as the warning lamps or
›››
page 318 do not appear on the display.
Warning and information messages
(Vehicle status)
The system runs a check on certain compo-
nents and functions when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults are displayed on the instrument cluster
display as red and yellow warning symbols
accompanied by messages and, depending
on the case, even an audible warning
›››
page 82. The representation of the mes-
sages and symbols may vary depending on
the version of the instrument panel.
Existing faults can also be checked manually.
To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or
Vehicle
›››
page 70.
Priority 1 warning (red)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Stop
driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-
nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-
nal assistance.
Priority 2 warning (yellow)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Operating
faults or the lack of operating fluids can
cause damage to the vehicle or a fault.
Check the faulty function as soon as possible.
If necessary, seek professional assistance.
Information message
It provides information about processes in the
vehicle.
1)
Not available in all countries.
72
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Driver alert system (break recom-
mendation)*
Fig. 55
On the instrument panel display: driver
al
ert syst
em symbol.
The Fatigue detection informs the driver when
their driving behaviour sho
ws signs of f
atigue.
Function and operation
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
haviour of the driver when starting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-
stantly compared with the current driving be-
haviour. If the system detects that the driver is
tired, an audible warning is given with a
sound and an optic warning is shown with a
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 55. The mes-
sage on the instrument panel display is
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
pending on the case, is repeated. The system
stores the last message displayed.
The message on the instrument panel display
can be switched off by pressing the button
on the multi-function steering wheel
›››
page 80.
The message can be recalled to the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
display
›››
page 71.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Switching on and off
Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-
vated in the infotainment system using the
function button > Driver assistance >
Driver Alert System
›››
page 88. A mark in-
dicates that the adjustment has been activa-
ted.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
inherent to the system. The following condi-
tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
vent it from functioning.
●
At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
●
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
●
When cornering
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
When a sporty driving style is employed
●
In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long peri-
od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-
tem automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
ted.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-
gue detection syst
em tempt you into taking
any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,
sufficient in length when making long jour-
neys.
●
The driver always assumes the responsi-
bility of driving to their full capacity.
●
Never drive if you are tired.
●
The system does not detect the tiredness
of the driver in all circumstances. Consult
the information in the section
›››
page 73,
System limitations.
»
73
Operation
●
In some situations, the syst
em may incor-
rectly interpret an intended driving
manoeuvre as driver tiredness.
●
No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
●
F
atigue det
ection has been developed
for driving on motorways and well paved
roads only.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
Road signs detection system*
1)
Fig. 56
On the instrument panel display: ex-
ampl
es of speed limits or o
vertaking prohibi-
tions with their respective additional signs.
The traffic sign detection system records the
st
andar
d traffic signs in front of the vehicle
with a camera located on the base of the in-
terior mirror and provides information about
speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.
Within its limitations, the system also displays
additional signals, such as time-specific pro-
hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers
›››
page 297 or limitations that only apply in
the event of rain. Even on journeys without
signs, the system may display any applicable
speed limits.
The traffic sign detection system does not
work in all countries. Keep this in mind when
travelling abroad.
Shown on the display
In Germany, on motorways and vehicle
roads, besides speed limits and overtaking
provisions the system also displays the end of
prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the
time in other countries is always shown.
The traffic signs detected by the system are
displayed on the dash panel display
›››
Fig. 56 and, depending on the navigation
system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-
ment system as well
›››
page 84.
Road sign detection system messages:
There are no traffic signs available
●
The system is in its start-up phase.
●
OR: the camera has not recognized any
mandatory or prohibitive sign.
1)
System available depending on the country.
74
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display
●
There is a fault in the system. Have the sys-
t
em check
ed by a specialised workshop.
Speed warning currently unavailable
●
The speed warning function of the road
sign detection system is faulty. Have the sys-
tem checked by a specialised workshop.
Dynamic Road Sign Display: please
clean the windscreen.
●
The windscreen is dirty in the camera area.
Clean the windscreen.
Dynamic Road Sign Display currently
restricted.
●
The navigation system is not transmitting
data. Check if the navigation system has up-
dated maps.
●
OR: the vehicle is in a region not included
on the navigation system's map.
No data available
●
The traffic sign detection system does not
work in the current country.
Activate and deactivate the road sign dis-
play on the instrument panel
The permanent traffic sign view on the instru-
ment cluster can be switched on or off in the
infotainment system using the function button
> SETTINGS > Driver assistance.
Display of traffic signs
When the traffic sign detection system is con-
nected, a camera located on the base of the
interior rear-view mirror records the traffic
signs in front of the vehicle. After checking
and evaluating the information from the cam-
era, the navigation system and the current
vehicle data, up to three valid road signs are
displayed,
›››
Fig. 56 with their additional
signs.
●
First: The sign that is currently valid for the
driver is shown in the left side of the screen
For example, a maximum speed limit of
130 km/h (100 mph)
›››
Fig. 56 .
●
Second: A sign valid only in certain circum-
stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown sec-
ond, together with the additional rain sign.
●
Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is
working while you are driving, the signal with
the additional rain sign will be shown first, on
the left, as it is the one that is applicable at
the time.
●
Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.
No overtaking at certain times, will be dis-
played in third place
›››
Fig. 56 .
Speed warning
If the system detects that the permitted
speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver
with a “gong” and visually with a message on
the dash panel display.
The speed warning can be set or completely
switched off in the infotainment system using
the function button > SETTINGS > Driv-
er assistance
›››
page 84. The speed is
adjusted in steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a
range of between 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h
(12 mph) above the maximum speed permit-
ted.
Trailer mode
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
device from the factory and a trailer that is
electrically connected to the vehicle, it is
possible to activate or deactivate the display
of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,
such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
tions. It is switched on or off in the infotain-
ment system, using the function button >
SETTINGS > Driver assistance
›››
page 84.
For trailer mode, the display of speed limits
applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal
provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-
justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a
range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and
130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed
greater than that which is permitted in the
country in question for driving with a trailer,
the system automatically displays the usual
speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h
(50 mph).
»
75
Operation
If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-
v
at
ed, the system displays the speed limits as
if there were no trailer hitched.
Limited operation
The traffic sign detection system has certain
limitations. The following cases may lead the
system to operate with limitations or not at
all:
●
In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,
rain, fog or intense mist.
●
In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-
on traffic or by the sun.
●
When driving at high speeds.
●
If the camera is covered or dirty.
●
If the traffic signs are out of the camera's
field of vision.
●
If the traffic signs are partially or totally
covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-
cles.
●
In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil
the regulations.
●
In the case of damaged or bent traffic
signs.
●
In the case of variable messages on over-
head or gantry signs (LED-based variable
traffic signs or other lighting units).
●
If the maps on the navigation system are
not up-to-date.
●
In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles
that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on
lorries.
WARNING
The technology in the traffic sign detection
system cannot change the limits imposed
by the l
aws of physics and only works with-
in the system's limits. Do not let the extra
convenience afforded by the traffic sign
detection system tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and
fog may lead to the system failing to dis-
play traffic signs or not displaying them
correctly.
●
If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
ered or damaged, system operation may
be impaired.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications shown on the tr
affic sign detec-
tion system may differ from the actual cur-
rent traffic situation.
●
The system may not detect or correctly
show all the traffic signs.
●
Tr
affic signs and traffic regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the system.
WARNING
If messages are ignored, the vehicle may
st
all in tr
affic and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
Never ignore the messages displayed.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
Note
To avoid affecting the correct operation of
the system, t
ake the following points into
consideration:
●
Regularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Always replace damaged or worn blades
when required to avoid lines on the cam-
era's field of vision.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
sion.
●
The use of outdated maps on the naviga-
tion system may cause the system to show
traffic signs incorrectly.
76
Instruments and warning/control lamps
●
In the waypoints mode of the navigation
syst
em, the traffic sign detection system is
only partly available.
●
Failure to heed the control lamps and
corresponding text messages when they
light up may result in damage to the vehi-
cle.
Time
Setting the time on the infotainment sys-
t
em
●
Pr
ess the function button > SETTINGS
> Time and date to set the time
›››
page 84.
Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digital
Cockpit
●
In the Driving data menu, select the
Range function (function button > View >
Driving data > Range).
●
Press the button
on the multifunction
st
eering wheel until the Service menu is dis-
pl
ayed on the instrument panel display
›››
page 70.
●
Select the menu Time.
●
Adjust the correct time by turning the right
thumbwheel of the multifunction steering
wheel.
Revolution counter
The rev counter indicates the number of en-
gine re
volutions per minute.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
counter indicates the maximum speed in any
gear after running-in and with the engine hot.
However, it is advisable to change up a gear
or move the selector lever to D (or lift your
foot off the accelerator) before the needle
reaches the red zone
›››
.
W
e r
ecommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the addition-
al information in
›››
page 229, Selecting the
optimal gear.
CAUTION
●
To pr
event damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the
red zone for a short period of time.
●
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
and heavy acceleration and do not make
the engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to
save fuel and minimise emissions and en-
gine noise
.
Fuel gauge
Fig. 57
Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.
Control lamps
It lights up, and in addition, the
lo
wer diode lights up in red
Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has
been reached
›
››
. Refuel as soon as you have the
opportunity.
When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-
es red.
The display only works when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on.
»
77
Operation
The fuel range is displayed on the instrument
panel.
Y
ou can consult the t
ank capacity of your ve-
hicle in the
›››
page 355 section.
WARNING
When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may
stall in tr
affic and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could
reach the engine irregularly, particularly
when driving up or down slopes.
●
The steering system and the driver assis-
tance systems and brakes do not work
when the engine is running irregularly or
switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-
lar supply thereof.
●
Always refuel when there is only one
quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle
to stop due to lack of fuel.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An
irregul
ar fuel supply can cause misfiring
and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust
system. The catalytic converter or the par-
ticulate filter may get damaged!
Note
The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to
the fuel pump symbol points out to
wards
the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank
flap
.
Engine coolant temperature indica-
tor
.
Fig. 58
Digital instrument panel: engine cool-
ant t
emper
ature indicator.
Cool zone. The engine has not r
eached
oper
ating temperature yet. Avoid high
speeds and stressing the engine if it has
not reached operating temperature.
Normal zone. At high outside tempera-
tures and when making the engine work
hard, the diodes may continue lighting up
and reach the upper zone. This is no
cause for concern, provided the control
lamp does not light up
Warning area. When the engine is work-
ing hard, especially at high outside tem-
A
B
C
peratures, the diodes may light up in the
w
arning ar
ea.
The coolant temperature gauge only works
when the ignition is switched on.
Control and warning lamp
It lights up red
Do not carry on driving!
Engine coolant l
evel too low, coolant temperature too
high.
Flashes red
Fault in the engine coolant system.
●
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
l
et it cool do
wn.
●
Check the engine coolant level
›››
page 320.
●
If the warning lamp does not switch off even
if the coolant level is correct, request assis-
tance from specialised personnel.
CAUTION
●
To ensur
e a long useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approxi-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm
also depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
›››
page 72 as a guide.
78
Instruments and warning/control lamps
●
Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inl
et reduce the cooling ef-
fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-
atures and high engine loads, there is a risk
of the engine overheating.
●
The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-
tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle
is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can
reduce the cooling effect, which could
cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-
cialist assistance.
Service intervals
The service interval display appears on the
instrument clust
er scr
een and in the infotain-
ment system.
There are different versions of instrument
panels and infotainment systems, so the ver-
sions and instructions on the screens may
vary.
SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
spection).
In vehicles with Services established by
time or mileage, the service intervals are al-
ready pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hicle so requires. To calculate this variation
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use
and individual driving styles are considered.
The advance warning first appears 20 days
before the date established for the corre-
sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-
maining until the next service are always
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and
the time is given in complete days. The cur-
rent service message cannot be viewed until
500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-
ly lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
If a service or an inspection has to be carried
out soon, a service reminder will be dis-
played when the ignition is switched on.
The figure displayed are the kilometres that
can still be travelled or the time until the next
service.
Service due
When the time for a service or an inspec-
tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-
ted when the ignition is switched on and the
fixed key symbol may appear on the in-
strument panel for a few seconds, along with
one of the following messages:
●
Service now!
●
Please have your vehicle inspec-
ted.
●
Oil change service due!
●
Oil change service and inspection
due!
Consult a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine off
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service notification can be read:
Check the date of the current service on the
infotainment system
●
Press the > SETTINGS
›››
page 84
function button.
●
Select the Service menu option to display
information about the services.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows:
●
The service interval display can only be re-
set through the Service menu
›››
page 70.
Do not restart the indicator between the
service intervals, otherwise the information
displayed will be incorrect.
If the oil change service is reset manually, the
service interval display changes to a fixed
»
79
Operation
service interval, also in vehicles with Fl
e
xible
oil change service.
Note
●
The service message disappears after a
f
ew seconds, when the engine is started or
when the
button is pressed on the multi-
function steering wheel.
●
In v
ehicles with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected
for a long period of time, it is not possible to
calculate the date of the next service.
Therefore the service interval display may
not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the
maximum service intervals permitted
›››
page 339.
●
If you reset the display manually, the next
service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
cles with fixed service intervals. For this
reason we recommend that the service in-
terval display be reset by a SEAT author-
ised Dealer.
Using the instrument panel
Intr
oduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible to
r
ead the diff
erent functions of the display by
scrolling through the menus.
The multifunction display can only be con-
trolled from the buttons on the multi-function
steering wheel.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead
to an accident and cause injuries.
●
Ne
ver use the menus on the instrument
panel display while the vehicle is in motion.
Note
After loading or changing the 12-volt bat-
tery, check the syst
em settings. If the pow-
er supply is interrupted, the system settings
might be incorrect or deleted.
Operation using the multifunction
st
eering wheel
Fig. 59
Right side of the multifunction steering
wheel
: butt
ons to the menus and information
displays on the instrument panel.
As long as a priority 1
›
›
›
page 72 warning is
active, it will not be possible to access any
menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
hidden with the button of the multifunction
steering wheel
›››
Fig. 59.
Select a menu or an informative display
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Customisation option: select a user.
●
If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
press the button
›››
Fig. 59; if necessary,
several times.
●
To change menus, use buttons or
›››
Fig. 59.
80
Instruments and warning/control lamps
●
T
o open the menu or the inf
ormation dis-
played, press the button
›››
Fig. 59 or wait
a few seconds until the menu or the informa-
tive display opens automatically.
Changing menu settings
●
In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-
wheel of the multifunction steering wheel
›››
Fig. 59 until the desired option of the menu
is highlighted. The option appears framed.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 59 to make the
required modifications. A mark indicates that
the system or function is activated.
Back to menu selection
Press the button or .
Button for the driver assistance
systems*
Fig. 60
On the turn signal and main beam lev-
er: butt
on f
or driver assistance systems (de-
pending on versions).
Fig. 61
Left side of the multifunction steering
wheel
: butt
on for driver assistance systems
(depending on versions).
With the turn signal and main beam headlight
l
e
ver button, you can activate or deactivate
the driver assistance systems displayed in the
Assistance systems menu .
Activating or deactivating a driver assis-
tance system using the turn signal lever
and main beam headlight
●
Briefly press the
›››
Fig. 60
1
button to
open the Assist
ants
menu.
●
Select the driver assistance system and ac-
tivate or deactivate it
›››
page 80. A mark in-
dicates that driver assistance system is
switched on.
●
Next, confirm the selection by pressing the
button on the multi-function steering
wheel.
Activating or deactivating a driver assis-
tance system using the multifunction
steering wheel*
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 61 to open the
Aids menu.
●
Select the driver assistance system and ac-
tivate or deactivate it. A mark indicates that
driver assistance system is switched on.
●
Next, confirm the selection by pressing the
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The driver assistance systems can also be
switched on and off in the infotainment sys-
tem, in the menu Vehicle settings
›››
page 88.
81
Operation
Control lamps
Contr
ol and w
arning lamps
The control and warning lamps are indicators
of warnings
›
››
, faults or certain functions.
Some control and w
arning lamps come on
when the ignition is switched on, and switch
off when the engine starts running, or while
driving.
Depending on the model, additional text
messages may be viewed on the instrument
panel display. These may be purely informa-
tive or they may be advising of the need for
action
›››
page 66, Instrument panel.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
strument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are
lit, an audible warning is also heard.
Red warning lamps
Notification central lamp: additional infor-
mation on the instrument panel display
P
arking brake on
››
›
page 265.
Fault in the brake system
›
›
›
page 265.
Fault in the steering system
›
›
›
page 231.
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat
belt
››
›
page 17.
Engine cooling fluid
››
›
page 78.
Engine oil pressure
›
›
›
page 318.
Alternator anomaly
›
›
›
page 325.
Press the foot brake
›
›
›
page 249.
AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCR
syst
em
›››
page 310 .
Yellow warning lamps
Notification central lamp: additional infor-
mation on the instrument panel display
Fr
ont brake pads worn
››
›
page 265.
Fault in the ESC or the system caused it to
swit
ch off; OR ESC or ASR operating
›››
page 270.
ASR switched off manually; OR ESC in
Sport mode
››
›
page 270.
Fault in the ABS
››
›
page 270.
Rear fog light switched on
››
›
page 112.
Fault in the emission control system
›
›
›
page 312.
Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault
in the management of the diesel engine
›››
page 312.
Fault in the petrol engine management
››
›
page 312.
Particulate filter blocked
››
›
page 312.
Fault in the steering system
››
›
page 231.
Tyre pressure monitor system
››
›
page 335.
Fuel tank almost empty
››
›
page 77.
Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR sys-
t
em
›››
page 310.
Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-
sioners
›
›
›
page 26.
Front passenger front airbag disabled
›››
page 26.
Front passenger airbag switched on
›››
page 26.
Defective active cruise control (ACC)
›››
page 254
Lane Assist (lane keeping system)
›››
page 255.
Error in the lane assist warning system
›››
page 255.
OFF
Lane Assist switched off
›››
page 255.
Fault in the lighting of the vehicle
›››
page 112.
82
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Low engine oil level
››
›
page 318.
Fault in the gearbox
››
›
page 228.
Windscreen cleaning fluid too low
››
›
page 121.
Green indicator lamps
Turn lights or emergency lights on
››
›
page 112.
Trailer turn signals
››
›
page 112.
Auto Hold activated
›
›
›
page 269.
Press the foot brake
›
›
›
page 222.
Cruise control
›
›
›
page 241.
Speed limiter
›
›
›
page 243
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
››
›
page 250.
Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning
››
›
page 255.
Blue indicator lamps
Main beam on or flasher on
›››
page 112.
Other warning lamps
Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not
properly cl
osed
›››
page 69.
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
››
›
page 112.
Hill descent control (HDC)
››
›
page 230.
Service interval display
›
›
›
page 79.
Mobile phone connected by Bluetooth® .
Mobile telephone battery charge status.
Risk of freezing
›
›
›
page 69.
Start-Stop system activated
›
›
›
page 219.
Start-Stop system unavailable
››
›
page 219.
Low consumption driving status
›››
page 70.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ig-
nored, f
aults may occur in the vehicle, it
may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-
ous injuries may occur.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble.
●
A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users.
If necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to
advise other drivers.
●
Befor
e opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
●
In any vehicle, the engine compartment is
a hazardous area and could cause severe
injuries
›››
page 314.
83
Operation
Infotainment system
Intr
oduction
The infotainment system brings together im-
portant v
ehicle functions and systems into a
single central control unit, e.g. air condition-
ing, menu settings, radio equipment and the
navigation system.
The actual number of menus available and
the name of the various options will depend
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.
General operating information
General information on the operation of the
infotainment system, as well as on the warn-
ing and safety instructions that must be taken
into account, is found in
›››
page 169.
How to move through the different menus
and select them
●
S
witch the ignition on.
●
If the infotainment system is off, switch it on.
●
The different menus are selected directly
on the touch screen using texts, icons or but-
tons.
If the box is checked , the function is activa-
ted.
Pressing the menu button will always take
you to the last menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing those
menus.
Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show
more content above or below those dis-
played on the screen at that time, for exam-
ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll
bar and pull up or down.
Tutorial
The first time you connect the infotainment
system, a system tutorial will open with a brief
description of the main functions and how to
use it.
Help
In the Help menu can be found more informa-
tion and tips for using the infotainment sys-
tem.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury. Operating the Inf
o-
tainment system while driving could dis-
tract you from traffic.
84
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Explanation of the function buttons
Fig. 62 Schematic representation: Overview of the
possible function butt
ons on the screen
Top part of the screen
Curr
ent time
Driving pr
ofile and navigation informa-
tion. If the user has an active route, both
the time and the distance to the destina-
tion are displayed. If there is no active
route, the driving profile is displayed. On
vehicles with no available driving profile,
the current address is displayed whenev-
er there is no active route.
Air conditioning information. In vehicles
with heated steering wheels or wind-
screen heating, the corresponding icon is
A
B
C
displayed when these functions are ena-
bl
ed. If not, the curr
ent outside tempera-
ture is displayed.
Telephone information. Information re-
garding your mobile device is displayed:
available network signal strength, estab-
lished Bluetooth connection, unanswered
calls, new messages, battery status, etc.
Number of notifications and customi-
zation of the system depending on the
user and connectivity.
Bottom part of the screen
Main menu display mode:
D
E
F
: main menu with the 6 main functions
divided int
o 2 scr
eens (3 + 3, customisa-
ble by the user by pressing on the func-
tion).
: main menu in mosaic mode (all func-
tions of the Infotainment system)
Direct accesses to the functions of the In-
fotainment system (up to 10 functions, 5 +
5, customisable by the user). By pressing
on the icon, you can select/deselect the
functions in question.
G
85
Operation
Initial configuration wizard
Fig. 63 Schematic representation: Initial configu-
ration wiz
ard
The initial configuration wizard will help you
t
o set up your Inf
otainment system the first
time you switch it on.
Every time you switch on the Infotainment
system, the initial setup screen will be dis-
played
›››
Fig. 63 if any parameters have not
been set (marked with “”) or if the Don't
show again function button has not been
pressed.
Function button: Function
Closes the Configuration Wizard.
Function button: Function
A
Press to set day and time.
B
Press to search and store to memory
the radio stations that have the best
reception at that moment.
C
Press to go to the Online Media set-
tings.
D
Press to link your mobile phone to
the Infot
ainment system.
Function button: Function
Don't show
again
Disables the possibility of changing
the settings of the Infot
ainment sys-
tem. If you wish to perform the initial
configuration, you must access
through Help.
Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.
End
Once one or more settings have
been applied, press t
o finalise the
setup in the main menu of the wizard.
86
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Vehicle information
Fig. 64 Schematic representation: Vehicle infor-
mation and stat
us
Pressing on
> Selection and then on
Vehicle info opens the Vehicle information
menu with the following submenus:
Driving data. The average consump-
tion, average speed, distance travelled,
trip duration and autonomy are shown. It
has 3 memories: “From departure”, “To-
tal calculation” and “From refuelling”
›››
page 71.
Vehicle status. The warnings regarding
faults, incidents, memorisation of the
tyre pressure or information of the next
inspection service are displayed.
–
–
87
Operation
Assist systems and vehicle settings
Fig. 65 Schematic representation: Assist systems
and vehicl
e settings
The number of assist systems and settings
depend on the v
ersion and the country in
question.
■
Driv
er assistance
■
Automatic parking brake activation
›››
page 267.
■
Park assist
›››
page 274.
■
Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation
systems and brake assist
›››
page 270.
■
Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop sys-
tem
›››
page 219.
■
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
›››
page 248.
■
Lane Assist (lane keeping system)
›››
page 254.
■
Emergency brake assistance system
(Front Assist)
›››
page 245.
■
Fatigue detection
›››
page 73.
■
Traffic sign recognition
›››
page 74.
■
Lane assist
›››
page 260.
■
Emergency Assist
›››
page 259.
88
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Multifunction steering
wheel*
Functions
Fig. 66 Controls on the steering wheel.
Fig. 67
Controls on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel includes multifunction
modul
es fr
om where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con-
trol and assist functions without the driver
needing to be distracted from the road.
Buttons available depending on the version
Symbol Function
1
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Pr
ess: Mute volume
2
Turn: Search in the instrument panel
menu. In Navigation mode, turn to in-
crease/decrease map size in SEAT
Digital Cockpit
Press: Select the highlighted option in
the instrument panel
Radio: Search for the previous/next
st
ation.
Media: Short press: previous/next
track; long press: fast forward/rewind
Activate phone menu (answer call,
end call)
Switch between media and radio
sources
Change the instrument panel menu
(pre
vious/next)
Enable/disable voice control
Analogue Panel: No function
Digital Panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit):
Change digital panel views
›››
page 67
Activate or deactivate steering wheel
heating
›››
page 162
Symbol Function
Connect/disconnect the Cruise con-
trol syst
em
›››
page 241 / ACC
›››
page 248 / Speed limiter
›››
page 243
: Activate ACC / Cruise control sys-
t
em / Limiter
: Reset programmed ACC speed or
cruise control system
: Increase programmed speed
: Decr
ease programmed speed
Open the drive assist menu in the in-
strument panel
Modify the programmed ACC dis-
tance
89
Operation
Opening and closing
Set of v
ehicl
e keys
Vehicle key
Fig. 68 Assignment of buttons on the remote
contr
ol k
ey.
Fig. 69
Vehicle key with alarm button.
Key to the
›
›
›
Fig. 68,
›››
Fig. 69
Unlock the vehicle
Lock the vehicle
Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button
until all the turn signals on the vehicle
flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open
the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it
will lock again. In addition, the lamp on
the key flashes.
Folding the key shaft in and out
Alarm button*. Only press in the event of
an emergency! When the alarm button is
pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn
signals light up for a short time. Press
again to disconnect.
With the vehicle key the vehicle may be
locked or unlocked remotely
›››
page 92.
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-
cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote
control and new battery is several metres
around the vehicle.
If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle
using the remote control key, this should be
re-synchronised
›››
page 92 or the battery
changed
›››
page 91.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may
be used.
1
2
3
4
5
Control lamp on the vehicle key
When a butt
on on the v
ehicle key is pressed,
the control lamp flashes
›››
Fig. 68 (arrow)
once briefly, but if the button is held down for
a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-
eral times, such as in convenience opening.
If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
up when the button is pressed, replace the
key's battery
›››
page 91.
Spare key
To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
the vehicle ID number is required.
Each new key contains a microchip which
must be coded with the data from the vehicle
electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
work if it does not contain a microchip or the
microchip has not been encoded. This is also
true for keys which are specially cut for the
vehicle.
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be
obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-
cialised workshop or an approved key service
qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchronised
before use
›››
page 92.
WARNING
●
Nev
er leave children or disabled persons
in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they
90
Opening and closing
may not be able to leave the vehicle or
manage on their own.
●
An uncontr
olled use of the key could start
the engine or activate any electric equip-
ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk
of accident. The doors can be locked using
the remote control key. This could become
an obstacle for assistance in an emergen-
cy situation.
●
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.
An unauthorised use of your vehicle could
result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore
always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the
steering could suddenly block and it would
be impossible to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic
components. Prot
ect them from damage,
impacts and humidity.
Note
●
Only use the key butt
on when you require
the corresponding function. Pushing the
button unnecessarily could accidentally
unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is
also possible even when you are outside
the radius of action.
●
Key oper
ation can be greatly influenced
by overlapping radio signals close to the
vehicle working in the same range of fre-
quencies, for example, radio transmitters or
mobile telephones.
●
Obstacles between the remote control
and the vehicle, bad weather conditions
and discharged batteries can considerably
reduce the range of the remote control.
●
If the buttons of the vehicle key are
pressed or one of the central locking but-
tons
›››
page 95 is pressed repeatedly in
short succession, the central locking brief-
ly disconnects as protection against over-
loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock
it if necessary.
●
Spare remote control keys are available
at your Technical Service, where they must
be matched to the locking system.
●
Up to five remote control keys can be
used.
To change the battery
Fig. 70
Vehicle key: opening the battery com-
partment co
v
er.
Fig. 71 Vehicle key: removing the battery.
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
w
orkshop t
o replace the battery.
The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-
cle key, under a cover.
»
91
Operation
Changing the battery
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›
›
›
page 90.
●
Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
hicle key
›››
Fig. 70 in the direction of the ar-
row
›››
.
●
Extract the battery from the compartment
using a suit
abl
e thin object
›››
Fig. 71.
●
Place the new battery in the compartment
as shown
›››
Fig. 71, pressing in the opposite
direction to that shown by the arrow
›››
.
●
Fit the cover as shown
›
›
›
Fig. 70, pressing it
onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di-
rection to that shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-
ter or any other butt
on battery can cause
serious and even fatal injuries within a very
short time.
●
Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with
batteries out of reach of children.
●
If you suspect that someone may have
swallowed a battery, seek immediate med-
ical attention.
CAUTION
●
If the battery is not changed corr
ectly,
the vehicle key may be damaged.
●
Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same volt
age, size and specifications.
●
When fitting the battery, check that the
polarity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries cor-
r
ectly and with r
espect for the environ-
ment.
Synchronize the vehicle key
If the butt
on is pr
essed frequently outside
of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-
synchronised as described below:
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 90.
●
If necessary, remove the cover from the
driver door lever
›››
page 102.
●
Press the button on the vehicle key. For
this, it must remain with the vehicle.
●
Open the vehicle within one minute using
the key blade. The key has been synchron-
ised.
●
If necessary, fit the cap.
Central locking
Introduction
Central locking functions correctly when all
the doors and the rear lid ar
e correctly shut. If
the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be
locked with the key.
If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking
and ignition system, it may only be locked
with the ignition off and the driver's door
closed.
The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for
a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may
run down and fail to start the motor.
WARNING
The incorrect use of the central locking
system may cause serious injuries.
●
The centr
al locking system will lock all
doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can
prevent any non-authorised individual from
opening the doors and accessing the vehi-
cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or
accident, locked doors will complicate ac-
cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-
sengers.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the vehicle. The central locking
button can be used to lock all the doors
from within. Therefore, passengers will be
locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked
92
Opening and closing
in the vehicle can be exposed to very high
or very l
ow temperatures.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
●
Never leave individuals locked in a closed
and locked vehicle. In case of emergency,
they may not be able to exit the vehicle by
themselves or get help.
Description
Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid
and the t
ank fl
ap to be unlocked centrally:
●
From outside, using the vehicle key
›››
page 94.
●
From outside with the Keyless Access
›››
page 95 system,
●
From inside, by pushing the central locking
button
›››
page 95.
Various functions are available to improve the
vehicle safety:
●
Security system “Safe”
›››
page 98
●
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
●
Selective unlocking system
●
Automatic speed dependent locking and
unlocking system (Auto Lock)
●
Emergency unlocking system
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-
intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-
cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-
onds, it re-locks automatically.
Unlocking one side of the vehicle only
When you lock the vehicle with the key, the
doors and the rear lid are locked. When you
open the door, you can either unlock only the
driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select
the required option, use the Infotainment sys-
tem setting
›››
page 94.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and
the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed
of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-
tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle
can also be unlocked via the central locking
switch or by pulling one of the inside door
handles.
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, the doors will be automatically
unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
is locked.
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of
the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not
closed correctly.
Accidental lock-out
The central locking system prevents you from
being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-
ing situations:
●
If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot
be locked with the central locking switch
›››
page 95.
Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
when all the doors and the rear lid have been
closed. This prevents the accidental locking
of the vehicle.
Note
●
Nev
er leave any valuable items in the ve-
hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is
not a safe.
●
If the LED on the driver door sill lights up
for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is
locked, the central locking system or anti-
theft alarm* is not working properly. You
should have the fault repaired at a SEAT
Official Service or specialised workshop.
»
93
Operation
●
The vehicl
e interior monitoring of the an-
ti-theft alarm* system will only function as
intended if the windows and the sunroof*
are closed.
Central locking settings
Central locking settings can be changed in
the Infot
ainment system.
Unlocking doors
●
Press the function button > SETTINGS
> Opening and closing > Central
locking > Door unlocking.
You can choose t
o unlock all the doors or on-
ly the driver door when you unlock the vehi-
cle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is also
unlocked.
With the Driver setting, when you press the
button on the remote control key once, only
the driver door is unlocked. If that button is
pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the
rear lid will be unlocked.
If the button is pressed, all the vehicle
doors are locked. At the same time, a confir-
mation signal* is heard.
Unlock and lock from the outside
Fig. 72
Remote control key: buttons.
●
Lock: press the
›
›
›
Fig. 72 button.
●
Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-
curity system: push the button again and
hold for 2 seconds.
●
Unlock: press the button.
●
Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the
button for at least 1 second.
The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the
rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the
car. This function prevents the vehicle from
remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you
press the button for at least one second.
Selective unlocking system
The selective unlocking system allows you to
only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank
flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain
locked.
Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:
●
Press (once) the button on the remote
control key or turn the key once in the open-
ing direction.
Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the
tank flap simultaneously:
●
Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-
ton on the remote control key, or turn the key
twice within 5 seconds in the opening direc-
tion.
The Safe* security system and the anti-theft
alarm* deactivate immediately when only
the driver door is opened.
In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can
programme the security central locking sys-
tem directly
›››
page 94.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Lock-
ing system “Saf
e” on page 99.
Note
●
Do not use the remot
e control key until
the vehicle is visible.
●
Other functions of the remote control key
›››
page 108, Convenience open/close
function.
94
Opening and closing
Unlocking and locking from the in-
side
Fig. 73
Driver's door: central locking switch.
●
Lock: press the
›
›
›
Fig. 73 button.
●
Unlock: press the
›››
Fig. 73 button.
Please note the following when using the
central locking switch to lock your vehicle:
●
It is not possible to open the doors or the
rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
●
The LED in the central locking switch lights
up when all the doors are closed and locked.
●
You can open the doors individually from
the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-
cess and assistance.
WARNING
●
The central l
ocking switch also works
with the ignition switched off, except when
the “safe” system is activated.
●
The central locking switch does not oper-
ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside
and the security system is switched on.
●
Locked doors could delay assistance in
an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-
cially children, in the vehicle.
Note
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
(Aut
o Lock)
›››
page 93. You can unlock the
vehicle again using the button on the
central locking switch.
Unlock and lock the vehicle with
K
eyl
ess Access*
Fig. 74
Keyless Access: proximity zones.
Fig. 75 Door handle: sensor surfaces
›››
Fig. 75
Unl
ocking sensor surf
ace on the inside of
the door handle.
Locking sensor surface on the outside of
the door handle.
»
A
B
95
Operation
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may hav
e the K
eyless Access system.
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-
tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle
without actively using its key. To do this, all
that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in
the detection area where you are attempting
to access the vehicle
›››
Fig. 74 and to touch
one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles
›››
Fig. 75 or operate the softtouch/han-
dle on the rear lid
›››
page 103
›››
.
Aut
omatic v
ehicle unlock
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via
the front doors only. When doing so, the re-
mote control key must be no further than ap-
prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.
It does not matter where you carry the key,
e.g. in your jacket pocket.
Once the doors have been locked, they can-
not be opened again immediately. This will
enable you to check that the doors are prop-
erly closed.
If you wish you may unlock only the corre-
sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec-
essary adjustments can be performed in ve-
hicles with a driver information system
›››
page 88.
General information
If a valid key is in the proximity of the car,
›››
Fig. 74 the Keyless Access locking and
starting system gives the key entry as soon as
one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles is touched or the softtouch/handle on
the rear lid is operated.
The following features are then available
without having to use the vehicle key actively:
●
Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using
the handles of the front doors or the soft-
touch/handle on the rear lid.
●
Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the
sensor of the driver or passenger door han-
dle.
●
Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one
foot below the rear bumper
›››
page 106.
●
Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine
with the starter button
›››
page 215.
The central locking and locking systems op-
erate in the same way as a normal locking
and unlocking system. Only the controls
change.
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
double flash of the indicator lights; locking by
a single flash.
If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and
the rear lid are closed leaving the last key
used inside the vehicle and none outside, the
vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-
hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.
The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if
you do not open any door or the rear lid.
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-
onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open
any door or boot hatch.
Unlocking and opening the doors
(Keyless-Entry)
●
Grip one of the front door handles. When
you do this, you touch the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 75
A
(arrow) of the handle and the
v
ehicl
e unlocks.
●
Open the door.
On vehicles with selective opening or info-
tainment system configuration, pulling the
door handle twice will unlock all doors.
In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-
tem: closing and locking the doors
(Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the locking sensor surface
›››
Fig. 75
B
(arrow) on one of the front door
handl
es. The door that is used must be
cl
osed.
96
Opening and closing
In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys-
t
em: cl
osing and locking the doors
(Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 75
B
(arrow) on one of the front door handles.
The v
ehicl
e locks with the “Safe” security sys-
tem
›››
page 98. The door that is used must
be closed.
●
Touch (twice) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 75
B
(arrow) of one of the front door handles to
l
ock the v
ehicle without activating the
“Safelock” security system
›››
page 98.
Unlocking and locking the boot hatch
When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-
id vehicle key in the proximity zone
›››
Fig. 74.
Open or close the rear lid normally.
After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If
the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid
will not lock automatically after closing it.
What happens when locking the vehicle
with a second key
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
it is locked from the outside with a second ve-
hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked
for engine ignition
›››
page 215. In order to
enable engine ignition, press the button on
the key inside the vehicle.
Automatically disabling sensors
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
long period of time, the proximity sensors on
the passenger doors are automatically disa-
bled.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles is often activated in an unusual manner
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity
sensors are disabled for a certain period of
time.
Sensors will again be enabled:
●
After a time.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
ton on the key.
●
OR: if the boot is opened.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with
the key.
Keyless Access temporary disconnection
function*
You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless
Access unlocking for one locking and unlock-
ing cycle.
●
Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-
hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-
wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
●
Close the door.
●
Push the central locking button on the re-
mote control and touch the locking sensor
surface of the driver door handle
›››
Fig. 75
B
within the following 5 seconds.
Do not gr
asp the door handl
e; otherwise the
vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also
possible if the vehicle is locked through the
driver’s door lock.
●
To check that the function has been deacti-
vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull
on the door handle. The door should not
open.
The next time the door can only be unlocked
via the remote control or the lock cylinder.
The next time the door is locked/unlocked,
Keyless Access will be active again.
Convenience functions
To close all the electric windows and the sun-
roof using the comfort function, keep a fin-
ger for a few seconds on the locking sensor
surface
›››
Fig. 75
B
(arrow) of the door han-
dl
e until the windo
ws and roof have closed.
How the doors open when touching the sen-
sor surface on the door handle will depend
on the settings that have been activated in
the infotainment system, using the function
button > SETTINGS > Opening and
closing.
»
97
Operation
CAUTION
The sensor surfaces on the door handles
could engage if hit with a w
ater jet or high
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle
key in the proximity. If at least one of the
electric windows is open and the sensor
surface
›››
Fig. 75
B
(arrow) on one of the
handles is activ
ated continuously, all win-
dows will close.
Note
●
If the 12-volt v
ehicle battery has little or
no charge, or the vehicle key battery is al-
most or entirely out of charge, you will
probably not be able to lock or unlock the
vehicle with the Keyless Access system.
The vehicle can be unlocked or locked
manually
›››
page 102.
●
To control the proper locking of the vehi-
cle, the release function is disabled for ap-
prox. 2 seconds.
●
If the message Keyless access system
faulty is displayed on the screen of the
dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the
operation of the Keyless Access system.
Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this.
●
Depending on the function set on the in-
fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-
rior mirrors will unfold and the surround
lighting will come on when unlocking the
v
ehicle using the sensor surface on the
driver and passenger door handles
›››
page 123.
●
If there is no valid key inside the vehicle
or the system fails to detect one, a warning
will display on the dash panel screen. This
could happen if any other radio frequency
signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.
from a mobile device accessory) or if the
key is covered by another object (e.g. an
aluminium case).
●
If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a
layer of salt, the correct functioning of the
sensors on the door handles may be affec-
ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the
gear stick is in position P.
●
To improve the safety of your vehicle, the
remote control of the system is equipped
with a position sensor. If this remote control
does not detect movement for a certain
length of time, the system will conclude
that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on
a night table) so it will be disabled.
Locking system “Safe”
1)
When the vehicle is blocked, the “Safe” se-
curity syst
em puts the door handles out of
operation and prevents unauthorised persons
for entering. The doors cannot be opened
from inside
›››
.
Depending on the vehicl
e, when switching the
ignition off, a warning may be displayed on
the control panel screen stating that the
“Safe” security system is activated.
Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”
security system.
●
Press the locking button once on the ve-
hicl
e key.
Lock the vehicle without activating the
“Safe” system.
●
Press the locking button on the vehicle
key twice.
●
On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking
and ignition system: touch the sensor surface
on the outside part of the door handle twice.
1)
Available depending on market and version.
98
Opening and closing
When the “Safe” security system is disa-
bl
ed, the f
ollowing needs to be taken into
account:
●
The vehicle can be unlocked and opened
from the inside using an door handle.
●
The anti-theft alarm is activated.
●
The vehicle interior monitoring system and
the anti-tow system are disabled.
“Safe” status
The flashing frequency of the diode in the
door sill immediately confirms the process.
Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence
for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues
flashing slowly.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children)
in the vehicl
e if it is locked from the outside
and the “Safe” security system* is activa-
ted, as the doors and windows cannot then
be opened from the inside. Locked doors
could delay assistance in an emergency.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
br
eak int
o the vehicle or steal it. The system
will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-
nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned
on when the vehicle is locked with the key.
The system is immediately activated and the
turn signal light located on the driver door will
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
that the alarm and the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) have been turned on.
If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
they will not be included in the protection
zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-
quently closed, they will be automatically in-
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
and the turn signals will flash accordingly
when the doors close.
●
The turn signal light will flash twice on
opening and deactivating the alarm.
●
The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
ing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for
about 30 seconds alongside a sound and
optical (flashing) warning signals and will be
repeated about ten times when the vehicle is
locked and the following unauthorised ac-
tions are attempted:
●
Opening a door that is mechanically un-
locked using the vehicle key without switching
on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-
tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is
no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is
activated immediately on opening the door).
●
A door is opened.
●
Opening the bonnet.
●
The rear lid is opened.
●
When the ignition is switched on with a non-
authorised key.
●
Undue manipulation of the alarm.
●
Switching off the 12 volt battery.
●
Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles
with interior monitoring
›››
page 100).
●
When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with
anti-tow system
›››
page 100).
●
When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with
anti-tow system
›››
page 100).
●
When the vehicle is transported on a ferry
or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or
vehicle interior monitoring
›››
page 100).
●
When a trailer connected to the anti-theft
alarm system is disconnected.
How to turn OFF the alarm
●
Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button
of the key.
●
OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.
»
99
Operation
If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically
using the k
ey, the ignition must be t
urned on
within 15 seconds of opening the door.
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.
and the ignition will be blocked.
CAUTION
If the anti-theft security system is switched
off, the v
ehicle interior monitoring and the
tow-away protection are automatically
disconnected.
Note
●
After 28 days, the indicat
or light will be
switched off to prevent the battery from ex-
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system
remains activated.
●
If, after the audible warning goes off, an-
other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
rear lid is opened after a door has been
opened), the alarm is triggered again.
●
The anti-theft alarm is not activated
when the vehicle is locked from within using
the central locking button .
●
If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-
ly with the key, only the driver door is un-
locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.
Only when the ignition has been turned on
will the other doors be available - but not
unlocked - and the central locking button
will be activated.
●
If the 12-volt v
ehicle battery is run down
or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not op-
erate correctly.
●
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working
for any reason.
●
The alarm is triggered immediately if one
of the battery cables is disconnected while
the alarm system is active.
Interior monitoring and the anti-
t
o
w system*
It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-
r
at
ed in the anti-theft alarm* which detects
unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-
sound.
The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
the rear lid must be closed.
If the “Safe” security system*
›››
page 98 is
switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring
and the tow-away protection are automati-
cally disconnected.
Activation
●
It is automatically switched on when the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
Deactivation
●
Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
chanically or by pressing the button on the
remote control. The time period from when
the door is opened until the ignition is turned
on should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise
the alarm will be triggered.
●
Press the button on the remote control
twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors
will be deactivated. The alarm system re-
mains activated.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are automatically switched on
again next time the vehicle is locked.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
if not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system should be switched off if animals
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
their movements will trigger the alarm) or
when, for example, the vehicle is transported
or has to be towed with only one axle on the
ground.
Deactivation through the infotainment
system
●
Switch off the contact and select: >
SETTINGS > Opening and closing >
100
Opening and closing
Central locking > Interior monitor-
ing.
●
When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle
int
erior monit
oring and the tow-away protec-
tion are switched off until the next time the
door is opened.
False alarms
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
serve related legal requirements.
The following cases may cause a false
alarm:
●
Open windows (partially or fully).
●
Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or
completely).
●
Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
such as loose papers, items hanging from the
rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
Note
●
If the vehicl
e is relocked and the alarm is
activated without the volumetric sensor
function, relocking will activate the alarm
with all its functions, except the volumetric
sensor. This function is reactivated when
the alarm is switched on again, unless it is
deliberately switched off.
●
If the alarm has been triggered by the
volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by
a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash
is differ
ent to the flash indicating the alarm
is activated.
●
The vibration of a mobile phone left in-
side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-
terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both
sensors react to movements and shakes in-
side the vehicle.
●
If on activating the alarm, any door or the
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-
vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and
the anti-tow system will only be activated
once all the doors are closed (including the
rear lid).
Doors
Intr
oduction
The doors and rear lid can be locked man-
ually and partially opened, f
or e
xample if the
key or the central locking is damaged.
WARNING
Opening and closing doors carelessly can
cause serious injury.
●
If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
doors and windows cannot be opened fr
om
the inside.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the car. They could be trapped in
the car in an emergency and will not be
able t
o get themselves to safety.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
WARNING
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
lid is danger
ous and can l
ead to serious in-
jury.
●
Open and close the doors and the rear lid
only when there is nobody in the way.
CAUTION
When opening and closing in an emergen-
cy, carefully disassembl
e components and
then reassemble them carefully to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
101
Operation
Emergency unlocking or locking of
the driv
er
’s door
Fig. 76
Driver door handle: Concealed lock
cylinder
.
Fig. 77
Driver door handle: lever the cover off
If the central locking system should fail to op-
er
at
e, the driver door can still be locked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver door is
locked manually all other doors are locked.
When it is unlocked manually, only the driver
door opens. Please observe the instructions
relating to the anti-theft alarm system
›››
page 99.
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 90.
●
Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in
the cover on the driver door handle
›››
Fig. 77
then remove the cover upwards.
●
Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to
unlock or lock the vehicle.
Special characteristics
●
The anti-theft alarm will remain active
when vehicles are unlocked. However, the
alarm will not be triggered
›››
page 99.
●
After the driver door is opened, you have 15
seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this
time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
●
Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-
bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-
activates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the vehicl
e is locked manually using the
key shaft
›››
page 92.
Emergency lock of doors without
l
ock cylinders
Fig. 78
Locking the door manually.
If the central locking system should fail to
w
ork at any time
, doors with no lock cylinder
will have to be locked separately.
The emergency lock is located on the front of
the front passenger's door and the rear
doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.
●
Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to
the right as far as it will go (if the door is on
the right side) or to the left (if the door is on
the left side).
Once the door has been closed it can no lon-
ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-
rior door handle once to unlock and open the
door.
102
Opening and closing
Childproof locks
Fig. 79
Childproof lock on the left hand side
door
.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
fr
om being opened fr
om the inside. This sys-
tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-
cidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle
electronic opening and locking systems. It
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-
ted and deactivated manually, as described
below:
Activating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in
which you wish to activate the childproof
lock.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in the
door using the ignition key, clockwise for
the left hand side doors
›››
Fig. 79 and anti-
clockwise for the right hand side doors.
Deactivating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door
whose childproof lock you want to deacti-
vate.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in the
door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise
for the left hand side doors
›››
Fig. 79 and
clockwise for the right hand side doors.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the
door can only be opened from the outside.
Rear lid
Introduction
WARNING
Careless and unsuitable locking, opening
and closing of the r
ear lid can cause acci-
dents and serious injury.
●
The rear lid must not be opened when the
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may
damage the tail lights.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it
down with your hand on the rear window.
The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing
it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while
driving.
●
Closing the r
ear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear could cause serious
injury to you and to third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-
soning!
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-
low children to play inside or next to it, es-
pecially if the rear lid is open. Children
could enter the luggage compartment,
close the rear lid and become trapped. A
locked vehicle can reach extremely high
and low temperatures, depending on the
time of year, thus causing serious injuries,
illness or even death.
CAUTION
Before opening or closing the rear lid, make
sure that ther
e is enough space to open or
close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a
garage.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that
the key has not been l
eft inside the luggage
compartment.
103
Operation
Opening and closing the rear lid
Fig. 80
Rear lid: handle
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
cally. It is activ
at
ed by exerting slight pressure
on the handle
›››
Fig. 80.
To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or
buttons of the vehicle key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if it
is opened while the vehicle is moving faster
than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
Opening and closing
●
To open: place slight pressure on the han-
dle. The rear lid opens automatically.
●
To close: hold one of the handles on the in-
ner trim and close it by moving it downwards,
or press the button on the rear lid*
›››
Fig. 81.
If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also
locked.
Rear lid with electric opening and
closing*
Fig. 81
Rear lid: button to close the rear lid.
Fig. 82
On the driver’s door: button to open
and cl
ose the r
ear lid.
Opening the rear lid
●
Unlock the vehicle and briefly press the
handl
e of the r
ear lid. On vehicles with
Keyless Access you can directly press the
handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is unlocked
if an authorised key is recognised in the prox-
imity of the vehicle.
●
OR: depending on the features, pull the
button on the driver door upwards
›››
Fig. 82.
The button also works when the ignition is
switched off.
●
OR: press and hold the button of the ve-
hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is
locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doors
remain locked).
●
OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and
sensor-controlled opening you can open the
rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the
sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy
Open
›››
page 106). The rear lid will be auto-
matically opened.
Closing the rear lid
●
Briefly press the button on the rear lid
›››
Fig. 81
›››
in Introduction on page 103.
●
OR: depending on the f
eat
ures, pull the
button on the driver door upwards
›››
Fig. 82.
●
OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press
and hold the vehicle key button until the
rear lid is closed, or move one foot into the
area of the sensors located below the rear
bumper (Easy Open)
›››
page 106. The key
104
Opening and closing
of the vehicle must not be further away than
1.5 m fr
om the boot or inside the v
ehicle.
●
OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc-
tion of closing until it closes automatically.
●
The rear lid goes down automatically to the
final position and also closes automatically
›››
in Introduction on page 103.
Int
errupting opening or cl
osing
After beginning to open or close the rear lid,
the action can be halted by pressing one of
the buttons.
Continue opening or closing the rear lid by
hand. To do this, some force will have to be
used.
If you press one of the buttons again, the
rear lid will move again in the original direc-
tion.
If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob-
stacle during the automatic opening or clos-
ing, opening or closing will be interrupted im-
mediately. For the closing process, the rear
lid opens again slightly.
●
Check why it has not been possible to open
or close the rear lid.
●
Try to open or close the rear lid again.
●
If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or
closed by hand using reasonable force.
Restrictions if the vehicle has a third row of
seats
If the vehicle is fitted with a third row of seats,
it will not be possible to close the tailgate with
the button, on the driver’s door
›››
Fig. 82,
or with the vehicle key. This happens regard-
less of whether the seats in the third row are
folded or not.
Particular features if towing a trailer
If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-
cally connected to a trailer
›››
page 297, the
electric rear lid can only be opened or closed
with the buttons on the rear lid itself.
Acoustic warnings
Throughout the process of opening or closing
the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard.
Exception: when the rear lid is opened man-
ually using the handle or the Easy Open func-
tion with the movement of the foot or closed
using the button on the rear lid itself
›››
Fig. 81.
Modifying and memorising the opening
angle
If the space behind or above the vehicle is
less than the travel area of the rear lid, you
can change the opening angle of the rear lid.
To memorise a new opening angle, the rear
lid must be open at least halfway.
●
Interrupt the opening process in the desired
position.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 81 on the rear
lid for at least 3 seconds.
The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-
tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard
warning lights and an audible warning.
Resetting and memorising the opening an-
gle
For the rear lid to reopen completely, the
opening angle must be reset and memorised
again.
●
Release the rear lid and open it to the
memorised height.
●
Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To
do this, some force will have to be used.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 81 on the rear
lid for at least 3 seconds.
●
This resets and memorises the factory-set
opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by
blinking of the hazard warning lights and an
audible warning.
Automatic protection against overheating
If the system is operated repeatedly in a short
space of time, it automatically switches off to
prevent overheating.
Once the system is cool again, the function
can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can only
»
105
Operation
be opened and closed by hand using reason-
abl
e f
orce.
If the 12-volt battery is disconnected or the
corresponding
›››
page 59 fuse burns out
while the rear lid is open, the system will have
to be reset. This requires closing the rear lid
completely once.
Emergency unlocking
›››
page 107
WARNING
If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it
is heavily loaded, the r
ear lid may not open
or, after opening, it may lower by itself due
to the extra weight and cause serious in-
jury.
●
Do not open the rear lid when there is a
lot of snow on it or when carrying a load
(e.g. on a rack).
●
Before opening the rear lid, remove the
snow or the load.
Rear lid with sensor-controlled
opening and cl
osing (Easy Open)
Fig. 83
Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-
ing (Easy Open).
If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity
of the r
ear lid, it is possibl
e to unlock and
open or close it moving one foot in the area of
the sensors located under the rear bumper.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the
middle.
●
With a brisk movement, bring your foot and
lower leg as close as you can to the bumper.
The lower part of the leg needs to be close to
the upper sensor area and your foot must be
close to the lower sensor area
›››
Fig. 83
1
.
●
Quickly remove your foot and lower leg
fr
om the sensor ar
eas
›››
Fig. 83
2
. The rear
lid will be aut
omatically opened.
●
If the rear lid f
ails to open, repeat the pro-
cedure after a few seconds.
To notify that the rear lid has been opened
with the Easy Open function, the turn lights
blink twice.
The rear lid can be closed with another foot
movement similar to the opening one (provi-
ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of
the rear lid).
When closed, the rear lid automatically locks
if the vehicle has been locked beforehand
and there is no valid key inside.
While the rear lid is in motion (either opening
or closing), it can be stopped with another
foot movement similar to the opening one
(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi-
ty of the rear lid).
The Easy Open feature is not available or on-
ly has limited availability in the following sit-
uations (examples):
●
If the rear bumper is very dirty.
●
If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g.
after having driven on gritted roads.
●
If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not
covered.
●
If the vehicle has been equipped at a later
time with a tow bracket.
In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea-
ture may take a little longer to open the boot
106
Opening and closing
or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the
boot opening by accident, e
.g. because of
the running w
ater.
The Easy Open function can be connected
and disconnected permanently in the info-
tainment system using the function button
> SETTINGS > Opening and closing
›››
page 88.
WARNING
If there is a valid key in the proximity of the
rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-
tion may be accident
ally activated and the
rear lid will open, for example, when
sweeping under the rear bumper, when di-
recting a water jet or high pressure steam
to the area or when carrying out mainte-
nance work or repairs in that area. If acci-
dentally opened, the rear lid could injure
somebody situated in its area of operation
or cause material damage.
●
Therefore, always make sure that there is
no unsupervised valid key in the area near
the rear lid.
●
Before carrying out any maintenance or
repair work on the vehicle, always disable
the Easy Open feature via the infotainment
system.
●
Before washing the vehicle, always disa-
ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-
ment system.
●
Befor
e attaching a bicycle rack or a trail-
er,
›››
page 297, always disable the Easy
Open feature via the infotainment system.
Emergency unlocking of the rear lid
Fig. 84 Detail of the luggage compartment:
emer
gency unl
ocking
The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in
the e
v
ent of an emergency (e.g. no battery).
There is a groove in the luggage compart-
ment allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-
gage compartment
●
Insert the key blade into the slot and press
the lever in the direction of the arrow until the
lock unlocks
›››
Fig. 84.
Window controls
Electrically opening and closing
the windows
Fig. 85
Detail of the driver's door: window
contr
ol
s.
●
Opening the window: press the button .
●
Closing the window: pull the button .
Butt
ons on the driv
er door
Window on the front left door
Window on the front right door
Window on the rear left door
Window on the rear right door
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons in the rear doors.
»
1
2
3
4
5
107
Operation
The front and rear electric windows can be
oper
at
ed by using the controls on the driver
door. The other doors each have a switch for
their own window.
Always close the windows fully if you park the
vehicle or leave it unattended
›››
.
Y
ou can use the el
ectric windows for approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door have been opened.
Safety switch *
The safety control
›››
Fig. 85
5
on the driver
door can be used t
o disabl
e the electric win-
dow buttons on the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
are deactivated.
The safety control symbol lights up in yel-
low if the buttons on the rear doors are
switched off.
Convenience open/close function
The electric windows can be opened or
closed from outside using the vehicle key:
Convenience opening:
●
Press and hold the button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
roof* have reached the desired position.
●
OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but-
ton on the remote control key and then keep
the key in the driver door lock until all the win-
dows and the sunroof* have reached the re-
quired position.
Convenience closing:
●
Press and hold button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
roof* are closed
›››
.
●
OR: K
eep the key in the driver door in the
"l
ock" position until all the windows and the
sunroof* are closed.
During convenience closing, first the windows
and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.
Different settings can be changed using the
infotainment system. Select: > SETTINGS
> Opening and closing > Windows >
Convenience opening.
One-touch opening and closing
The one-touch automatic opening and clos-
ing is used to open or close the windows
completely. It will not be necessary to hold
the button of the corresponding electric win-
dow.
For the automatic raising function: pull the
button for the corresponding window up-
wards until it reaches the second position.
For the automatic lowering function: pull
the button for the corresponding window up-
wards until it reaches the second position.
Stop automatic movement: push or pull on
the button of the corresponding window.
Resetting one-touch opening and closing
The one-touch opening and closing function
is not active after the vehicle battery has
been disconnected or is flat and will have to
be reset.
●
Pull the button of the corresponding win-
dow and hold it for one second in this posi-
tion.
●
Release the button and pull upwards and
hold again. The one-touch function is now
ready for operation.
The automatic one-touch electric windows
can be reinitialised individually or several at a
time.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Intro-
duction on page 101.
●
Incorrect use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
●
Ne
ver close the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise
could cause serious injury to you and third
parties. Make sure that no one is in the path
of a window.
108
Opening and closing
●
If the ignition is swit
ched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of
injury, for example, in the electric windows.
●
The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an
obstacle for assistance in an emergency
situation.
●
Therefore always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
●
The electric windows will work until the
ignition has been switched off and one of
the front doors has been opened.
●
If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-
able the rear electric windows. Make sure
that they have been disabled.
●
For safety reasons, you should only use
the remote control open and close func-
tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.
To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the
windows when pressing the button to close
them. The windows stop moving as soon as
the button is released.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the
window will aut
omatically open again
›››
page 109. If this happens, check why the
window could not be closed before at-
tempting to close it again.
Window anti-trap function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
jury when the electric windo
ws close.
●
If a window is obstructed when closing au-
tomatically, the window stops at this point
and lowers immediately
›››
.
●
Next, check why the window does not close
befor
e attempting it again.
●
If you try within the following 10 seconds
and the window closes again with difficulty or
there is an obstruction, the automatic closing
will stop working for 10 seconds.
●
If the window is still obstructed, the window
will stop at this point.
●
If ther
e is no obvious reason why the win-
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
back function is now deactivated.
●
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
will open fully when you operate one of the
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Elec-
trically opening and closing the windo
ws
on page 108.
●
The roll-back function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
accident.
Sunroof*
Introduction
The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The
rear part is fix
ed and cannot be opened. It al-
so has a sun blind.
The sunroof only works when the ignition is
switched on. Once the ignition has been
switched off, you can still open or close the
sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver
door and the front passenger door are not
opened.
WARNING
If the sunroof is used negligently or without
paying due attention, it can cause serious
injury.
●
Open or cl
ose the sunroof and the sun
blind only when no one is in their path of
movement.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting.
●
Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle, espe-
cially if they have access to the vehicle
key. If using they key unattended, they
could lock the vehicle, start the engine,
»
109
Operation
switch on the ignition and activate the sun-
roof
.
●
After switching off, it is still possible to
open or close the sunroof during a short
space of time provided that neither the
driver nor passenger door is opened.
CAUTION
●
T
o pr
event damage, during winter tem-
peratures remove any ice or snow that
might be on the car roof before opening the
sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.
●
Before leaving the vehicle or in case of
rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the
sunroof open or in a tilted position, water
can enter the interior and can cause con-
siderable damage to the electrical system.
As a result, other damage can occur in the
vehicle.
Note
●
Leav
es and other loose objects that ac-
cumulate on the sunroof rails should be
regularly cleaned away either by hand or
with a vacuum.
●
If the sunroof does not work correctly, the
anti-trap function will not work either. Con-
tact a specialised workshop.
Opening and closing the sunroof
Fig. 86
On the interior roof lining: sunroof but-
t
on.
The sun blind automatically opens along with
the sunr
oof if compl
etely closed or if in front
of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the
previous position and does not automatically
close with the sunroof. The sun blind can only
be closed completely once the sunroof has
been closed.
The button
›››
Fig. 86 has two levels. The
first level switches the sunroof to the tilted po-
sition, opening or closing it fully or partially.
On the second level, the sunroof automati-
cally moves to the corresponding final posi-
tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat-
ing the button again stops the automatic
function.
Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof
●
Press the rear part of the button
B
to the
first l
e
vel.
●
Automatic function: briefly press the rear
part of button
B
to the second level.
Cl
osing the sunr
oof from a tilted position
●
Press the front part of the button
A
to the
first l
e
vel.
●
Automatic function: briefly press the front
part of the button
A
to the second level.
St
opping the aut
omatic operation by ad-
justing the tilted position of the sunroof or
by closing the sunroof
●
Press button
A
or
B
again.
Opening the sunr
oof
●
Pr
ess button
C
backwards to the first level.
●
Automatic function to the comfort position:
briefly pr
ess butt
on
C
backwards to the sec-
ond l
e
vel.
Closing the sunroof
●
Press button
D
forwards to the first level.
●
Automatic function: briefly press button
D
forwards to the second level.
110
Opening and closing
Stopping the automatic operation during
the opening or cl
osing
●
Pr
ess button
C
or
D
again.
Opening and closing the sunshade
blind
Fig. 87
On the interior roof lining: sunshade
blind butt
ons.
The electrical sun blind works when the igni-
tion is s
wit
ched on.
When the sunroof is in its most tilted position,
the sun blind automatically goes into a venti-
lation position. The sun blind remains in this
position also with the sunroof closed.
Buttons
›››
Fig. 87
1
and
2
have two levels.
The first l
e
vel opens or closes the sun blind
fully or partially.
By briefly pressing the button to the second
level, the sun blind automatically moves to
the corresponding final position. Activating
the button again stops the automatic func-
tion.
Once the ignition has been switched off, you
can still open or close the sun blind for a few
minutes provided the driver door and the
front passenger door are not opened.
Opening the sun blind
●
Press button
1
to the first level.
●
Automatic function: briefly press button
1
to the second level.
Cl
osing the sun blind
●
Pr
ess button
2
to the first level.
●
Automatic function: briefly press button
2
to the second level.
St
opping the aut
omatic operation during
the opening or closing
●
Press button
1
or
2
again.
Note
When the sunroof is open, the electric sun
blind can only be closed t
o the front edge
of the sunroof.
Convenience function to open or
cl
ose the sunr
oof*
Fig. 88
Door handle: sensor surface.
The sunroof can be opened and closed with
the conv
enience function, just lik
e the win-
dows.
Using the door lock*
●
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver
door in either the unlocking or locking posi-
tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-
sition. Release the key to interrupt this func-
tion.
Using the remote control
●
Keep the locking or unlocking button press-
ed to open or close the roof. If you release the
button is the opening or closing will stop.
»
111
Operation
Using the Keyless Access* system (only
cl
osing)
●
Pr
ess and hold the locking sensor surface
›››
Fig. 88 (arrow) on the door handle to close
the sunroof. If you release the sensor surface,
the closing movement stops.
Anti-trap function of the panoramic
sunroof and sunshade
The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of
injury when cl
osing the sunr
oof and the sun
blind
›››
. If the sunroof or sun blind encoun-
t
er r
esistance or an obstacle when closing,
they reopen immediately.
●
Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not
close.
●
Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.
●
If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed
due to an obstacle or some resistance, it
stops at the corresponding position and then
opens. For automatic closing, a new closing
attempt might take place.
●
If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to
close, close it without the anti-trap function.
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without
the anti-trap function
●
Sunroof: within approximately 5 seconds of
having activated the roll-back function, press
the button
›››
Fig. 86 to the second level in
the direction of arrow
›››
Fig. 86
D
until the
sunr
oof cl
oses completely.
●
Sun blind: within approximately 5 seconds
of activating the roll-back function, press and
hold button
›››
Fig. 87
2
until the blind is fully
cl
osed.
●
The sunr
oof or sun blind close without
the anti-trap function intervening!
●
If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close,
visit a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the
anti-trap function can cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Al
ways be careful when closing the sun-
roof and sun blind.
●
No person should ever remain in the way
of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when
closing without the anti-trap function.
●
The anti-trap function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body from be-
coming trapped against the roof frame and
injuries occurring.
Lights
V
ehicl
e lighting
Control lamps
It lights up
Driving light totally or partially faulty.
Fault in the cornering light system.
It lights up
Rear fog light switched on
››
›
page 114.
It lights up
Left or right turn signal.
The control l
amp flashes twice as fast when a turn
signal is faulty.
Hazard warning lights on
››
›
page 118.
It lights up
Trailer turn signals
It lights up
Main beam on or flasher on
››
›
page 115.
It lights up
The Light Assist system is on
››
›
page 116.
112
Lights
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
ew seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
Headlight switch
Fig. 89 Dash panel: lights control.
●
Turn the switch to the required position
›
›
›
Fig. 89.
Sym-
bol
Ignition switch-
ed off
Ignition is
swit
ched on
Fog lights, dipped
beam and side
lights off.
Daylight running
lights swit
ched on.
Sym-
bol
Ignition switch-
ed off
Ignition is
swit
ched on
The “Coming
home”, “Leaving
home” and W
el-
come lights may be
switched on.
Automatic control
of dipped beam
and daytime run-
ning light.
Side light on.
Daylight running
lights swit
ched on.
Dipped beam head-
light off
Dipped beam
swit
ched on.
The driver is personally responsible for the
corr
ect use and adjustment of the lights in all
sit
uations.
Automatic dipped beam headlight control
*
The automatic dipped beam control is merely
intended as an aid and is not able to recog-
nise all driving situations.
When the light switch is in position , the
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and
switch lighting switch on automatically in the
following situations
›››
:
●
The photo sensor detects d
arkness
, for ex-
ample, when driving through a tunnel. They
switch off when adequate lighting is detec-
ted.
●
The rain sensor detects rain and activates
the wipers. They switch off when the wipers
have not been activated for a few minutes.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights consist of individu-
al lights, integrated in the front headlights.
When the daytime running lights are switched
on, the rear side light also switches on
›››
.
The daytime running lights t
urn on e
very time
the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in
position or , according to the level of ex-
terior lighting.
When the light switch is in position , a light
sensor automatically switches dipped beam
on and off (including the control and instru-
ment lighting) or the daytime running lights
depending on the level of exterior lighting.
Motorway light*
The function is connected and disconnected
via the corresponding Infotainment system
menu.
●
Activation: when going above 110 km/h
(68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip-
ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-
er's visibility distance.
●
Deactivation: when reducing the speed of
the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the
dipped beam immediately returns to its nor-
mal position.
»
113
Operation
Audible warnings to advise the driver that
the lights hav
e not been s
witched off
If the ignition is not connected and the driver
door is open, an audible warning signal is
heard in the following cases: this will remind
you to turn the light off.
●
When the parking light is on
›››
page 115.
●
When the light switch is in position or .
WARNING
If the road is not well lit and other road
users cannot see the vehicl
e well enough
or at all, accidents may occur.
●
The automatic dipped beam control
( ) only switches on the dipped beam
when there are changes in light conditions
but not, for example, when it is foggy.
WARNING
The side lights or daytime running lights
are not bright enough t
o illuminate the road
ahead and to ensure that other road users
are able to see you.
●
Always use your dipped beam head
lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.
●
Never drive with daytime lights if the road
is not well lit due to weather or lighting
conditions.
●
On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,
when activating the daytime running light
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-
cle which does not have the rear lights on
may not be visible t
o other drivers in the
darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in
conditions of poor visibility.
WARNING
If the headlights are set too high and not
used corr
ectly, ther
e is a risk of dazzling or
distracting other road users. This could re-
sult in a serious accident.
●
Always make sure that the headlights are
correctly adjusted.
Note
●
The legal r
equirements regarding the use
of vehicle lights in each country must be
observed.
●
The dipped beam headlights will only
work with the ignition on. The side lights
come on automatically when the ignition is
turned off.
Fog lights
Fig. 90
Dash panel: lights control.
The warning lamps or al
so sho
w, on the
light switch or instrument panel, when the
front fog lights are on.
●
Turning on the front fog lights* : pull the
light switch out to its first click position
›››
Fig. 90
1
, from positions , or .
●
Turning on the rear fog light : pull the
light s
wit
ch fully out
2
from position , or
.
●
T
o switch off the fog lights, press the light
switch or turn it to position .
Note
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
you. You shoul
d use the rear fog light only
when visibility is very poor.
114
Lights
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 91
Turn signal and main beam lever.
More the lever to the required position:
Right t
urn light or right
-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Left turn light or left-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Turning main beam headlights on: control
lamp lit up on the instrument panel.
The headlight flasher comes on while we
pull the lever. Control lamp lit up.
Place the lever in rest position to turn off the
corresponding function.
Convenience turn signals
When the ignition is switched on, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or down-
wards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times.
1
2
3
4
The convenience turn signals are switched on
and off in the inf
ot
ainment system by means
of the function button > SETTINGS >
Light > Light assistant > Conven-
ience turn signals
›››
page 88.
In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
a specialised workshop.
Parking light
The parking lights will only work with the igni-
tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning
will sound while the driver door is open.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Move the turn signal lever up or down.
When the parking light is switched on, the
front side light and the tail light on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle turn on.
Parking light on both sides
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Place the light switch in position .
●
Lock the vehicle from the outside.
In doing so, only the side lights of both head-
lights light up, and additionally the tail lights
will do so partially.
WARNING
Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,
or for
getting to deactivate them can con-
fuse other road users. This could result in a
serious accident.
●
Always give warning when you are going
to change lane, overtake or when turning,
activating the turn signal in good time.
●
As soon as you have finished changing
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn
signal off.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause
accidents and serious injury, as the main
beam may distract or dazzl
e other drivers.
Note
●
If the convenience t
urn signals are oper-
ating (three flashes) and the other conven-
ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-
tive part stops flashing and only flashes
once in the new part selected.
●
The turn signal only works when the igni-
tion is switched on. The hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switch-
ed off.
●
If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the
control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn
signals) and the vehicle turn signal will
flash at double speed.
»
115
Operation
●
The main beam headlights can only be
swit
ched on if the dipped beam headlights
are already on.
●
In cold or damp weather conditions, the
headlights, tail lights and turn signals may
mist up inside temporarily. This is normal
and in no way effects the useful life of the
vehicle lighting system.
●
The parking light does not activate auto-
matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-
nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-
ted.
Main beam assist (Light Assist)*
The main beam assist acts within the limits of
the syst
em and depending on envir
onmental
and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the
system is activated as of a speed of about 60
km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below
about 30 km/h (18 mph)
›››
.
When the syst
em is activ
ated and the cam-
era detects other vehicles that may be daz-
zled, the main beam is automatically switch-
ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati-
cally switched on.
The main beam assist generally detects illu-
minated areas and deactivates the main
beam when passing through a town, for ex-
ample.
Switching the main beam assist on
●
Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch
to the position .
●
From the base position, press the turn signal
and main beam headlights lever forwards
›››
Fig. 91
3
When the lamp is displ
ayed
on the instrument panel displ
ay, the main
beam assist is switched on.
Switching the main beam assist off
●
Turn the light switch to a position other than
›››
page 113.
●
OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turn
signal light and main beam headlights lever
forwards
›››
Fig. 91
4
.
●
OR: push the t
urn signal and main beam
headlight l
ever forwards to manually turn on
the main beam. The main beam assist will
then be deactivated.
System limitations
In the following cases, the main beam head-
light must be switched off manually because
the main beam assist will not disconnect it on
time or disconnect it at all:
●
On roads with insufficient lighting with very
reflective signs
●
If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe-
destrians or cyclists.
●
On closed curves, when the traffic in the
opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-
nounced slopes or inclinations.
●
On roads with traffic in the opposite direc-
tion and with a central reservation barrier
where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry driv-
ers.
●
In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain
●
In the event of dust or sand storms
●
If the windscreen is damaged in the cam-
era's field of vision.
●
If the camera's field of vision is misted up,
dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.
●
If the camera is damaged or if the power
supply has been cut off.
WARNING
The convenience features of the main
beam assist should not encour
age the tak-
ing of risks. The system is not a replace-
ment for driver concentration.
●
You are always in control of the main
beam and adapting it to the light, visibility
and traffic conditions.
●
It is possible that the main beam head-
light control does not recognise all driving
situations and is limited under certain cir-
cumstances.
●
When the field of vision of the camera is
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of
the main beam control may be affected.
This also applies when changes are made
116
Lights
to the vehicle lighting system, for example,
if additional headlights are inst
alled.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
t
em, t
ake the following points into consid-
eration:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
and ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the field of vision of the
camera.
Note
●
The headlight flasher can be t
urned on
and off manually at any time with the turn
signal and main beam lever
›››
page 115.
●
If there are objects that radiate light in
the camera's area of influence, e.g. a port-
able navigation system, this may affect the
operation of the main beam assist system.
Fog lights with cornering light func-
tion*
The cornering light function is an additional
function t
o the dipped beam headlights t
o
improve lighting of the side of the road when
taking a sharp turn at low speed.
The cornering light function works when the
dipped beam headlights are already on and
it is activated when driving at speeds below
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
●
If the steering wheel is turned or the turn
signal is switched on, the front fog light grad-
ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering
light function is gradually switched off.
●
When engaging reverse gear, both front fog
lights turn on.
“Coming home” and “Leav-
ing home” function
The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”
function lights up the v
ehicl
e’s immediate
proximity when getting into and out of it in the
dark. When switched on, the front position
and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-
cense plate light come on.
The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-
sensor.
In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-
ment system you can adjust the duration of
the light switch-off delay, and activate and
deactivate the function.
Activating the “Coming Home” function
For vehicles with light and rain sensors.
●
Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition with the light switch in posi-
tion
›››
page 113.
●
The automatic “Coming Home” function is
only active when the light sensor detects
darkness.
For vehicles without light and rain sensors.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-
mately 1 second.
When the driver door is opened, the “Coming
Home” lighting comes on. The headlight turn-
ing off time counts from when the last door or
rear lid are closed.
The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in
the following cases:
●
Automatically, once the headlight turning
off time has elapsed.
●
Automatically, when a vehicle door or the
rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting
the engine.
●
When the rotary light switch is turned to po-
sition
›››
page 113.
●
With the ignition is switched on.
»
117
Operation
Activating the “Leaving Home” function
●
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
●
The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-
t
ed when the light s
witch is in position
and the light sensor detects darkness.
The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off
in the following cases:
●
Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”
switch-on time ends (default 30 sec).
●
When the vehicle is locked using the remote
control.
●
When the light switch is turned to position .
●
With the ignition is switched on.
Welcome light*
1)
The welcome light is a light located on the
exterior mirrors, focused on the ground, which
activates or deactivates if the light switch is in
the position and the “Coming Home” or
“Leaving Home” function is turned on or off.
Note
To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-
ing Home” function, the rot
ary light switch
must be in position and the light sensor
must detect darkness.
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 92
Dash panel: hazard warning lights
s
wit
ch
The hazard warning lights are used to draw
the att
ention of other r
oad users to your vehi-
cle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from
moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights
›››
.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the electronic parking brake.
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
f
or an aut
omatic gearbox, move the gear
lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-
tention of other road users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
you leave the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the
hazard warning lights are switched on. The
two turn signal turn signal lamps and the
turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at
the same time. The simultaneous hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is
switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-
ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50
mph), the brake light flashes several times per
second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If
you continue braking, the hazard warning
lights will come on automatically when the
vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off
automatically when the vehicle starts to
move again.
1)
Valid for vehicles with a light and rain sensor
and full-LED headlights.
1
18
Lights
WARNING
●
The risk of an accident increases if your
v
ehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-
ard warning lights and a warning triangle to
draw the attention of other road users to
your stationary vehicle.
●
Due to the high temperatures that the
catalytic converter can reach, never park
in an area where the catalytic converter
could come into contact with highly inflam-
mable materials, for example dry grass or
spilt petrol. This could start a fire.
Note
●
The 12-volt v
ehicle battery will run down
if the hazard warning lights are left on for a
long time, even if the ignition is switched
off.
●
The use of the hazard warning lights de-
scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-
utory requirements.
Dynamic headlight range control
The headlight range is automatically adjus-
t
ed accor
ding to the vehicle load status when
they are switched on.
WARNING
Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean
that the headlights dazzle and distr
act oth-
er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-
cident.
Driving abroad
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
asymmetric: the side of the road on which
you ar
e driving is lit more intensely.
When a car that is manufactured in a country
that drives on the right travels to a country
that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-
mally necessary to cover part of the head-
light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-
justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling
other drivers.
In such cases, the regulations specify certain
light values that must be complied with for
designated points of the light distribution. This
is known as “Tourist light”.
The light distribution of the headlights allows
the specific “tourist light” values to be met
without the need for stickers or changes be-
ing made to the settings.
Note
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
you are pl
anning a long stay in a country
that drives on the other side, you should
take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical
Service to change the headlights.
Interior lights
Lighting of the instrument panel
,
displ
ays and switches
Depending on the model, the lighting of the
instrument cluster and s
witches can be ad-
justed in the infotainment system, using the
> SETTINGS > Light > Interior light-
ing
›››
page 88 function button.
With the ignition on and without light activa-
tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting
remains activated in daytime light conditions.
The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-
minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving
through a tunnel without the function ac-
tive, the instrument panel lighting may even
switch off. The objective of this function is to
provide the driver with a visual indication that
he or she should activate the dipped beam.
If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-
strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the
following message will appear Turn on the
lights on the instrument panel.
119
Operation
Interior and reading lights
Fig. 93
Detail of roof lining: front lighting of the
passenger compartment.
Knob Function
Turning the rear interior lights on or
off.
The int
erior lights come on automati-
cally when you unlock the v
ehicle,
open a door or remove the key from
the ignition.
The light goes out a few seconds after
closing all the doors, when locking the
vehicle or connecting the ignition.
/
Turning the reading light on and off
Glove compartment and luggage com-
par
tment lighting*
When opening and cl
osing the glove com-
partment on the front passenger side and the
rear lid, the respective light will automatically
switch on and off.
Footwell lighting*
The lights in the footwell area below the dash
(driver and front passenger sides) will switch
on when the doors are opened and will de-
crease in intensity while driving. This intensity
can be adjusted through the infotainment
system menu using the function button >
SETTINGS > Light > Interior lighting
›››
page 88.
Ambient light*
The ambient light lights up the area of the
centre console and the footwell area and,
depending on the version, the front door pan-
els as well.
The intensity of the background light can be
adjusted in the infotainment menu using the
function button > SETTINGS > Back-
ground lighting
›››
page 84.
Note
●
Depending on the feat
ures fitted in the
vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following
interior lights: front vanity mirror light, rear
vanity mirror light, footwell light, sun blind
and glove compartment light.
●
The reading lights go out when the vehi-
cle is closed and locked or after a few mi-
nutes of turning the ignition off. This pre-
vents the 12-volt vehicle battery from dis-
charging.
120
Visibility
Visibility
Windscr
een wiper and r
ear
window wiper systems
Window washer lever
Fig. 94
Operating the windscreen wiper and
r
ear wiper
.
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wipers off.
1
Wiper intervals.
Use control
›
››
Fig. 94
A
to set the in-
t
erv
al (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
2
Slow sweep adjustable by using con-
tr
ol
›
››
Fig. 94
A
.
3
Fast sweep adjustable by using control
››
›
Fig. 94
A
.
More the lever to the required position:
4
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.
Hold the l
ever down for more time to in-
crease the wipe frequency.
5
Windscreen washer. The windscreen
washer function is activated by push-
ing the lever towards the steering
wheel, and the wipers operate simulta-
neously.
6
Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-
er will wipe the window appr
oximately
every six seconds.
7
The rear window wash function is acti-
vat
ed by pressing the lever, and the
rear wiper starts simultaneously.
WARNING
In cold conditions you should not use the
wash/wipe syst
em unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the heating
and ventilation system. The windscreen
washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the
windscreen and obscure your view of the
road.
CAUTION
If the ignition is switched off with the wind-
screen wipers activ
e, they complete their
wipe before returning to the rest position.
When switching the ignition back on, the
windscreen wiper will continue to operate
at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-
er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-
age the wiper and the windscreen wiper
mot
or.
●
If necessary, remove snow and ice from
the windscreen wipers before starting your
journey.
●
Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-
ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-
icer spray for this operation.
●
Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if
the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the
windscreen wipers while dry can cause
damage.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
the wipers in service position
›››
page 51.
Note
●
The windscreen and windo
w wipers only
function when the ignition is switched on
and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are
closed.
●
The rear wiper is automatically switched
on when the windscreen wiper is on and the
car is in reverse gear.
121
Operation
Wiper functions
Windscreen wipers performance in differ-
ent situations
●
If you st
op the vehicle with the windscreen
wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically
change to a lower position speed. The set
speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls
away.
●
The air conditioner comes on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode
when the windscreen washer is activated,
to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-
er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.
●
When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary
according t
o the speed. The higher the vehi-
cle speed the shorter the intervals.
Heated windscreen washer jets*
The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does
not thaw the water in the washer hoses.
When the ignition is switched on the heated
windscreen washer jets automatically adjust
the heat depending on the ambient tempera-
ture.
Note
●
The wiper will try to wipe aw
ay any ob-
stacles that are on the windscreen. The
wiper will stop moving if the obstacle
blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and
switch the wiper back on again.
●
The windscreen will be wiped again ap-
pr
oximately 5 seconds after the wind-
screen washer has been activated, provi-
ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).
If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec-
onds after the “drip” function, a new wash
sequence will begin without performing the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work
again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
Rain sensor*
Fig. 95
Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor
A.
Fig. 96 Rain sensor sensitive surface
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the
windscr
een wiper int
ervals, depending on the
amount of rain
›››
. The sensitivity of the rain
sensor can be adjust
ed manually. Manual
wipe
›
››
page 121.
Move the lever to the required position
›››
Fig. 95:
Rain sensor off.
Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
sary.
Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
–
Set control to the right: high sensitivity.
–
Set control to the left: low sensitivity.
When the ignition is switched off and then
back on, the rain sensor remains active and
starts operating again when the windscreen
wipers are in position
1
and the vehicle is
tr
av
elling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).
0
1
A
122
Visibility
Modified behaviour of the rain sensor
P
ossibl
e causes of faults and mistaken read-
ings on the sensitive surface
›››
Fig. 96 of the
rain sensor include:
●
Damaged wipers: a film of water on the
damaged blades may lengthen the activa-
tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-
sult in a fast and continuous wipe.
●
Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger
the windscreen wiper.
●
Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on
the roads may cause an excessively long
wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.
●
Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus
effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or
make it react more slowly, later or not at all.
●
Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone
will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain
sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-
duction in the sensitive surface area and
adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the
sensor will vary with the size of the damage
caused by the stone.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
to s
witch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers man-
ually when water on the windscreen ob-
structs visibility.
Note
●
Regul
arly clean the sensitive surface of
the rain sensor
›››
Fig. 96 (arrow) and check
for possible damage to the wiper blades.
●
To remove wax and coatings, we recom-
mend a window cleaner containing alco-
hol.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor*. This may cause
sensor disruption or faults.
Mirrors
Int
erior mirr
or anti-dazzle function
Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-
zl
e function*
The anti-dazzl
e function is activated every
time the ignition is switched on.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the
interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-
matically according to the amount of light it
receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-
led if reverse gear is engaged.
WARNING
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
rear vision mirr
or breaks, an electrolyte flu-
id may leak. This could cause irritation to
the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you
come into contact with this liquid, it must
be rinsed with lar
ge quantities of water. If
necessary, get medial help.
CAUTION
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
r
ear vision mirr
or breaks, an electrolyte flu-
id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-
faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon
as possible.
Note
●
If the light incident in the interior r
ear vi-
sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun
blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror
with automatic setting will not operate per-
fectly.
●
When the interior lights are on or reverse
gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken
with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle
position.
●
If you have to stick any type of sticker on
the windscreen, do not do so in front of the
sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-
dazzle function from working well or even
from working at all.
123
Operation
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 97
Detail of the driver's door: control for
the e
xt
erior mirror.
Turn the control to the corresponding posi-
tion:
T
urning the knob t
o the desired position,
adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,
left) and the passenger side (R, right) to
the direction desired.
Depending on the equipment fitted on
the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.
Folding in mirrors.
L/R
Synchronized regulation of the exterior
mirrors
In the infotainment system, using the function
button > Settings > Mirrors and
wipers > Mirrors, the exterior rear view
mirrors can be selected to adjust in a
synchronised manner.
●
Turn the knob to position L
1)
.
●
Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The
right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the
same time (synchronised).
●
If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-
view mirror: rotate the control to position R
1)
.
Tilt function for front passenger exterior
mirror*
When parking backwards, and in order to be
able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-
ror can be automatically tilted towards the
passenger to provide a better view of the
kerb. The control must be in the position R
1)
for this feature to be operational.
The mirror returns to its original position as
soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h
(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-
turns to its original position if the position of
the control is adjusted.
Storing the rear view mirror settings for the
tilt function
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
In the infotainment system, select >
SETTINGS > Mirrors and wipers > Mir-
rors > Lower in reverse gear
›››
page 84.
●
Select the R
1)
position on the control.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so
that you can see, for example, the kerb area
well.
●
Release the reverse gear.
●
The adjusted position for the rear view mir-
ror is stored.
Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the
vehicle*
In the infotainment system, using the function
button > SETTINGS > Mirrors and
wipers > Mirrors, the exterior rear view
mirrors can be selected to fold in when the
vehicle is parked and locked
›››
page 84.
When the vehicle is locked with the remote
control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-
tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with
1)
Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-
metrical.
124
Visibility
the remote control, the exterior mirrors are
depl
oyed aut
omatically.
WARNING
Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors
give a l
arger field of vision. However, they
make objects look smaller and further
away than they really are. If you use these
mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles
behind you when changing lane, you could
misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!
WARNING
Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking
care t
o avoid injuries.
●
Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror
when there is no-one in the way of the mir-
ror.
●
When moving the mirror, take care not to
trap fingers between the mirror and the
mirror bracket.
CAUTION
●
If for any r
eason (e.g. a bump when ma-
noeuvring) one of the rear view mirrors is
knocked out of position, the mirrors must
first be fully retracted with the electric
control. The rear view mirror must not be
placed by hand in the starting position, as
the folding mechanism can be damaged.
●
Before washing the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to fold
the exterior mirrors in to prevent them from
being damaged. Electrically r
etractable
exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out
by hand, always use the electrical power
control.
Note
●
If the el
ectrical adjustment shoul
d fail to
operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-
ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of
the mirror glass.
●
The fold-in function on the exterior mir-
rors will not activate at speeds over
40 km/h (25 mph).
Sun protection
sun blind
Fig. 98
Sun visor
Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
senger sun visors
●
Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
scr
een.
●
The sun visor can be pull
ed out of its
mounting and turned towards the door
›››
Fig. 98
1
.
●
Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-
t
udinally backw
ards.
There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a
cover. When the cover is opened
2
a light
comes on.
The l
amp goes out when the v
anity mirror
cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed
back up.
WARNING
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
●
Always store sun blinds and visors in their
housing when not in use.
Note
The light above the sun visor automatically
swit
ches off after a few minutes in certain
conditions. This prevents the 12-volt vehicle
battery from discharging.
125
Operation
Seats and headrests
Adjusting seats
Manual adjustment of the fr
ont
seats
Fig. 99
Front seats: manual seat settings.
Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and
mo
v
e the seat. The seat must engage
when the lever is released!
Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push
down (several times if necessary) from its
home position.
Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
Lumbar support: move the lever until the
required position is achieved.
1
2
3
4
WARNING
Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-
cidents and sev
ere injuries.
●
Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is
stationary, as the seats could move unex-
pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and
you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, an incorrect position is adopted
when adjusting the seat.
●
Adjust the height, position and inclination
of the front seats only when their move-
ment area is empty.
●
Make sure there are no objects in that
area.
●
Make sure that the movement and lock-
ing areas of the seats are clean.
WARNING
Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-
ers might cause an accidental activ
ation of
the electrical seat adjustment system and
make it move unexpectedly while driving.
This might cause loss of control of the vehi-
cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-
over, the electrical components of the front
seats might be damaged.
●
Never attach or place seat upholstery or
covers on the electric controls.
●
Never use upholstery or seat covers that
have not been explicitly authorised for the
seats of the vehicle.
Electric driver's seat adjustment*
Fig. 100
Driver's seat: electric seat settings.
Adjust the lumbar support: press the but-
t
on accor
ding to the desired position.
Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-
ton forwards/backwards.
Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the
button up/down. To adjust the angle of
the seat cushion, press the front of the
button up/down.
Backrest further upright/further reclined:
press the button forwards/backwards.
WARNING
●
If the electric fr
ont seats are used negli-
gently or without paying due attention, it
can cause serious injury.
A
B
C
126
Seats and headrests
●
The front seats can al
so be electrically
adjusted when the ignition is switched off.
Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle.
●
In the event of an emergency, electrical
adjustment can be stopped by pressing
any control.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the electrical compo-
nents of the fr
ont seats, pl
ease refrain from
kneeling on the seat or applying sharp
pressure at a single point to the seat cush-
ion and backrest.
Note
●
It may not be possible t
o electrically ad-
just the seat if the charge of the 12-volt ve-
hicle battery is very low.
●
If the engine is started while the seats are
being electrically adjusted, the adjustment
will stop.
Adjusting the rear seat
Fig. 101
Under the bench of the rear seat: set-
ting l
e
vers.
Fig. 102
Rear seat backrest adjustment.
The rear seat is asymmetrical and each part
can be adjust
ed separ
ately.
Adjusting the rear seat
●
Pull the right of left lever, in the direction of
the arrow
›››
Fig. 101, and move the part cor-
responding to the seat to the front or the
back.
●
Release the lever and lock the seat, moving
it slightly to the front or the back.
Adjusting the rear seat backrest
●
Press the right or left backrest of the seat
with one hand and, at the same time, pull
from the corresponding cord with the other
›››
Fig. 102
1
.
●
Move the backrest with your hand to the
desir
ed position; ther
e will be some resist-
ance
2
.
●
Release the cord and lock the backrest,
mo
ving it slightly t
o the front or the back.
WARNING
Incorrect backrest adjustment may lead to
accidents and sev
ere injuries.
●
Only adjust the rear seat when the vehi-
cle is stationary; otherwise, it could move
unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion.
Furthermore, an incorrect position is adop-
ted when adjusting the seat.
●
Adjust the rear seat only when its move-
ment area is empty.
»
127
Operation
CAUTION
●
When moving the r
ear seat horizontally,
objects in the luggage compartment might
cause damages.
●
When the seat is in its frontmost position,
objects can be stored between the seat
and the luggage compartment. Before
moving the seat backwards, remove any
objects in this area.
Headrest
Intr
oduction
The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-
sembly of the headr
ests ar
e described below.
Always make sure that the seats are correctly
adjusted
›››
page 13.
All seats are equipped with a headrest. The
rear headrests have been designed exclu-
sively for the corresponding seat of the sec-
ond or third row. Therefore, never mount them
on any other seat.
Correct adjustment of headrest
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head and
under no circumstances below eye level.
Keep the back of your head always as close
to the headrest as possible.
In vehicles with horizontally adjustable headr-
ests on the front seats, move the headrest as
close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjusting the headrest for short people
Lower the headrest completely, even if your
head is below its upper edge. In the lowest
position, there may be a small distance be-
tween the headrest and the backrest.
Adjusting the headrest for tall people
Push the headrest up as far as it will go.
WARNING
If travelling with the headrests removed or
improperly adjust
ed, the risk of severe or
fatal injuries in the event of accidents and
sudden braking or manoeuvres increases.
●
Always travel with the headrest correctly
installed and adjusted.
●
To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in
the event of an accident, adjust the head-
rest correctly based on your height, always
making sure that its upper edge is at the
same height as the top of the head, but
never below eye level. Keep the back of
your head always as close to the headrest
as possible and centred.
●
Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
●
Under no circumstances should the rear
passengers travel while the headrests are
in the non-use position.
CAUTION
When assembling and disassembling the
headrests, do not l
et them meet the top lin-
ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the front
seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,
this could damage the vehicle.
128
Seats and headrests
Adjusting the headrests
Fig. 103
Front seat: headrest adjustment.
Fig. 104
Adjusting the rear headrests: Sec-
ond r
o
w of seats, third row of seats.
Adjusting the height of the headrests
●
Move the headrest up or down in the direc-
tion of the corr
esponding arr
ow. Regarding
the rear headrest, to both raise and lower,
press the button
›››
Fig. 103
1
; for the rear
headr
ests it is only necessary t
o press the
button
›››
Fig. 104
1
to lower them
›
›
›
in
Intr
oduction on page 128
.
●
The headrest must lock correctly in one po-
sition.
Adjusting the front headrests horizontally
●
Move the head restraint forward or back in
the direction of the corresponding arrow
while pressing the button
›››
Fig. 103
1
.
●
The headrest must lock correctly in one po-
sition.
129
Operation
Removing and fitting the headrests
Fig. 105
Front headrest: removal.
Fig. 106
Removal of the rear headrests: sec-
ond r
o
w of seats.
Removing the front headrests
●
If this is the case, lower the headrest
›
›
›
in
Intr
oduction on page 128
.
●
To unlock it, look for the rabbet on the bot-
tom of the backrest and press in the direction
of the arrow
›››
Fig. 105
1
.
●
R
emo
ve the headrest in the direction of the
arrow
2
.
Fitting the fr
ont headr
ests
●
Place the headrest in the correct position
on the guides of the corresponding backrest
and insert it.
●
Press the headrest downwards until the
bars lock.
●
Adjust the headrest according to the in-
structions on the correct position of the seat.
Removing the headrests from the second
row of seats
●
If necessary, adjust the backrest of the seat
so the headrest can be removed.
●
Push the headrest up as far as it will go
›››
in Introduction on page 128.
●
Remove the headrest completely while
pr
essing butt
on
›››
Fig. 106
1
.
Inst
alling the headr
ests of the second row
of seats
●
Unlock the rear seat backrest and fold it
forward slightly
›››
page 127.
●
Place the headrest in the correct position
on the guides of the corresponding backrest
and insert it.
●
Lower the headrest while pressing button
1
.
●
Raise the rear seat backrest and lock it.
WARNING
Remove the rear headrests only when it is
necessary to fit a chil
d seat. After removing
a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.
Note
The headrests of the third row of seats can-
not be remo
ved.
Seat functions
Memory function*
Fig. 107
On the outer side of the driver's seat:
memory butt
ons.
Memory buttons
Individual settings f
or the corr
esponding seat
can be stored with the memory buttons. Addi-
tionally, settings for the exterior mirrors can
be saved with the memory buttons of the
driver seat.
130
Seats and headrests
Save the settings of the driver seat and
the e
xt
erior mirrors while driving forward
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir-
rors.
●
Press for longer than 1 second
›››
Fig. 107.
●
Press the memory button in which to store
the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A
warning sound will confirm they have been
stored.
Storing the passenger rear view mirror
settings while driving in reverse
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the required memory button.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so
that you can see, for example, the kerb area
well.
●
The new position of the mirror will be stored
automatically and allocated to the vehicle
key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
Activating settings
●
With the vehicle stopped and the ignition
switched on, press and hold the correspond-
ing memory button until the saved position is
reached.
●
OR: With the ignition switched off and the
driver's door open, briefly press the corre-
sponding button.
●
The front passenger side exterior mirror au-
tomatically changes from the position stored
for reversing as soon as the vehicle moves
forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h
(10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is
changed to a position other than R
›››
page 123.
To activate the memory function of the ve-
hicle key
Condition: a position must be memorised in
the memory.
●
Open the driver-side door.
●
Press and hold any memory button.
●
Within three seconds of the move being
completed, push the open button on the
vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the
settings have been activated.
Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and
assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle
key
●
Activate the memory function of the vehicle
key
●
With the ignition switched on, adjust the ex-
terior mirrors and the seat.
●
An audible warning confirms the saved po-
sition, both when turning off the ignition and
locking the vehicle. The settings are assigned
to the vehicle key.
To deactivate the memory function of the
vehicle key
Condition: a position must be memorised in
the memory.
●
Press and hold the button
›››
Fig. 107.
●
Within the following 10 seconds, push the
open button on the vehicle key. An audible
warning confirms the settings have been de-
activated.
Initialising the seat position memory
The position memory system must be restar-
ted if, for example, the driver seat has been
changed.
Restarting deletes all memories and assign-
ments for the seat with position memory. The
memory buttons can then be reprogrammed
and the vehicle keys re-assigned.
»
131
Operation
●
Open the driv
er door and do not get int
o
the vehicle.
●
Operating the seat settings from outside
the vehicle.
●
Move the angle of the seat backrest com-
pletely forwards.
●
Release the control to set the angle and
then press again until an audible warning is
heard.
WARNING
Adjust the memory function only when the
vehicl
e is stationary.
Note
If the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi-
nutes aft
er the vehicle was unlocked or lat-
er, the driver seat and the exterior mirrors
do not move automatically.
Access aid for the third row of seats
Fig. 108
Second row of seats:: access aid
contr
ol
s.
The convenient entry function makes it easier
t
o access the thir
d row of seats.
Folding down the backrest and moving the
second row seat
●
Remove any objects located in the footwell
of the second row of seats
›››
.
●
Pull the release lever
›
›
›
Fig. 108 in the di-
rection of the arrow.
●
Fold down the backrest of the seat and
move the seat forward.
●
Enter the vehicle or leave the vehicle care-
fully
›››
.
F
ol
ding down the second row backrest
●
Move the rear seat to its rearmost position.
●
Pull the lever
›››
Fig. 108 and push the
backrest backwards until it is in a vertical po-
sition. The entire seat folds down
›››
.
●
The rear seat must be correctly engaged
›
›
›
.
WARNING
If the convenient entry function is used
negligently or without due care
, this may
cause accidents and serious injury.
●
Never use the convenient entry function
when the vehicle is in motion.
●
Avoid trapping or damaging the seat belt
when folding the rear seats back.
●
When moving the backrests up and down,
keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
body parts out of the operating area of the
hinges and the locking mechanism of the
seats.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the seat backrests or the
seats themselves. This would cause the
backrests and benches not to lock correct-
ly when moving the seats to the vertical po-
sition.
●
For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-
sary protection all the parts of the rear
backrest must be properly engaged verti-
cally. If someone is seated in a seat whose
backrest is not properly engaged they will
be thrown forwards, along with the back-
rest, during an accident or a sudden driving
or braking manoeuvre.
132
Seats and headrests
●
When a rear seat or its backr
est is folded
down or not correctly engaged, do not let
anyone use that seat, not even a child.
●
When going in and out of the vehicle,
never lean on or grab the tilted seat of the
second row.
WARNING
If all the seats on the second row are
equipped with chil
d seats, in the e
vent of
an accident the seats of the second row
cannot be pushed forwards from the third.
People travelling in the third row will not be
able to leave the vehicle or help them-
selves in the event of an emergency.
●
Whenever there are people in the third
row, do not install child seats on all the
second row seats at the same time.
CAUTION
Before lowering and raising the rear seat
backrest, adjust the fr
ont seats so that nei-
ther the headrests nor the cushions of the
rear backrest can hit them.
CAUTION
Any objects located in the footwell of the
second ro
w of seats may be damaged on
folding the rear seat forwards. Before fold-
ing down the seats, r
emove the objects.
Adjusting or folding the backrest of
the front passenger seat
Fig. 109 Front passenger seat: fold the back-
r
est of the seat f
orwards.
Fig. 110 Unlocking the folding backrest of the
front passenger seat
Adjusting the inclination of the front pas-
senger seat backr
est
●
Mo
ve the lever in the direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 109
1
, and adjust the backrest to the
desir
ed position.
F
olding the backrest of the front passen-
ger seat forward
1)
●
Remove any objects from the front passen-
ger seat cushion
›››
.
●
Move the passenger seat to its lowest posi-
tion.
●
Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possibl
e
.
●
Lower the headrest properly.
»
1)
In the FR version with sports seats, the backrest
cannot be lo
wered.
133
Operation
●
Unl
ock the backr
est of the front passenger
seat in the direction of the arrow
1
.
●
Fold the backrest of the front passenger
seat f
orw
ards in the direction of the arrow
2
until it is horizontal.
●
Once folded down, the backrest has to be
l
ock
ed safely.
When carrying objects on the folded down
backrest of the passenger seat, the front air-
bag of this seat must be disabled
›››
page 28.
Lifting the backrest of the front passenger
seat
●
When lifting the passenger backrest, make
sure there are no objects or body parts within
the hinge movement area.
●
Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat
by first unlocking it again
›››
Fig. 110.
●
Lift the backrest of the seat in an upright
position.
●
Once it is raised again, the backrest must
be correctly engaged.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the pas-
senger seat backrest is l
owered or lifted
without due care and attention.
●
Only fold and lift the backrest of the front
passenger seat when the vehicle is station-
ary.
●
When fol
ding down the passenger seat,
always make sure there are no people or
animals in the backrest area.
●
While the passenger backrest is down,
the front airbag must always be disabled
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG warning
lamp must be on.
●
When moving the passenger backrest up
and down, keep your hands, fingers, feet
and other body parts out of the operating
area of the hinges and the locking mecha-
nism of the seat.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the backrest of the front pas-
senger seat. This would cause the backrest
not to be locked in an upright position when
lifting it.
●
Once the backrest is up, it must be cor-
rectly engaged in an upright position. Oth-
erwise, it could move unexpectedly and
cause severe injuries.
WARNING
When folding down the passenger back-
rest, its anchor points and hinges ar
e left
uncovered and may cause severe injuries in
the event of a sudden brake or accident.
●
When the passenger seat backrest is
lowered nobody else can travel in the cor-
responding seats (not even a child).
●
When the passenger seat backrest is
lowered, the only permitted seat is the rear
seat behind the driver seat. This also ap-
plies to chil
dren travelling on a child seat.
134
Seats and headrests
Folding down and raising the rear
seat backr
est
Fig. 111
Folding down and lifting the rear seat
backr
est
Fig. 112 In the luggage compartment: levers
f
or r
elease, from the luggage compartment, of
the left part
1
and right part
2
of the rear
seat backr
est.
The rear seat backrest is split and each part
can be l
o
wered forward separately to extend
the luggage compartment.
Fold the backrest of the rear seat for-
wards .
●
Push the headrest down as far as it will go
›››
page 128.
●
Move the rear seat to its rearmost position.
●
If required, lower the folding table.
●
Pull the cord
›››
Fig. 111 forward in the direc-
tion of the arrow while holding the seat back-
rest and move it forward slowly
›››
.
●
Press the backrest down with your hand un-
til it l
ocks.
F
olding down the backrest from the boot
with the unlocking levers
●
Push the headrest down as far as it will go
›››
page 128.
●
Open the rear lid
›››
page 103.
●
Pull the unlocking lever
›››
Fig. 112 of the
part of the backrest to fold down.
●
The part of the backrest in question unlocks
and can be folded down.
●
If necessary, close the rear lid
›››
page 103.
Folding up the rear seat backrest
●
Unlock the seat backrest with the cord. The
backrest disengages from its position.
●
Without letting go of the cord, lift the back-
rest.
●
Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.
●
Press the backrest firmly into the lock until it
engages
›››
.
●
The backrest must be properly engaged.
●
If necessary, adjust the backrest.
●
If necessary, adjust the headrest.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the rear
seat backrest is l
owered or lifted without
due care and attention.
●
When folding down the rear seat, always
make sure there are no people or animals in
the backrest area.
●
Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest
while driving.
●
Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
raising the rear seat backrest.
●
When lowering or lifting the rear seat
backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet
and other body parts out of its path.
●
For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-
sary protection all the parts of the rear
backrest must be properly engaged. This is
particularly important in the case of the
centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a
seat whose backrest is not properly engag-
ed they will be thrown forwards, along with
the backrest, during an accident or a sud-
den driving or braking manoeuvre.
»
135
Operation
●
When the rear seat backr
est is lowered or
is not properly engaged nobody else can
travel in the corresponding seats (not even
a child).
CAUTION
Serious damage can be caused to the vehi-
cl
e and other ob
jects if the rear seat back-
rest is lowered or lifted without due care
and attention.
●
Before folding the rear seat backrest for-
ward, always adjust the front seats so that
neither the headrests nor the cushions of
the rear backrest can hit them.
●
Before folding the rear seat backrest, al-
ways make sure there are no objects in the
movement area of the backrest.
Central armrests
Fig. 113 Front centre armrest
Fig. 114 Folding rear centre armrest.
Front centre armrest
T
o
raise the armrest, pull it fully up in the di-
rection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 113 up or step by
step depending on the desired opening.
To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest
position. Then lower it down.
To move the armrest horizontally, move it for-
ward
›››
Fig. 113 or backward as much as
possible in the direction of the corresponding
arrow.
Rear centre armrest
Depending on the features, there might be a
folding armrest in the rear centre seat.
To lower the armrest, pull the cord in the di-
rection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 114.
To lift the armrest, press it down in the oppo-
site direction to the arrow
›››
Fig. 114 and lock
it in the seat backrest.
WARNING
The front centre armrest may obstruct the
driver
's arm movements, which could
cause an accident and severe injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
●
Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-
rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even
a child. This position is incorrect and may
cause severe injuries.
WARNING
To decrease the risk of injuries while driv-
ing, the rear centr
e armrest must always be
raised.
●
When the centre armrest is down, nobody
may travel in the centre rear seat, not even
a child. An incorrect sitting position may
cause severe injuries.
136
Transport and practical equipment
Transport and practical
equipment
St
oring ob
jects
Positioning the luggage and cargo
It is possible to carry objects and luggage in
the vehicl
e, in a trailer
›››
page 297 and on
the roof
›››
page 146. When doing so, please
consider all legal provisions.
Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely
●
Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly
as possible
.
●
Always place equipment and heavy ob-
jects in the boot
›››
.
●
Position heavy items in the boot as far for-
w
ar
d as possible.
●
Take into account the maximum authorised
weight per axle, as well as the maximum au-
thorised weight of the vehicle
›››
page 355.
●
Secure the objects to the fastening rings of
the boot using appropriate chains or belts
›››
page 142.
●
Also place small objects safely.
●
If required. raise the rear seat backrest and
lock it.
●
Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into
account the pressure adhesive of the tyres
›››
page 331.
●
In vehicles equipped with tyre pressure
control system, adjust to the new load status
if necessary
›››
page 335.
WARNING
Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri-
ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring
or braking or in case of an accident. P
artic-
ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-
ing and they are thrown across the inside of
the vehicle. Please observe the following
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-
ly.
●
Secure all objects, little and large.
●
Place the objects in the cabin in such a
way that they can never reach the airbag
deployment areas while the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
●
Place the objects in such a way that they
never force any occupant of the vehicle to
sit in an incorrect position.
●
When transporting objects that take up a
seat, never let anyone use that seat.
●
Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
loose in open storage compartment of the
vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat
or on the dashboard.
●
Remo
ve all hard, sharp or heavy objects
from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin
and store them safely.
WARNING
The transport of heavy object changes ve-
hicl
e handling and incr
eases braking dis-
tance. Heavy objects that are not properly
placed or secured may cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.
●
Never put too much load in the vehicle.
Both the carrying capacity as well as the
distribution of the load in the vehicle have
effects on the driving behaviour and brak-
ing ability.
●
When transporting heavy objects, the
driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due
to the displacement of the centre of gravi-
ty.
●
Always distribute the load in the vehicle
as evenly and horizontally as possible.
●
Always place heavy objects in the boot
before the rear axle and as far away from it
as possible.
●
Objects in the luggage compartment
that are unsecured could move suddenly
and modify the handling of the vehicle.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion.
»
137
Operation
●
Avoid sudden br
aking and manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual.
WARNING
●
Ne
v
er leave your vehicle unattended, es-
pecially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Close and lock all the doors and the rear
lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Electrical wires or, depending on the fea-
tur
es, the antenna embedded into the rear
windows could be damaged, even irrepara-
bly, if they are in contact with objects.
Note
Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings are commer
cially available from
accessory shops.
Luggage compartment
L
uggage compar
tment shelf
Fig. 115 In the luggage compartment: luggage
compartment shelf cl
osed.
Fig. 116
In the luggage compartment: remove
the r
ear shelf
.
Open the rear shelf
●
Pull the cover backwards with the handle
›
›
›
Fig. 115
1
and remove it above the anchor
point (arrows). Move the cover forward care-
fully.
Cl
ose the r
ear shelf
●
Pull the cover backwards with the handle
1
and secure it to the anchor point (arrows).
R
emo
ve the rear shelf
●
If required, open the rear shelf.
●
Press the support of the cover
›››
Fig. 116
1
in the direction of the arrow and hold it in this
position.
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
Remove the cover support
›
›
›
Fig. 116
1
.
Depending on the equipment, once the lug-
gage compartment shelf has been r
emo
ved,
it can be stored under the boot's floor
›››
page 139.
Fit the rear shelf
●
Place the left side of the rear shelf in the
housing provided in the left side cover.
●
Press the support of the cover
›››
Fig. 116
1
in the direction of the arrow and hold it in this
position.
●
Place the cover in the housing provided in
the l
eft side co
ver.
●
Remove the cover support
›››
Fig. 116
1
.
●
Check that the cover is correctly secured.
138
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING
Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-
ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-
jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or
br
aking or in case of an accident.
●
Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-
jects or in bags on the rear shelf.
●
Never transport animals on the rear shelf.
WARNING
If the rear shelf is fitted in front of a rear
seat, it may cause sev
ere injuries in the
event of sudden braking or in the event of
an accident.
●
If the seats of the third row are occupied,
never fit the rear shelf before that row.
WARNING
If driving without the covers of the rear
shelf install
ed, serious injury may happen
in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking
or in case of an accident.
●
In vehicles with 7 seats, always place the
covers on the housings of the rear shelf
when it is not fitted.
Store the rear shelf
Fig. 117 Below the luggage compartment
fl
oor: st
ore the rear shelf.
Depending on the equipment, once the lug-
gage compartment shelf has been r
emo
ved,
it can be stored under the boot floor.
●
Lift the floor of the boot
›››
page 141.
●
Place the rear shelf in the corresponding
housing
›››
Fig. 117.
●
Place the boot floor in its starting position.
If the 12-volt battery is fitted in the boot, do
not store the rear shelf under the boot
floor
›››
. If you are going to use the third row
of seats, k
eep the co
ver at home.
WARNING
During a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre
, or in the event of an accident, ob-
jects could be flung though the interior and
cause serious or fatal injuries or damage to
the vehicl
e.
●
Never leave the rear shelf loose in the
luggage compartment.
CAUTION
If the rear shelf is stored incorrectly, it may
cause damages t
o the el
ectrical system or
the cabin.
●
When storing the rear shelf, always make
sure it does not touch the 12-volt battery in
the boot.
139
Operation
Placing the third row of seats in the
car
go fl
oor position
Fig. 118
Third row of seats: place in the cargo
fl
oor position.
Fig. 119 Third row of seats: lift the seat.
The rear seats can be folded down separate-
ly t
o e
xtend the boot.
Placing the third row of seats in loading
floor position
●
Disassemble the luggage compartment
tray
›››
page 138.
●
Push the headrest down as far as it will go
›››
page 128.
●
Release the seat belt from both locks to
prevent damages to the seat and the seat
belt.
●
Fold down the folding tables on the front
seats.
●
Move the seats of the second row com-
pletely forward
›››
page 127.
●
Open the rear lid
›››
page 103.
●
Remove any objects located in the footwell
in front of and behind the seat
›››
.
●
Remove objects from the space below the
corr
esponding seat.
●
Pull the unl
ocking lever
›››
Fig. 118 to its
rearmost position to unlock the seat backrest.
●
Move the seat down with your hand until it
is completely against the frame of the
seat
›››
.
●
When the seat is in loading floor position,
do not et anyone tr
av
el in it (not even a
child)
›››
.
●
Close the tailgate.
Lifting the seats of the third row
●
Move the seats of the second row com-
pl
et
ely forward
›››
page 127.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the cord on the backrest of the seat
›››
Fig. 118 to lift the backrest. OR: lift the
backrest with your hand from the cabin.
●
The red marking on the unlock lever
›››
Fig. 118 must not be seen.
●
Make sure that the seat backrest is correct-
ly engaged by tugging from it and press-
ing
›››
.
●
If required, fit the rear shelf again.
●
Close the tailgate.
WARNING
Risk of suffering severe head injuries If peo-
ple t
aller than 1.60 m travel in the third row,
they may receive severe head injuries in
the event of an accident.
●
Never travel with anyone taller than 1.60
m on the third row.
●
When closing the rear lid, always be
mindful of the passengers of the rearmost
seats.
WARNING
If the rear seats are folded down or lifted
without paying attention or without contr
ol,
severe injuries might occur.
140
Transport and practical equipment
●
Nev
er lower or lift the rear seat backrests
while driving.
●
Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
raising the rear seat backrests.
●
When moving the rear seat backrests up
and down, keep your hands, fingers, feet
and other body parts out of the operating
area of the hinges and the locking mecha-
nism of the seats.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the seat backrests or the
seats themselves. This would cause the
backrests not to be locked correctly in an
upright position.
●
For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-
sary protection, the rear backrests must be
properly engaged vertically. If someone is
seated in a seat whose backrest is not
properly engaged they will be thrown for-
wards, along with the backrest, during an
accident or a sudden driving or braking
manoeuvre.
●
A red mark on unlock lever
›››
Fig. 118 indi-
cates that the seat backrest is not engag-
ed. If the back rest is locked correctly, the
mark is not visible.
●
When a rear seat or its backrest is folded
down or not correctly engaged, do not let
anyone use that seat (not even a child).
CAUTION
●
Objects pl
aced in the footwell in front of
and behind the rear seats can be damaged
when seats are folded down or lifted. Be-
for
e folding down or lifting the seats, re-
move the objects.
●
Any objects located in the footwell be-
hind the third row of seats may be dam-
aged on folding or lifting the seats of this
row. Before folding down or lifting the seats,
remove the objects.
Adjustable luggage compartment
floor (5-seat
er vehicles)
Fig. 120 In the luggage compartment: lift the
luggage compartment fl
oor
.
Fig. 121
In the luggage compartment: adjust
the height of the v
ariabl
e luggage compart-
ment floor.
Open boot floor
●
Grab the boot floor by the opening
›
›
›
Fig. 120 and lift it in the direction of the ar-
row. Secure the belt to the rubber gasket
(small arrow).
Close boot floor
●
Loosen the belt and secure it to the support
under the boot floor. Move the floor down
carefully and let it go
›››
.
»
141
Operation
Adjust the height of the variable boot floor
Depending on the f
eat
ures, the height of the
boot floor can be adjusted.
●
If necessary, release the net bag
›››
page 143 and, if necessary, remove the
belts.
●
Lift the boot floor and pull it backwards to
release it from the side guides of the boot
›››
Fig. 121 .
●
Place the floor on the guides of the desired
height and move it forwards
›››
Fig. 121 .
CAUTION
●
Do not tug the boot fl
oor suddenly when
opening or let it fall down when closing.
Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the
boot could be damaged.
●
The maximum weight that can be loaded
on the luggage compartment variable floor
in the top position is 125 kg.
Note
●
Depending on the feat
ures, there are
storage compartments for small objects
under the boot floor.
●
SEAT recommends the use of fastening
straps to secure objects to retaining rings.
Luggage compartment floor (7-
seat
er v
ehicles)
Fig. 122
In the luggage compartment: lift the
luggage compartment fl
oor
.
Open boot floor
●
Grab the boot floor by the cord
›
›
›
Fig. 122
and lift it in the direction of the arrow and re-
move it.
Close boot floor
●
Place the boot floor on the support and
carefully lower it
›››
.
CAUTION
●
Do not let the luggage compar
tment
floor fall when closing it. Always carefully
guide it downward in a controlled manner.
Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the
boot could be damaged.
●
The maximum weight that can be l
oaded
on the luggage compartment variable floor
in the top position is 125 kg.
Fastening rings*
Fig. 123
In the luggage compartment: fixed
and depl
oyabl
e fastening rings.
There are fastening rings
›
›
›
Fig. 123 on the
front and rear of the boot to secure loose ob-
jects and luggage with fastening belts and
cords.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining
straps ar
e used, they could break in the
event of braking or an accident. Objects
could then be launched across the passen-
ger compartment and cause serious or fa-
tal injuries.
●
Always use belts or straps that are suita-
ble and in good condition.
142
Transport and practical equipment
●
Tighten the belts and str
aps in a cross
layout over the load placed on the boot
floor and secure them to the fastening rings
safely.
●
Never exceed the maximum tensile load
of the fastening rings when securing ob-
jects.
●
Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-
jects, the upper edge of the load is higher
than the fastening rings.
●
Depending on the features, take into ac-
count the instruction panels on the boot on
how to place the load.
●
Never secure a child seat to the fastening
rings.
Note
●
The maximum tensil
e load that the fas-
tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.
●
Belts, straps and securing systems for the
appropriate load can be obtained from
specialised dealerships. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Net bag*
Fig. 124
In the luggage compartment: net bag
hook
ed up at fl
oor level.
The luggage compartment prevents light
luggage fr
om mo
ving. The net bag has a zip
and can be used to store small objects.
Hooking the net bag into the luggage
compartment floor
If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded
first
›››
page 142.
●
Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
›››
Fig. 124
›››
. The bag zip should be fac-
ing up
w
ards.
Removing the net bag
The hooked up net bag is taut
›››
.
●
Release the net bag from the fastening
rings.
●
St
or
e the net bag in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-
ing rings of the boot it must be stret
ched
out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag
is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly the
hooks could cause injuries.
●
Always secure the bag hooks properly so
that they do not suddenly release from the
fastening rings when hooking or unhooking
them.
●
On hooking or unhooking them, protect
your eyes and face in case the hooks are
released suddenly.
●
Always hook up the net bag hooks in the
described order. If a hook is unfastened
suddenly, this may cause injuries.
143
Operation
Bag hooks
Fig. 125
In the luggage compartment: bag
hooks.
There may be hooks for hanging bags on
both sides of the luggage compartment
›
›
›
Fig. 125.
The retaining hooks have been designed to
secure light shopping bags.
WARNING
Never use the hooks to hang luggage or
other objects. In case of sudden br
aking or
an accident, the hooks could break.
CAUTION
Each hook is designed for a maximum load
of 2.5 kg.
Trapdoor for long loads
Fig. 126
Backrest of the rear seat: opening the
tr
apdoor f
or long loads
Depending on the features, on the rear seat,
behind the centr
al armr
est, there is a tail-
board for transporting long items in the interi-
or, such as skis.
Opening the tailboard for long items
●
Press the unlocking button
›››
Fig. 126
1
and fold the tailboard forward
›
›
›
.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Insert the long objects through the tail-
boar
d fr
om the luggage compartment.
●
Secure the objects with the seat belt firmly.
●
Close the tailgate.
Closing the tailboard for long items
●
Lift the seat back and press it firmly into the
lock until it engages correctly
›››
.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the tail-
board f
or long items is lowered or lifted
without due care and attention.
●
Never lower or lift the tailboard while
driving.
●
Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
raising the tailboard.
●
When lowering or lifting the tailboard,
keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
body parts out of its path.
●
When the tailboard is lowered or is not
properly engaged nobody else can travel
in the corresponding seats, particularly
children.
144
Transport and practical equipment
Net partition*
Unf
ol
ding and folding the net parti-
tion
Fig. 127
Deploying the net partition.
Fig. 128
Folding in the net partition.
Before fitting the net partition in the vehicle it
must be unf
ol
ded.
Fold out the net partition
Take out the partition net from the corre-
sponding bag and unroll it.
Extend the cross rods
›››
Fig. 127
1
and
2
of
the net in the dir
ection of the arr
ows until it
“clicks”.
Folding in the net partition
●
Press on the release button
›››
Fig. 128
1
and bend the cross rod in the direction of the
arr
o
w with the button pressed.
●
Press on the release button
›››
Fig. 128
2
and bend the cross rod in the direction of the
arr
o
w with the button pressed.
●
Fold in the net partition and store it in its
bag.
●
Store the net partition safely in the vehicle.
Using the net partition
Fig. 129
Net partition fitted.
The purpose of the net partition is to prevent
the it
ems in the boot fr
om moving into the
cabin, e.g. in the event of sudden braking.
Fitting the net partition
The partition net can be fitted behind the rear
seat or, depending on the features, behind
the front seats with the second row of seats
lowered.
●
If required, remove the rear shelf
›››
page 138.
●
Folding out the net partition
›››
page 145.
●
Secure the net partition in the left housing
of the roof
›››
Fig. 129
A
. Make sure to move
the cr
oss r
od down beyond the upper posi-
tion.
»
145
Operation
●
Hook in the net partition on the r
ear right
-
hand side roof housing by pressing on the rod
›››
Fig. 129
A
.
●
Secure two hooks of the partition net to the
f
ast
ening rings of the boot
›››
Fig. 129
B
and
tight
en the str
aps firmly.
Removing the net partition
●
If required, remove the rear shelf
›››
page 138.
●
Loosen the straps from the net partition.
●
Release the net hooks from the fastening
rings
›››
Fig. 129
B
.
●
Unhook the net partition on the right-hand
side r
oof support
›
››
Fig. 129
A
by pressing
on the r
od.
●
Unhook the net partition fr
om the left-hand
side roof housing.
●
Fold in the net partition
›››
page 145.
●
If required, fit the rear shelf
›››
page 138.
WARNING
In order to ensure the proper functioning of
the luggage restr
aint systems (backrests
together with the net partition), place the
second row of seats in their rearmost posi-
tion to avoid the possibility of the load on
top moving forward. Risk to vehicle occu-
pants.
WARNING
During a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre
, or in the event of an accident, ob-
jects could be flung though the interior and
cause serious or fatal injuries.
●
Check whether the cross rods are cor-
rectly engaged.
●
Always secure objects, even when the
net partition is properly assembled.
●
There should be nobody behind the net
partition when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
If the net partition is secured incorrectly or
to incorr
ect points, this may damage the
vehicle.
Roof carrier*
Intr
oduction
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
mise aer
odynamics. F
or this reason, cross
bars or conventional roof carrier systems
cannot be secured to the roof water drains.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems
can be used.
Cases in which cross bars and the roof
carrier system should be disassembled.
●
When they are not used.
●
When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
●
When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
mum height, for example, in some garages.
WARNING
●
Alw
ays secure the load properly using
belts or retaining straps that are suitable
and in a good condition.
●
Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a
negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-
tre of gravity and driving performance.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
CAUTION
●
Remo
ve the cross bars and the roof carri-
er system before entering a car wash.
●
Vehicle height is increased by the instal-
lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system
and the load secured on them. For this pur-
pose, check that your vehicle's height does
not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-
ple, for underpasses or for entering garage
doors.
146
Transport and practical equipment
●
Cross bars, the r
oof carrier system and
the load secured on them should not inter-
fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path
of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.
●
On opening the rear lid make sure that it
does not knock into the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
When cross bars and a roof carrier system
ar
e inst
alled, the increased air resistance
means that the vehicle uses more fuel.
Securing the crossbars and the
r
oof carrier syst
em
Fig. 130
Attachment points for the roof railings
f
or the r
oof carrier system.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of
special r
oof carrier syst
ems. For safety rea-
sons, special fixtures must be used to safely
transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards
or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories
can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof
carrier system properly. Always take the as-
sembly instructions that come with the cross-
bars and the roof carrier system in question
into account.
The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-
ings. The distance between crossbars
›››
Fig. 130
A
should be between 75 and 90
cm and the dist
ance betw
een the crossbars
and the brackets of the roof railings
B
must
be 15 cm.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars and the roof carrier syst
em may cause
the whole system to detach from the roof
and cause an accident and injuries.
●
Always take the manufacturer assembly
instructions into account.
●
Check threaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them af-
ter you have travelled a short distance.
When making long trips, check the threa-
ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.
●
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
roof carrier system.
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that
come with the crossbars and the r
oof carri-
er system carefully and keep them in the
vehicle.
Loading the roof carrier system
The load can only be secured if the crossbars
and the roof carrier syst
em are properly in-
stalled
›››
.
Maximum authorised car
go on the r
oof
The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.
This figure comes from the combined weight
of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load
itself on the roof
›››
.
Al
w
ays check the weight of the roof carrier
system, the cross bars and the weight of the
load to be transported and weigh them if
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
thorised roof load.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
with a lower weight rating, you will not be
able to carry the maximum authorised roof
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-
mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is
listed in the fitting instructions.
»
147
Operation
Distributing a load
Distribut
e l
oads uniformly and secure them
correctly
›››
.
Check att
achments
Once the cr
oss bars and roof carrier system
have been installed, check the bolted con-
nections and attachments after a short jour-
ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-
cy.
WARNING
●
Nev
er exceed the maximum authorised
load on the roof and on the axles or the ve-
hicle's maximum authorised weight.
●
Never exceed the load capacity of the
cross bars and the roof carrier system,
even if the maximum authorised roof load
has not been reached.
●
Secure heavy items as far forward as
possible and distribute the vehicle load
uniformly.
WARNING
If the load is loose or not secured, it could
fall fr
om the roof carrier system or cause
accidents and injuries.
●
Always use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition.
Storage compartment
Intr
oduction
Use the storage compartments only for small
or light items.
The
Apple® iPod adapter or the USB port
may be housed in the storage compartment
of the front centre armrest.
WARNING
Objects inside the vehicle that are not se-
cured coul
d be thrown across the cabin in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
vring. This may cause severe injuries as
well as loss of control of the vehicle.
●
Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or
heavy items in open storage compartments
of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the
cover behind the rear seats, or inside
pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-
cle.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi-
cult the use of the pedals. This may cause
l
oss of control of the vehicle and increases
the risk of severe injuries.
●
Make sure that nothing prevents you from
using the pedals at any time.
●
Alw
ays secure the mat in the footwell.
●
Never place other mats or other type of
covers on the factory-fitted mat.
●
Ensure that no objects can fall into the
driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
●
When the vehicle is stationary, remove
the objects in the footwell.
WARNING
If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they
might be damaged or lit inadv
er
tently. This
could lead to severe burns and damage to
the vehicle.
●
Before moving a seat, make sure there
are no lighters in the moving part area of
the vehicle.
●
Before closing a storage compartment,
make sure there are no lighters in the clos-
ing area.
●
Never leave a lighter inside a storage
compartment or any other surface of the
vehicle as it could ignite due to the high
temperatures on such surfaces, particular-
ly during the summer.
CAUTION
●
Do not stor
e heat- or cold-sensitive ob-
jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat
and cold could damage them or render
them useless.
148
Transport and practical equipment
●
Objects made fr
om transparent materi-
als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,
magnifying glasses or transparent suction
pads stuck to the windows can concentrate
sunlight and damage the vehicle.
storage compartment on the driv-
er's side
Fig. 131
On the driver side: storage compart-
ment.
Opening: Pull the handl
e
›
››
Fig. 131.
Closing: Press the cover upwards until it clicks
into place.
Note
There might be a support for memory cards
on the inside of the cov
er.
Glove compartment
Fig. 132
On the front passenger side: glove
compartment cl
osed.
Fig. 133 On the front passenger side: glove
compartment open.
Key to the Fig. 132:
Gl
o
ve compartment
Storage net
Key to the Fig. 133:
1
2
Air diffuser regulator
Support f
or memory car
ds
CD player and card reader
On-board documentation
Opening and closing the glove compart-
ment
Opening: Pull the handle
›››
Fig. 132 and
open the glove compartment.
Closing: Press the glove compartment up-
wards.
Glove compartment cooling
With the AC on, cool air can be directed to-
wards the inside of the compartment. Turn
the air vent to open and close it.
WARNING
If the glove compartment is left open, the
risk of causing sev
ere injuries in the event
of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-
vring increases.
●
Always keep the glove compartment
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
For structural reasons, some vehicle ver-
sions will have gaps behind the gl
ove com-
partment (for instance, behind the com-
partment for on-board documentation) into
which small objects may fall. This could
»
1
2
3
4
149
Operation
lead to strange noises and damage to the
vehicl
e. You should therefore not keep very
small objects in the glove compartment.
Storage compartment in the front
central armr
est
Fig. 134 In the front central armrest: storage
compartment.
Opening: Giv
en the case
, press the unlock
button and raise the centre armrest in the di-
rection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 134.
Closing: Lower the armrest.
WARNING
The centre armrest may obstruct the driv-
er's arm mo
vements, which could cause an
accident and severe injuries.
●
Keep the st
orage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Storage compartment in the roof
console (gl
asses case)
Fig. 135 On the roof console: glasses case.
Opening: Pr
ess and r
elease the button
›››
Fig. 135.
Closing: Press the cover upwards until it clicks
into place.
Note
For the surveillance of the cabin to work
correctly, the st
orage compartments must
be closed when locking the vehicle
›››
page 92.
Folding table*
Fig. 136
Front left seat: folding table.
Fig. 137
Front left seat: folding table with
drinks hol
der
.
Depending on the model version, at the rear
of the fr
ont seats, ther
e may be “plane-style”
folding tables for passengers in the rear
seats.
150
Transport and practical equipment
Opening the folding table
●
Pull the table up, in the direction of the ar-
r
o
w, until it catches
›››
Fig. 136.
Folding the table or adjusting its inclina-
tion
The foldable table can be used at different
inclinations.
●
Press the unlocking lever under the table
›››
Fig. 137
1
and keep it that way.
●
Adjust: Adjust the inclination of the t
abl
e by
pressing the lever.
●
Fold: Push the table downwards while
pressing the lever.
Drink holder
A drink holder is built into the folding table
2
.
With the f
ol
dable table extended, remove the
drink holder
2
following the direction of the
arr
o
w. To store the drink holder, insert it into
the table against the direction of the arrow.
WARNING
The table must always be closed while
driving to decr
ease the risk of injuries.
Storage compartment under front
seats*
Fig. 138
Drawer under the front seat
Opening: Pr
ess the t
ab on the drawer handle
and take the drawer out.
Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until
it engages.
WARNING
If the drawer is left open, it could prevent
use of the pedals. This may cause serious
accidents and injuries.
●
Al
ways keep the drawer closed while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer
and any objects in it could fall into the driv-
er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.
CAUTION
The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.
Drink holder
Fig. 139 In the front part of the centre console:
cup hol
der (v
ariant 1);
cup holder (variant
2).
»
151
Operation
Fig. 140 In the rear central armrest: drinks
holder
.
The storage compartments of the driver and
passenger doors cont
ain a bottl
e holder.
The folding tables of the front seats contain
more bottle holders
›››
page 150.
Depending on the features, there are two
drink holders in the front part of the centre
console
›››
Fig. 139.
Open and close the drink holder (variant 1)
Opening: Move the lid backwards.
Closing: Move the lid forwards.
Adjust the drink holder (variant 1)
To adapt the drink holder to the size of the
container, press the corresponding button
›››
Fig. 139
1
. The fastening ring
2
opens.
When you are not using the drink holder any
mor
e
, press the corresponding ring
2
in the
opposit
e dir
ection to the arrow until it locks.
Drinks holder in the rear central armrest
Use: Lower the centre armrest.
When the drink holder is no longer in use, lift
the armrest again.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bottle holders may
cause injuries.
●
Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.
In the ev
ent of sudden braking or an acci-
dent while driving, hot beverages in the
bottle holders might spill and cause burns.
●
Ensure that no bottles or other objects
are dropped in the driver footwell while
driving, as they could get under the pedals
and obstruct their working.
●
Never place glasses, food or other heavy
objects drink holders. These heavy objects
may be thrown across the cabin in the
event of an accident and cause serious in-
juries.
WARNING
Closed bottles may explode inside the ve-
hicle due t
o cold or heat.
●
Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle
if the temperature inside is very high or very
low.
CAUTION
Do not leave open cans in the drink holders
when the vehicl
e is in motion. If the drink is
spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may
damage the vehicle and its electrical sys-
tem.
Note
The inside elements of the drink holders
can be extr
acted for cleaning.
Other object holders
There are hangers on the struts of the doors
and the r
ear
.
WARNING
Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's
visibility, which may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries.
●
Al
ways hang clothes from hangers in
such a way that the driver's visibility is not
affected.
●
Only hang light pieces of clothing from
the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave
heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets
of these pieces of clothing.
●
Do not use clothes hangers to hang up
the clothing, as this could interfere with the
function of the head-protection airbags.
152
Transport and practical equipment
CAUTION
Each hanger is designed for a maximum
load of 2.5 k
g.
Power sockets
Vehicl
e power sockets
Fig. 141
1
12 volt socket.
2
USB socket on
the r
ear part of the centr
e console.
Fig. 142 On the left side of the luggage com-
partment: 230 v
olt po
wer socket.
You can find 12 volt sockets on the front cen-
tr
e consol
e, in the rear part of the centre con-
sole (between the front seats) and in the lug-
gage compartment.
●
Lift the power socket cover
›››
Fig. 141
1
.
●
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
int
o the po
wer socket.
Maximum power consumption
Power socket
Maximum power con-
sumption
12 Volts 120 Watts
230 Volts 150 watts (300 watt peaks)
Electrical equipment can be connected to
the 12 v
olt po
wer socket.
Make sure that the maximum power con-
sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex-
ceeded. The power consumption of devices is
shown on the model plate.
When connecting two or more electrical de-
vices at the same time, make sure that their
total consumption never exceeds 190 watts
›››
.
USB po
w
er sockets
Depending on the equipment and the coun-
try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-
tions exclusively for charging or as a power
socket.
These USB ports are located in the rear part
of the centre console, between the front
seats
›››
Fig. 141
2
. These connectors can
w
ork at a maximum po
wer of up to 10.5 W per
port.
They are not intended for file playback.
230 volt power socket*
With the engine running, the power socket
›››
Fig. 142 activates automatically as soon
as a connector is plugged in. If there is
enough power available, the socket can still
be used while the engine is off
›››
Connect an electrical device: Open the co
v-
er and insert the plug int
o the power socket
as far as possible to unlock the built-in child
lock. The socket only supplies power once
the child lock is unlocked.
LED on the power socket
Steady green
light:
The childproof lock is unlocked.
The socket is ready to operate.
Flashing green
light:
The ignition is switched off, but
there is enough po
wer available
to continue supplying the socket
with current for a maximum of 10
minutes. If the connector is un-
plugged before this time elap-
ses, the socket is disconnected
and cannot be used again until
the ignition is switched on again.
»
153
Operation
LED on the power socket
Flashing red
light:
There is an anomaly, e.g. dis-
connection due to a curr
ent
surge or overheating.
Disconnection due to overheating
When the temper
ature exceeds a certain val-
ue, the 230 volt socket inverter is automati-
cally disconnected. The disconnection pre-
vents overheating when the power consump-
tion of the connected devices is excessive or
the ambient temperature is very high. The
230-volt power supply can be used once
again after a cooling time. First unplug the
connector of the connected device and then
plug it back in again. This prevents the elec-
trical device from being switched on again if
this is not wanted.
WARNING
The electrical system is under high voltage!
●
Do not spill liquids onto the socket.
●
Do not plug adapters or extension cords
into the 230 v
olt power socket. Otherwise,
the integrated child lock will be unlocked
and the power socket will operate.
●
Do not insert conductive objects (a knit-
ting needle, for example) into the 230 volt
power socket.
WARNING
The power socket works only when the igni-
tion is on. Improper use may cause serious
injury or e
ven fire. Children should there-
fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if
the button is also left behind. Otherwise
there is a possibility that they may be in-
jured.
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to
avoid damaging the sock
ets.
CAUTION
●
230 volt po
wer socket:
–
Do not leave devices or connectors
that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer)
hanging directly from the power sock-
et.
–
Do not connect neon lamps.
–
Only connect devices to the socket if
the device and socket voltage match.
–
The built-in overload disconnect func-
tion prevents any electrical devices
that require a high start-up current
from turning on. In this case, unplug the
electrical device's power supply and
re-try the connection after about 10
seconds.
Note
●
The use of electrical appliances with the
engine s
witched off will cause a battery
discharge.
●
Should the connected appliance over-
heat, immediately switch it off and discon-
nect it from the socket.
●
Before switching the ignition on or off, un-
plug the appliances from the USB ports to
protect them from any damage caused by
fluctuations in voltage.
●
Some appliances may not work properly
when connected to the 230 volt sockets
due to a lack of power (watts).
154
Air conditioning
Air conditioning
Heating, v
entil
ation and
cooling
Introduction
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, sever-
al systems may hav
e been fitted:
●
The manual air conditioning system
heats, cools and dehumidifies the air.
●
The Climatronic
is an automatic air condi-
tioner that heats, cools and dehumidifies the
air.
With the Climatronic’s automatic mode it is
possible to automatically regulate the air
temperature, distribution and flow.
The air conditioning system is more effective
if the vehicle's interior is kept closed. When a
lot of heat builds up inside the vehicle, venti-
lation can speed up the cooling process.
To switch a specific function on, press the ap-
propriate button. Press the button again to
switch off the function.
The illuminated LEDs next to the buttons indi-
cate that the function is switched on.
In the air conditioning settings in the infotain-
ment system, the yellow function buttons in-
dicate that the function is switched on
›››
page 159.
Refrigerated glove box
When the vent is open, cold air flows into the
glove box. If the inside of the vehicle is cooled
by the air conditioning system, the cold air
can be directed towards the inside of the
glove box.
Dust and pollen filter
The dust and pollen filter with its activated
charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier
against impurities in the air taken into the ve-
hicle interior.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed
regularly so that air conditioner performance
is not adversely affected.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to
use in areas with very high levels of air pollu-
tion, the filter must be changed more fre-
quently than stated in the Service Schedule.
Economic use of the air conditioning
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compressor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption.
The air conditioner operates most effectively
with the windows and the panoramic sliding
sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has
heated up after standing in the sun for some
time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-
ly by opening the windows and the panoram-
ic sliding sunroof briefly.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows in-
creases the risk of serious accidents.
●
Al
ways ensure that all windows are free
of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-
ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-
erything outside.
●
Only drive when you have good visibility.
●
Always ensure that you use the air condi-
tioning, heater or rear window heating to
maintain good visibility to the outside.
●
Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system is
switched off and air recirculation mode
switched on, the windows can mist over
very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it
is not required.
CAUTION
●
To r
eplace the pollen filter, always visit a
service centre.
●
Switch the climate control or air condi-
tioner off if you think it may be broken. This
will avoid additional damage. Have the cli-
mate control or air conditioning checked
by a specialised workshop.
»
155
Operation
●
Repairs t
o the climate control or air con-
ditioning require specialist knowledge and
special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT Official Service.
Note
●
When the cooling syst
em is t
urned off, air
coming from the outside will not be dried.
To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT
recommends leaving the cooling system
(compressor) turned on. To do this, press
the
button. The button lamp should
light up.
●
The maximum heat output requir
ed to de-
frost windows as quickly as possible is only
available when the engine has reached its
normal running temperature.
●
Keep the air intake slots in front of the
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to
ensure heating and cooling are not im-
paired, and to prevent the windows from
misting over.
●
The air from the vents flows through the
vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in
the luggage compartment designed for this
purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-
structing these slots with any kind of ob-
ject.
●
Do not smoke whil
e air recirculation
mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air
conditioning system leaves residue on the
evaporator, producing a permanent un-
pleasant odour.
●
It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
ing at least once a month, to lubricate the
system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
crease in the cooling capacity is detected,
a Technical Service should be consulted to
check the system.
●
When the engine is under extreme strain,
switch off the compressor for a moment.
Climatronic* controls and functions
Fig. 143 In the centre console: Climatronic con-
trol
s.
Some functions and buttons, as well as the
air conditioning f
or the r
ear seats, are only
available depending on the vehicle equip-
ment.
Sensors fields
1
and
2
The temperature of the right and left sides
can be adjust
ed separ
ately using the adjust-
ers. The selected temperature is shown on
the display of the climate control panel.
156
Air conditioning
To set the Climatronic temperature to +22 °C
(+7
2 °F), the centr
e of the touch control must
be pressed briefly. To adjust the maximum
cooling or heating power, briefly press and
hold either end of the touch control (red or
blue zone).
The set air temperature is kept constant. Tem-
perature and the amount and distribution of
air are controlled automatically. Automatic
mode is switched off when the fan power is
changed manually.
The fan power in automatic mode can be se-
lected using the air conditioning profile in the
air conditioning settings of the infotainment
system
›››
page 159 .
Cooling mode
Press the button to switch on or off the cool-
ing system.
The cooling mode cools and dehumidifies the
air.
Blower
Adjust the fan power.
Synchronisation
Active for all seats, the temperatures set for
the driver's seat.
Air distribution
●
Upper arrow: Direct the air towards the
windscreen.
●
Central arrow: Directs air to the upper
body.
●
Lower arrow: Direct the air towards the
footwell.
Defrost/demist function
The Climatronic’s defrost function removes
ice and fog from the windscreen. The air is
dehumidified and the fan is set high.
Infotainment System
Open the air conditioning settings in the info-
tainment system
›››
page 159.
The climate control operation and settings
menu will be displayed in the infotainment
system screen.
Heated rear window
Switches the heated rear window on and off.
This only works when the engine is running
and switches off automatically after a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
It should be switched off as soon as the glass
is demisted. By saving electrical power you
can also save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish-
ed.
Air recirculation
Switches the air recirculation mode on and
off
›››
page 160
Seat heating
Switches seat heating on and off
›››
page 161
Switching off
Switch off the air conditioning system.
Auxiliary heating
Switch the auxiliary heater on or off
›››
page 164.
Air Conditioning settings in Infotainment
Open the auxiliary heater menu in the air
conditioning settings in the infotainment sys-
tem
›››
page 164.
The Air Care Climatronic allergen filter can
reduce the amount of harmful substances
that get inside, including allergens
›››
page 160.
»
157
Operation
Windscreen heating
S
wit
ches the heated windscreen on and off
with the engine running
›››
page 162.
Steering wheel heating
Activate or deactivate steering wheel heating
›››
page 162.
Manual air conditioning controls
Fig. 144 In the centre console: manual air condi-
tioning control
s.
Cooling mode
Pr
ess the button to switch on or off the cool-
ing system.
Temperature
1
Turn the control to adjust the temperature.
Bl
o
wer
Turning the regulator
2
sets the fan power.
At l
e
vel 0 the fan and manual air conditioning
are disconnected. Level 6 is the maximum.
Air distribution / / / /
Turning regulator
3
distributes the air to the
desir
ed z
one:
The airflow is directed towards the chest
The airflow is directed towards the chest
and the footwell area.
The airflow is directed towards the foot-
well.
The airflow is directed towards the wind-
screen and the footwell area.
Defrost/demist function
When control
3
is in position the air fl
o
w is
directed at the windscreen and air recircula-
tion is disconnected automatically or not ac-
tivated. Increase the fan power to clear the
windscreen of condensation as soon as pos-
sible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling sys-
tem will automatically switch on.
Maximum cooling power
When the control is in position air recir-
culation and the cooling system are connec-
ted automatically and the air flow is automat-
ically adjusted to position .
158
Air conditioning
Heated rear window
This only w
orks when the engine is running
and s
witches off automatically after a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
It should be switched off as soon as the glass
is demisted. By saving electrical power you
can also save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish-
ed.
Air recirculation
›››
page 160
Seat heating
›››
page 161
Switching off
Press button or manually set the fan to .
Setting the temperature on the in-
fotainment system
The air conditioning settings in the infotain-
ment syst
em ar
e available in the Climatronic.
Depending on the vehicle equipment.
Open the air conditioner menu
●
Press the button of the Climatronic
control panel.
The current air conditioning settings are dis-
played at the top of the screen. The current
air conditioning settings are displayed at the
top of the screen.
Air conditioning operating modes
The air conditioning operating modes are
colour coded:
●
Blue: Cooling.
●
Red: Heating.
General settings submenu
Sets the following functions:
●
Automatic air recirculation mode
›››
page 160.
●
Supplementary heater
›››
page 164.
●
Automatic heated windscreen
›››
page 162.
Presets submenu
Sets the automatic or manual mode of the
cooling system or switches the air condition-
ing off.
Air conditioning profile
Adjust the power of the fan in AUTO mode.
Rear controls
Fig. 145 In the rear part of the centre console:
control
s for the rear seats.
Temperature
●
Press buttons
1
and
2
›
›
›
Fig. 145 to ad-
just the temperature.
Setting the temperature on the infotain-
ment system
●
Open the air conditioning settings in the in-
fotainment system.
●
Press the function button for the rear seat.
●
Press the function buttons to set the tem-
perature.
Note
When function button is active on the In-
f
otainment System, the rear controls do not
work.
159
Operation
Air vents
To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-
lation in the v
ehicle interior, the air vents must
remain open.
●
Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in the
required direction to open and close the air
vents. When the thumbwheel is in the posi-
tion, the corresponding air vent is closed.
●
Change the air direction using the ventila-
tion grille lever.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air
vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in
the rear area of the passenger compartment.
Note
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen-
sitive ob
jects should never be placed in
front of the air outlets as they may be dam-
aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient
air fr
om ent
ering the interior.
For safety reasons, air recirculation is switch-
ed off in the following situations:
●
When the button is pressed or the air
distributor is turned to .
●
When a sensor detects that the vehicle's
windows could mist up.
Switching the manual air recirculation
mode on and off
●
Press the button to connect or discon-
nect manual air recirculation.
Climatronic automatic air recirculation
mode
With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-
tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-
terior is enabled. If the system detects a high
concentration of hazardous substances in the
ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically. When the level of impurities
drops to within a normal range, recirculation
mode is switched off.
The system is unable to detect unpleasant
smells.
The air recirculation will not connect auto-
matically in versions without humidity sensor
and in the following external conditions:
●
The outside temperature is lower than +3°C
(+38°F).
●
The cooling system is switched off and the
outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).
●
The cooling system is switched off, the out-
side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and
the windscreen wipers are switched on.
Air Care Climatronic with allergen filter
The Air Care Climatronic allergen filter can
reduce the amount of harmful substances, in-
cluding allergens, that get inside.
If the Air Care option is switched on, the air
conditioning’s air recirculation mode is maxi-
mised until there is a risk of the windows mist-
ing up due to humidity inside the vehicle and
the outside temperature. The air recirculation
mode is automatically regulated and incor-
porates an automatic setting to prevent the
vehicle occupants suffering from fatigue.
●
Open the air conditioning settings in the in-
fotainment system
›››
page 159.
●
Switch the Air Care function on or off using
active Air Care.
WARNING
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and
reduce driv
er concentration possibly re-
sulting in a serious accident.
●
Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
use the air recirculation for long periods of
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not
be refreshed.
●
If the cooling system is switched off and
air recirculation mode switched on, the
windows can mist over very quickly, con-
siderably limiting visibility.
160
Air conditioning
CAUTION
Do not smoke when air recirculation is
swit
ched on in vehicles with an air condi-
tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the
cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-
vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and
pollen filter, leading to a permanently un-
pleasant smell.
Note
●
Climatronic: air r
ecirculation mode is ac-
tivated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleas-
ant odours from entering the vehicle interi-
or when it is in reverse and while the auto-
matic windscreen wiper is working.
●
When the outside temperature is very
high, selecting manual air recirculation
mode for a short period refreshes the vehi-
cle interior more quickly.
Seat heating*
Fig. 146
In the centre console: front seat heat-
ing s
wit
ches.
Fig. 147 In the rear part of the centre console:
rear seats heating s
witch.
With the engine running, the front seats and
side rear seats can be el
ectrically heated to
three power levels.
Seat heating power levels
Seat heating operating modes are colour co-
ded. At the highest heating level, all three
LEDs light up.
Control seat heating
●
Press buttons or on the control panel
t
o turn on the seat heating as high as possi-
ble.
●
Press buttons or repeatedly to adjust it
to the required level.
●
To turn off the seat heating, press button
or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.
When the engine is started again within ap-
proximately 10 minutes, the most recently set
heating level for the driver's seat is switched
on automatically.
Cases in which the heat seating should
not be switched on
Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the
following conditions are met:
●
If the seat is occupied by a person with limi-
ted pain or temperature perceptions
›››
.
●
The seat is not occupied.
●
The seat has a cover.
●
A child seat has been installed on the seat.
●
The seat cushion is wet or damp.
●
The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-
er than +25°C (7
7°F).
WARNING
People who cannot perceive pain or tem-
perat
ure because of medications, paralysis
or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have
a limited perception of these, may suffer
burns to the back, buttocks or legs when
using seat heating.
●
People with limited pain and temperature
thresholds must never use seat heating.
●
If an abnormality in the device's temper-
ature control is detected, have it checked
by a specialist workshop.
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can
adversely aff
ect the operation of the seat
heating, increasing the risk of burns.
»
161
Operation
●
Make sur
e the seat cushion is dry prior to
using the seat heater.
●
Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.
●
Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
on the seat.
●
Do not spill liquid on the seat.
CAUTION
●
T
o av
oid damaging the heating elements
of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on
the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single
point on the seat cushion or backrest.
●
Liquids, sharps objects and insulating
materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can
damage the seat heating.
●
If the seat heating generates any kind of
odour, it must be switched off immediately
and it should be checked by a specialist
service centre.
●
If you have replaced the original uphols-
tery with another material, the seat heating
may overheat or its operation may be limi-
ted.
For the sake of the environment
To save fuel, turn off the seat heating as
soon as possible
.
Steering wheel heating*
Steering wheel heating works only with the
engine running.
Steering wheel heating l
evels
The selected flywheel heating level will be
displayed on the instrument panel display.
Level control is carried out using the button
on the multifunction steering wheel:
●
Brief press (less than 1 second): the heating
is switched on at maximum level. Press the
steering wheel button repeatedly until the
desired level is adjusted. To switch off steer-
ing wheel heating, press the steering wheel
button repeatedly until the heated steering
wheel OFF icon is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster.
●
Long press (more than 1 second): the heat-
ing is s
witched off directly from the level that
is currently operating. If the steering wheel
button is pressed again for a long period, the
heating is switched on directly at the last lev-
el saved before switching off.
Automatic off
The steering wheel heating will be switched
off automatically when any of the following
conditions are met:
●
Power consumption is too high.
●
The steering wheel heating system is faulty.
●
If the ignition is switched off.
Windscreen heating*
Fig. 148
Windscreen humidity and tempera-
t
ur
e sensor.
The brake servo works only when the engine
is running.
The heat
ed windscr
een is comprised of a set
of heated wires placed between the layers of
the windscreen which, when electric current
is supplied to them, heat up and cause the
temperature of the glass to rise.
Its function is to assist the air-conditioning
system to prevent the windscreen from mist-
ing up or to demist it faster if it does mist up.
The system can be switched on manually or
automatically.
162
Air conditioning
Manual activation
●
Press the button in the air conditioning
settings in the inf
ot
ainment system.
The heated windscreen is switched off based
on the outside temperature and, in any case,
after approximately 8 minutes.
Automatic activation
The heated windscreen switches on automat-
ically when a window is at risk of misting up.
●
Open the air conditioning settings in the in-
fotainment system
›››
page 159.
●
Switch the automatic heated windscreen
on or off.
The automatic heated windscreen is switch-
ed on, even when the air conditioning is
switched off.
Thermal windscreen using the defrost
function
If the defrost function is switched on and a
sensor detects that the windscreen could
mist up, the heated windscreen switches on.
When does the heated windscreen switch
off?
The heated windscreen switches off when
one of the following conditions is met:
●
Power consumption is too high.
●
The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
●
If the preset time has elapsed.
Troubleshooting
Cooling mode cannot be switched on or
operat
es in a limited way
The cooling mode works only with the engine
running and if the ambient temperature is
above +3 °C (+38 °F). When the engine is very
hot, the cooling mode is deactivated.
●
Switch on the fan.
●
Check the air conditioning fuse
››
›
page 59.
●
Dust and pollen filter
●
If the fault continues, consult a specialised
workshop.
The heating and fresh air system cannot
be switched on or operates in a limited
way
●
The heating and fresh air system and the
defrost function operate best when the en-
gine is hot.
●
If the fault continues, consult a specialised
workshop.
The windows are misted up
Windows mist up when they are cooler than
the ambient temperature and the air is very
damp. Cold air can absorb less moisture than
hot air, so the windows mist up more often in
cold weather.
●
The air vent in front of the windscreen
keeps it free of ice, snow and leaves, which
improves the performance of the heating and
cooling systems.
●
The air grooves located at the rear of the
luggage compartment must be kept clear to
allow the air to circulate through the vehicle
from front to back.
●
Switch on the demist function
›››
page 157,
›››
page 158.
The temperature unit is not correct
Use the infotainment system to change the
units for all of the vehicle's temperature dis-
plays.
Water or water vapour under the vehicle
When the outside air is very humid and the
ambient temperature is high, condensation
may drip from the evaporator of the cooling
system, which can form a puddle under the
vehicle. This is completely normal and is no
indication of a leak.
If the outside air is very humid and the ambi-
ent temperature is low, the auxiliary heating
»
163
Operation
can evaporate the condensation. In this case,
st
eam may come out fr
om under the vehicle.
This does not mean that the vehicle has bro-
ken down.
Auxiliary heating and venti-
lation*
Introduction
With the auxiliary heating and ventilation, it is
possibl
e t
o heat the vehicle interior in winter
and ventilate it in summer. It can also be used
to demist the windscreen and remove ice or
even a thin layer of snow. The auxiliary heat-
ing is powered by fuel from the vehicle’s tank
and can even continue to operate when the
ignition is switched off. The auxiliary ventila-
tion is powered by the 12-volt vehicle battery.
The auxiliary heating can be controlled by
the SEAT CONNECT mobile app or through
the MySEAT website.
The auxiliary heater can be switched on using
the fast heating button of the air conditioning
controls, with the remote control or by previ-
ously programming a departure time in the
auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment sys-
tem.
If the outside temperature is very high, the ve-
hicle interior can be ventilated with the en-
gine off using the auxiliary heater.
Auxiliary heating exhaust system
The exhaust gases generated by the auxiliary
heater are removed via an exhaust pipe fitted
underneath the vehicle. This exhaust pipe
must not be blocked by snow, mud or any-
thing else.
WARNING
The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain
carbon monoxide
, an odourless and colour-
less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause
people to lose consciousness. It can also
cause death.
●
Never switch on the auxiliary heater or
leave it running in enclosed spaces or
areas with no ventilation.
●
Never programme the auxiliary heater so
that it switches itself on and is running in an
enclosed space or an area with no ventila-
tion.
WARNING
The components of the auxiliary heater are
extr
emely hot and could cause a fire.
●
Always park your vehicle so that no part
of the exhaust system can come in contact
with easily flammable materials that might
be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.
CAUTION
Never place food, medicines or other tem-
perat
ure-sensitive objects close to the air
vents. Food, medicines and other objects
sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged
or made unsuitable for use by the air com-
ing from the vents.
Switching the auxiliary heater and
ventil
ation on and off
The auxiliary heating can operate with the ig-
nition s
wit
ched on and off.
Open the Auxiliary heater menu
●
Open the air conditioning settings in the in-
fotainment system.
●
Press the function button.
Switching on the auxiliary heater
The auxiliary heating can be switched off in
the following ways:
●
Press the immediate heat button on the
air conditioning controls.
●
OR: Press button on the remote control
›››
page 166.
●
OR: Set the departure time
›››
page 165.
●
OR: Using the App or MySEAT website.
164
Air conditioning
If the 12-volt vehicle battery is low on charge
or the t
ank is empt
y, the auxiliary heating
cannot be switched on.
Switch off the auxiliary heating manually
The auxiliary heater can be switched off
manually in the following ways:
●
Press the immediate heat button on the
air conditioning controls.
●
OR: Press button on the remote control.
●
OR: Using the SEAT CONNECT mobile app
or the MySEAT website.
The auxiliary heater switches off automat-
ically
●
At the scheduled departure time or the end
of the set operating period
›››
page 165.
●
If the yellow indicator lamp (fuel gauge)
lights up.
●
If the 12-volt battery's charge level drops
sharply.
●
The auxiliary heating can be turned off im-
mediately with the on/off button.
To burn the remaining fuel in the auxiliary
heating, it continues to operate briefly once it
has been turned off manually or automatical-
ly.
Using the auxiliary heating as a supple-
mentary heater
If the engine has been started, the auxiliary
heating can continue to operate as a supple-
mentary heating system. The following condi-
tion must be met for this to happen:
●
The Automatic supplementary heater
function can be switched on in the infotain-
ment system's air conditioning settings.
●
The outside temperature is lower than +5
°C (+41 °F).
The supplementary heating system switches
off again automatically after a while.
Note
●
Noises will be heard whil
e the auxiliary
heater is running.
●
When the air humidity is high and the in-
side temperature low, condensation from
the heating and ventilating system may
evaporate when the auxiliary heater is
switched on. In this case, steam may be re-
leased from underneath the vehicle. This
does not mean that there is a vehicle mal-
function.
●
If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a
slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater
may be restricted if the fuel tank level is
low (just above the reserve level).
●
If the auxiliary heater is used a number of
times for a long period of time, the 12-volt
battery will lose its charge. To recharge the
battery, the v
ehicle must be driven for a
number of kilometres from time to time. As
a guideline: the journey should last approx-
imately as long as the heater was connec-
ted.
●
At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the
auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto-
matically when the engine is switched on.
The auxiliary heater is switched off again
after a certain time.
●
While the vehicle is stopped, the auxiliary
heating can be switched on up to a maxi-
mum of three consecutive times in a row
with the maximum operating duration.
Programming the auxiliary heater*
Before pr
ogramming it, check that the vehi-
cl
e's date and time are set correctly
›››
.
The auxiliary heat
er is pr
ogrammed in the
Auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment
system.
Set the operating duration of the auxiliary
heating
●
Open the Auxiliary heater menu.
●
Press the Set function button.
●
To set the operating time, press the Oper-
ating duration button.
»
165
Operation
The set operating duration is taken into ac-
count when the auxiliary heating is s
wit
ched
on using the immediate heat button or the
remote control.
The maximum duration of the auxiliary heat-
ing is 60 minutes.
Set the departure time
Activating this function only affects the heat-
ing or ventilation. The departure time must be
reactivated whenever the vehicle is started.
●
Open the Auxiliary heater menu.
●
Press the Set function button.
●
Select one of the memory spaces for a De-
parture time.
●
Press the Activate function button.
Manual air conditioning: The scheduled de-
parture time determines when the auxiliary
heating or ventilation will be switched off. The
start of the heating or ventilation process de-
pends on the programmed duration of opera-
tion.
Climatronic: The vehicle uses the program-
med departure time to automatically calcu-
late the time at which the heating or ventila-
tion process should begin to attain the set
temperature.
A departure time can be scheduled in the App
or on the MySEAT website.
Checking the programming
If a departure time is activated, the yellow
LED on the immediate heat button lights up
on the Climatronic control panel, approxi-
mately ten seconds after the ignition is
switched off.
WARNING
Never programme the auxiliary heater so
that it swit
ches itself on and is running in an
enclosed space or an area with no ventila-
tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes
contain carbon monoxide, an odourless
and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide
can cause people to lose consciousness. It
can also cause death.
Radio-operated remote control
Fig. 149
Auxiliary heating: radio-operated re-
mot
e contr
ol.
Switch on: Pr
ess the butt
on for about
one second
Switch off: Press the button for about
one second
If the buttons of the remote control are press-
ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxili-
ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of
range or when the control lamp is flashing.
Remote control LED
When the buttons are pressed, the LED of re-
mote control
›››
Fig. 149
2
gives the user a
r
ange of inf
ormation:
166
Air conditioning
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: The auxiliary heat
er has been
s
witched on using the
button.
●
In red: The auxiliary heater has been
switched off con with button .
Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: No on signal has been received.
The remote control is out of range. Move
closer to the vehicle.
●
In red: No off signal has been received. The
remote control is out of range. Move closer to
the vehicle.
It flashes irregularly
●
In green: The independent heating is
blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al-
most empty, the 12-volt battery charge is
very low or there is a fault.
It lights up or flashes steadily
●
In orange (then in green or in red): The re-
mote control battery is almost flat. However,
the on or off signal has been received.
●
In orange (then flashes green or red): The
remote control battery is almost flat. No on or
off signal has been received.
Flashes for around 5 seconds
●
In orange: The remote control battery is flat.
No on or off signal has been received.
Range
The range of the remote control is a few hun-
dred meters when the battery is fully charged
and under optimal conditions.
●
A distance of at least 2 m must be left be-
tween the remote control and the vehicle.
●
There should be no obstacle between the
remote control and the vehicle.
●
Secure the remote control with the chrome
pin
›››
Fig. 149
1
vertically facing upwards.
●
Do not cover the antenna.
The r
ange of the contr
ol is considerably less
in poor weather conditions, if there are build-
ings in the vicinity or if the battery is low.
Changing the remote control battery
If the indicator lamp does not come on, the
remote control's battery must be replaced.
●
Insert a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver, into
the indentation in the remote control housing,
in the direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 149.
●
With the help of the same tool, lift the lid
until the housing locking element is released.
●
Slightly move the cover in the direction of
the arrow.
●
Remove the cover.
●
To remove the battery, carefully insert a
tool like a screwdriver into the indentation
next to the battery.
●
Use the screwdriver to lift up the battery un-
til it releases from its housing.
●
Remove the old battery.
●
Insert a new battery of the same type and
make sure it clicks into place. When inserting
the battery, make sure that the polarity is cor-
rect.
●
Fit the cover onto the remote control hous-
ing.
●
Slide the cover in the direction opposite to
the arrow until it clicks into place
›››
Fig. 149.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-
ter or any other butt
on battery can cause
serious and even fatal injuries within a very
short time.
●
Always keep the remote control, keyrings
with batteries, the spare batteries, button
batteries and all other batteries over 20
mm out of reach of children.
●
If you suspect that someone may have
swallowed a battery, seek immediate med-
ical attention.
CAUTION
●
The radio fr
equency remote control con-
tains electronic components. Therefore,
avoid getting it wet and exposing it to
knocks or direct sunlight.
●
The use of inappropriate batteries may
damage the radio frequency remote
»
167
Operation
control. For this reason, always replace the
used battery with another of the same v
olt-
age, size and specifications.
For the sake of the environment
●
Pl
ease dispose of your used batt
eries
correctly and with respect for the environ-
ment.
●
The remote control battery may contain
perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions
regarding disposal.
●
Care should be taken so as not to oper-
ate the remote control unintentionally so
as to prevent the auxiliary heater being
switched on accidentally.
168
Introduction
Infotainment system
Intr
oduction
First st
eps
Introduction
Infotainment functions and settings depend
on the country and equipment
Befor
e first use
Before the first use, bear in mind the following
points, to take full advantage of the functions
and settings offered:
●
Observe the basic safety warnings
››
›
page 169.
●
Reset the Infotainment factory settings.
●
Search and store favourite radio stations on
the preset buttons so you can tune them
quickly.
●
Use only suitable audio sources and data
media.
●
Pair a mobile phone to use phone manage-
ment through the Infotainment system.
●
Use current maps for navigation.
●
Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the cor-
responding services.
Current documentation attached
For using infotainment and its components,
take into account, together with this instruc-
tion manual, the following documentation:
●
Supplements to your vehicle’s on-board
documentation.
●
Instruction Manual of the mobile phone de-
vice or audio sources.
●
Operating instructions for data media and
external players.
●
Manuals for the Infotainment accessories
subsequently installed or used additionally.
●
Description of services when running SEAT
CONNECT services.
Safety instructions
Some function areas may include links to
thir
d-part
y websites. SEAT, S.A. is not the
owner of the third-party websites accessible
through the links, and assumes no liability for
their content.
Some function areas may include outside in-
formation from third-party providers. SEAT,
S.A. is not responsible for such information
being correct, up-to-date or complete, or for
ensuring it does not infringe the rights of third
parties.
Radio stations and owners of data media and
audio sources are responsible for the infor-
mation they transmit.
Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall
buildings, mountains or due to the operation
of other electrical devices, such as chargers,
can also interfere with the reception of the ra-
dio signal.
Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the
antenna and on the window panes can inter-
fere with radio reception.
WARNING
The infotainment central computer is inter-
connected with the contr
ol units mounted
on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious
danger of accident and injury if the central
computer is repaired or disassembled and
reassembled incorrectly.
●
Never replace the central computer with
another used, recycled or from another ve-
hicle at the end of its useful life.
●
The repair or disassembly and reassem-
bly of the central computer should only be
carried out at specialised workshops. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this.
WARNING
The factory assembled radio with integra-
ted softw
are is interconnected with the
control units mounted on the vehicle.
»
169
Infotainment system
Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci-
dent and injury if the radio is r
epaired or
disassembled and reassembled incorrect-
ly.
●
Never replace the radio with another ra-
dio that is used, recycled or from another
vehicle at the end of its useful life.
●
The repair or disassembly and reassem-
bly of the radio should only be carried out
at specialised workshops. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
WARNING
Any distraction affecting the driver in any
way can l
ead to an accident and cause in-
juries. Reading the information on the
screen and managing the infotainment sys-
tem can distract your attention from traffic
and cause an accident.
●
Always drive as carefully and responsibly
as possible.
WARNING
Connecting, inserting or removing an audio
source or dat
a media while driving can dis-
tract your attention from the traffic and
cause an accident.
WARNING
Select volume settings that allow you to
easily hear signals fr
om outside the vehicle
at all times (e.g. emergency services si-
rens).
●
Hearing may be impair
ed if using too high
a volume setting, even if only for short peri-
ods of time.
WARNING
The following circumstances may result in
an emer
gency call, phone call or dat
a
transmission not being made or being inter-
rupted:
●
When in areas with zero or insufficient
mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also in
tunnels, confined areas between very tall
buildings, garages, underpasses, moun-
tains and valleys.
●
When in areas with sufficient mobile
phone or GPS signal, the telephony net-
work of the telecommunications provider
has interference or is not available.
●
When the vehicle components necessary
to make emergency calls, phone calls and
to transmit data are damaged, do not work
or do not have sufficient electrical power.
●
When the battery of the mobile phone
device is discharged or its charge level is
insufficient.
WARNING
In some countries and some telephone net-
works it is only possibl
e to make an emer-
gency call, if a mobile telephone device is
connected to the telephone interface of
the vehicl
e, inside it there is an “unlocked”
SIM card with sufficient balance to make
calls and with sufficient network signal
coverage.
WARNING
Read and observe the operating instruc-
tions pr
o
vided by the manufacturer in
question when using mobile phone devices,
data media, external devices, external au-
dio and multimedia sources.
WARNING
Position the connection cables of the audio
sources and e
xternal devices so that they
do not interfere with the driver.
WARNING
When changing or connecting an audio or
multimedia source may cause sudden
changes in the v
olume.
●
Lower the volume before connecting or
switching to audio or multimedia sources.
WARNING
If mobile phone and radiocommunication
devices ar
e used without connection to an
external antenna, the maximum electro-
magnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle
might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to
the health of the driver and passengers.
170
Introduction
This is also the case if the external antenna
has not been correctly inst
alled.
●
Keep a distance of at least 20 centime-
tres between the antennas of the mobile
phone device and an active medical de-
vice, such as a pacemaker, as mobile
phones might alter the functioning of these
devices.
●
Do not carry a mobile phone switched on
very close or directly on top of an active
medical device, for instance in a chest
pocket.
●
Immediately turn off the mobile phone if
you suspect it is causing interferences in an
active medical device or any other medical
device.
WARNING
Mobile phones, external devices and ac-
cessories that are l
oose or not properly se-
cured could move around the passenger
compartment during a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre or an accident and
cause damage or injury.
●
Set mobile phone devices, external devi-
ces and their accessories outside the air-
bag deployment areas or store them se-
curely.
WARNING
The centre armrest may obstruct the driv-
er's arm mo
vements, which could cause an
accident and severe injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
If the light conditions are not good and the
screen is damaged or dir
ty, the indications
and information displayed on the screen
may not be read or be read incorrectly.
●
The indications and information dis-
played on the screen should never induce
to take any risk that compromises safety.
The screen is not a replacement for driver
awareness.
WARNING
Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz-
ard announcements. The f
ollowing condi-
tions prevent such notices from being re-
ceived or issued:
●
When in areas with zero or insufficient ra-
dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas
between very tall buildings, garages, un-
derpasses, mountains and valleys.
●
When the frequency bands of the radio
station have interference or are not availa-
ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re-
ception.
●
When the speakers and the v
ehicle com-
ponents necessary for radio reception are
damaged, do not work or do not have suffi-
cient electrical power.
●
When the infotainment is switched off.
WARNING
Switch off mobile phone devices in areas
with a risk of e
xpl
osion!
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications shown on the navigation syst
em
may differ from the current traffic situation.
●
Traffic signs, signalling systems, traffic
regulations and local circumstances pre-
vail over driving recommendations and
navigation system indications.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Certain circumstances can significantly
initially planned lengthen both the duration
of the trip and the route to the destination,
or even temporarily prevent navigation to
it, for example, if a road is closed to traffic.
Note
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobile phones is f
orbidden, the
mobile device in question must be switched
off at all times. The radiation produced by
»
171
Infotainment system
a mobile phone device when switched on
may interf
ere with sensitive technical and
medical equipment, possibly resulting in
malfunction or damage to the equipment.
Note
If the playback volume is excessive or dis-
t
or
ted, the speakers may be damaged.
172
Introduction
Overview and controls
Connect Syst
em
Fig. 150
Overview: control unit and indication in
the 9.
2-inch v
ersion
Touch screen. The infotainment functions
can be used thr
ough the scr
een.
Navigation Menu
Full Link menu
Turn volume up
Turn volume down
Turn the infotainment on/off
1
2
3
4
5
6
HOME button.
: main menu with widget vie
ws.
: main menu in mosaic mode.
7
173
Infotainment system
General instructions for use
Oper
ating indications
●
The infotainment needs a few seconds for
the complet
e start-up of the system and dur-
ing that time it does not react to inputs. Only
the image of the rear view camera* system
can be displayed during system start-up.
●
The display of all indications and the exe-
cution of functions only takes place once the
infotainment system has finished booting. The
duration of the system booting depends on
the number of infotainment functions and
may take longer than normal in the event of
very high or very low temperatures.
●
When using the infotainment system and
corresponding accessories, e
.g., head-
phones, bear in mind country-specific regu-
lations and legal provisions.
●
Some functions of the infotainment system
require an active SEAT CONNECT user ac-
count and an Internet connection for the ve-
hicle. The data transmission must not be limi-
ted to perform the functions.
●
To use the infotainment system, simply
lightly press a button or touch the screen.
●
For the correct operation of the infotain-
ment system it is important that it is switched
on and that, if necessary, the time and date
of the vehicle are set correctly.
●
If a function button is missing on the screen,
it is not a device defect, but corresponds to
the specific equipment of the country or ver-
sion.
●
Some infotainment functions can only be
selected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In
some countries, the selector lever must also
be in the parking position P or in neutral posi-
tion N. It is not a malfunction, but is due to
compliance with legal provisions.
●
Restrictions on the use of devices using
Bluetooth® technology may apply in some
countries. For further information, contact the
local authorities.
●
If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turn
on the ignition before restarting the infotain-
ment system.
●
If the setup is changed, this may change
the display on the screen and in some cases,
the infotainment system may behave in a
manner different to that described in this in-
struction manual.
●
Ensure that any repairs or modifications
that need to be carried out on the infotain-
ment system are carried out by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
●
Using a mobile phone device inside the ve-
hicle may cause noise in the speakers.
●
In some countries, the infotainment system
automatically shuts off when the engine is
switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt battery
charge level is low.
●
On vehicles with park assist, the audio
source volume is automatically lowered when
reverse gear is selected. The volume reduc-
tion can be adjusted.
●
Information about the included software
and the license conditions can be found in
Settings > Copyright.
●
When selling or lending the vehicle, make
sure that all saved data, files and settings
have been deleted and, if necessary, external
audio sources and data media have been re-
moved.
Note
You will find more information and tips for
using the infot
ainment system in the Help
menu.
HOME screen
In the control and display unit you can set up
the vie
ws and r
epresentation on the home
screen or use the factory setting templates.
If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a
device defect, but corresponds to the specific
equipment of the country or version.
The following menus can be included as an
icon on the home screen:
174
Introduction
Main menus on the home screen
Navigation
›››
page 201
Radio/Multimedia
›
›
›
page 194
Telephone
›
›
›
page 208
Full Link
›
›
›
page 185
Setup
›
›
›
page 176
Vehicle
›
›
›
page 88
Data
›
›
›
page 87
Air conditioning
›
›
›
page 155
Sound
Users
a)
Privacy mode
››
›
page 184
Store
Legal
Help
a)
Depends on the selected privacy mode.
Managing the infotainment system
Execute the functions and settings with the in-
f
ot
ainment controls.
Depending on the equipment, the infotain-
ment system has different controls:
●
Touch screen.
●
Off-screen sensor fields.
Opening the Quick Guide
You will find more information and tips for
handling in the Quick Guide of the infotain-
ment system.
●
Press HOME > .
Connecting and disconnecting the info-
tainment system
The infotainment system turns on when the
ignition is switched on, unless it has been
manually turned off beforehand.
The infotainment system starts-up with the
last set volume, provided that this does not
exceed the preset maximum start-up volume.
The infotainment system automatically turns
off when the driver's door is opened, provided
the ignition has been switched off before-
hand.
Moving objects and adjusting volume
Move objects on the screen to adapt settings,
for example, with scrollable buttons or to
move the areas of a menu.
Depending on the equipment, customise me-
nus and views.
Increasing and reducing images or map
sizes
Tip: use your thumb and index finger.
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and leave them on the screen.
●
To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin-
ger from the other. To reduce views, slowly
bring one finger towards the other.
Note
If you turn on the infotainment system man-
ually with the ignition off, it will aut
omati-
cally turn off after about 30 minutes.
Customising the infotainment sys-
t
em
Customise the menus and infotainment views
t
o quickly access your f
avourite or most fre-
quently used functions.
The main menu contains function buttons for
accessing all of the Infotainment apps.
Customise shortcuts
At the bottom of the screen you will find
shortcuts to customisable system functions.
Use the settings to delete or replace them, or
change their order.
»
175
Infotainment system
●
Pr
ess and hol
d one of the icons (or press +
of an empty position) to display an additional
window.
●
Select one of the icons from the apps bar.
●
Press to delete an icon.
●
Click on an icon in the additional window to
replace the value.
●
Hold your finger on one of the icons and
drag it to the desired position.
●
To close the edit mode, press in the addi-
tional window, or press .
Note
The shortcut bar cannot be edited when
the vehicl
e is moving.
Settings (system and sound)
The selection of possible settings varies de-
pending on the country, the equipment in
question and the equipment of the v
ehicl
e.
Modifying settings
The meaning of the following symbols are
valid for all system and sound settings.
All changes are automatically applied when
the menus are closed.
Symbol and its meaning
The setting is selected and activated or
connected.
The setting is not selected, disabled or
disconnected.
T
o open a drop-down list.
To increase a setting value.
To increase a setting value.
To go back step by step.
To go forward step by step.
To change a setting value with the
scr
oll
able button without adjusting.
Sound settings
Access the sound settings: HOME >
In the sound settings ther
e may be the f
ollow-
ing functions, information and setting options:
●
Equaliser
●
Position.
●
Settings.
System settings
Access the system settings: HOME > .
In the system settings there may be the fol-
lowing functions, information and setting op-
tions:
●
Screen.
●
Time and date.
●
Language.
●
Additional keypad languages.
●
Units.
●
Voice control.
●
Wi-Fi.
●
Applications and services
●
Manage mobile devices.
●
Reset factory settings.
●
System information.
●
Copyright.
●
Configuration wizard.
Adjust the volume of external audio sour-
ces
If you need to increase the playback volume
for the external audio source, first lower the
volume on the infotainment system.
If the sound from the connected audio source
is very low, increase the output volume on
the external audio source. If this is not
enough, change the input volume to medi-
um or high.
If the sound from the connected external au-
dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the
output volume on the external audio source.
If this is not enough, change the input vol-
ume to medium or low.
176
Introduction
Clean the screen
Remove persistent dirt carefully and without
using aggressiv
e cleaning products. To clean
the screen we recommend that:
●
The infotainment system is switched off.
●
Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa-
ter
›››
page 342.
●
In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by
moistening with a little water. Then carefully
remove with a clean, soft cloth.
CAUTION
Cleaning the screen with inappropriate
cleaning pr
oducts or when dry, may dam-
age it.
●
When cleaning, only press lightly.
●
Do not use aggressive cleaning products
or that contain solvents. Such products
may damage the equipment and “darken”
the screen.
Trademarks, licenses and copy-
rights
Registered trademarks and licenses
Cert
ain t
erms in this manual bear the symbol
® or ™. These symbols indicate that it is a
trademark or a registered trademark. The ab-
sence of this symbol, however, does not nec-
essarily mean that the term in question can
be used freely.
Other product names are registered trade-
marks or trademarks of the respective rights
holders.
●
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
●
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
●
Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
●
Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple
Inc.
●
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.iPod®, iPad® and
iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc.
●
MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are certi-
fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor-
tium LLC.
●
Windows® is a registered trademark of Mi-
crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA.
●
MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology
and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS.
●
This product is protected by certain Micro-
soft Corporation industrial and intellectual
property rights. The use or commercialization
of technology of this type outside the config-
uration of this product, without a licence from
Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft branch
is prohibited.
Copyright
As a general rule, audio and video files stored
on data media and audio sources are subject
to intellectual property protection in accord-
ance with the national and international pro-
visions applicable in each case. Please bear
in mind all legal provisions!
Technical data
Radio with integrated hardware (8.25 ")
1)
The f
act
ory-mounted radio in the vehicle with
integrated hardware includes country-specif-
ic components and software for connectivity
and for the execution of vehicle, comfort and
infotainment functions.
The corresponding indications are shown on
the radio screen and partly on the instrument
panel.
■
Capacitive colour screen:
■
8.25 inch version, TFT, WVGA: 1082 x 480
pixels.
»
1)
Equipment name: Media System
177
Infotainment system
■
T
ouch oper
ation via the device screen, ro-
tary push-button, menu button and buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Central computer with control and display
unit (9,2”)
1)
The factory-mounted central computer in the
vehicle includes country-specific compo-
nents and software for connectivity and for
the execution of vehicle, comfort and infotain-
ment functions.
The corresponding indications are shown on
the control and display unit screen and partly
on the instrument panel.
■
Capacitive colour screen:
■
Using the equipment with:
■
Touch zones Touch operation.
■
Buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
■
Approach sensors (driver and passenger
side recognition, gesture control).
Vehicle and comfort functions
■
Driver assistance system settings.
■
Heating and air conditioning settings.
■
Lights and visibility function settings.
■
Vehicle comfort settings.
■
Parking and manoeuvring settings.
Sound system
Basic equipment:
The infot
ainment system that is supplied from
the factory is equipped as follows:
■
Speakers in different locations and with dif-
ferent power levels (watts).
■
Internal amplifier depending on the system:
■
8 speakers: 5 x 20 W
■
Setting options:
■
Equaliser, depending on the system:
■
8 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre-
defined settings.
■
Sound distribution, depending on the sys-
tem:
■
8 speakers: Balance + Fader (left /
right / front / rear).
■
Sound optimisation by zones (valid for 8
speaker system):
■
Manual (Driver and All)
■
Automatic depending on the seats oc-
cupied.
Optional sound system
The infotainment system can be extended
with an optional sound system as follows:
■
10 speakers in different locations and with
different power levels (watts).
■
External amplifier (340 W Ethernet), which
pr
ocesses the audio signals sent by the
central computer.
■
Excitation of speaker channels through
class AB final stages.
■
Audio signal processing in digital internal
signal processor (DSP).
■
Independent subwoofer in the luggage
compartment.
■
Setting options:
■
User equaliser: 5 bands.
■
Sound distribution: Balance + Fader (left /
right / front / rear).
■
Sound optimisation by zones:
■
Manual (Driver, Front and All)
■
Subwoofer volume.
Connectivity
Wi-Fi
■
Wi-Fi conf
orming t
o IEEE 802.11 b/g/n.
■
Transfer in 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.
■
Three Wi-Fi modes at the same time:
■
Tethering (2.4 GHz).
■
2.4 GHz access point.
■
Connect System:
1)
Equipment name: Connect System.
178
Introduction
■
Simult
aneous connection of up t
o 8 Wi-Fi
devices.
■
Media System:
■
Simultaneous connection of up to 2 Wi-Fi
devices.
■
Connect System:
■
Internet connection via Wi-Fi:
■
Tethering through the customer's
phone.
■
Customer access point (clients) in the
vehicle.
■
Media System:
■
Internet connection via Wi-Fi:
■
Apple CarPlay wireless.
■
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto over Wi-Fi.
■
Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR
code.
Bluetooth® profiles
There can be a maximum of two mobile devi-
ces connected to the Bluetooth® hands-free
and a third device connected to the Blue-
tooth® as a music player.
When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-
ephone management system, a data ex-
change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®
profiles.
●
Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the
HFP can be used to manage calls through the
infotainment system.
●
Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows
audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It
may require connecting other profiles for
managing and controlling playback.
●
Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows
phone book contents to be downloaded from
the mobile telephone.
●
Message profile (MAP): It allows short
messages (SMS) to be downloaded and
synchronised.
179
Infotainment system
Data transfer
SEAT CONNEC
T
Intr
oduction
To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be activa-
ted online by ent
ering into a SEAT CONNECT
contract with SEAT, S.A. and is subject to a
temporary use limitation depending on the
country.
Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfolios
offered by SEAT and individual services can
be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reacti-
vated, renamed and extended, even without
prior notification.
In https://my.seat you can create the user
account, see the description of services and
more information.
The execution and availability of the SEAT
CONNECT services and service portfolios
may vary depending on the country, as well
as the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi-
ty.
Connectivity statuses
(white)
Full connectivit
y, all services active
(grey)
Limit
ed connectivity, some services
may not be avail
able.
no icon
No connectivity, no services availa-
ble
.
SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition or search
technol
ogy does not recognise or offer re-
sults for all words.
There are SEAT CONNECT services for which
registration is mandatory and others for
which it is not mandatory.
Description of services
Before running SEAT CONNECT services,
read and take into account the description of
the corresponding services. Descriptions are
updated non-periodically and are available
online at https://my.seat.
●
Always use the most up-to-date version of
the corresponding service description.
WARNING
In areas with insufficient mobile phone and
GPS signal cov
erage, neither emergency
calls nor phone calls can be made, and da-
ta cannot be transmitted. Where possible,
change location.
CAUTION
The vehicle may be damaged by factors
outside the control of SEAT
, S.A. These may
be specifically:
●
Misuse of mobile terminals
●
Data loss during transmission
●
Unsuitable or defective third party appli-
cations
●
Malicious software on data storage devi-
ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones
Services portfolio
The initial service allocation shown here cor-
r
esponds t
o the third generation of SEAT
CONNECT services and represents the maxi-
mum services portfolio. The maximum possi-
ble portfolio is only available on some vehicle
models. During the useful life of the vehicle,
you can change the assignment shown here.
After activating the services management in
the infotainment system you can check if the
vehicle has services and what they are.
In some countries and in the event of a con-
tract renewal, the services offered may be
combined differently than indicated here.
They may also vary depending on the year of
production of the vehicle. The services men-
tioned correspond to the third generation of
SEAT CONNECT.
180
Data transfer
SEAT CONNECT services and functions
that do not r
equir
e activation
The following services also work without the
activation of SEAT CONNECT:
●
Public emergency call service.
●
Privacy mode.
●
Legal.
SEAT CONNECT services
The SEAT CONNECT services are:
●
Private emergency call
●
Public emergency call
●
Roadside assistance call
●
Customer support
●
Service appointment planning
●
Online system update
●
Customisation
●
Activating SEAT CONNECT
●
Private mode (deactivation of services)
●
Delete user / Reset factory settings
●
Remote independent heating
●
Remote opening
●
Horn and turn signals
●
Vehicle status incl. doors and lights
●
Driving data
●
Vehicle status report
●
Anti-theft alarm warning
●
Zone warning
●
Speed warning
●
Online map update
●
Search for points of interest
●
Petrol stations
●
Online traffic information
●
Parking lots
●
Online infotainment system update
●
Online route calculation
●
Information on risks
●
Dictation
●
Natural voice control for destinations and
addresses
●
Online radio
●
Online media
●
Online route import
●
Online destination import
●
Remote auxiliary ventilation
●
Parking position
●
Privacy mode
●
Legal
SEAT CONNECT services for hybrid vehi-
cles
Available only in electric and hybrid vehicles.
●
Remote air conditioning
●
Electrical power manager
●
Departure times
●
plus all SEAT CONNECT services in the pre-
vious section
›››
page 181.
SEAT CONNECT individual options
●
In-Car Applications. These applications
can be purchased and installed directly in
the infotainment system through the In-Car
store.
●
Full Link.
●
Data package. Pay per use data rates for
the use of online functions, for example, 2 GB
per month.
Note
●
The public emergency call service is
av
ailable regardless of whether the info-
tainment system is logged in.
●
Customisation and purchase of In-Car
applications require loggint into infotain-
ment system, but the activation of the vehi-
cle in a SEAT CONNECT account is not nec-
essary.
Activation of SEAT CONNECT and S-
PIN
Activating SEAT CONNECT
The f
oll
owing steps are necessary for the ac-
tivation of SEAT CONNECT (including regis-
tration):
»
181
Infotainment system
●
Cr
eat
e a user account at https://my.seat or
directly through the infotainment system in
the User Management menu.
●
Place the SEAT CONNECT order and acti-
vate it.
●
Add the vehicle to your user account.
●
Prove ownership.
●
Prove your identity. It is only necessary if
you are to run SEAT CONNECT services rele-
vant to security.
●
You can activate it at https://my.seat or di-
rectly through the infotainment system. To
activate it through the infotainment system,
proceed as follows:
HOME > User management > Become
a main user.
MENU > Settings > SEAT Connect >
Register
Follow the rest of the indications and the in-
formation shown in the infotainment system.
During activation, you may be asked to cre-
ate an S-PIN.
Update option
9.2” Infotainment yes
8.25” Infotainment yes
SEAT CONNECT portal yes
SEAT CONNECT application yes
9.2"
8.25"
More information at https://my.seat/faqs.
S-PIN
The S-PIN is a sequence of se
v
eral digits,
which can be selected when completed the
SEAT CONNECT registration.
When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-
guess number sequences and known dates
of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the SEAT
CONNECT user account in “Account set-
tings”.
The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro-
tect your user profile or to run a SEAT CON-
NECT service relevant to the security of your
vehicle.
You must manage this S-PIN with absolute
confidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to third
parties, for security reasons you must change
it immediately.
Ownership and identity accredita-
tion
Depending on the Infotainment system, the
o
wnership accr
editation method will be the
2-key method or the registration code meth-
od.
9.2” Infotainment system
To become a main user and thus prove own-
ership of the vehicle, you need both of the ve-
hicle’s physical keys. Ownership accredita-
tion takes place in the vehicle during registra-
tion or, if you already have a SEAT CONNECT
user account, you must log in through the in-
fotainment system and then go to User man-
agement
●
Switch on the ignition and the infotainment
system.
●
In the infotainment system, register in SEAT
CONNECT.
●
Or: open the menu User management >
Settings > Become main user and follow the
instructions.
●
Press the unlock button on the first vehicle
key.
●
Press the unlock button on the second vehi-
cle key.
8.25” Infotainment System
To become the main user and therefore ac-
credit ownership of the vehicle, you will need
the registration code found on the SEAT Web
Portal and in the APP after linking the vehicle
to your account (My Garage > Add Vehicle
> Accept terms and conditions and SEAT
privacy policy). Ownership is accredited in-
side the vehicle. Go to Vehicle settings >
SEAT CONNECT > Registration and enter
182
Data transfer
the registration code shown on the Web Por-
t
al or in the App
.
Once the infotainment system has processed
the orders by radiofrequency, the accredita-
tion of the ownership will have been comple-
ted. You can control the current status in the
SEAT CONNECT portal.
How is ownership accredited?
9.2” Infotainment 2-Key method.
8.25” Infotainment Registration code
SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible
SEAT CONNECT appli-
cation
No, it is not possible
Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident)
Identit
y accr
editation must be done before
you can use SEAT CONNECT services that
are relevant to security, such as the “Remote
Opening” service. Identity accreditation can
be done in two ways:
●
In person at the SEAT dealership.
●
You can find more information about SEAT
Ident on the SEAT CONNECT portal at
https://my.seat.
Legal provisions
During the use of SEAT CONNECT services,
information is tr
ansferred and processed on-
line through the vehicle. Such data can also
provide (at least indirectly) information about
the driver in question, for example, driving be-
haviour and location. As a contracting party
in the SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT,
S.A., you must ensure that when your vehicle
is used by other drivers (for example, family or
friends), data protection and personal rights
are respected. Therefore, you must inform
drivers in advance that the vehicle transfers
and receives data online, and that you can
access such data.
Not taking into account this obligation to in-
form, can infringe certain rights of the occu-
pants.
Users can manage data sending and trans-
fers through the privacy mode at any time.
More information at: https://my.seat/faq.
Follow-up services: ask all occupants
The follow-up services need geographical
and vehicle data to determine whether the
vehicle is being used within defined speed
ranges, where it has been parked or if it is be-
ing used in an established geographical area.
This information is displayed on the SEAT
CONNECT portal and in the SEAT CONNECT
app.
Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehi-
cle occupants if they agr
ee with the activa-
ted services. If they do not, deactivate the
service in question (if possible) or do not al-
low the occupants to use the vehicle.
GPS tracking: marking
If the vehicle has a factory-assembled con-
trol unit that transmits the its current geo-
graphical position and speed, the vehicle
usually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the roof
console). The absence of the marking on the
vehicle does not guarantee that the control
unit does not transmit the vehicle’s current
geographical position and speed.
Personal information
SEAT protects your personal data and only
uses them, as long as the law allows it or you
have given your consent on the occasion of a
use. You will find detailed information on data
processing in relation to SEAT CONNECT
services in the Privacy Policy, which you can
access in its corresponding current version
on the SEAT website.
Permanent transfer of the vehicle
If another person has left you the vehicle for
permanent use (for example, if you buy a
used vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may already
be activated and the previous user still has
»
183
Infotainment system
the possibility of accessing the data regis-
t
er
ed through SEAT CONNECT and control
certain functions of your vehicle.
In the infotainment system you can check if
your vehicle is assigned to a person as the
main user. In this case, you can register your-
self as the main user of the vehicle and thus
automatically delete the previous main user.
Alternatively, through the infotainment sys-
tem you can directly and permanently delete
the previous user as the main user, as well as
put the vehicle in offline mode and thus limit
both the communication of your vehicle with
the SEAT, S.A. data server and the processing
of personal and vehicle data.
Deactivating SEAT CONNECT serv-
ices
The following functions are available in the
inf
ot
ainment system to deactivate and acti-
vate SEAT CONNECT services:
●
Central deactivation or activation
●
Individual deactivation or activation
You can rerun the corresponding services af-
ter cancelling their deactivation in the info-
tainment system.
Note
The services required by law and their data
transmission, such as the public emer
gen-
cy call system, cannot be disconnected or
deactivated.
Faults
Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEAT
CONNECT services ar
e met, there may be
factors beyond the control of SEAT, S.A. that
interfere with the execution of such services
or prevent them. These may be specifically:
●
Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software
update and t
echnical expansion of telecom-
munication equipment, satellites, servers and
data banks.
●
Change of the mobile telephony standard
for the transmission of mobile data by the tel-
ecommunications service provider, for exam-
ple, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS.
●
Disconnection of an existing mobile phone
standard by the telecommunications service
provider.
●
Interference, disturbance or interruption in
the reception of the mobile phone and GPS
signal due to aspects such as high-speed
driving, solar storms, meteorological influen-
ces, topography, blocking equipment and the
intensive use of mobile phones in the radio
cells in question.
●
When in areas with zero or insufficient mo-
bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam-
ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very
tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun-
tains and valleys.
●
External information from third party sup-
plies available with limitations, incomplete or
incorrect, e.g. representations of maps.
●
Countries and regions where SEAT CON-
NECT is not offered.
Service management
Open the settings in Users and go t
o
Privacy
and Services. In vehicles equipped with a
Media System (8.25") it is accessed from Set-
tings > SEAT Connect > Privacy settings
and services. You can do the following in the
infotainment system:
●
Check which SEAT CONNECT services are
currently available in the vehicle.
●
The number of SEAT CONNECT services
that are enabled or disabled.
●
Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECT
services.
More information at https://my.seat.
Privacy and Services Settings
SEAT CONNECT services can be activated
and deactivated individually. To do this, just
184
Data transfer
check the box corresponding to the service
you w
ant t
o activate or deactivate. Use the
privacy mode option if you want to deacti-
vate all of the services at the same time.
Privacy mode
Allows you to deactivate or activate the serv-
ices depending on the selected privacy level.
Tr
acking
Share location. Main users and co-
users can view position dat
a on the
SEAT CONNECT portal or app.
Location
Use l
ocation. Position, v
ehicle, and
user data are used for services.
Personal
No l
ocation. Only the vehicl
e data
and user data are used for services.
Incognito
Maximum priv
acy. Your services ar
e
disabled. Only services required for
legal reasons use data.
Setting options are not available in all mar-
k
ets or in all v
ehicle models.
Note
If you deactivate each and every SEAT
CONNECT service
, the OCU may continue
to transmit data.
Full Link
Intr
oduction
With Full Link it is possible to view and use the
contents and functions that ar
e shown on the
mobile phone device on the infotainment
screen.
To do this, the mobile phone device must be
connected with the infotainment system
through a USB interface.
Some technologies can also be used by
Wireless Full Link through the Bluetooth® in-
terface and a Wi-Fi connection.
The following technologies may be availa-
ble:
●
Apple CarPlay™
●
Apple CarPlay™ Wireless
●
Android Auto™
●
Android Auto™ Wireless
●
MirrorLink®
The avail
ability of the technologies that Full
Link includes depends on the country and the
mobile phone device used.
You will find more information on the SEAT
website (www.seat.com).
Access the Full Link main menu
Browsing the Full Link main menu depends on
the infotainment system used.
●
View : click on Full link
●
View : click on Menu > Full Link
●
OR: press APP.
Configure Wireless Full Link
In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must first
pair the mobile phone device with the info-
tainment system. To do this, proceed as fol-
lows:
Connect a mobile phone device for the first
time.
●
Unlock the mobile phone device.
●
Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® on
the mobile phone device.
●
Connect the mobile phone device to the in-
fotainment system using a USB cable or via
Bluetooth®.
●
Access the Full Link main menu, unless it
appears automatically.
●
Select the mobile phone device and the
technology you want.
●
Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo-
bile phone device to grant the necessary au-
thorisations to the infotainment system.
●
Disconnect the USB connection and con-
nect with the infotainment system again via
»
185
Infotainment system
Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is now
configur
ed.
The pairing has concluded. The connect
ed
mobile phone device can also use Wireless
Full Link from now on without the USB con-
nection.
If pop-up menus are rejected during the con-
nection process, Wireless Full Link will not be
available. In this case, SEAT recommends re-
moving the devices in both the iPhone set-
tings and the infotainment system, and re-
starting the connection process.
WARNING
The use of applications while driving can
distract your att
ention from the traffic. Any
distraction affecting the driver in any way
can lead to an accident and cause injuries.
●
Always drive as carefully and responsibly
as possible.
WARNING
Any applications that are not suitable or
ex
ecute incorrectly may cause damage to
the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.
●
Protect the mobile phone device and its
applications from inappropriate use.
●
Never carry out modifications to the ap-
plications.
●
Follow instructions in the instruction
manual for the mobile phone device.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
caused to the v
ehicle as a result of the use
of applications that are of poor quality or
are defective, the inadequate program-
ming of the applications, the insufficient
coverage of the network, the loss of data
during transmission or the improper use of
mobile phone devices.
Note
Wireless Full Link may not be compatible
with all technol
ogies.
Applications (apps)
With SEAT Full Link, the display of the con-
t
ents of SEAT applications and other pr
ovid-
ers installed on mobile phone devices can be
transferred to the infotainment screen.
In the case of third-party applications, there
may be compatibility problems.
Applications, their use and the necessary
mobile phone connection may be pay per
use.
The offer of applications can be varied and
designed for a vehicle or a specific country.
The content and volume of applications, as
well as the companies that offer them, may
vary. Some applications also depend on the
availability of third-party services.
It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica-
tions offered will work on all mobile phone
devices or with all their operating systems.
The applications offered by SEAT can be
modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated
and extended without prior notification.
To avoid distracting the driver while driving,
only certified applications can be used.
Full Link symbols and settings
To show more information
T
o open the Full Link settings menu
Appl
e CarPlay™
In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following
r
equir
ements must be met:
●
The iPhone™ must be compatible with Ap-
ple CarPlay™.
●
Voice control (Siri ™) must be active on the
iPhone™.
●
Apple CarPlay™ must be active without
limitations in the iPhone™ settings.
186
Data transfer
●
The iPhone ™ must be connect
ed t
o the in-
fotainment system via a USB connection. On-
ly USB connections with data transmission
are suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay™.
●
The USB cable used must be an original
Apple™ cable.
Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® and
Wi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone™.
Establish connection
When you first connect an iPhone™, follow
the instructions on the infotainment system
screen and on the iPhone ™.
The requirements must be met to use Apple
CarPlay™.
Launch Apple CarPlay™:
●
Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full
Link main menu.
●
OR: press APP to access the Full Link main
menu.
●
Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a con-
nection with the iPhone™.
Disconnecting
●
On the Apple CarPlay™ mode, press the
SEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
The representation of function buttons on the
screen may vary.
Special characteristics
During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
Bluetooth® connections between the
iPhone™ and the infotainment system are not
possible.
●
If there is an active Bluetooth® connection,
it is automatically interrupted.
●
The phone functions are only available
through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de-
scribed for the Infotainment system are not
available.
●
The connected iPhone™ cannot be used as
a multimedia device in the Media main menu.
●
It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga-
tion system at the same time. The last route
started interrupts the one that was previously
active.
●
Depending on the infotainment system you
use, on the instrument panel screen you can
view data from the Telephone mode.
●
The instrument panel screen does not dis-
play any indication to turn.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you
can accept or reject incoming calls, as well
as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
voice control
●
Press briefly to start voice control using
the infotainment system.
●
Press this button for a long time to start
voice control (Siri™) of the connected
iPhone™.
Note
●
The avail
ability of technologies depends
on the country and may vary.
●
You will find information about technical
requirements, compatible iPhones, certi-
fied applications and their availability on
the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple Car-
Play ™ websites, or at SEAT dealerships.
Android Auto™
Requirements for Android Auto™
In or
der t
o use Android Auto™, the following
requirements must be met:
●
The mobile phone device, called smart-
phone from here on, has to be compatible
with Android Auto™.
●
The smartphone must have an Android Au-
to™ application installed.
●
The smartphone has to be connected
through the USB connection with data trans-
mission with the infotainment system.
●
The USB cable used must be an original ca-
ble provided by the smartphone manufactur-
er.
»
187
Infotainment system
Android Auto™ Wireless: Bluet
ooth® and Wi-Fi
al
so have to be activated on the device.
Establish connection
When you first connect a smartphone, follow
the instructions on the infotainment system
screen and on the smartphone.
The requirements must be met to use Android
Auto™.
Launch Android Auto™:
●
Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full
Link main menu
●
OR: press APP to access the Full Link main
menu.
●
Press Android Auto™ to establish a connec-
tion with the smartphone.
Disconnecting
●
On the Android Auto™ mode, press the Re-
turn to SEAT icon to access the Full Link main
menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
Special characteristics
During an active Android Auto™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
An active Android Auto™ device can be
connected at the same time via Bluetooth®
(HFP profile) with the infotainment system.
●
It is possible to use the phone’s functions
through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™
device is connected at the same time via
Bluetooth® with the infotainment system, the
telephone function of the infotainment can
also be used.
●
An active Android Auto™ device cannot be
used as a multimedia device in the Media
main menu.
●
It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Android Auto™ navigation
system at the same time. The last route star-
ted interrupts the one that was previously ac-
tive.
●
On the instrument panel screen you can
view data from the Telephone mode.
●
The instrument panel screen does not dis-
play any indication to turn or the Media
mode.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you
can accept or reject incoming calls, as well
as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
voice control
●
Press briefly to start voice control using
the infotainment system.
●
Press this button for a long time to start
voice control on the connected smartphone.
Note
●
The avail
ability of technologies depends
on the country and may vary.
●
You will find information about technical
requirements, compatible mobile phone
devices, certified applications and their
availability on the SEAT (www.seat.com)
and Android Auto™ websites, or at SEAT
dealerships.
MirrorLink®
Requirements for MirrorLink®
In or
der t
o use MirrorLink™, the following re-
quirements must be met:
●
The mobile device must be compatible with
MirrorLink™.
●
The mobile phone device must be connec-
ted to the infotainment system via a USB con-
nection that is suitable for data transmission.
●
The USB cable used must be an original ca-
ble provided by the mobile phone device
manufacturer.
●
Depending on the mobile tphone device
used, a Car-Mode application that is suitable
for using MirrorLink® must be installed.
Establish connection
When you first connect a mobile phone de-
vice, follow the instructions on the
188
Data transfer
infotainment system screen and on the mo-
bil
e phone de
vice.
The requirements must be met to use Mirror-
Link™.
Launch MirrorLink®:
●
Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full
Link main menu.
●
OR: press APP to access the Full Link main
menu.
●
Press to establish the connection with the
mobile phone device.
Disconnecting
●
In the MirrorLink® mode, press the APP icon
to access the Full Link main menu.
●
OR: press to access the MirrorLink® main
menu.
●
Press to interrupt the active connection.
Special characteristics
During an active MirrorLink® connection, the
following characteristics are applicable:
●
An active MirrorLink® device can be con-
nected to the infotainment system at the
same time via Bluetooth®.
●
If the MirrorLink® device is connected to the
infotainment system via Bluetooth®, the tele-
phone function of the infotainment system
can be used.
●
You cannot use an active MirrorLink® de-
vice as a multimedia device in the Media
main menu.
●
On the instrument panel screen you can
view data from the Telephone mode.
●
The instrument panel screen does not dis-
play any indication to turn or the Media
mode.
●
With the multifunction steering wheel you
can accept or reject incoming calls, as well
as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
Function buttons
Function buttons and their function:
Return the Full Link main menu. Here you
can end the MirrorLink® connection,
connect another mobile phone device or
select another technology.
Press to close the open apps. Then press
the apps to be closed or the Close all
function button to close all the open ap-
plications.
Press to display the mobile phone device
screen on the infotainment system
screen.
To open the MirrorLink® settings.
Press to return to the MirrorLink® main
menu.
APP
Note
You will find information about technical re-
quirements, compatibl
e mobile phone de-
vices, certified applications and their avail-
ability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and
MirrorLink® websites, or at SEAT dealer-
ships.
WLAN access point*
Introduction
3 Not avail
able for model: Media System
The infotainment system can be used to
share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-
ces
›››
page 190, Configuration for sharing
a connection over WLAN.
The infotainment system can also use the
WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-
vide Internet to the devices connected to the
hotspot (WLAN client)
›››
page 190.
Note
●
Data tr
ansmission may incur charges.
Due to the high volume of data exchanged,
SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar-
iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op-
erators can provide the relevant informa-
tion.
●
The exchange of data packages may
generate additional costs, depending on
»
189
Infotainment system
your mobile phone rate, particularly if you
are abr
oad (for example, roaming rates).
Configuration for sharing a con-
nection ov
er WLAN
Establishing the connection with the wire-
less netw
ork (WLAN)
●
Pulse the HOME > button.
●
Activate the wireless network. To do so,
press the WLAN function button.
●
Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the
device that is t
o be connected. If necessary,
refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man-
ual.
●
Activate the mobile device assignment in
the infotainment system. To do so, press the
Enable WLAN connection button and acti-
vate the checkbox.
●
Enter and confirm the network key dis-
played on the device.
The following settings can also be made on
the menu Share connection:
●
Security level: WPA2 encryption automati-
cally generates a network key.
●
Network key: Network key automatically
generated. Press the function button to man-
ually change the network key. The network
key must have a minimum of 8 characters
and a maximum of 63.
●
SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32
characters).
The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
ed. To complete the connection, it may be
necessary to enter other data into the device.
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
3 This depends on the equipment and the coun-
try in question.
Wi-Fi Prot
ected Setup can be used to create
a ciphered local wireless network quickly and
simply.
●
Establish the connection with the wireless
network (WLAN).
●
Pr
ess the WPS button on the WLAN router
until the warning light on the router starts
flashing. If the WLAN router does not support
WPS the network must be configured man-
ually.
●
OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the
WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router
starts flashing.
●
Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.
The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
ed.
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
Configure Internet access
The infotainment system can use the WLAN
hotspot of an ext
ernal device to establish an
Internet connection.
Establishing the connection with the wire-
less network (WLAN)
●
Activate and check the wireless hotspot on
the external device. If necessary, refer to the
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
●
Press the HOME > button;
OR access the
Media mode and press the Settings menu.
●
Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLAN
connection and check the verification box.
●
Press the Find function button and select
the device you want from the list.
●
If necessary, enter the network key of the
device in the infotainment system and con-
firm with OK.
Manual settings:
●
To manually enter the network settings of
an external (WLAN) device.
The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
ed. To complete the connection, it may be
necessary to enter other data into the device.
190
Data transfer
Note
Due to the large number of devices on the
market, it is not possibl
e to guarantee fault-
free operation of all functions.
191
Infotainment system
Infotainment operation
v
oice contr
ol*
Introduction
The voice control works both online* and off-
line taking int
o account what is indicated in
page 192, Languages available depend-
ing on the market. In online* mode, com-
mands are recorded more accurately, as
more data is available.
Voice control understands questions and ex-
pressions without having to learn commands.
Commands can be formulated freely and
can be colloquial. You will find proposals for
commands in the infotainment system.
Functions are reduced in offline mode.
Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can
cause malfunctions, as well as confusing
phrases and answers.
Languages available depending on the
market
Online* and offline: German, American Eng-
lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanish
and Czech. These languages have advanced
functions such as Online Commands, air con-
ditioning control, natural interaction, etc.
The other languages of the infotainment sys-
tem
do not offer Online Commands, air con-
ditioning control or natural interaction.
Requirements
●
Online* and offline: voice control with the
corresponding infotainment mounted on the
vehicle.
●
Online* current SEAT CONNECT Plus con-
tract active.
Note
●
Voice contr
ol only recognises commands
in the language that is set in the infotain-
ment system.
●
Test the voice control with the vehicle
stopped before starting to move to famili-
arise yourself with its operation.
Activation word and commands
Voice control activation words
If you hav
e connect
ed the voice control via
the activation word, the connected infotain-
ment responds with How can I help you?. It
then scans the words spoken in the vehicle
after the activation word.
Voice control starts when the infotainment
recognises the activation word.
Connect and disconnect the activation
word
●
In HOME press Settings > Voice control >
Activate/ deactivate activation word.
Activation word: Hola Hola
Commands
For v
oice control to recognise commands re-
liably, bear in mind the tips for the commands
to work properly.
Tips for the commands to work correctly:
●
Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands
are not r
ecognised. Talk in a normal tone of
voice. Speak a little louder if you are driving
at high speed.
●
Avoid outside noises. Open windows and
doors can interfere with voice control.
●
Avoid other secondary noises, such as con-
versations in the vehicle. Do not direct the air
flow from the outlets towards the microphone
or the interior lining of the roof.
●
Do not use a very strong accent or dialec-
tal.
●
Do not make long pauses.
Voice control is active and recognises the
wor
ds pronounced.
192
Infotainment operation
Note
●
When the activation w
ord is disconnec-
ted, the infotainment system cannot be ac-
tivated by means of the activation word.
Voice control is still available via the
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
●
Availability depends on country and
equipment.
●
Depending on the content of the phone
book and to ensure reliable recognition of
the names of the phone book, it may be
useful to change the order of the first and
last name of the contact in question.
Start and stop voice control
Depending on the equipment, you can start
voice contr
ol in different ways.
Start voice control
●
Voice control activation: say the word that
activates voice control.
●
Multifunction steering wheel: press the
voice control button .
The voice control ends automatically, if you
use infotainment functions, if the parking sys-
tem is activated or by incoming calls.
In some cases you can also start voice con-
trol of the connect
ed mobile phone device,
by pressing and holding the voice control
button.
Manually ending voice control
Voice control can be cancelled with the Can-
cel command.
●
Multifunction steering wheel: press the
voice control button twice in a row, or a
long press.
193
Infotainment system
Radio/Multimedia
R
adio mode
Fig. 151
Schematic representation: Radio view
In Radio mode you can tune in the available
r
adio st
ations in different frequency bands
and memorise your favourites on the preset
buttons to access them quickly.
The types of reception and frequency bands
available depend on the equipment and the
country. In certain countries, frequency
bands may stop broadcasting or not be
available again.
Access the RADIO menu
●
Press HOME >
›››
Fig. 151.
Access the settings
●
Press HOME > > .
Online* functions in Radio mode
Online* functions in Radio mode are only
available under the following conditions:
●
SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plus
equipment.
●
You have an active SEAT CONNECT user
account.
●
Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac-
count.
●
You have a corresponding data package
acquired from the In-Car store or have a data
volume for your own mobile phone device via
Wi-Fi access point.
Note
●
For str
eaming services you need to have
an account with the provider in question.
●
Radio stations are responsible for the
content of the information they transmit.
Additional electrical equipment connected
to the vehicle can cause interference in the
reception of the radio signal and noise in
the speakers.
194
Infotainment operation
●
Foil or met
al-coated stickers attached to
the windows may affect reception on vehi-
cles with a window aerial.
Radio equipment and symbols
The functions, as well as the types of recep-
tion and frequency bands av
ailable depend
on the equipment and the country.
●
AM* tuner.
●
Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna).
●
Summarised FM station list.
●
Fusion of DAB* and FM stations into one list.
●
Fusion of all stations stored in preset but-
tons int
o one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta-
tions.
●
Station logos.
●
DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that
are emitted sequentially.
●
Online* radio.
Universal symbols in Radio mode
To select the desired AM frequency
band.
To select the desired FM/DAB fre-
quency band.
To select the type of Online*
radio reception.
AM
FM/DAB
Online radio*
Next to the name of the station, monitor-
ing of active traffic information stations
(TP).
Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band
To display the frequency band for man-
ual selection of the FM frequency. Only
possible when the summary station list is
disconnected.
DAB not available.
DAB stations support presentations (sli-
deshow).
Symbols on the AM frequency band
Manually updating the station list.
To display the frequency band for man-
ual selection of the AM frequency.
Menus in Online* radio mode
Show station selection.
Open text search.
Show the last online radio stations
heard.
Show the 100 most heard online radio
stations.
Show available online radio podcasts.
Show online radio stations, which origi-
nate from the desired country.
Show online radio stations, which broad-
cast in the desired language.
TP
Show online radio stations whose pro-
gramme belongs to the desired musical
genre.
Selecting, tuning and saving a sta-
tion
Select the frequency band
Befor
e selecting a station you have to select
a frequency band or a type of reception. Dif-
ferent stations are available depending on
the frequency band selected or the type of
reception.
The types of reception and frequency bands
available depend on the equipment and the
country.
●
Select the frequency band or type of re-
ception: AM*, FM/DAB, FM (f
or devices that
do not have DAB), Online* radio.
Search and select a station
You can select radio stations in different
ways. The options vary depending on the fre-
quency band and the type of reception.
Select via the frequency band (AM and
FM)
●
Activate the frequency band.
»
195
Infotainment system
●
Click on the cursor
, scr
oll through the fre-
quency band and release it when you reach
the frequency band you want.
●
OR: press on a point on the frequency
band. The cursor will automatically jump to
the corresponding frequency.
The station of the set frequency is tuned.
Select from the station list (AM and
FM/DAB)
The station list shows the stations that are
currently tunable. In the AM frequency band,
you may have to update the station list if you
are no longer in the area where you last ac-
cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre-
quency band, the station list is automatically
updated.
●
Open the station list
●
Press the station you want.
The selected station is tuned. In the case of
FM/DAB and if the station is available, the
best quality reception is automatically selec-
ted.
Search and filter stations (Online* radio)
In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered
by categories and can be searched by text.
●
Open the station list.
●
Select the category by which the stations
are to be filtered.
●
OR: press to start the text search. The in-
put field is displayed.
●
Enter the name of the station you want. The
list of the stations found is updated while en-
tering the text.
●
Press the station you want.
The selected station is tuned.
Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB)
In SCAN mode the stations are automatically
tuned in a sequential manner and each of
them is played for approx. 5 seconds.
●
To start the SCAN mode, under Settings
press SCAN.
SCAN mode starts and the station currently
tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is a
SCAN function button.
●
To select a station press SCAN.
SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned.
The SCAN function button is hidden.
Storing the station on the preset buttons
You can store up to 36 stations of different
frequency bands and reception types as fa-
vourites using the preset buttons.
●
Tune the station you want.
●
Access the preset buttons.
●
Press the preset button and keep it pressed
until the station is stored.
●
OR: press the station on the station list and
keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis-
played.
●
Press the preset button.
The station is stored in the selected preset
button.
If a station was already stored in the preset
button, it is overwritten with the new station.
Special functions in Radio mode
(TP) Traffic information
The TP function monit
ors the announcements
of a st
ation with traffic information and auto-
matically reproduces them in the Radio mode
or in the multimedia playback that is active.
To do this, you have to be able to tune into a
station with traffic information.
Some stations without their own traffic infor-
mation support the TP function by broad-
casting traffic information from other stations
(EON).
In the AM frequency band or in the Multime-
dia mode, a station with traffic information in
the background is automatically tuned while
196
Infotainment operation
it is possible to tune into a station with traffic
inf
ormation.
If no st
ation with traffic information can be
tuned in, the device automatically searches
for stations with tunable traffic information.
Stations with traffic information are not avail-
able in all countries.
Activating and deactivating the TP func-
tion
●
In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press
Settings > Traffic station (TP).
Online* radio
Online radio is a type of reception for Internet
radio stations and podcasts that are inde-
pendent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Inter-
net transmission, reception is not limited to
the region.
Online radio is only available through the In-
ternet connection of the active infotainment
system. The use of online radio can generate
expenses due to the transmission of data
from the Internet.
●
In Online radio mode, press and set the au-
dio quality to high or low to tune the online ra-
dio.
Station logos
In the case of some frequency bands, station
logos may already be pre-installed in the in-
fotainment system.
If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings the
automatic selection of station logos is ac-
tivated, station logos are automatically as-
signed to the stations.
In the Online radio mode, the infotainment
system accesses the station logos of the on-
line database and automatically assigns
them to the stations
Assign station logos manually
●
In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos.
●
Press on the icon and then select the
station to which a station logo is to be as-
signed.
●
Select the station logo. If desired, repeat
the same process with other stations.
●
OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos.
197
Infotainment system
Media Mode
Fig. 152 Schematic representation: Multimedia
view
In Media mode you can play multimedia files
fr
om dat
a media and streaming services
through the infotainment system.
Depending on the equipment, the following
data media can be used:
●
USB storage support (for example, a USB
stick, a mobile phone connected vai USB).
●
Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobile
phone or a tablet).
Depending on the equipment, the following
types of multimedia files can be played:
●
Audio files.
●
Video files (depends on the system).
You can also use streaming services. The
availability of streaming services depends on
the equipment and the country.
To use streaming services you need to have
your own user account in the streaming serv-
ice in question.
Access the MEDIA menu
●
Press HOME >
›››
Fig. 152.
Access the settings
●
Press HOME > > .
Limitations and indications of data media
Data media may not work if they have been
exposed to high temperatures or have been
damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac-
turer’s indications.
Quality differences between data media pro-
duced by different manufacturers can cause
multimedia playback malfunctions.
Incorrect configuration on a data media may
cause the data media to be unreadable.
Playlists only specify a playback order and
refer to the storage location of the multime-
dia files within the folder structure. In a play-
list there are no multimedia files saved. To
play a playlist, multimedia files have to be
found in the storage places of the data media
to which the playlist refers.
198
Infotainment operation
Equipment features. Audio, multimedia
and connectivit
y:
●
Multimedia pl
ayback and control via Blue-
tooth®.
●
Audio playback in these formats: AAC,
ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA.
●
Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1
and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, DivX
3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264
(.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 10
(.wmv, .asf).
●
Playlists on any type of device.
●
Multimedia streaming (online*).
●
Multimedia search.
Note
SEAT assumes no liability for any deteriora-
tion or loss of fil
es on data storage devices.
Select and play a multimedia
sour
ce
Select multimedia source
Bef
or
e playing multimedia files you must first
connect a multimedia source.
To use streaming services you must be con-
nected to the Internet.
●
Connect an external multimedia source.
●
Select the connected media source to be
used for playback.
Playing audio and video files
You can search and play multimedia files
from an available multimedia source in differ-
ent ways.
Search in the folder structure
Multimedia files can be catalogued by cate-
gories (for example, album, artist, title). In My
Multimedia this category view is always dis-
played. The classic folder structure of individ-
ual USB data media is also found in My Multi-
media.
●
Activate the folder structure.
●
The folder structure of the selected multi-
media source is displayed. When My multi-
media is selected, the categories (music, vid-
eos, playlists) and connected multimedia
sources are displayed first.
●
Search for the title you want in the folder
structure.
●
Or: press to start the text search. The in-
put field is displayed.
●
Enter the name of the desired title. The list
of the titles found is updated while entering
the text.
●
Press the desired title.
●
If at the beginning of the playback your se-
lection is in a folder of a multimedia source,
the multimedia files that are in it are also
added to the playback.
●
If a playlist is played, all available titles in
the playlist are added to the playback.
●
Close your selection with .
Select favourites
In favourites you can save titles, music gen-
res, artists and albums individually for play-
back.
●
Access favourites .
●
Press the favourite you want.
Depending on your selection, all the titles be-
longing to the favourite are added to the
playback.
Configure streaming services
Depending on the equipment you can use
streaming services directly through the info-
tainment system. For this you need to have a
premium user account of the streaming serv-
ice in question and you have to log in with it in
the infotainment system. You also need to be
connected to the Internet.
●
Select Streaming as the multimedia
source.
●
A list of available streaming services is dis-
played.
●
Select the streaming service you want.
»
199
Infotainment system
●
F
oll
ow the steps indicated by the infotain-
ment system.
●
The streaming service is added to the list of
multimedia sources as a new function button.
Save favourites
Only multimedia files in My multimedia of
the infotainment system can be saved as fa-
vourites. You can save up to a maximum of 30
titles, albums, artists and music genres indi-
vidually as favourites.
●
Start playback.
●
Access favourites.
●
Tap a favourite that is not assigned.
●
Or: click on an existing favourite and press
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
●
Select from the selection list: Title, Album,
Artist, Musical genres.
●
Playlist.
The selection is saved instead of the previ-
ously selected favourite. If the favourite was
already assigned, the previously saved fa-
vourite is overwritten.
The selectable options in the selection list
depend on the data attached to the multime-
dia file. If the music genre is not indicated in
the music files, for example, you cannot save
the music genre as favourite.
If a video file is playing, only that video can
be saved as favourite.
Playing entertainment content in
the infotainment system
Depending on the infotainment system, vid-
eos can be pl
ayed.
Video mode
When in video mode, a video can be pl
ayed
on the infotainment screen if this is stored on
a data media, in My Multimedia or is sourced
from a streaming service. In this case, the vid-
eo sound is played through the vehicle's
speakers.
The image is only displayed if the vehicle is
stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the in-
fotainment screen turns off. The sound of the
video can still be heard.
A stable Internet connection is required for
playback from a streaming service. In this
case, telephony costs may be generated.
200
Infotainment operation
Navigation*
Intr
oduction
Fig. 153 Schematic representation: Navigation
view
A global satellite system determines the cur-
r
ent position of the v
ehicle and the sensors
mounted on the vehicle analyse the routes
taken. All measured values and possible traf-
fic events are compared with the available
maps to allow optimal navigation to the des-
tination.
Navigation announcements and graphic rep-
resentations will guide you to your destina-
tion.
Navigation management is carried out on the
screen.
Depending on the country, some functions of
the infotainment system will not be available
on the screen when travelling above a certain
speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to
compliance with legislation.
Navigation announcements
Navigation announcements are acoustic indi-
cations for driving referred to the current
route.
The type and frequency of navigation an-
nouncements depend on the driving situation,
for example, starting the guide to the destina-
tion, driving on the motorway or on a round-
about and the settings.
If the exact destination cannot be reached
because, for example, it is in a non-digitised
area, indications relating to the address and
the distance to the destination are displayed
on the screen.
During dynamic route guidance, you will re-
ceive information about reported traffic con-
gestion on the route. An additional navigation
announcement is provided if the route is re-
calculated due to traffic congestion.
While a navigation announcement is playing,
its volume can be adjusted. The following
navigation announcements provided will be
played with the newly adjusted volume.
»
201
Infotainment system
Limitations during navigation
If the inf
ot
ainment system cannot receive da-
ta from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnel
or in an underground garage, navigation con-
tinues using the vehicle's sensors.
In areas that are not digitised or are only par-
tially digitised on the infotainment memory,
the infotainment system will still attempt to
provide route guidance.
In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-
tion data, it may not be possible to determine
the exact position of the vehicle. This may
mean that navigation is not as precise as usu-
al.
Roads and streets are subject to constant
change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads
closed to traffic, changes to street names
and building numbers). If the navigation data
is obsolete, this may lead to errors or inaccur-
acies during the route guidance.
Managing the navigation map
To allow an optimal view, you can also man-
age the navigation map with additional finger
movements.
Move the map (tip: use your index finger).
●
Move the map with your finger.
Zoom in the view (tip: use your index finger).
●
To increase the view in a certain position,
double-click on the map.
Zoom out the view (tip: use your index and
middle fingers).
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time.
Change view (tip: use your index finger).
●
Press twice on the map and keep your fin-
ger pressed on the screen.
●
To zoom out the view of the map, move your
finger upwards. To zoom in the view of the
map, move your finger downwards.
Change view (tip: use your index and middle
fingers).
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and keep them pressed.
●
To zoom out the view of the map, move one
finger towards the other. To zoom in the view
of the map, move one finger away from the
other.
Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middle
fingers).
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and horizontal to each other, keep
them pressed.
●
To tilt the view of the map forward, move
your fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the
map backward, move your fingers down-
wards.
Rotate view (tip: use your index and middle
fingers).
●
Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and keep them pressed.
●
To rotate the map view, turn your fingers
clockwise anticlockwise.
Saved data
The infotainment system saves certain data,
for example, frequent routes and position da-
ta, to make the entry of the destination more
agile and optimise the route guidance.
Delete saved data
●
Press Settings > Basic function settings >
Delete and then OK
WARNING
Select the settings, enter the destination
and the modifications for navigation only
with the v
ehicle at a standstill.
Note
●
If a detour is passed during r
oute guid-
ance, navigation may recalculate the
route.
●
The quality of the navigation recommen-
dations given by the Infotainment system
depends on the navigation data available
and any reported traffic congestions.
202
Infotainment operation
●
Navigation announcements are not emit
-
ted if the sound is muted in the infotainment
system.
Navigation functions and symbols
Navigation
Navigation functions depend on the equip-
ment and country.
Functions
●
Entering destination and route calculation
(offline and online*).
●
Indication of two navigation maps at the
same time (scr
een and instrument panel*).
●
Updat
e of online* maps.
●
Predictive navigation.
●
3D urban maps.
●
Online* traffic information
●
Dynamic POIs (points of interest)
Symbols on the map
The buttons and indications depend on the
settings and the current driving situation.
Symbols for traffic events and points of inter-
est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex-
ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter-
esting stopovers, provided navigation has
such data
›››
page 206.
Current position
Search for destinations.
Destinations along the route.
Final destination
Home address
Work address
Favourite destinations
Additional window with more options.
Additional window with route options.
Centre the map on the current position.
Change view: 2D oriented to the north,
or 2D oriented to the direction of travel,
or 3D to the direction of travel.
Information about the current route
guidance.
Map scale.
Symbols in the additional window
●
To open the additional window, press .
Repeat the last navigation announce-
ment.
Volume of navigation announcements.
Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Night
mode.
Offer new guidance routes.
|
Other symbols
Entering the detailed destination for an
address.
Search for destinations.
Frequent destinations.
Last destinations.
Favourite destinations
Back
Symbols in the route details
Current position.
Destination of the current guidance.
POI symbols (points of interest)
POIs (points of interest) are shown on the
map, provided the navigation has said data.
Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to
start a route guidance
›››
page 204.
Petrol station.
Parking lot.
Tourist information offices.
Train station.
Restaurant.
Traffic information.
POIs (points of interest) are shown on the
map, provided the navigation has said data
›››
page 206.
»
203
Infotainment system
Click on a traffic event to open an additional
windo
w with further det
ails
›››
page 206.
Slow traffic.
Traffic jam.
Accident.
Broken down vehicle.
Slippery surface (ice or snow).
Road closed to traffic.
Slippery road hazard.
Danger.
Road works.
Strong wind.
Reduced visibility.
Navigation data
The Infotainment system is equipped with a
built
-in navigation dat
a memory. Depending
on the country, the necessary navigation da-
ta may already be pre-installed.
To provide correct route guidance and make
the most of the functions offered, the infotain-
ment system should be updated on a regular
basis.
Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur-
ing navigation. Current routes cannot be
traced or the route guidances will lead to
mistaken destinations.
Ensure navigation data is updated at all
times.
Online* updating of navigation data
The navigation data of the regions through
which you travel frequently is automatically
updated in the background if the Internet
connection is established and the privacy
settings are valid.
●
With the ignition switched on, the naviga-
tion data is updated automatically.
Manual update of navigation data
Current navigation data for large regions, for
example Western Europe, can be downloa-
ded from www.seat.com and stored on USB
data devices. Navigation through USB data
devices is not possible.
●
Download the navigation data to a USB da-
ta device.
●
Turn on the ignition of the vehicle.
●
Connect the USB data device to the info-
tainment system. Navigation data is automat-
ically updated in the background.
The map version is displayed in HOME > >
System information.
WARNING
If you update the navigation data manually
while driving, it may cause accidents with
serious injuries.
●
Updat
e the navigation data only with the
vehicle at a standstill.
Note
Automatic update of the navigation data is
subject t
o the privacy settings. In “Incogni-
to” mode, no update is carried out.
Start route guidance
Depending on the country and equipment,
diff
er
ent functions are available to enter des-
tinations.
The different functions for entering destina-
tions are found in the navigation main menu.
Opening the Navigation main menu
●
Press HOME > .
Select the destination and start naviga-
tion
Press .
Select the desired destination. You can
chose from Frequent destinations,
Last destinations and Favourite
destinations.
1.
2.
204
Infotainment operation
OR: pr
ess and ent
er the address in
the input screen.
OR: detailed address.
Press Start.
Frequent destinations
The destination synopsis uses recorded data
to propose possible destinations.
Select the destination and start naviga-
tion
Press and then .
Select the desired destination. The route
guidance starts automatically.
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold
the desired destination for a few seconds.
Last destinations
Navigation saves the last destinations to
make them available for a route guidance.
Select the destination and start naviga-
tion
Press and then .
Press the desired destination.
Press Start.
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold
the desired destination for a few seconds.
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Favourite destinations
Save up to 20 destinations as favourites.
To save a destination as a favourite press
in the split screen when entering the destina-
tion.
Select the destination and start naviga-
tion
Press and then .
Press the desired destination.
Press Start.
Note
Enter the destination as accurately as pos-
sible
. If you enter a destination incorrectly,
the route guidance will not be able to start
or it will guide you to an incorrect destina-
tion.
Start route guidance by selecting
fr
om the map
The navigation map includes active areas at
many points that ar
e suit
able for entering the
destination. To do this, press the desired posi-
tion or place on the map. If there is map data
at this point, you can start a route guidance.
Whether it is possible to enter the destination
through the navigation map depends on the
1.
2.
3.
state of the data and it is not possible for all
positions.
To start “offroad navigation”, press an empty
area without position data.
Start navigation
●
Press .
●
Move the view on the map until the desired
position can be selected. The navigation map
can be used by means of additional finger
movements
›››
page 202.
●
Press the desired destination on the map.
●
Press Route.
Offroad navigation*
“Offroad navigation” calculates routes to se-
lected destination points using unknown da-
ta. When a destination point is outside the
known roads or position data, navigation
finds the route to the next point of the known
road and completes the path to the next des-
tination point with a direct connection.
Start navigation
●
Move the view on the map until the desired
position can be selected. The navigation map
can be used by means of additional finger
movements
›››
page 202.
●
Press on any point on the map without posi-
tion data.
●
Press Route.
205
Infotainment system
Start route guidance using contact
det
ail
s
Start route guidance with the saved address
data of a cont
act. Contacts saved without
address data cannot be used for route guid-
ance.
Start navigation
●
Press .
●
Press on the contact you want.
●
Press Route.
Note
If the address details of a contact are ob-
solet
e, the route guidance will nevertheless
take you to the registered address. Check
that the contact address is updated.
Traffic information
The infotainment system receives detailed
tr
affic inf
ormation automatically if the Inter-
net connection is established. This informa-
tion is shown with symbols and highlighting
the road network in colour on the map.
Traffic incidents
Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or
congested traffic, are shown on the naviga-
tion map using symbols.
With an active route guidance, traffic inci-
dents that are on the current route are shown
in the route details. Such traffic incidents can
be avoided
›››
page 206.
Hazard information
Hazard information is shown on the naviga-
tion map with symbols in the same way as
traffic incidents. In this case, the source of this
information is another vehicle that has detec-
ted the hazard and has uploaded the infor-
mation to the service provider.
The following hazards are displayed: acci-
dent, broken down vehicle and slippery road
surface.
Traffic flow indication
The navigation map shows traffic flow ac-
cording to current traffic events, highlighting
the road network in colour.
●
Orange: Slow traffic.
●
Red: Traffic jam.
Note
Traffic information receipt is subject to the
privacy settings. In maximum Priv
acy
mode, no traffic information is received.
Tracking or Location level setting is neces-
sary.
Function descriptions
Route details
The rout
e details contain information on all
incidents, for example, the starting point,
stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina-
tion, provided the navigation has such data.
If you press on an incident, an additional win-
dow opens providing more options. The avail-
able options depend on the incident and the
current settings.
Open and close the route details
●
To open, press
|
or swipe it.
●
T
o close, press
|
or swipe it.
Edit route guidance
To edit route guidance, move the stopovers to
the destination in the TripView view.
●
Hold the desired destination pressed until it
is visibly highlighted.
●
Move the destination to the desired posi-
tion.
●
Remove your finger from the screen. The
route will recalculate.
Avoid traffic incidents
The details of the route show the current traf-
fic incidents if the navigation has such data.
206
Infotainment operation
Avoid traffic incidents by editing route details
›
›
›
page 206.
●
Press on a traffic event.
●
Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.
Split screen
When handling navigation functions, an addi-
tional window with other options may open.
Possible options depend on the function be-
ing used.
Close the additional screen
●
Press on an empty area outside the addi-
tional window.
●
OR: press .
●
OR: press Accept.
Functions in the additional window:
Show on map Show what is selected on the
map.
Add st
opover Add a stopover to the route guid-
ance.
Dir
ect route Starts direct route guidance.
Functions in the additional window:
Delete Delete a stopover from the route
guidance.
Av
oid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re-
calcul
ate.
Stopping route
guidance
Ends the current route guidance.
Close the additional window.
Add a destination to favourites.
Learn usage pattern
When the v
ehicl
e is in motion, navigation
saves routes and destinations used to auto-
matically generate destination proposals.
Destinations are learned based on the time of
day and the day of the week.
Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the
same time. The proposed routes may be dif-
ferent from the routes of the normal route
guidance.
If one of the proposed destinations is selec-
ted, the guide to that destination is started.
The route guidance follows the selected route
until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case,
the route is recalculated and takes you back
along the most direct path to the initially se-
lected destination.
Important traffic jams are taken into account
in the route guidance, and are avoided if al-
ternative routes are available, provided navi-
gation has such data.
You can activate and deactivate the function
whenever you want.
Enable and disable learning usage pattern
The setting is in the corresponding navigation
menu > Basic function settings.
●
To activate the function, activate Learn us-
age pattern.
●
To disable the function, disable Learn us-
age pattern.
●
To delete saved data, press Delete usage
pattern.
207
Infotainment system
Telephone interface
Intr
oduction
Fig. 154
Schematic representation: Phone view
You can use the telephone interface to con-
nect your mobil
e t
o the infotainment system
and operate phone functions through it. The
sound is played through the vehicle's speak-
ers.
You can connect up to two mobile phone de-
vices simultaneously to the infotainment sys-
tem.
High speeds, poor weather or road conditions
and a noisy ambience (even outside of the
vehicle), as well as the quality of reception
can all affect the quality of a telephone con-
versation in the vehicle.
Note
●
As a general rul
e, pairing a device (for ex-
ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec-
essary once. You can restore the device
connection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with the
infotainment system whenever you want
without having to pair the device again.
●
The availability of some telephone func-
tions will depend on the mobile phone con-
nected to the infotainment system.
Telephone interface equipment and
symbol
s
Equipment features
●
Hands-free function.
●
Use up to two phones at the same time.
●
Phone book with a maximum of 5,000 con-
tacts.
●
SMS functions via Bluet
ooth®*: reading
SMS, writing SMS (including templates), SMS
playback, message history.
●
Email functions via Bluetooth®*: reading
email, writing email.
208
Infotainment operation
●
Connection t
o wir
eless charging option.
●
Connection to the microphone mounted on
the vehicle.
Symbols in the main menu
Contacts.
List of incoming and outgoing calls.
Enter telephone number.
Text messages (SMS and emails).*
Telephone interface settings.
Symbols for calls
The symbols may be different depending on
the infotainment system.
Start a call or bringing it to the fore-
ground.
End or reject a call.
Open contact list.
Enter telephone number.
Mute the sound of the hands-free
Hold call.
Continue call.
Start conference call.
Pass call to private mode
Make an emergency call.
Get help in case of breakdown.
Obtain information on the SEAT brand
and selected additional services related
to traffic and your travel.
Voice mail.
Call list symbols
●
To open the call lists, press .
Incoming call.
Outgoing call.
Missed call.
Telephone number (company).
Telephone number (private).
Mobile telephone number (company).
Mobile telephone number (private).
Fax (private).
Fax.
Symbols for text messages*
The symbols may be different depending on
the infotainment system.
●
To open the text messages, press .
Activate voice control input
›››
page 192.
Templates for text messages.
Places with special regulations
Switch off the mobile telephone and the tele-
phone interf
ace in places with a risk of explo-
sion. These places are not always clearly
marked. They include, for example:
●
the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks
●
The lower decks of boats and ferries.
●
In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq-
uefied gas (such as propane or butane).
●
places where the air is laden with chemi-
cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal
powder.
●
All other places where the vehicle engine or
tel
ephone must be switched off.
WARNING
Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a
risk of expl
osion!
Note
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobile phones is f
orbidden, it
must be switched off at all times. The radi-
ation produced by the mobile phone when
switched on may interfere with sensitive
technical and medical equipment, possibly
resulting in malfunction or damage to the
equipment.
209
Infotainment system
Pair, connect and manage
Requirement for pairing:
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone device
.
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the infotainment
system.
●
Depending on the mobile device, it will be
necessary to have the Bluetooth® menu open
or activate the Visibility option so that the
device is visible from the infotainment system.
Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel-
ephony with the infotainment system to use
the telephone interface functions. On the first
connection, the mobile phone device is
paired with the infotainment system. Doing so
saves a user profile
›››
page 210.
The pairing can take a few minutes. The func-
tions available depend on the mobile phone
device used and its operating system.
Pair a mobile phone device
●
Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi-
ces on the mobile phone de
vice and select
the name of the infotainment system.
●
Please note and, if necessary, confirm the
messages that appear on the mobile phone
device and on the infotainment system. If the
pairing was successful, the phone data is
saved in the user profile.
●
Optional: confirm the data transfer mes-
sage on the mobile phone device.
Active and passive connection
To use the functions of the telephone inter-
face, there must be at least one mobile
phone device connected to the infotainment
system. If there are several mobile phone de-
vices connected to the infotainment system,
you can switch between active and passive
connections. To use the telephone interface
with the desired mobile phone device, estab-
lish the active connection with the infotain-
ment system.
Difference between connection types
Primary
The mobile phone device is paired and
connected. The functions of the t
ele-
phone interface are performed with the
data of said mobile phone device.
Secon-
dary
The mobile phone device is paired and
connected. Call
s can be managed but
the phone book, messages or other
functions will not be active.
Paired mobile phone devices are stored in the
inf
ot
ainment system, even if they are not cur-
rently connected.
Connect a mobile phone device
Requirement: the mobile phone device is
paired with the infotainment system.
●
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone device.
Establish an active connection
Requirement: several mobile phone devices
are connected to the infotainment system at
the same time.
●
Select the desired mobile phone device
from the drop-down menu. All other mobile
phone devices are automatically in the pas-
sive connection.
User profiles
For each of the paired mobile phone devices
an individual user profile is automatically cre-
ated. In the user profile, data from the mobile
phone device is stored, for example, contact
details or settings. A maximum of four user
profiles can be saved in the infotainment sys-
tem at the same time.
WARNING
If you perform the pairing while driving, it
could cause an accident or injury.
●
P
erform pairing only with the vehicle at a
standstill.
210
Infotainment operation
Note
●
In the pairing of some mobile phone de
vi-
ces, a PIN number is shown on the screen of
the mobile phone device. Enter that number
in the infotainment system to complete the
pairing.
●
While the infotainment system is in the
Known mobile phones menu, the wireless
charging function is disabled. When you
exit this menu, the wireless charging func-
tion is activated again.
Basic and Comfort Telephony
Depending on the equipment, two types of
t
el
ephone interface can be used:
●
Basic telephone interface.
●
Comfort telephone interface.
Basic telephone interface
The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue-
tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This inter-
face allows the use of telephone functions
through the infotainment system and play-
back through the vehicle's speakers.
Comfort telephone interface
Like the Basic telephone interface, the Com-
fort telephone interface also uses the Blue-
tooth® HFP profile.
The Comfort phone interface can be equip-
ped with the wireless charging function
›››
page 212.
In order to use the functions of the wireless
charging function, you have to place a suita-
ble mobile phone device correctly in the stor-
age compartment. The mobile phone device
will then connect to the vehicle antenna. This
improves the reception and sound quality of
calls.
To call
Open the telephone interface
●
Press HOME > .
Mak
e a call
Sel
ect a phone number to start a call. Differ-
ent functions are available for selecting a
phone number:
Contacts
If a contact has several registered phone
numbers you have to select one.
●
Press and press a number on the list to
start the call.
●
OR: press and enter the contact name in
the input field to search for it. Press on the
contact to start the call.
●
OR: press a favourite in the telephone inter-
face main menu to start the call.
Calls
The telephone interface shows the call list of
the mobile telephone device. Start a call from
the call list.
●
Press > All and press a number on the list
to start the call.
●
OR: press and filter the call list entries
(for example, missed calls or dialled num-
bers). In filtered list, press a number to start
the call.
Dial
Manually enter a phone number to start a
call. While entering the phone number, con-
tacts that match that number are shown on
the infotainment screen.
●
Press and enter the phone number.
●
Press to start the call
The last call is dialled by pressing and hold-
ing the button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Send messages*
Depending on the mobile phone device and
the inf
ot
ainment system used, you can send
»
211
Infotainment system
and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel-
ephone int
erf
ace.
Send an SMS
●
Press > Text message > Enter new
message and enter the message on the
screen.
●
Enter the contact you want in the search
bar.
●
To send the message press OK.
Send an e-mail
●
Press > E-mail > Enter new message
and enter the message on the screen.
●
Enter the contact you want in the search
bar.
●
To send the message press OK.
Phone book, favourites and speed
dial buttons
In the first connection of a telephone with the
inf
ot
ainment system, the phone book is saved
in the infotainment system. It may be neces-
sary to confirm the data transmission on the
mobile phone.
Each time the phone is reconnected, the
phone book is updated.
If conference calls are supported, the phone
book can be accessed during a call. If there
is a saved image for a contact, it can be dis-
played in the list next to the entry.
Favourites
A speed dial button can be assigned to a
phone book favourite up to a maximum of six.
If there is a registered photo saved to the
contact, it is shown on the speed dial button.
All speed dial buttons have to be manually
edited and will be assigned to a user profile.
Assign the speed dial button
●
In the Favourites menu, press the + button,
then open the phone book to select a con-
tact as a favourite. If the contact has several
phone numbers, press on the number in the
list.
Edit the speed dial button
●
To edit or delete a favourite contact press
on the icon in the Favourites menu screen.
You can delete one or more favourites.
Call a favourite
●
Press the assigned speed dial button.
Note
Favourites are not updated automatically.
If you change a contact's phone number
,
you have to reassign the speed dial button.
Connectivity Box*
Fig. 155
In the centre console: pad for the mo-
bil
e phone connection.
The Connectivity Box includes different func-
tions that will help t
o use your mobil
e device.
These are:
●
Wireless Charger
1)
.
1)
It only includes the wireless charge functionali-
ty.
2
12
Infotainment operation
●
Signal amplifier / (Mobil
e Signal Amplifier
)
(Wireless Charger)
The Wireless Charger allows mobile devices
with Qi
1)
technology to be charged without a
cable.
To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:
●
Place your mobile device in the middle of
the pad with the screen facing up
›››
Fig. 155
›››
.
Mak
e sur
e there are no objects between the
pad and the mobile phone.
The mobile phone will start charging auto-
matically. For further information about
whether your mobile device uses Qi technol-
ogy, check your phone's user manual or visit
the SEAT website.
Signal amplifier / (Mobile Signal Amplifier)
It allows you to reduce radiation in the vehicle
and have better reception.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that
you pair the system and the mobile using
Bluetooth
®
and place it on the Connectivity
Box pad, for the best reception without hav-
ing to handle the mobile phone.
To establish a connection with the vehicle's
external aerial:
●
Place your mobile device in the middle of
the pad with the screen facing up
›››
Fig. 155
›››
.
Mak
e sur
e there are no objects between the
pad and the mobile phone.
Your mobile phone will automatically be
ready to make use of the external aerial.
WARNING
●
The mobile phone may heat up due t
o the
wireless charging. Think about this before
you pick it up, and take care when removing
it.
●
There must be no metallic or other ob-
jects between the mobile phone and the
housing, to prevent the functionality of the
Connectivity Box from being affected.
Note
●
Your mobil
e device must support the Qi
inductive charging interface standard for
proper operation.
●
The charging time and the temperature
vary in accordance with the device used.
●
The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.
●
Qi technol
ogy does not allow you to
charge more than one mobile device simul-
taneously.
●
No improvement in reception can be
guaranteed if there is more than one mo-
bile phone on the pad.
●
You are advised to keep the engine run-
ning to guarantee proper wireless charg-
ing.
●
When a telephone with Qi technology is
connected by USB, it will be charged by the
means specified by the manufacturer.
1)
Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-
bile phone wir
elessly.
213
Infotainment system
Multimedia
USB por
t
Fig. 156
Centre console: USB port.
Fig. 157
Rear part of the centre console: USB
connect
ors with po
wer outlet function.
The USB port can be found in the storage
compartment ar
ea of the fr
ont centre con-
sole
›››
Fig. 156.
Depending on the equipment and the coun-
try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-
tions exclusively for charging or as a power
socket.
These USB ports are located at the rear of
the console, between the front seats
›››
Fig. 157.
214
Start and driving
Driving
St
ar
t and driving
Starting and stopping the
engine
Ignition and start button
Fig. 158 In the lower part of the centre con-
sol
e: st
art button.
The engine can be started with a start button
(Pr
ess & Driv
e). To do so, there must be a valid
key inside the vehicle in the area of the front
or rear seats, or on the centre console.
In vehicles with the Keyless Access
›››
page 92 system, the engine can also be
started with the key in the luggage compart-
ment.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the
steering column if the ignition is disabled.
Switching the ignition on/off
If you only want to switch on the ignition
(without starting the engine), briefly press the
start button once without pressing the brake
pedal or the clutch pedal
›››
.
The
push-button text flashes
lik
e a heartbeat when the syst
em is ready for
the ignition to be turned on or off.
Automatic ignition disconnection
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key
with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni-
tion does not switch off automatically. The ig-
nition is switched off by pressing the lock but-
ton on the remote control or by pressing
the sensor surface on the door lever
›››
Fig. 75.
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on
vehicles with the Start-Stop system
The ignition is switched off automatically
when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-
matic engine shutdown is active, if:
●
The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
●
the driver does not step on any pedal,
●
the driver door is opened.
After automatically turning off the ignition, if
the dipped beam is on, the side light re-
mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is
enough charge in the battery). If the driver
locks the vehicle or manually turns off the
light, the side light goes out.
Engine restart feature
If no key is detected inside the vehicle after
the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-
onds to restart it. A warning will display on the
dash panel screen.
After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside the
vehicle.
WARNING
When switching on the ignition, do not
pr
ess the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
the engine could start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
out due care
, this may cause accidents and
serious injury.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-
authorised person could lock the vehicle,
start the engine or connect the ignition and
operate any of the electrical equipment.
»
215
Driving
Note
●
Befor
e leaving the vehicle, always dis-
connect the ignition and, if appropriate,
take into account the instructions on the
screen of the dash panel.
●
If the vehicle is stationary for a long time
with the engine off and the ignition on, the
12-volt vehicle battery might be dis-
charged and it might not be possible to
start the engine.
●
In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until
the warning light
›››
page 216 goes off
before starting the engine.
●
If during the STOP phase you press the
button, the ignition is switch-
ed off and the push-button fl
ashes.
●
If the indication is displayed on the in-
strument panel display “Start-Stop system
deactivated: Start the engine manually”;
the
button will flash.
Starting the engine
●
Vehicles with manual transmission: put the
gear l
e
ver in neutral, press the clutch pedal
and keep it pressed in this position until the
engine starts.
●
Vehicles with automatic transmission: put
the selector lever in P or N, press the brake
pedal and keep it pressed in this position until
the engine starts.
●
Press the starter button
›››
Fig. 158; do not
press the accelerator. There needs to be a
valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to
start. After starting the engine, the lighting of
the
button remains fixed indicat-
ing that the engine is running.
●
Once the engine starts, release the start-up
butt
on.
●
If the engine does not st
art, stop and wait
for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,
perform an emergency start
›››
page 218.
Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer
than usual to start on cold days. During pre-
heating, the warning lamp remains lit. To
avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-
tery, do not use any other major electrical
equipment while the glow plugs are pre-
heating.
The preheating time depends on the coolant
and exterior temperatures. With the engine at
operating temperature, or at outside temper-
atures above +8°C, the warning lamp will
light up for about one second. This means
that you can start the engine almost immedi-
ately.
Starting a diesel engine after having run
out of fuel
If the fuel tank of a diesel vehicle was run until
completely empty, after refuelling it can last
longer than normal to start the engine, even
up to a minute. This is because the fuel sys-
tem must eliminate air first.
WARNING
Do not keep the engine running in confined
spaces, as there is a risk of poisoning.
●
The e
xhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-
ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-
ness and death.
WARNING
Do not get out of the vehicle with the en-
gine running, especially if a gear is engag-
ed. The vehicl
e could then suddenly move
or something strange could happen that
would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
WARNING
Never use cold start sprays, they could ex-
plode or cause the engine t
o run at high
revs. Doing this risks injury.
CAUTION
●
The star
ter motor or the engine may be
damaged if you try to restart the engine im-
mediately after switching it off.
●
When the engine is cold, you should
avoid high engine speeds, driving at full
throttle and over-loading the engine, as
this could cause engine damage.
216
Start and driving
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the vehicl
e stationary. Start off
immediately, driving gently. This helps the
engine reach operating temperature faster
and reduces emissions.
Note
●
Electrical components with a high po
wer
consumption are switched off temporarily
when the engine starts.
●
When starting with a cold engine, noise
levels may briefly increase. This is quite
normal, and no cause for concern.
●
When the outside temperature is below
+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some
smoke may appear under the vehicle when
the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.
Turning off the engine
●
Bring the vehicle to a full stop
›
›
›
.
●
With manual transmission, press the clutch
all the w
ay do
wn. If the vehicle is automatic,
set the selector lever to the P position.
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Briefly press the start-up button
›››
Fig. 158.
Emergency disconnection
If the engine does not switch off after briefly
pressing the starter button, an emergency
disconnect will be required:
●
Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-
onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-
ond
›››
in Ignition and start button on
page 2
15
.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehi-
cle is mo
ving. This could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
The airbags and belt tensioners do not
work when the ignition is switched off.
●
The brake servo does not work with the
engine off. Therefore, you need to press the
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
●
Power steering does not work when the
engine is not running. You need more
strength to steer when the engine is switch-
ed off.
●
If the ignition is switched off, the steering
column could be locked, making it impossi-
ble to control the vehicle.
WARNING
Always take the key with you when you
leav
e the vehicle. This is particularly impor-
tant if there are children in the vehicle, as
they might otherwise be able to start the
engine or use power-operated equipment
(e.g. the el
ectric windows), which could
cause injuries.
CAUTION
●
If the v
ehicl
e is stopped and the Start-
Stop system* switches off the engine, the
ignition remains switched on. Make sure
that the ignition is switched off before leav-
ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could
discharge.
●
If the engine has been driven at high
speed for a prolonged period of time, it
may overheat when switched off. To avoid
damage, allow the engine to run for ap-
proximately two minutes in neutral before
switching it off.
Note
After the engine is switched off the radiator
fan may run on f
or up to 10 minutes, even if
the ignition is switched off. It is also possi-
ble that the fan turns itself on once more if
the coolant temperature increases due to
the heat accumulated in the engine com-
partment or due to its prolonged exposure
to solar radiation.
Electronic immobilizer
The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-
thorised persons fr
om driving the v
ehicle.
»
217
Driving
In the key there is a chip that automatically
deactiv
at
es the electronic immobiliser.
The electronic immobiliser is automatically
activated when the key is outside the vehicle.
If the following message is shown on the in-
strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle
cannot be started.
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-
ed if genuine SEAT keys ar
e used.
Emergency starting function
Fig. 159 On the right of the steering column:
emer
gency st
art.
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emer
gency st
art-up will be required. The
relevant message will appear in the dash
panel display. This may happen when, for ex-
ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:
●
Immediately after pushing the starter but-
ton, keep the key next to the right trim of the
steering column
›››
Fig. 159, as close as pos-
sible to the Kessy logo.
●
The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Instructions for the driver on the in-
strument panel display
Press the clutch
●
This message appears on vehicles with a
manual gearbo
x if the driv
er tries to start the
engine without having the clutch pedal
pressed. The engine will only start if you press
the clutch pedal.
Press the brake
●
This message appears on vehicles with an
automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start
the engine without having the brake pedal
pressed.
Select N or P
●
This message appears if you try to start or
stop the engine when the selector lever of the
automatic gearbox is not in position P or N.
The engine can only be started and stopped
in those positions.
Engage position P; the vehicle can
move; doors can only close in posi-
tion P.
●
For safety reasons, this driver message ap-
pears and an audible warning sounds if the
selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not
in position P after you switch off the ignition.
Move the selector lever to the P position, oth-
erwise the vehicle could roll away.
Gear change: selector lever in the
drive position!
●
This driver message is displayed when the
selector lever is not in the position P when the
driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzing
sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po-
sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.
Ignition is switched on
●
This driver message is displayed and a buz-
zer is sounded when the driver door is
opened with the ignition switched on.
“My Beat” function
For vehicles with a convenience key there is
the “My Beat” function. This f
eat
ure provides
an additional indication of the vehicle ignition
system.
218
Start and driving
When entering the vehicle, the start button
›
›
›
Fig. 158 flashes to draw attention to it.
When the ignition is on/off, the engine start
button flashes. With the ignition is switched
off, the start button goes off after a few sec-
onds.
With the engine running, the start button light
stays on, indicating that the engine is running.
The time elapsed between the moment the
user starts the engine with the start button
button and the lighting changes from flashing
to fixed will depend on specific engine size
characteristics. When the start button is used
to stop the engine, the button starts flashing
again.
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
“My Beat” function also offers additional in-
formation:
●
When the engine stops during the Stop
phase, the light of the start button button
stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains
active even though the engine is off.
●
When the engine cannot be started again
with the Start-Stop system,
›››
page 219, and
needs to be started manually, the start but-
ton flashes to indicate this situation.
Start-Stop system*
Control lamps
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-
gine shutdown is active.
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is not available or has been
disconnected.
Instructions for the driver on the instru-
ment panel displ
ay
Start-Stop system deactivated. Start
the engine manually
●
This indication f
or the driver shows that the
Start-Stop system cannot start the engine
again.
Start-Stop system: Fault! Function
not available
●
There is a fault in the Start-Stop system.
Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the
fault repaired.
Description and operation
The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel
and r
educe CO
2
emissions.
In St
art-Stop mode, the engine will automati-
cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is
stopping. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine automatically switches back on
when required.
In this scenario, the light of the
button stays lit.
When the ignition is s
wit
ched on, the Start-
Stop function is automatically activated.
More information on the Start-Stop system
can be found in the Infotainment system:
press the function button > View > Ve-
hicle status.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
●
When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put
it into neutral and release the clutch pedal.
The engine will switch off. The warning lamp
will light up. The engine can be stopped
before stopping completely (approximately 7
km/h).
●
When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-
gine will start up again. The warning lamp will
switch off.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
●
Brake until it is stopped, and keep your foot
on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold*
system so that the vehicle remains braked.
The engine will switch off. The warning lamp
will appear in the display. The engine can
»
219
Driving
be stopped before stopping completely (ap-
pr
o
ximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the ve-
hicle's gearbox).
●
When you take your foot off the brake ped-
al the engine will start up again. The warning
lamp will switch off. With the Auto Hold* sys-
tem, the engine will not start if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal. The car starts
when you press the accelerator pedal.
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop
mode
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The bonnet must be closed.
●
The engine has reached operating temper-
ature.
●
The reverse gear must not be engaged.
●
The vehicle must not be on a very steep
slope.
The engine does not turn off for various
reasons
Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri-
fies whether certain conditions are met. The
engine does not switch off, in the following
situations for example:
●
The engine has not yet reached the re-
quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.
●
The temperature selected on the climate
control has not been reached.
●
The interior temperature is very high/low.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 155.
●
The parking aid* is switched on.
●
The battery is very low.
●
The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
ing turned.
●
If there is a danger of misting.
●
After engaging reverse gear.
●
In case of a very steep gradient.
is shown on the instrument panel display,
as well as on the driver information system*
.
The engine starts by itself
When stopped, the normal system mode may
be interrupted in the following situations. The
engine restarts by itself without involvement
from the driver.
●
The interior temperature differs from the
temperature selected on the climate control.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 155.
●
The brake has been pressed several times
consecutively.
●
The battery is too low.
●
High power consumption.
Additional information related to the auto-
matic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in
the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when
in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P,
the engine will also remain switched off when
you take your foot off the brake pedal. In or-
der to start the engine up again the accelera-
tor must be pressed, or another gear engag-
ed or the brake released.
If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-
ped, the engine will start up again.
Change from D to P to prevent the engine
from accidentally starting when passing
through R.
Additional information about vehicles with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will
start up again in certain operating conditions
if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle
ahead drives off again.
WARNING
●
Nev
er switch the engine off until the vehi-
cle is stationary. The operation of the brake
and steering will not be fully guaranteed.
More force will be needed to turn the steer-
ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an
accident and even serious injuries.
220
Start and driving
●
To av
oid injury, make sure that the Start-
Stop system is switched off when working
in the engine compartment
›››
page 221.
CAUTION
The Start-Stop system must always be
s
wit
ched off when driving through flooded
areas
›››
page 236.
Note
●
In vehicl
es with an automatic gearbox,
you can control whether the engine should
switch off or not by reducing or increasing
the brake force applied. While the vehicle
remains stopped, the engine will not stop if
the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic
jams with frequent stopping and starting
for example. As soon as strong pressure is
applied to the brake pedal, the engine will
stop.
●
When stopped, the brake pedal must be
kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle
does not move.
●
If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-
box, it can be directly started up again by
immediately pressing the clutch pedal.
●
With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is
placed in position D, N or S after engaging
reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards
direction must be reached for the system to
be in a status to stop the engine.
Manually connecting and discon-
necting the St
ar
t-Stop system
Fig. 160
Centre console: Start-stop system
butt
on.
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
s
wit
ch it off manually.
●
To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop
system, press the button
›››
Fig. 160.
The button symbol remains lit up yellow
when the system is switched off.
Note
The system switches on every time the en-
gine is turned off v
oluntarily.
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
Fig. 161 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed man-
ual gearbo
x
The position of the gears is indicated on the
gearbo
x l
ever
›››
Fig. 161.
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
●
Release the clutch.
Selecting reverse gear
Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped.
»
221
Driving
●
Pr
ess the clut
ch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
downwards, move it to the left as far as it will
go and then forwards to select reverse
›››
Fig. 161
R
.
●
Release the clutch.
Changing do
wn gears
Whil
e driving, changing down a gear must al-
ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-
rectly below and when the engine speed is
not too high
›››
. Changing down while by-
passing one or v
arious gears at high speeds
or at high engine speeds can damage the
clut
ch and the gearbox, even if the clutch
pedal remains depressed
›››
.
WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will
star
t to move as soon as a gear is engaged
and the clutch released. This also happens
if the electronic parking brake is switched
on.
●
Never engage reverse gear when the ve-
hicle is moving.
WARNING
If the gear is changed down inappropriate-
ly by selecting a gear that is t
oo low, you
may lose control of the vehicle, causing an
accident and serious injuries.
CAUTION
When travelling at high speeds or at high
engine speeds, selecting a gear that is t
oo
low can cause considerable damage to the
clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-
cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held
and it does not engage.
CAUTION
To prevent damage and avoid premature
wear
, please observe the following:
●
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure applied by your
hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector
forks.
●
Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-
al; although the pressure may seem insig-
nificant, it can cause the premature wear of
the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you
do not need to change gear.
●
Always ensure that the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped before engaging the re-
verse gear.
●
Always press the clutch to the floor when
changing gears.
●
Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on
hills with the engine on.
Automatic gearbox/DSG au-
t
omatic gearbo
x*
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-
ly controll
ed manual gearbox. Torque be-
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-
mitted via two independent clutches. They
replace the torque converter found on con-
ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-
hicle.
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to
change gears manually
›››
page 224,
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*.
Control lamps
It lights up green
The brake is not pressed.
To sel
ect a gear range, press the brake pedal.
Flashes green
The selector lever locking button is not engaged.
The vehicl
e is prevented from moving forwards. En-
gage the selector lever lock.
222
Start and driving
Selector lever positions
Fig. 162
Selector lever lock.
The selector lever position is shown when the
corr
esponding sign lights up
. With the selec-
tor lever in the manual gearbox positions M, D
and S, the engaged gear is also shown on the
display.
– Parking lock
When the lever is put in this position, the drive
wheels are locked. The lever must only be put
in P when the vehicle is stationary
›››
.
T
o put the l
ever in P or take it out of P , the
locking button must be pressed and held and
the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.
– Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when
the vehicle is stationary and the engine is
idling
›››
.
To move the lever to position R, the l
ock but
-
ton must be pressed and held while pressing
the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse
lights come on when the lever is in the R posi-
tion with the ignition on.
– Neutral
With the lever in this position, the gear is in
neutral.
Press the brake pedal to move the lever from
N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at
speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)
›››
.
– P
ermanent f
orward drive position
The lever in the D/S position enables the
gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or
sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S,
move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever
again will select normal mode D. The selec-
ted driving mode is shown on the instrument
panel display.
In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the
best gear ratio. This depends on the engine
load, the road speed and the dynamic gear
control programme (DCP).
Sport mode (S) should be selected for a
sporty driving style. This setting makes use of
the engine's maximum power output. When
accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea-
ble.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun-
tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch
tiptronic mode
›››
page 224, to adapt the
gears to suit the road conditions.
Selector lever lock
In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range
from being engaged, and prevents the vehi-
cle from moving off accidentally.
To release the gear lever lock, press and hold
the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the
same time, press the lever lock in the direc-
tion of the arrow
›››
Fig. 162.
As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is
in positions P or N the following indication will
be shown on the screen:
When stationary, apply footbrake
while selecting a gear.
The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly
through position N (e.g. when shifting from R
to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to
“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if
it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-
gages automatically if the brake pedal is not
pressed and the lever is in position N for more
than about one second at a speed of less
than 5 km/h (3 mph).
WARNING
●
Tak
e care not to press the accelerator
pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The
»
223
Driving
vehicle could start moving immediately (in
some cases ev
en if the parking brake is en-
gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
●
Never move the lever to R or P when driv-
ing. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in an accident or failure.
●
With lever in any position (except P), the
foot brake must be pushed down whenever
the engine is running. This is because an
automatic gearbox still transmits power
even at idling speed.
●
While you are selecting a gear and the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running,
do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
As a driver you should never leave your
vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is
engaged. Switch on the electronic parking
brake and select the parking lock (P).
Note
●
If the le
ver is moved accidentally to N
when driving, release the accelerator and
let the engine speed drop to idling before
selecting gear range D or S again.
●
Should the power supply to the lever be
interrupted in position P, it will not be possi-
ble to move the lever. If this should happen
the manual release can be used
›››
page 229.
Note
●
If the le
ver lock does not engage, there is
a fault. The transmission is interrupted to
prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov-
ing. Follow the procedure below in order for
the lever lock to engage again:
–
With a 6-speed gearbox: press the
brake pedal and release it again.
–
With a 7-speed gearbox: press the
brake pedal. Move the lever to posi-
tion P or N and subsequently engage a
gear.
●
Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-
cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-
ceed to the next mode:
–
When the vehicle does not move in the
required direction, the system may not
have the gear range correctly engag-
ed. Press the brake pedal and engage
the gear range again.
–
If the vehicle still does not move in the
required direction, there is a system
malfunction. Seek specialist assistance
and have the system checked.
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*
Fig. 163
Lever in the Tiptronic position
Fig. 164
Steering wheel: automatic transmis-
sion l
e
vers
Tiptronic gives the driver the option to
change gears manually.
When you change t
o the T
iptronic pro-
gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently
selected gear. This is possible as long as the
224
Start and driving
system is not changing gear automatically
due t
o a tr
affic situation.
Using Tiptronic with the selector lever
It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,
both when the vehicle is stopped and while
driving.
●
Starting from the D/S position, move the
lever to the right. The instrument panel will
show whether the lever is in manual or Tip-
tronic mode (e.g. M4).
●
Push the lever forwards
+
or backwards
–
to move up or down a gear
›
›
›
Fig. 163.
●
To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the
left.
Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel
paddles*
The gearshift paddles can be used when the
selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic)
positions.
●
Press the gearshift paddle
+
to select a
higher gear
›
›
›
Fig. 164.
●
Press the gearshift paddle
–
to select a
l
o
wer gear.
●
To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-
hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-
proximately 1 second or move the lever to the
left.
If the paddles are not operated for some time
and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection
position, it will automatically exit from Tip-
tronic mode.
CAUTION
●
When acceler
ating, if a higher gear is not
selected, it will automatically change
shortly before reaching the maximum per-
mitted RPM.
●
Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-
tem will not change until it detects that the
engine will not reach its maximum RPM.
Driving with an automatic gearbox
The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-
cally as the v
ehicl
e moves.
The engine can only start with the selector
lever in position P or N. At low temperatures
(below -10 °C), the engine can only start with
the selector lever in position P..
Driving down hills
Under certain circumstances it may be ad-
vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-
lect the gear manually according to driving
conditions
›››
.
Stop/Park
On l
e
vel ground, just use the lever to engage
position P. On slopes you should first apply
the parking brake and then set the lever to P.
This makes it easier to remove the lever from
position P when starting.
If the driver door is opened and the lever is
not in position P, the vehicle could move. The
following warning is displayed on the instru-
ment panel: Gear change: selector
lever in the drive position!. Addi-
tionally, a buzzer will sound.
Stopping on a downhill
Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,
apply the electronic parking brake
›››
.
Do not accel
er
ate while a range of gears is
engaged to prevent the car from rolling
downhill
›››
.
St
ar
ting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-
tion
●
Once you have engaged a gear, take your
foot off the brake pedal and gently press the
accelerator.
Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold
function
●
Pull on the electronic parking brake button.
»
225
Driving
●
Once you hav
e engaged a gear
, gently
press the accelerator and pull on the elec-
tronic parking brake button.
Back-up programme
If all the positions of the lever are shown over
a light background on the instrument panel
display, there is a system fault and the auto-
matic gearbox will operate in with the backup
programme. It is still possible to drive the ve-
hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se-
lected range of gears. Driving in reverse
gear may not be possible.
Kick-down
The kick-down system provides maximum ac-
celeration when the gear selector lever is in
the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic mode.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right
down, the automatic gearbox will shift down
to a lower gear, depending on road speed
and engine speed. This takes advantage of
the maximum acceleration of the vehicle
›››
.
The upshift t
o the ne
xt higher gear is delayed
until the engine reaches maximum rpm.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Selec-
tor l
ever positions on page 223.
●
Never allow the brake to rub and do not
use the brake pedal too often or for long
periods, as the brakes can overheat. This
reduces the br
aking power, increases the
braking distance or even causes a brake
system fault.
●
If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-
cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or
parking brake.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
pery or w
et, the kick
-down feature could
cause the driving wheels to spin, which
could result in skidding.
CAUTION
●
If you stop the v
ehicle on a gradient, do
not attempt to stop it from rolling by de-
pressing the accelerator when a gear has
been selected. This could cause overheat-
ing and damage the automatic gearbox.
●
If you allow the vehicle to roll with the
lever in position N and the engine off, the
automatic gearbox will be damaged by
lack of lubrication.
●
In certain driving situations or traffic con-
ditions, the gears could overheat and be
damaged! If the warning lamp lights up,
stop the vehicle as soon as you can and
wait for the gearbox to cool
›››
page 228.
●
If the gearbox operates with the backup
programme, take the vehicle to a special-
ised workshop and have the fault repaired
without delay.
Launch-control program
3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of more
than 125 kW
, and petrol of more than 140 kW.
The Launch-control programme enables
maximum acceleration from a standstill.
Condition: the engine must have reached op-
erating temperature and the steering wheel
must not be turned.
The engine speed for Launch-control is differ-
ent on petrol and diesel engines.
To use the Launch-control you must discon-
nect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the
infotainment system menu
›››
page 84. The
warning lamp will stay switched on or will
flash slowly depending on whether or not the
vehicle has a driver information system*.
On vehicles with the driver information sys-
tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and
the corresponding text message Stability
control deactivated (temporary) appears
on the instrument panel to indicate the deac-
tivation status.
226
Start and driving
●
With the engine running, s
wit
ch off traction
control (ASR)
›››
page 272
1)
.
●
Press the brake pedal with your left foot
and hold it down for at least one second.
●
Turn the selector lever to position S or Tip-
tronic, or select the sport driving profile from
the SEAT Drive Profile*
›››
page 232.
●
With your right foot, press the accelerator
down to the full throttle or kick-down position.
The engine speed will stabilise at about
3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about
2,000 rpm (diesel engine).
●
Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The
vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.
WARNING
●
Alw
ays adapt your driving style to the
traffic conditions.
●
Only use the Launch control programme
when road and traffic conditions permit,
and make sure your manner of driving and
accelerating the vehicle does not incon-
venience or endanger other road users.
●
Make sure that the ESC remains switched
on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC
are deactivated, the wheels may start to
spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk
of accident!
●
Aft
er moving off, the ESC “sport” mode
should be deactivated by briefly pressing
the button.
Note
●
Aft
er using the L
aunch control pro-
gramme, the temperature in the gearbox
may have increased considerably. In this
case, the programme could be disabled for
several minutes. The programme can be
used again after the cooling phase.
●
Accelerating with the launch control pro-
gramme places a heavy load on all parts of
the vehicle. This can result in increased
wear and tear.
downhill assistant*
Downhill speed control is activated when the
l
e
ver is in the D/S position and the brake is
applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag-
ed.
The assistant attempts to maintain the speed
at which the vehicle was travelling when the
brake was applied, within logical limits. It may
be necessary to correct the speed by press-
ing the brake.
The assistant can only change down as far
as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep
slopes you may have to switch to tiptronic
mode and thus manually change down to
2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine
braking and take the load off the brake sys-
tem.
Downhill speed control is deactivated as
soon as the road levels out again or you press
the accelerator pedal.
On vehicles with cruise control system*
›››
page 241, downhill speed control is acti-
vated when you set a cruising speed.
WARNING
The downhill speed control cannot defy the
laws of physics. Ther
efore, speed cannot
be maintained constant in all situations. Al-
ways be prepared to use the brakes!
1)
Vehicles without a driver information system:
the warning l
amp flashes slowly. Vehicles with a
driver information system: the warning lamp re-
mains on.
227
Driving
Inertia mode
The inertia mode allows you to travel certain
distances without using the accel
erator,
which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-
ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.
Activation of the inertia mode
Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less
than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130
km / h (12 and 80 mph).
●
Gently take your foot off the accelerator.
The indication will be shown on the instru-
ment clust
er , the engaged gear and cur-
rent consumption will disappear and the
word Inertia will appear.
The gears will automatically disengage and
the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of
the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the
engine runs at idling speed.
Stopping inertia mode
●
Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.
To take advantage of the engine's inertia
mode, simply remove your foot from the ac-
celerator.
Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged
section with less energy) and inertia discon-
nection (= shorter section without the need
for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption
and emission balance.
If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile
›››
page 232, the inertia mode can be activa-
ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. In
Eco mode, it is activated whenever the oper-
ating conditions are met, regardless of the
smoothness with which the foot is removed
from the accelerator.
WARNING
●
If the inertia mode has been s
witched on,
take into account, when approaching an
obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-
ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!
●
When using inertia mode while travelling
down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:
risk of accident!
●
If other users drive your vehicle, warn
them about inertia mode.
Note
●
The driver message
Inertia is only dis-
played with the current consumption. In in-
ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-
played (for example “D” or “E” will appear
instead of “D7” or “E7”).
●
The inertia mode will be automatically
disconnected on gradients steeper than
15%.
Indications on the instrument panel
displ
ay
Clutch
Clutch overheating! Please stop!
●
The clutch has overheated and could be
damaged. Stop and w
ait for the gearbox to
cool with the engine at idling speed and the
selector lever in position P. When the warning
lamp and the driver message switch off, have
the fault corrected by a specialised work-
shop without delay. If they do not turn off, do
not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
Faults in the gearbox
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle
and place the lever in the position
P.
●
There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the ve-
hicle in a saf
e place and do not continue driv-
ing. Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: System fault! You may
continue driving.
●
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
228
Start and driving
Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving with restrictions.
Reverse gear disabled
●
T
ake the vehicle to a specialised workshop
and have the fault repaired.
Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving in D until switch-
ing off the engine
●
Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek spe-
cialist assistance.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
driving accordingly
●
Continue driving at moderate speeds.
When the warning lamp switches off, you can
continue driving in a normal manner.
Gearbox: press the brake and en-
gage a gear again.
●
If the warning was caused by the tempera-
ture of the gearbox, this driver message will
be displayed when the gearbox has cooled
again.
Manual release of the selector lev-
er
Fig. 165
Gear selector lever: manual release
fr
om the parking position.
In the event of a power failure when starting
(e
.g. dischar
ged battery), the lever will remain
locked in position P. To move it to position N to
move the vehicle, there is an emergency re-
lease device under the centre console, on the
right side. Releasing the selector lever re-
quires a certain degree of practical skill.
Removing the cover from the selector lev-
er
●
Apply the electronic parking brake
›››
.
●
Carefully pull the corners of the selector
l
e
ver boot and twist it upwards over the lever
handle.
Releasing the selector lever
●
Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press
the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed
down
›››
Fig. 165.
●
Press the lock button on the selector lev-
er and move it to position N.
●
After completing the emergency release,
reattach the selector lever boot to the gear-
box console.
WARNING
Do not move the lever from position P if the
parking brak
e is not firmly engaged. If you
still think the car could move, press the
brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could
move in an unforeseen way and cause an
accident or serious injury.
Gear-change recommenda-
tion
Sel
ecting the optimal gear
Depending on the equipment on the instru-
ment panel scr
een, a r
ecommendation is
shown with the gear that should be engaged
to optimise consumption.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the
lever must be in Tiptronic mode
›››
page 224.
»
229
Driving
No recommendation will appear if the opti-
mal gear is engaged. The curr
ent gear will be
displ
ayed.
Display Meaning
Optimum gear.
Changing to a higher gear is rec-
ommended.
Changing to a lower gear is rec-
ommended.
Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
the par
ticul
ate filter
When the exhaust system detects that the
particulate filter is close to saturation, this
system’s self-cleaning function recommends
the optimal gear for that function
›››
page 313.
WARNING
The gear change recommendation is an
auxiliary function and in no case should be
a substit
ute for careful driving.
●
Responsibility for selecting the correct
gear, depending on the circumstances,
rests solely with the driver.
For the sake of the environment
Selecting the correct gear can help to save
fuel.
Note
The recommended gear indication turns off
when the clutch pedal is pr
essed or when
the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi-
tion.
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Control l
amps
3 Valid f
or vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive
It lights up white
Hill Descent Control is active.
It lights up grey
Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is
swit
ched on, but is not adjusting.
Some control and warning lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is s
wit
ched on to
check certain functions. They will switch off
after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
Description and operation
Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steep
descents by automatically br
aking all four
wheels, both when moving forward and in re-
verse. As the anti-lock brake system remains
active, it prevents the wheels from locking. In
vehicles with manual transmission, the Hill
Descent Control adapts the theoretical
speed without slowing the engine below its
idling speed.
After starting the descent of a slope below
30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini-
mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of
30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the
driver may increase or decrease the speed
within the limit by pressing the accelerator or
the brake. At this point the function is interrup-
ted and, if necessary, it is then reactivated.
Even so, it is imperative that the surface guar-
antees sufficient adhesion. For this reason,
the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its func-
tion when, for example, descending a slope
with a frozen or slippery surface.
Hill Descent Control is available when the
dash panel display shows the message .
Hill Descent Control automatically intervenes
if the following conditions are met:
●
The vehicle engine is running.
●
The Offroad driving profile has been selec-
t
ed
›››
page 232. Driving at a speed below
230
Start and driving
30 km/h (18 mph) (the message is sho
wn
on the instrument panel).
●
The sl
ope of the descent is at least 10%
when driving forward and 9% when driving in
reverse.
●
The brake and the accelerator are not
pressed.
Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press-
ing the brake and the accelerator or if the
slope is below 5%. The function can be
switched off manually in the infotainment
system using the > HDC function button.
WARNING
Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an
accident could occur and cause injury.
●
Hill Descent Contr
ol is only an auxiliary
system that in some situations may not suf-
ficiently brake the vehicle when going
down a slope.
●
The speed of the vehicle may increase
despite the intervention of Hill Descent
Control.
Steering
Inf
ormation r
elating to different ve-
hicle processes.
Electro-mechanical power steering adapts
electr
onically to the speed of the car, torque
and steering angle.
Even if the power steering fails or the engine
is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate
the steering wheel as long as the key remains
in the ignition, but more force must be ap-
plied.
Progressive steering
Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may or
may not incorporate a progressive steering
system.
In city traffic you do not need to turn so much
on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns.
On the road or on the motorway, progressive
steering transmits, for example, in bends, a
sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy-
namic driving sensation.
Steering assist
This help assists the driver in critical situa-
tions. It recommends turning the steering
wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre
(counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid
skidding
›››
.
WARNING
Steering assist helps the driver in critical
situations. The driv
er is the person who has
to control the vehicle's steering at all times.
Control lamp
It lights up red
Faulty steering.
Do not continue driving, stop the v
ehicle as soon as
possible and in a safe manner.
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired as soon as possible.
It lights up yellow
Limited steering operation.
Drive car
efully to a specialised workshop to have the
steering checked.
If the warning light does not come on again after re-
starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is
not necessary to check the steering.
OR: The 12-volt batt
ery was disconnected and re-
connected.
Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).
»
231
Driving
It flashes yellow
The steering column is jammed.
When stopped, t
urn the steering wheel in both direc-
tions.
OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock.
T
urn off the ignition and turn it on again. Consider the
messages shown on the instrument panel display.
Do not continue driving if the steering column re-
mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek
specialist assistance.
The control lamp should light up for a few
seconds when the ignition is swit
ched on. It
should go out once the engine is started.
WARNING
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es.
●
If the warning lamps and the correspond-
ing messages are ignor
ed, the vehicle may
stall in traffic, causing serious damage or
accidents and injuries.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
SEAT Drive Profiles*
Intr
oduction
The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to
choose betw
een the
Eco, Normal, Sport and
Individual profiles, which modify the behav-
iour of several vehicle functions, providing dif-
ferent driving experiences.
In addition, the 4Drive version features the
Offroad and Snow profiles.
The Individual profile can be configured ac-
cording to personal preferences. The other
profiles have a fixed configuration.
Description
Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-
hicl
e
, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the
following functions:
Engine
Depending on the profile selected, the engine
responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac-
celerator being pressed. When the Eco pro-
file is selected, the Start-stop function is acti-
vated.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
gear change timing is changed to put the
changes at higher or lower revolutions. The
Eco profile activates the Inertia function,
thereby reducing consumption. The rest of
the driving profiles will activate the inertia use
function when the selector lever is not in the S
position, depending on how the accelerator
pedal is released
›››
page 228. When the ve-
hicle is turned on again, the function is activa-
ted by default to reduce consumption.
With manual transmission, the Eco profile
changes the gear change recommendations
to facilitate more efficient driving.
Dynamic chassis control (DCC)*
DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb-
ers to the condition of the road and current
driving conditions, according to the pre-set
programme.
In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-
ing message is displayed on the instrument
screen Fault: shock absorber regula-
tion
Steering
The power steering varies its driving modes
and adapts to the profile selected, thus offer-
ing the best behaviour for each situation.
Air conditioning
The Climatronic* can operate in Eco mode
with particularly limited consumption.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Depending on the driving profile, the perform-
ance of the ACC varies, to allow more sporty
acceleration and braking or a more respect-
ful fuel consumption.
232
Start and driving
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
In the Offr
oad
and Snow driving profiles, the
electronic stability Control (ESC)
›››
page 270 adjusts to adapt to the terrain.
In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti-
vated in the Offroad profile
›››
page 230.
PreCrash system
The PreCrash system adapts according to
the selected configuration. The Sport and
Offroad driving profiles have specific settings
to adapt them to driving and terrain charac-
teristics
›››
page 23.
Setting the driving profile
Fig. 166
Centre console: Driving Experience
butt
on.
You can select the Eco, Normal, Spor
t
, Indi-
vidual, Offroad
1)
and Snow
1)
.
The desired mode can be selected as follows:
●
Turn the Driving Experience button as much
as necessary to light up the desired profile on
the infotainment system display and on the
same driving experience button
›››
Fig. 166.
●
OR: select the desired profile in the infotain-
ment system from the menu that opens when
you rotate the Driving Experience button.
The features of each profile can be seen by
pressing the Profile information function
button.
In the Individual profile it is possible to con-
figure the characteristics of the vehicle using
the Profile setup function button.
An icon on the touch screen provides infor-
mation about the active profile. The selector
displays the selected profile with a yellow
LED.
Driving pro-
file
Char
acteristics
Places the vehicle in a low state
of consumption, facilit
ating a
fuel-saving driving style that is
respectful to the environment.
Driving pro-
file
Char
acteristics
Normal
Offers a balanced driving experi-
ence, suit
able for everyday use.
Sport
Provides a complete dynamic
perf
ormance in the v
ehicle, ena-
bling the user a more sporty driv-
ing style.
Individual
It allows you to personalise the
configur
ation. The functions that
can be adjust
ed depend on the
equipment fitted in the vehicle.
Offroad
a)
It adjusts the vehicle's parame-
ters in or
der to maintain optimal
off-road driving.
Snow
a)
It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour
for driving on slippery road sur-
faces, optimising grip and ma-
noeuvrability.
a)
Only for 4Drive models.
WARNING
When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-
tention t
o all traffic: doing otherwise could
cause an accident.
»
1)
Only for 4Drive models.
233
Driving
Note
●
When the engine is swit
ched off it will
store the driving profile that was selected
when the ignition was turned off. When re-
started, the engine and the gearbox will
start in their Normal mode. To return the en-
gine and gearbox to the desired mode, re-
select the corresponding driving profile by
turning the Driving Experience button or se-
lect from the infotainment display.
●
When the vehicle is restarted after using
the Offroad or Snow settings, the system is
always activated in the Normal profile.
●
Your speed and driving style must always
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-
fic conditions.
●
The Eco profile is not recommended
when towing a vehicle.
Driving tips
Running in
Please observe the instructions for running-in
ne
w components.
Running-in the engine
A ne
w engine must be driven through a run-in
period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000
miles). During its first few hours of running, the
internal friction in the engine is greater than
later on when all the moving parts have bed-
ded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km
(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-
formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it
should be driven at a moderate speed (espe-
cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce
engine wear and increase its useful life. Never
drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always
engage a lower gear when the engine works
“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or
600 miles, please note:
●
Do not use full throttle.
●
Do not force the engine above two thirds of
its maximum speed.
●
Do not tow a trailer.
Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600
to 1000 miles), gradually increase power
until reaching the maximum speed and high
engine speeds.
Running in new tyres and brake pads
●
Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres
›››
page 329.
●
Information about brakes
›››
page 266.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the
engine will be increased and the engine oil
consumption r
educed.
Four-wheel drive (4Drive)
3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive
On f
our-wheel drive models, the engine pow-
er is distributed to all four wheels
General notes
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine
power is distributed to all four wheels. The
distribution of power is controlled automati-
cally according to your driving style and the
road conditions. Also see
›››
page 270.
The four-wheel drive is specially designed to
complement the superior engine power. This
combination gives the vehicle exceptional
handling and performance capabilities, both
on normal roads and in more difficult condi-
tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-
haps especially for this reason), it is important
to observe certain safety points
›››
.
Wint
er t
yres
Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
have plenty of traction in winter conditions,
even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,
we still recommend that winter tyres or all-
season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to
give even better braking response.
234
Start and driving
Snow chains
On r
oads wher
e snow chains are mandatory,
this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive
›››
page 334.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four
tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-
ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying
tread depths
›››
page 329.
Off-roader?
If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: it
does not have enough ground clearance to
be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid
rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as
possible.
WARNING
●
Even with f
our-wheel drive, you should al-
ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-
tions. Do not let the extra safety features
tempt you into taking any risks when driv-
ing. Risk of accident!
●
The braking capability of your vehicle is
limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no
different from a car without four-wheel
drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast
on firm or slippery roads just because the
vehicle still has good acceleration in these
conditions. Risk of accident!
●
On wet roads bear in mind that the front
wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose
contact with the road if the car is driven too
fast. If this shoul
d happen, there will be no
sudden increase in engine speed to warn
the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel
drive car. For this reason you should always
choose a driving speed suitable for the
road conditions. Risk of accident!
Economical and environmentally
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and w
ear t
o the engine, brakes and tyres all
depend largely on driving style. Consumption
can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-
cient driving type. The following section gives
you some tips on lessening the impact on the
environment and reducing your operating
costs at the same time.
Active cylinder management (ACT®)*
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
cylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-
vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-
ing situation does not require too much pow-
er. The number of active cylinders can be
seen on the instrument panel display.
›››
page 68.
Foresight when driving
If you think ahead when driving, you will need
to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take
advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-
ever possible, with a gear engaged. This
takes advantage of the engine braking effect,
reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-
sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.
Changing gear to save energy
An effective way of saving is to change in ad-
vance to a higher gear.
Manual transmission: shift up from first to
second gear as soon as possible. Choosing
the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the
highest possible gear appropriate for the
driving situation (the engine should continue
functioning with cyclical regularity).
Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-
ally and without reaching the “kick-down”
position.
Avoid driving at high speed
Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,
whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-
sion of harmful gases and noise pollution
multiply as speed is increased. Driving at
moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Reduce idling time
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is
automatically reduced. In vehicles without
the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off
the engine, for example, at level crossings
and at traffic lights that remain red for long
»
235
Driving
periods of time. When an engine has reached
oper
ating t
emperature, and depending on
the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off
for a minimum of about 5 seconds already
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-
ry for restarting.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high during
this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best
to drive off immediately after starting the en-
gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Regular maintenance
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even
before the engine is started. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced
engine can consume up to 10% more fuel
than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to
reach their optimal operating temperature
in order to minimise fuel consumption and
emissions.
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate
amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
ing temperature after about four kilometres
(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return
to a normal level.
Check tyre pressure
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
correct pressures
›››
page 331 to save fuel. If
the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-
ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as
they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
Since the luggage rack increases the aero-
dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-
move it when not needed. At speeds of
100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%
of fuel.
Save electrical energy
The engine drives the alternator, thereby
generating electricity. This implies that any
increase in power consumption also increa-
ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch
off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices
that use a lot of electricity includes the blow-
er at a high setting, the rear window heating
or the seat heating*.
Note
●
If you have the St
art-Stop system, it is
recommended that it should not be discon-
nected.
●
It is recommended that you close the
windows when driving at more than
60 km/h (37 mph).
●
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
plate slip. This causes wear and can dam-
age the clutch plate.
●
Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the
brake. The fuel consumption will be lower
and you will prevent the clutch plate from
being damaged.
●
Use the engine brake on downhills by
changing to the gear that is best suited for
the gradient. Fuel consumption will be
“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.
Driving on flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on
fl
ooded r
oads, take the following into ac-
count:
●
The water should never come above the
lower edge of the bodywork.
●
Drive at pedestrian speed.
236
Driver assistance systems
WARNING
After driving through flooded zones, brak-
ing effectiv
eness can decrease if the brake
discs or pads are damp
›››
page 266.
CAUTION
●
Driving through fl
ooded areas may dam-
age vehicle components such as the en-
gine, transmission or electrical system.
●
Whenever driving through water, the
Start-Stop system* must be switched off
›››
page 219.
Note
●
Check the depth of the wat
er before en-
tering the flooded zone.
●
Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,
or stop the engine.
●
Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-
tion cause waves that could exceed your
vehicle's critical height.
●
Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion)
›››
page 342.
Trips abroad
●
With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured
that l
ead-fr
ee petrol is available throughout
the journey
›››
page 308, Fuel types. Seek in-
formation about service station networks sell-
ing unleaded fuel.
●
In some countries, it is possible that your
vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may
not be available or the technical services
may only be able to make limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will provide
information about the technical preparation
that your vehicle requires and also about
necessary maintenance and repair possibili-
ties.
CAUTION
SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-
age to the v
ehicle due to the use of a lower
quality fuel, an inadequate service or the
non-availability of genuine spare parts.
Driver assistance systems
Gener
al not
es
Safety advice
WARNING
●
Responsibilit
y for driving rests with the
driver at all times. The drive assist systems
are not a replacement for driver attention.
Focus all your attention on driving and be
prepared to intervene at all times.
●
Use the drive assist systems only when
conditions allow. The driving style must al-
ways be suitable for the weather, visibility,
road and traffic conditions.
●
In order for drive assist systems to react
correctly, sensors and cameras must oper-
ate without limitations. Please read the
notes on sensors and cameras in this chap-
ter.
Note
●
Keep in mind the specific rul
es of each
country, especially when it comes to driv-
ing, formation of an emergency corridor,
braking distance, speed, parking position,
wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re-
sponsible for always complying with the
specific regulations of each country.
●
The area in front of and around the radar
sensor should not be covered with
»
237
Driving
adhesives, additional headlights or similar
items, as this coul
d have a negative impact
on the operation of the assistants. If the ve-
hicle is not properly repaired or structural
modifications are made to it, the operation
of the assistants may be affected.
●
The repair and adjustment of sensors and
cameras requires special knowledge and
tools. It is recommended to visit a SEAT
dealership for this purpose.
System limits
WARNING
●
Drive assist syst
ems can not overcome
the laws of physics. Depending on the cir-
cumstances, a collision may not be avoida-
ble.
●
Warnings, notices and indicator lamps
may not be displayed on time, or may be
displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap-
proaches too quickly.
●
Corrective interventions by drive assist
systems (e.g. interventions in the steering
or brakes) may be insufficient or may never
occur, depending on the circumstances. As
a driver, you must be prepared to act at all
times.
Note
●
Due to the syst
em's detection limits in the
surroundings, the systems may not give
warnings or intervene on time, or they
might do so even if it is not desired. In addi-
tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly
interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result,
warn the driver in an unexpected manner.
●
When the towing mode is selected, some
assist systems may react with limitations,
in an unusual way or may not be available.
Keep in mind the instructions relating to the
towing mode.
Drive assist sensors and
camer
as
Fr
ont radar
Fig. 167
On the front bumper: radar sensors.
Fig. 168 Detection area.
A radar sensor may be fitted to the front
bumper of the v
ehicl
e
›››
Fig. 167. The front
radar detects any objects in its detection
zone
›››
Fig. 168 and provides support for the
following functions:
●
Front Assist
›››
page 245.
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
›››
page 248.
The radar can have a range of up to 120m
(400ft) depending on road and weather con-
ditions.
WARNING
The visibility of the radar sensor can be im-
paired by dir
t or environmental influences
such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects
etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC
functions may stop working. The instrument
panel displays the following message: No
sensor vision! And the Front Assist
238
Driver assistance systems
unavailable or ACC unavailable warning
lights come on.
●
Clean the sensor area on the bumper as
indicated in
›
››
page 344, Cleaning the ex-
terior. When the radar sensor starts cor-
rectly detecting again, the message disap-
pears from the screen and the functions
become available again.
CAUTION
●
If the r
adar sensor is dir
ty or poorly ad-
justed, the Front Assist system may give un-
necessary warnings and apply the brakes
inappropriately.
●
The operation of the radar can be affec-
ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig-
nal. This may occur, for example, in an en-
closed car park or due to the presence of
metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets
used in road works).
●
The sensor may not be adjusted correct-
ly if it receives an impact. This may com-
promise the system's efficacy or discon-
nect it. If you have the feeling that the ra-
dar sensor is damaged or adjusted incor-
rectly, switch off the Front Assist and ACC
functions to avoid any damage. If this oc-
curs have it adjusted.
Front camera
Fig. 169
On the windscreen: field of vision of
the L
ane Assist syst
em.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may be fitt
ed with a fr
ont camera on the front
windscreen
›››
Fig. 169. This camera detects
lane boundaries (lines) to provide support for
the following functions:
●
Lane Assist
›››
page 254.
●
Travel Assist
›››
page 256.
●
Emergency assist
›››
page 259.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
tems, t
ake the following points into consid-
eration:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
and ice.
●
Do not cov
er the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
sion.
Rear radar
Fig. 170 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor
z
ones.
Fig. 171 Sensor detection zones
»
239
Driving
The radar sensors are located on the left and
right of the bumper and ar
e not visibl
e from
the outside
›››
Fig. 170. The sensors monitor
both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-
hicle
›››
Fig. 171.
They support the following functions:
●
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
›››
page 262.
●
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)
›››
page 264.
Automatic deactivation of supported func-
tions
The rear radar sensors deactivate automati-
cally when, among other reasons, one of the
sensors is detected to be permanently cov-
ered. This may be the case if, for example,
there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the
sensors.
The relevant text message will appear in the
dash panel display.
CAUTION
●
The radar sensors on the r
ear bumper
may be damaged or shifted in the event of
a collision, for example, when entering or
exiting a parking space. This may result in
the system disconnecting itself, or at least
possibly having its functionality diminished.
●
In order to ensure that the radar sensors
work properly, keep the rear bumper free of
snow and ice and do not cover it.
●
The rear bumper shoul
d only be painted
with paint authorised by SEAT. The lane de-
parture warning's functions may be limited
or work incorrectly if other paints are used.
●
The visibility of radar sensors may be af-
fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or
dirt, among others. Clean the area in front
of the sensors.
●
Never use the lane departure warning,
the rear cross traffic alert or the door
opening warning if the radar sensors are
dirty.
Ultrasound sensors
The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen-
sors t
o perf
orm the following functions:
●
Park Assist
›››
page 274.
●
Parking aid Plus
›››
page 282.
●
Rear parking aid
›››
page 285.
CAUTION
●
Damage to the r
adiator grille, bumper,
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can
modify the orientation of the sensors. This
can affect the parking aid function. Have
the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
●
A number plate or number plate holder
with dimensions that exceed the space for
the number plate, or a cured or deformed
number plate can cause false detections or
a loss of visibilit
y for the sensors.
Note
●
In or
der t
o guarantee good operation,
keep the sensors clean, free of snow and
ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
other objects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
unless you do so very briefly, and always
keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
●
Fitting certain accessories to the front of
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation
of the Park Assist.
Area View system
Fig. 172 In the rear lid handle: Area View sys-
t
em
240
Driver assistance systems
Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, it
can be fitt
ed with 1 or 4 camer
as that provide
support to the following functions:
●
Area View
›››
page 289
●
Rear View Camera
›››
page 293.
WARNING
The use of a number plate may interfere in
the views sho
wn on the screen, since the
cameras' field of vision may be reduced.
CAUTION
●
In order t
o guarantee good system oper-
ation, keep the cameras clean, free of snow
or ice, and do not cover them with adhe-
sives or other objects.
●
Never use abrasive cleaning products to
clean the camera lenses.
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove
ice or snow from the camera lenses. Doing
so could damage the lenses.
Cruise control system
(CCS)*
Contr
ol l
amp
It lights up green
The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and
active.
OR: The Adaptive Cruise Contr
ol system (CCS) is
switched on and active.
OR: the speed limiter is s
witched on and active.
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on and should turn off after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for
the function check.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
Introduction
Fig. 173
Instrument panel display: GRA status
indications.
The cruise control system (CCS) is able to
maint
ain the set speed fr
om 20 km/h (15
mph).
The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by
ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking
the vehicle
›››
.
St
at
us display
GRA status
›››
Fig. 173
CCS temporarily switched off. The set
speed is displayed in small or darkened
figures.
System error. Contact a specialised
workshop.
»
A
B
241
Driving
CCS switched on. The speed memory is
empt
y.
The CCS is s
witched on. The set speed is
displayed in large figures.
Changing gear in CCS mode
The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch
pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
cally after a gear is engaged.
Travelling down hills with the CCS
If the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-
cle speed downhill, brake and change down
a gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarily
disabled by pressing the brake.
Automatic off
The GRA disconnects automatically or is
temporarily interrupted:
●
If the system detects a fault that could af-
fect the working order of the CCS.
●
If you press and maintain the accelerator
pedal for a certain time, driving faster than
the stored speed.
●
If the dynamic driving control systems inter-
vene, ASR, ESC, etc.
●
If the brake pedal is pressed.
●
If the airbag is triggered.
●
If the lever is taken out of the D/S position.
C
D
WARNING
Use of GRA could cause accidents and se-
ver
e injuries if it is not possible to drive at a
constant speed maintaining the safety dis-
tance.
●
Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-
tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-
cient, on steep roads, with several bends or
in slippery circumstances or on flooded
roads.
●
Never use the CCS when driving off-road
or on unpaved roads.
●
Adapt your speed and the distance to the
vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-
er, the condition of the road and the traffic
situation.
●
To avoid unexpected operation of the
cruise control system, turn it off every time
you finish using it.
●
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
too high for other conditions.
●
If driving down a steep gradient, the GRA
cannot maintain a constant speed. The
speed can increase. In this case, brake and
change down a gear.
Operating the cruise control
Fig. 174
On the turn signal lever: controls for
oper
ating the GRA.
Connecting
●
Move the control
›
›
›
Fig. 174
1
to .
If no speed has been pr
ogr
ammed, the sys-
tem will not control it.
Activating the cruise control
●
Press button
›››
Fig. 174
2
in area
.
The curr
ent speed is stored and the cruise
control is activated.
Temporarily interrupting
●
Move the control
›››
Fig. 174
1
to
or
step on the brake.
The cruise control system is switched off tem-
porarily. The speed is stored.
242
Driver assistance systems
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Press button
›
›
›
Fig. 174
2
in area
.
Cruise contr
ol is activated at the stored
speed.
Adjusting the speed
While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be
adjusted with button
›››
Fig. 174
2
:
●
To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)
briefly pr
ess butt
on
›››
Fig. 174
2
in the area
.
●
To increase the speed without interruption,
k
eep butt
on
›››
Fig. 174
2
pressed down in
the ar
ea
.
●
To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)
briefly press button
›››
Fig. 174
2
in the area
.
●
To reduce the speed without interruption,
keep button
›››
Fig. 174
2
pressed down in
the ar
ea .
The v
ehicle adapts the current speed by ac-
celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi-
cle does not brake actively.
Switching off
●
Move control
›››
Fig. 174
1
to .
The syst
em is disconnect
ed and the memo-
rised speed is deleted.
Speed limiter
Control lamp
It lights up grey
The speed limiter is switched on without program-
ming the speed
It lights up green
The speed limiter is switched on and active.
Flashes green
The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee-
ded.
It lights up
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit-
er is active
.
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on and should turn off after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for
the function check.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
Introduction
Fig. 175
On the instrument panel display: indi-
cations of the speed limit
ed st
atus.
The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a
pr
ogr
ammed speed, from 30 km/h (19 mph)
approx. and faster.
›››
Depending on the equipment, the speed lim-
it
er can be oper
ated using the lever of the
turn signals
›››
page 245 or from the multi-
function steering wheel.
Display messages on the speed limiter
Status
›››
Fig. 175:
The speed limiter is active. The last speed
set is displayed in large figures.
The speed limiter is not active. The last
speed set is displayed in small or dark-
ened figures.
The speed limiter is switched off. The total
mileage is displayed.
»
A
B
C
243
Driving
Switching between the speed limiter and
GRA or ACC (whil
e the speed limit
er is
connected)
To change between the driving assistance
systems, press button
›››
Fig. 176
2
, then
sel
ect with the right thumb
wheel on the multi-
function steering wheel in the instrument
panel menu and press the thumbwheel to
confirm your selection.
It switches between the speed limiter and
cruise control (GRA) or the adaptive cruise
control (ACC).
Going down slopes with the speed limiter
If the programmed speed is exceeded while
driving downhill, after a short time the control
warning lamp
›››
page 243 flashes and
an audible warning may sound. Brake and
change down a gear.
Temporarily deactivate by pressing the
accelerator down
If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-
down) and the set speed is exceeded be-
cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is
temporarily disabled.
To confirm it being switched off an acoustic
signal sound once. While cruise control is off,
the control lamp flashes .
When the accelerator is no longer pressed
down and the speed is reduced below the set
value, the limiter switches on again. The con-
trol lamp lights up and remains lit.
Automatic off
The speed limiter is automatically switched
off:
●
If the system detects a fault that could neg-
atively affect the working order of the limiter.
●
If the airbag is triggered.
WARNING
After use, switch off the speed limiter to
pre
vent the speed being regulated without
it being required.
●
The speed limiter does not relieve the
driver of their responsibility to drive at the
appropriate speed. Do not drive at high
speed if not necessary.
●
Using the speed limiter in adverse weath-
er conditions is dangerous and can cause
serious accidents. Use the speed limiter
only when the condition of the road surface
and the weather and traffic conditions al-
low it.
●
When driving on a steep gradient, the
speed limiter cannot limit the vehicle’s
speed. This can increase. In this case, brake
and change down a gear.
CAUTION
For automatic switching off due to system
failur
es, for security reasons, the limiter is
only completely switched off when the
driver stops pressing the accelerator or
consciously switches it off.
Note
●
Differ
ent versions of the instrument panel
are available and therefore the versions
and instructions on the display may vary.
●
If the cruise control (GRA), the adaptive
cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter
are connected when the ignition is switch-
ed off, the assistants will switch it when the
ignition is switched on, but only the speed
limiter will maintain the last programmed
speed.
244
Driver assistance systems
Operating the speed limiter with
the t
urn signal l
ever
Fig. 176
On the turn signal lever: buttons to
oper
at
e the speed limiter.
Connecting
●
Move control
›
›
›
Fig. 176
1
to position
and pr
ess butt
on
2
.
The l
ast pr
ogrammed speed is stored. It does
not take effect yet.
Activating the speed limiter
●
While driving, press button
›››
Fig. 176
3
in
the ar
ea .
The curr
ent speed is stored as the maximum
speed.
Setting the programmed speed
You can set the speed using button
›››
Fig. 176
3
:
●
Briefly pr
ess ar
ea to increase speed in
small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph).
●
Press and hold the area to continu-
ously increase speed in increments of 10
km/h (5 mph).
●
Briefly press area to decrease speed
in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph).
●
Press and hold area to continuously
decrease speed in increments of 10 km/h (5
mph).
The speed is limited to the set value.
Switching off the speed limiter
●
Move control
›››
Fig. 176
1
to position .
The syst
em s
witches off.
Switching off temporarily
If you want to temporarily deactivate the
speed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move the
control
›››
Fig. 176
1
to position
or
pr
ess button
2
.
Aft
er o
vertaking, the speed limiter can be ac-
tivated with the previously programmed
speed by pressing button
›››
Fig. 176
3
in the
ar
ea
.
Emergency brake assistance
system (Front Assist)*
Introduction
Fig. 177
On the instrument panel display: ad-
v
ance w
arning indications.
The objective of the system is to prevent
head-on collisions against ob
jects that may
be in the v
ehicle’s path or minimise the con-
sequences of such impacts.
Depending on several factors and how criti-
cal the situation is, the system operates in a
staggered manner. First it warns the driver,
and if the driver’s reaction does not occur or
is insufficient, it activates independent emer-
gency braking.
The function is intended to prevent collisions
with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same
lane travelling in the same direction, or with
pedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path or
»
245
Driving
travelling in the same lane and direction. It
may not activ
at
e in other hazard situations
›››
.
Fr
ont Assist is enabl
ed between 4 km/h (2.5
mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending
on a range of conditions, some of the func-
tions described below are omitted to optimize
the behaviour of the system.
Front Assist is a driving assistance function
that can never replace the driver’s atten-
tion.
Safety distance warning
If the system detects that you are driving too
close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the
driver with this indication on the instrument
panel display .
The timing of the warning varies according to
other factors: driver behaviour and speed.
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with
the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by
means of an audible warning and an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 177.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
possible emergency braking
›››
.
Critical warning
If the driv
er f
ails to react to the advance
warning, the system may actively intervene
in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn
the driver of the imminent danger of a colli-
sion.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the critical
warning, the system may initiate independ-
ent emergency braking by progressively in-
creasing the braking in accordance with how
critical the situation is.
Driver emergency brake assistance sys-
tem
The system may detect that the driver is not
braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In
this case, it will increase the braking intensity.
The system cannot prevent a collision, al-
though it can significantly minimise the con-
sequences by reducing the speed and the
force of the impact.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
WARNING
Front Assist cannot change the laws of
physics or repl
ace the driver in terms of
keeping control of the vehicle and reacting
to a possibl
e emergency situation.
WARNING
Following a Front Assist emergency warn-
ing, pay immediat
e att
ention to the situa-
tion and try to avoid the collision as appli-
cable.
●
If the Front Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly
intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.
Have the system checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership.
●
Always adapt your speed and distance
away from the vehicle in front of you at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
In complex driving situations, Front Assist
may issue warnings and intervene in brak-
ing unnecessarily.
●
If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
paired by dirt or because the radar sensor
has lost its settings, the system may issue
unnecessary warnings and intervene inop-
portunely in the braking.
●
The Front Assist does not react to animals
or vehicles crossing your path or ap-
proaching head-on down the same lane.
246
Driver assistance systems
●
The Front Assist does not r
eact to pedes-
trians walking head-on in the same lane.
●
The driver must always be ready to take
over the control of the vehicle.
Note
●
When Fr
ont Assist is connect
ed, the indi-
cations of other functions on the screen
may be hidden.
●
When the Front Assist causes a braking,
the brake pedal is “harder”.
●
Automatic interventions by the Front As-
sist on the brakes may be interrupted by
pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving
the wheel.
●
The Front Assist may brake the vehicle
until it stops completely. However, the
brake system does not halt the vehicle per-
manently. Use the foot brake!
●
If the Front Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes
several times unnecessarily), switch it off.
Operation of the emergency brake
assist
ance syst
em (Front Assist)
Fig. 178
On the instrument panel display: Front
Assist deactiv
at
ed indication.
The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-
tion is s
wit
ched on.
When the Front Assist is switched off, so too
are the advance warning and the distance
warning functions.
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist
activated. Exceptions
›››
page 248, Deacti-
vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol-
lowing situations.
Switching the Front Assist on and off
With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist
can be deactivated or activated as follows:
●
Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
tems
›››
page 81.
●
OR: using the infotainment system: press
the function button > SETTINGS > Driv-
er assistance
›››
page 88.
When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-
cation
›››
Fig. 178 will be displayed on the
instrument panel.
Activating or deactivating the pre-warning
(advance warning)
The advance warning can be switched on or
off in the infotainment system using the func-
tion button > SETTINGS > Driver as-
sistance
›››
page 88.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping advance warning
active.
Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys-
tem the advance warning function may be
adapted in the following modes:
●
Advance
●
Medium
●
Delayed
●
Deactivated
SEAT recommends driving with the function in
“Medium” mode.
»
247
Driving
Switching distance warning on and off
The dist
ance w
arning can be switched on or
off in the infotainment system using the func-
tion button > SETTINGS > Driver as-
sistance
›››
page 88.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance
warning active.
Deactivating Front Assist tempora-
rily in the following situations
In the following situations the Front Assist
shoul
d be deactiv
ated due to the system's
limitations:
●
When the vehicle is to be towed.
●
If the vehicle is on a test bed.
●
When the radar sensor is damaged.
●
If the radar sensor receives a violent im-
pact.
●
If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
●
If the radar sensor is temporarily covered
by an accessory.
●
When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto
transportation.
System limitations
Fig. 179
On the instrument panel display: ini-
tial syst
em self
-calibration indication.
Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to
the syst
em. Thus, in cert
ain circumstances,
some of the reactions may be inappropriate
from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention
in order to intervene if necessary.
The following conditions may cause the
Front Assist not to react or to do so too
late:
●
In the first few instants of driving after
switching on the ignition, due to the system’s
initial auto-calibration. During this period, a
status icon
›››
Fig. 179is displayed.
●
If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-
aged.
●
If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
●
On taking tight bends or complex paths.
●
Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
●
If the ASR has been disconnected or the
ESC activated in Sport mode
›››
page 272.
●
If the ESC is controlling.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or
sheets used in road works.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
In case of snow or heavy rain.
●
In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
bikes.
●
Misaligned vehicles.
●
Vehicles crossing the other's path.
●
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tion.
●
Loads and accessories of other vehicles
that protrude over the sides, backwards or
over the top.
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*
Introduction
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains
a const
ant speed set by the driv
er. When
approaching another vehicle in front, the
248
Driver assistance systems
ACC detects it and adapts the speed au-
t
omatically, maint
aining a distance set by
the driver.
Does my vehicle have ACC?
Your vehicle has ACC if it has a configuration
menu in the infotainment system
›››
page 88
and if it has the ACC function buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel
›››
Fig. 180.
Speed range
ACC regulates speeds between 30 km/h (20
mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph).
If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gear-
box, the ACC can bring the vehicle to a
standstill if a vehicle in front of it stops.
If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox,
you must pay attention to speed and gear
changes. The ACC is deactivated if the
speed is too low (less than 30 km/h) of the
engine RPM is too low or high.
Driver intervention prompt
ACC is subject to certain limitations in-
herent to the system. This means that
the driver will have to control the speed
and distance from other vehicles in cer-
tain situations. In this case, the instru-
ment cluster display will tell you to in-
tervene by applying the brake, and an
audio warning will be played.
Radar sensors
The ACC uses the front radar technology.
Read its maintenance instructions and infor-
mation about its limitations
›››
page 237.
WARNING
The ACC’s technology cannot overcome
the system's inher
ent limitations or change
the laws of physics. If used negligently or
involuntarily, it may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Always be prepared to brake or acceler-
ate.
●
If you press the accelerator pedal the
ACC will stop working. Therefore, it will not
brake or request any braking intervention.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or
on roads that are steep, with lots of curves
or slippery.
●
Never use ACC when driving off-road or
on unpaved roads.
●
The system does not react to stationary
obstacles (such as a traffic jam queue). Re-
act soon enough to avoid a hazardous sit-
uation.
●
The system does not react to people, ani-
mals or vehicles that are crossing or ap-
proaching in the opposite direction.
●
If you are driving with a spar
e wheel fit-
ted, the ACC system could automatically
switch off. Switch off the system when
starting off.
●
Brake immediately if the ACC does not
slow down enough.
●
Brake immediately when a driver inter-
vention instruction is displayed on the in-
strument cluster screen.
●
If the vehicle continues to move involun-
tarily after a driver intervention prompt,
brake the vehicle.
Note
If the ACC does not work as described in
this chapter
, do not use it until it has been
checked by a specialised workshop. Visit-
ing a SEAT dealership is recommended.
249
Driving
ACC operation
Fig. 180
On the multifunction steering wheel:
butt
ons t
o operate the ACC
Connecting
●
Press the butt
on on the multifunction
st
eering wheel.
The ACC does not regulate anything yet
(standby).
Start regulation
●
To start regulation, press the button
›››
Fig. 180.
The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos-
est speed within the valid range (30-210
km/h), as the cruise speed.
With manual transmission, the gear lever
must be in any gear except first and reverse,
and the speed must be higher than approxi-
mately 30 km/h (18 mph). On vehicles with
automatic transmission, the gear lever must
be in the D, S or M position.
Depending on the driving situation, the fol-
lowing indicator lamps come on:
It lights up green
ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front.
It lights up green
ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.
When the ACC is in standby, the indicator
l
amps light up in gr
ey.
Setting speed
To program the speed, press the or
›››
Fig. 180 buttons to the desired speed. The
speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5
mph).
When the ACC is active, the button can be
pressed to increase the desired speed by 1
km/h (1 mph). You can then press to de-
crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph).
Setting your distance level
The distance can be set to one of five levels,
from very short to very long:
●
Press the button and then the button or
›››
Fig. 180.
●
Alternatively, press the button as many
times as necessary to set the desired dis-
tance.
Keep in mind each country’s regulations on
minimum braking distances.
Suspend regulation (standby)
●
Briefly press the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.
The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed
and distance are saved.
If the ESC ASR
›››
page 272 is disconnected,
the ACC is automatically suspended.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Press the button. The ACC regulates to
the last speed and distance setting.
●
OR: Press the button to use the current
speed.
Switching off
●
Press and hold the button . The set speed
is cleared.
Exceeding the speed regulated by the
ACC
While driving with the ACC switched on, the
driver can increase speed by pressing the
250
Driver assistance systems
accelerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen-
ded until you r
el
ease the accelerator pedal
›››
.
Set the def
ault dist
ance setting
In the Infotainment system, you can pre-se-
lect the distance level when connecting the
ACC from:
●
Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very
long using the Infotainment system: > Driv-
er assistance > ACC
›››
page 88.
Changing the driving profile
In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving
profile selected can have an influence on the
ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour
›››
page 232.
In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-
haviour of the ACC can also be affected if
any of the following drive profiles are selec-
ted in the infotainment system in Drive assist.
ACC settings will be the same as those in the
SEAT Drive Profile.
WARNING
Before driving off, check that the road is
clear
. The radar sensor may not detect ob-
stacles on the road. This could cause an
accident and serious injuries. If necessary,
apply the brake.
CAUTION
If you increase speed using the accelerator
pedal, the ACC may not be able t
o safely
adjust the speed of the distance due to the
limitations of the system.
●
Be prepared to react if required by the
situation.
Status display
Fig. 181
On the instrument panel display: ACC
activ
e
.
Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if
the dist
ance t
o the vehicle is adjusted.
Selected distance level 2.
This information can be displayed on the
central panel of the Assists view, or in the left
hand information profile
›››
page 67. If these
views are not selected, it will be automatical-
1
2
ly displayed in the lower central part of the
instrument clust
er in a simplified manner
.
The set speed will be displayed next to the
function status indicator described in
›››
page 250, Start regulation.
Special driving situations
Fig. 182 On the instrument panel display: ACC
activ
e
, vehicle detected in an outer lane.
Be aware of the limitations and warnings de-
scribed at the beginning of this chapt
er
.
›››
in Introduction on page 249.
»
251
Driving
Avoid undertaking on the right
1)
If a v
ehicl
e is detected in the left lane that is
travelling at a speed slower than that set by
the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the
comfort limits of the system to avoid passing
it on the right
›››
Fig. 182.
You can cancel this regulation by changing
the set speed or by pressing the accelerator
pedal.
The function works at speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph). It may not be available in certain
countries.
Overtaking
When the turn signal is switched on for over-
taking, the ACC reduces the distance from
the vehicle in front to help with the overtaking
manoeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be
exceeded.
The function works at speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph). It may not be available in certain
countries.
Stop&Go function
3 Valid for: vehicles with an automatic gearbox
The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill
(0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops.
The ACC remains active and the message
ACC ready to start is displayed on the in-
strument cluster for a few seconds. You can
extend or reactivate this warning by pressing
the button or, depending on your vehicle’s
equipment, by grabbing the steering wheel.
During this time, the vehicle will move off
again if the vehicle in front moves forwards.
To move off when the message ACC ready
to start is not longer displayed, once the
vehicle in front has moved off:
●
Press the accelerator pedal.
●
OR: press the button or on the multi-
function steering wheel.
The ACC is deactivated while stopped in the
following cases:
●
If the vehicle stops for several minutes.
●
If a door is opened.
WARNING
If the message ACC ready to start is dis-
played on the instrument clust
er display
and the vehicle in front moves off, your ve-
hicle will move off automatically. In this
case, any obstacles in the road may not be
detected. This may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries.
●
Alw
ays check the road before moving off,
and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if
necessary.
1)
Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left
hand side of the road.
252
Driver assistance systems
ACC system limitations
Fig. 183
Vehicl
e on a bend.
Motorcyclist
ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.
Fig. 184 Vehicl
e changing lanes. One ve-
hicle turning and another stationary.
The limits of the ACC system mean that it is
not appr
opriat
e in all situations
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 2
49
.
SEAT does not recommend using the function
in the following cases
›››
:
●
Heavy rain, snow or fog.
●
When going through tunnels.
●
In sections with roadworks.
●
On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain
r
oads.
●
On off
-road routes.
●
In covered car parks.
●
On roads with embedded metal objects
such as train or tram tracks.
●
On roads with loose gravel.
Pay special attention when using ACC in the
following situations:
On curves
The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front
on a curve, or may regulate the distance from
vehicles in other lanes
›››
Fig. 183 .
Vehicles outside the sensor zone
In the following situations the ACC may not
react, or may react slowly or inappropriately:
●
Vehicles that are not aligned while driving
or that are outside the sensor's detection
area, such as motorcycles
›››
Fig. 183
●
Vehicles that move into your lane, a short
distance from your vehicle
›››
Fig. 184 .
●
Vehicles with loads or accessories that pro-
trude from the sides, rear or roof.
Objects that are not detected
The ACC function only detects and reacts to
vehicles moving in the same direction. There-
fore it does not detect:
●
People
●
Animals
»
253
Driving
●
V
ehicl
es travelling in the opposite direction
or crossing the road.
●
Other stationary obstacles
The ACC does not react to stationary vehi-
cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by the
ACC turns or moves over and there is a sta-
tionary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not
react to the second vehicle
›››
Fig. 184 .
WARNING
Using the ACC in the above situations can
cause serious accidents and injuries, and
you could br
eak the law.
Troubleshooting
ACC not available
The indicat
or l
amp lights up yellow:
●
The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor-
rectly. Take into account the warnings descri-
bed at the beginning of this chapter
›››
page 238
●
There is a fault or a defect. Turn off the vehi-
cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few
minutes.
●
If the problem persists, consult a special-
ised workshop.
The ACC does not work as expected
●
Make sure that the conditions are met for
the radar sensor to operate properly
›››
page 238.
●
If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au-
tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and
check the operation again.
●
Unusual noises during automatic ACC
braking are normal and do not indicate any
anomalies.
The following conditions may lead the
ACC not to react:
●
The accelerator or brake is depressed.
●
No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear
R.
●
The vehicle is reversing.
●
ESC is operating.
●
The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
●
A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty.
●
The RPM is too high or too low.
●
The parking brake is applied.
●
Driving on an excessive slope.
Lane Assist*
Introduction
The Lane Assist System helps the driver
stay in his/her l
ane within the physical lim-
its of the system. This function is not suita-
ble and is not designed to keep the vehicle
automatically in the lane.
Using the camera located in the windscreen,
the Lane Assist system detects the limits (lane
lines) dividing the lanes in which the vehicle is
travelling. If the vehicle gets too close to the
detected lane limits, the system alerts the
driver through a corrective motion of the
steering wheel. The driver can cancel the
steering corrective action at any time.
No warning is produced with the turn signals
activated, given that the Lane Assist system
understands that a lane change is required.
System limits
Use the Lane Assist system only on large,
well-maintained motorways and highways.
The system is not available under the follow-
ing conditions:
●
The driving speed allowed is below approx.
55 km/h (30 mph).
●
The system has not detected any lane
lines.
254
Driver assistance systems
●
On tight bends.
●
Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Lane As-
sist system cannot change the limits im-
posed by the l
aws of physics and by the
very nature of the system. Careless or un-
controlled use of the Lane Assist system
may cause accidents and injury. The sys-
tem is not a replacement for driver aware-
ness or manoeuvres when driving.
●
Always adapt your speed and the dis-
tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-
bility, weather conditions, the condition of
the road and the traffic situation.
●
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel so it can be turned at any time. The
responsibility of staying in the lane is al-
ways the driver's.
●
The Lane Assist system does not detect
all road markings. The road surfaces, road
structures or objects in poor condition can
be incorrectly detected as road markings
under certain circumstances by the Lane
Assist system. Immediately counter any un-
wanted intervention of the system.
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary if
the traffic situation permits.
●
In the following situations there may be
undesired interventions of the system or it
may be that the system does not intervene
at all. In these situations, special attention
is requir
ed from the driver and, where ap-
propriate, the temporary deactivation of
the lane assist warning system:
–
In very sporty driving situations.
–
In adverse weather conditions and
roads in poor condition.
–
When passing through areas undergo-
ing works.
–
Before gradient changes of grade and
river beds.
●
Always observe the vehicle surroundings
carefully and drive proactively.
●
When the area of vision of the camera
becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the
Lane Assist system function can be affec-
ted.
Control lamp
It lights up green
Lane Assist system active and available.
It lights up yellow
The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectifica-
tion of the steering.
OFF
It lights up yellow
Lane Assist system
Some control and warning lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is swit
ched on to
check certain functions. They will switch off
after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
Driving with the Lane Assist System
Fig. 185 On the instrument panel display: indi-
cations of the L
ane Assist Syst
em.
Lane line detected. The system inter-
v
enes assisting on the r
epresented side.
»
1
255
Driving
Lane line detected. The system does not
int
erv
ene.
Switching the lane assist system on or off
In some countries, the Lane Assist System is
always activated when the ignition is switch-
ed on. The connection status is shown in the
Driver assistance menu of the Infotainment
system or the driver assistance systems menu
after pressing the corresponding button. The
Lane Assist system can be activated and de-
activated in these menus.
The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in-
tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35
mph) and if it has detected the lane limits
(system status: active). The control lamp
emits a green light. When the system inter-
venes by rectifying the direction, the control
lamp emits a yellow light.
If the control lamp of the instrument panel
display is off, it means that the Lane Assist
system is connected but not ready to inter-
vene or it is disconnected.
When you activate a turn signal, the system
temporarily goes into a passive state in order
to allow manual lane change.
An energetic rotation or rectification of the
steering wheel by the driver causes the sys-
tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.
2
Driver intervention prompt
If the st
eering is not corr
ected manually, the
system prompts the driver through an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display and
acoustic warnings.
If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the
system switches to a passive state.
Regardless of the steering manoeuvres,
through an indication on the instrument panel
display and acoustic warnings, the driver is
also prompted to drive through the centre of
the lane if the steering correction lasts more
than reasonable.
Steering wheel vibration
The following situations may result in a steer-
ing wheel vibration:
●
The lane ceases to be recognised during a
sudden intervention in the direction of the
system.
Troubleshooting
Error message, the system disconnects
●
Clean the windscreen.
›
›
›
page 342
●
Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the camera's field of vision.
System behaviour is different than expec-
ted
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera reg-
ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snow
and ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-
era.
●
Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the camera's field of vision.
●
Do not mount objects on the steering
wheel.
In the event of doubts or queries, go to a spe-
cialised workshop.
Driving Assist (Travel Assist)
Introduction
The driving assist (Travel Assist) combines
adaptiv
e cruise contr
ol (ACC) and adap-
tive lane guidance. Within the limitations
of the system, the vehicle can maintain a
distance from the vehicle in front that is
preselected by the driver and remain in
the preferred position within the lane.
Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist.
Therefore, carefully read the information
about the ACC
›››
page 248 and the Lane
Assist
›››
page 254 and take into account the
256
Driver assistance systems
limitations of the systems and the indications
giv
en in the inf
ormation.
Speed range
Travel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap-
prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx.
210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case of
the adaptive lane guidance function, be-
tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250 km/h
(approx. 155 mph). This range may vary de-
pending on the market.
Driving with Travel Assist
Travel Assist automatically controls the ac-
celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering.
In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limita-
tions, decelerate the vehicle until it stops be-
hind another that stops and automatically
starts again.
You can override assisted adjustment at all
times.
How to know if the vehicle is fitted with
Travel Assist
The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the
multifunction steering wheel has the button
›››
Fig. 188.
Driver intervention prompt
If you remove your hands from the steering
wheel, after a few seconds the system asks
you to take over the steering with an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display and
acoustic warnings.
WARNING
The Travel Assist smart technology cannot
ov
ercome the limits imposed by the laws of
physics and it only works within the limits of
the system. If Travel assist is used negli-
gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious
accidents and injuries. The system is not a
replacement for driver awareness.
●
Bear in mind the system limitations and
the indications regarding the control of the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane
Assist.
●
Adapt your speed and safety distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is
bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in
slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,
rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
●
Do not use Travel Assist offroad or on
roads where the surface is not firm. Travel
Assist has been designed for use on paved
roads only.
●
Travel Assist does not react to people or
animal or vehicles crossing your path or
which approach you head-on in the same
lane.
●
Brake immediately if Travel Assist does
not slow down enough.
●
Brak
e immediately when a braking mes-
sage is displayed on the instrument panel
screen.
●
Brake when, after an indication to brake,
the vehicle rolls without it being desired.
●
Keep your hands on the steering wheel at
all times, to ensure you have control over
the steering at all times. The driver is al-
ways responsible for keeping the vehicle in
its own lane.
●
If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-
ing. The system could interpret this as no
driving activity.
●
If driver intervention is requested on the
instrument panel display, immediately re-
sume control of the vehicle.
●
Always be prepared to adjust the speed
yourself.
257
Driving
Indications on the instrument panel
displ
ay
Fig. 186
On the instrument panel display: indi-
cation with activ
e adjustment.
Fig. 187
On the instrument panel display: con-
tr
ol l
amps.
Displays on the screen
›
›
›
Fig. 186
The adaptive lane guidance function is
active.
1
Distance set.
In addition, depending on the equipment,
contr
ol l
amps indicate the status of the sys-
tem on the instrument panel display:
›››
Fig. 187
Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol and adaptive lane guidance function
are active.
Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol active and adaptive lane guidance
function passive.
Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol passive and adaptive lane guidance
function active.
Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol and adaptive lane guidance function
are passive.
Inactive Travel Assist.
Depending on the equipment, more details
may be displayed on the instrument cluster,
such as dashed lines or other vehicles on the
road.
2
A
B
C
D
E
Operating Travel Assist
Fig. 188
Left side of the multifunction steering
wheel
: butt
ons for operating Travel Assist.
Connecting
●
Press the butt
on on the multifunction
st
eering wheel.
The control lamp will light up green.
The following warning is also displayed on
the instrument panel screen: The Travel Assist
maintains the current speed and the preset
distance from the vehicle in front. At the same
time, if it detects road markings it keeps the
vehicle in the lane by moving the steering
wheel.
Interrupting the adjustment
●
Briefly press the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.
The set distance remains saved.
258
Driver assistance systems
Making other adjustments
F
or all el
se, Travel Assist is operated like the
ACC
›››
page 250.
Troubleshooting
Travel Assist is not available or does
not work as e
xpected
The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-
vant w
arning is also displayed on the instru-
ment panel screen.
●
There is a fault in the sensors. Check the
causes and solutions described in
››
›
page 238.
●
The system limits are exceeded.
●
If the fault continues, consult a specialised
workshop.
or
Take the wheel
The warning lamp comes on white or red, de-
pending on the urgency of the intervention. A
message is also displayed.
●
You released the steering wheel for a few
seconds. Take hold of the steering wheel and
take control of the vehicle.
●
The system limits have been reached. Take
hold of the steering wheel and take control of
the vehicle.
Travel Assist disconnects automatically
Vehicles without Emergency Assist: You have
released the steering wheel for a long period.
●
Abnormal operation. Contact a specialised
workshop.
The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-
edly
Vehicles without lane departure warning: You
have turned on the turn signal.
Emergency Assist
How it works
Emergency Assist can detect whether
ther
e is inactivit
y by the driver and can au-
tomatically keep the car within the lane
and stop it altogether if necessary. This
way the system can actively help avoid an
accident or reduce its consequences.
Emergency Assist uses the same sensors as
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As-
sist. Therefore, carefully read the information
about the ACC
›››
page 248 and the Lane
Assist
›››
page 254 and take into account the
limitations of the systems and the indications
given in the information.
If the Emergency Assist detects that the driver
does not perform any activity, it requests that
the driver take control of the vehicle. To do
this, it emits optical and acoustic warnings
and causes braking jolts. The seat belt is
tightened (depending on the equipment). The
system slows down the vehicle and keeps it in
its lane.
You can cancel the adjustment at any time
by moving the steering wheel, over-acceler-
ating or braking.
While the emergency assistant is in operation,
other road users are warned as follows:
●
The hazard warning lights are switched on
soon after.
The following happens as soon as the vehicle
stops:
●
The electronic parking brake is activated.
Connecting and disconnecting
Emergency Assist can be connected and dis-
connected in the infotainment system, in the
assist services menu
›››
page 88.
When connected, the Emergency Assist is on-
ly activated if the following requirements are
met:
●
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be
switched on .
●
The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist are
switched on.
»
259
Driving
●
The syst
em has det
ected a road lane mark-
ing on both sides of the vehicle.
Troubleshooting
SOS
Emergency Assist not available
The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-
vant w
arning is also displayed on the instru-
ment panel screen.
●
The field of vision of the camera is dirty.
Clean the windscreen.
●
The visibility of the camera is diminished
due to w
eather factors, e.g. snow, or deter-
gent residue or some coating. Clean the
windscreen.
●
The visibility of the camera is diminished
due to accessories or adhesives. Leave the
area around the camera’s field of vision free.
●
The camera has been altered or damaged,
e.g. because of damage caused to the wind-
screen. Check for visible damage.
●
There is a fault or a defect. Switch the en-
gine off and on again.
●
If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer-
gency Assist and consult a specialised work-
shop.
WARNING
The smart technology fitted into the Emer-
gency Assist cannot ov
ercome the limits
imposed by the laws of physics; it only
works within the limits of the syst
em. The
driver is responsible for driving the vehicle.
●
Adapt your speed and safety distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-
ditions.
●
The Emergency Assist cannot always
avoid accidents or serious injuries by itself.
●
If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-
ing. The system could interpret this as no
driving activity.
●
If the radar sensor or the camera are cov-
ered or have been altered or damaged, the
system may intervene on the brakes or on
the direction in an inappropriate manner.
●
The Emergency Assist does not react to
people or animal or vehicles crossing your
path or which approach you head-on in the
same lane.
WARNING
If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-
tunely, serious accidents and injuries may
occur
.
●
If the vehicle behaves differently than ex-
pected, interrupt the intervention of the
Emergency Assist by over-accelerating,
braking or moving the steering wheel.
●
Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist.
Have the system checked by a specialised
workshop.
Note
●
Automatic int
erventions by the Emergen-
cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted
by pressing the accelerator or brake or by
moving the wheel.
●
Hazard warning lights that come on auto-
matically can be switched off by pressing
the accelerator or the break, moving the
steering wheel or pressing the hazard
warning light switch.
●
If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may
decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a
complete stop.
●
When the Emergency Assist is activated,
it is only available again after the ignition
has been switched off and back on again.
Side Assist with Rear Cross
T
r
affic Alert (RCTA)*
Introduction
The lane departure warning (LCA) helps
det
ect tr
affic that is at the rear of the vehi-
cle.
The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helps
the driver when backing out of a parallel
parking spot and when manoeuvring.
260
Driver assistance systems
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the blind spot detect
or (BSD) with parking
assistance (RCTA) included cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. Accidents and severe injury may
occur if the blind spot detection system or
the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-
gently or involuntarily. The system is not a
replacement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
to be ready to intervene in the steering at
any time.
●
Pay attention to the indicator lamps that
may come on in the external rear view mir-
rors and on the instrument cluster, and fol-
low any instructions they may give.
●
The lane departure warning could react
to any special constructions that might be
present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high
or irregular dividers. This may cause erro-
neous warnings.
●
Never use the lane departure warning on
unpaved roads. The lane departure warn-
ing has been designed for use on paved
roads.
●
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
roundings.
●
The control l
amps of the lane departure
warning may have limited functionality due
to solar radiation.
Note
If the blind spot detector with parking as-
sist
ant does not w
ork as described in this
chapter, stop using it and contact a speci-
alised workshop.
Control lamp
Fig. 189 Control lamp of the lane departure
w
arning.
Fig. 190 Control lamp of the lane departure
warning.
indicator lamp in external rear view mir-
r
ors:
It lights up
It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning is
activat
ed and ready to operate, i.e. when activating
the system.
It lights up continuously: the lane departure warning
has detect
ed a vehicle in the blind spot.
Flashes
A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane and
the turn signal has been engaged in the dir
ection of
the detected vehicle
›››
.
For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist
›››
page 254, a warning to switch lanes will also ap-
pear even though the turn signal has not been en-
gaged (Lane Assist “Plus”
›››
page 262).
»
261
Driving
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on and should turn off after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for
the function check.
If there are no indications from the control
lamp of the lane departure warning, this
means that the lane departure warning has
not detected any other vehicles at the rear
area
›››
.
When the e
xt
erior lighting is low, the intensity
with which the control lamps come on is dim-
med. The user can modify the intensity of the
control lamps with up to 5 levels in the info-
tainment system menu.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
messages are ignor
ed when they light up,
the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause
accidents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-
sages.
●
Carry out the necessary operations.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and cor-
responding t
ext messages when they light
up may result in damage to the vehicle.
Lane departure warning (Side As-
sist)
The lane departure warning uses radar sen-
sors to monit
or the areas behind the vehicle
›››
page 8. The system does this by measur-
ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles
and its speed differential. The lane departure
warning will not work at speeds of less than
approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses
optical signals in the external rear view mir-
rors to notify the driver.
The lane width is not detected individually,
but is rather pre-configured in the system.
Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-
tween two lanes, the indications may be in-
correct. Furthermore, the system can detect
vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if
there are any), and can also detect station-
ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an
incorrect indication.
Indication on the exterior mirror
The control lamp provides an indication on
the corresponding side regarding the traffic
situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to
be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand
side
›››
Fig. 189 indicates the traffic situation
to the rear left of the vehicle, and the control
lamp of the right-hand side
›››
Fig. 190, indi-
cates the traffic situation to the rear right of
the vehicle.
In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or
windows with tint
ed film, the indications of the
external mirrors may not be seen clearly or
correctly.
Keep the external mirrors clean and free of
snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-
hesives or other similar materials.
Lane Assist Plus
The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by
activating the
Lane Assist
›››
page 254 and
Side Assist functions. In this case its functions
are expanded as described below.
If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu-
vre in a potential critical situation:
●
The lamp flashes in the corresponding rear-
view mirr
or even though the turn signal has
not been activated.
●
The steering wheel vibrates to warn the
driver of the risk of collision.
●
torque is applied to correct the steering
and return the vehicle to its lane.
262
Driver assistance systems
Driving situations
Fig. 191
Schematic representation: P
assing
sit
uation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi-
cation from the blind spot detector in the left-
hand external mirror.
Fig. 192
Schematic representation:
Sit
ua-
tion of passing and then mo
ving into the right-
hand lane.
Indication from the blind spot de-
tector in the right-hand external mirror.
In the following situations, an indication will
be displ
ayed in the e
xternal mirror
›››
Fig. 191
(arrow) or
›››
Fig. 192 (arrow):
●
When being overtaken by another vehicle
›››
Fig. 191
.
●
When passing another vehicle
›››
Fig. 192
with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-
erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-
played.
The faster a vehicle approaches, the sooner
an indication will be displayed in the exterior
mirror, because Side Assist takes into account
the different in speed compared to other ve-
hicles. Thus even though the distance from
the other vehicle is identical, the indication
will appear sooner in some cases and later in
others.
Physical limitations inherent to the system
In some situations the lane departure warning
may not interpret the traffic situation correct-
ly. I.e. in the following situations:
●
on tight bends;
●
in the case of lanes with different widths;
●
in areas with significant gradient changes;
●
in adverse weather conditions;
●
in the case of special constructions to the
side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-
ers.
263
Driving
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)
Fig. 193
Schematic representation of the rear
cr
oss tr
affic alert assistant: zone monitored
around the vehicle while leaving a parking
space.
Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear
bumper
›
›
›
page 238 to monitor the traffic
crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of
a parallel parking space or as it is being man-
oeuvred, for example in very low visibility con-
ditions.
When the system detects a relevant vehicle
on the road that is approaching the rear of
the vehicle
›››
Fig. 193, an acoustic alarm
may sound if the relevance so requires it.
In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is
also informed by means of a visual signal on
infotainment system display. This signal is dis-
played in the form of a red or yellow strip at
the back of the image of the vehicle on the in-
fotainment system screen. This strip displays
the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is
approaching in transverse direction
1)
.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
If the rear cross traffic alert detects that
someone else on the road is approaching the
rear of the vehicle and the driver does not
step on the brake, the system will engage the
brakes automatically.
The parking system helps the driver by auto-
matically engaging the brakes to reduce any
damage. The automatic intervention on the
brakes takes place when driving in reverse at
approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting
that the vehicle is stationary, the system
keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.
After automatically braking to reduce dam-
age, the system will not be able to automati-
cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
You can interrupt the automatic braking by
stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or
the brake pedal in order to regain control of
the vehicle.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the rear cr
oss traffic alert cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. The parking assistant function
should not tempt you into taking any risks.
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness.
●
The system should never be used in limi-
ted visibility conditions or complicated
traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when
crossing multiple lanes.
●
Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-
cle's surroundings, since the system often
fails to detect things such as bicycles or
pedestrians.
●
The rear cross traffic alert itself will not
brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
Managing the assist systems
Enabling and disabling the assist systems
The blind spot det
ect
or with parking assistant
can be switched on and off by accessing the
Assistance systems menu on the dash panel
display using the steering wheel controls. If
the vehicle is equipped with a multifunction
1)
It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped
with a parking system.
264
Braking and parking
camera, it can also be accessed by means of
the driv
er assist
ance systems key located on
the main beam headlight lever.
Open the Assistants menu.
●
Side Assist
●
Rear cross traffic alert
If the verification box on the instrument panel
or the infotainment system is checked , the
functionality will be automatically activated
when switching on the ignition.
When the Side Assist is ready to operate, the
indicator turns on briefly on the exterior rear
view mirrors as confirmation.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-
ment in the system will remain active.
Trailer mode
Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert are
automatically deactivated and cannot be
switched on if the factory-fitted tow-bar is
electrically connected to a trailer or similar
device.
As soon as the driver starts to drive with a
trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a
message is displayed on the instrument pan-
el display indicating that the Side Assist and
the rear cross traffic alert are switched off.
Once the trailer has been unhooked from the
vehicle, if you want to use the Side Assist and
the rear cross traffic alert, you will have to re-
activate them in the corresponding menu.
If the tow-bar is not factory fitted, Side Assist
and the rear cross traffic alert should be
switched off manually when driving with a
trailer.
Braking and parking
Br
aking syst
em
Control lamps
It lights up red
Brake fluid level too low
›››
page 322 or fault in the
brake system.
Do not carry on driving!
It lights up red
Electronic parking brake
››
›
page 267.
The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-
leased.
It lights up green
Auto Hold function activated
››
›
page 269.
It lights up yellow
Front brake pads worn.
Contact a specialised w
orkshop immediately.
WARNING
●
If the brak
e warning lamp does not go
out or if it lights up when driving, the brake
fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there
is a risk of an accident
›››
page 322, Brake
fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.
Obtain technical assistance.
»
265
Driving
●
If the brak
e warning lamp lights up to-
gether with the ABS lamp this could be
due to an ABS fault. When this function
fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under
certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-
cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-
trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.
●
If the lamp lights up, alone or accom-
panied by a warning message on the in-
strument panel display, please go immedi-
ately to a specialised workshop to check
the brake pads and to replace them if they
are worn.
Information about the brakes
New brake pads
F
or the first 200 t
o 300 km (100 to 200
miles), new brake pads have not yet reached
their maximum braking capacity, and need to
be “run in” first. However, you can compen-
sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by
applying more pressure on the brake pedal.
Avoid overloading the brakes while running
them in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
a great deal on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a
particular problem in urban traffic and short
stretches, or with very sporty driving.
Depending on the speed, the braking force
and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-
perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be
produced when braking.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain situations (for example, on driving
through flooded areas, in severe downpours
or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-
tion could be delayed if the discs and pads
are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the
brakes should be “dried” by pressing the
brake pedal several times.
At high speed and with the windscreen wipers
activated, the brake pads will briefly touch
the brake discs. This takes place, although
unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals
to improve the response time of the brakes
when they are wet.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be
temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for
some distance without using the brakes when
there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The
layer of salt that accumulates on the discs
and pads can be removed by gently apply-
ing the brakes a few times.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to
form on the discs and dirt to build up on the
brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently
or the brakes are not used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust
has formed on the disks, it is advisable to
clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly
a few times at a moderately high speed
›››
.
F
ault in the br
ake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase
suddenly, this may mean that one of the two
brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to
the nearest specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-
member that you will have to apply more
pressure on the brake pedal and allow for
longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if
the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid
level is monitored electronically.
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you
apply to the brake pedal. It works only when
the engine is running.
WARNING
Any anomaly in the brake system can in-
crease the br
aking distance, with the re-
sulting risk of an accident.
●
New brake pads and discs must be run in
and do not have the correct friction during
the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced
266
Braking and parking
braking capacity may be offset by pressing
on the brak
e pedal a little harder.
●
If you are driving on roads which have
been salted, braking effectiveness may be
decreased.
●
Brakes can overheat if used excessively
on slopes. Before driving down a long steep
slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
change down into a lower gear or range.
Therefore, using the engine brake relieves
the brakes.
●
Gentle continuous braking causes the
brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
tance will increase. Apply and then release
the brakes alternately.
●
Apply the brakes heavily to clean the
brake system only in a suitable traffic situa-
tion. Do not put other road users in danger:
there is risk of causing an accident.
●
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
neutral, when the engine is stopped. The
braking distance is increased considerably
when the brake servo is not active.
●
If the brake is subjected to high stresses,
vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-
tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of
the brakes.
●
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
accessories please read the relevant in-
structions.
CAUTION
●
Nev
er let the brakes “drag” by leaving
your foot on the pedal when it is not neces-
sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-
sulting in longer stopping distances and
greater wear.
●
Before driving down a long, steep gradi-
ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-
lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine
braking and relieves the brakes. If you still
have to use the brakes, it is better to brake
firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes
continuously.
Note
●
If the brak
e servo is out of action, for ex-
ample when the car is being towed, you will
have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder than normal to make up for the lack
of servo assistance.
●
If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-
cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel
covers, it is important that the flow of air to
the front wheels is not obstructed, other-
wise the brakes can overheat.
Electronic parking brake
Fig. 194
In the lower part of the centre con-
sol
e: el
ectronic parking brake button
The electronic parking brake replaces the
handbr
ak
e
›››
.
Applying the el
ectr
onic parking brake
The electronic parking brake can be activa-
ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,
even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-
vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-
cle.
●
Pull and hold the
›››
Fig. 194 button.
●
The parking brake is activated when the
control light of button
›››
Fig. 194 (arrow) is on
and the red control lamp on the instrument
panel is always on.
●
Release the button.
»
267
Driving
Disconnecting the electronic parking
br
ak
e
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 194. At the same
time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the
engine is running, press the accelerator pedal
slightly.
●
The control lamp of button
›››
Fig. 194 (ar-
row) and the red control lamp on the in-
strument panel go out.
Automatic release of the electronic park-
ing brake upon moving off
The electronic parking brake is automatically
switched off when starting if, after the driver's
door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-
tened, any of the following situations take
place:
●
In vehicles with automatic gearboxes: a
gear is engaged or changed to another and
the accelerator is pressed gently.
●
In vehicles with manual gearboxes: the
clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting
off and the accelerator is pressed gently.
●
To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are
exceptions that allow the automatic parking
brake to be released without the driver's seat
belt being fastened.
The parking brake can be prevented from be-
ing automatically released by continuously
pulling up the
›››
Fig. 194 switch when
starting off.
The electronic parking brake is not discon-
nected until the button is released. This
can facilitate starting off when a heavy load
is towed
›››
page 297.
Automatic activation of the electronic
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in-
correctly
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
electronic parking brake is activated auto-
matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly
if:
●
The selector lever is in the D/S or R position
or in the Tiptronic selector gate.
●
AND: the vehicle is stationary.
●
AND: the driver door is open.
Emergency brake function
Only use the emergency brake function if you
are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot
brake
›››
.
●
Pull and hold the
›
›
›
Fig. 194 button in
this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At
the same time, an acoustic warning can be
heard.
●
To stop the braking process, release the
button or press the accelerator.
WARNING
The improper use of the electronic parking
brak
e can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Never use the electronic parking brake to
stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.
Braking distances can be considerably lon-
ger, since, under certain circumstances,
only the rear wheels brake. Always use the
foot brake.
●
Never accelerate from the engine when a
gear range or a gear is engaged and the
engine is running. The vehicle could move,
even if the electronic parking brake is acti-
vated.
●
When the electronic parking brake is
switched on or off, there is a slight move-
ment of the brake pedal. Be careful not to
position your foot under the pedal.
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally
moving when parking it, first apply the
el
ectronic parking brake and then remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
Note
●
In vehicl
es with a manual gearbox, re-
leasing the clutch and accelerating at the
same time automatically disconnects the
electronic parking brake.
268
Braking and parking
●
If the 12-volt v
ehicle battery is flat, it will
not be possible to switch off the electronic
parking brake. Use the jump-start
›››
page 52.
●
When the electronic parking brake is ap-
plied or released, noises may be heard.
●
The system performs automatic and au-
dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-
cle if some time elapses without the elec-
tronic parking brake being used.
Auto Hold Function
Fig. 195
In the lower part of the centre con-
sol
e: Aut
o Hold function button.
The
›››
Fig. 195 button's indicator
lamp remains on while the Auto Hold function
is switched on.
Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-
sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-
ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-
od of time with the engine running, for exam-
ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at
traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-
tent stops.
When connected, the Auto Hold function au-
tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling
when stationary without pressing the brake
pedal.
After detecting that the vehicle is stationary
and the brake pedal has been released, the
Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-
er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.
When the driver touches the accelerator
pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-
ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.
The vehicle moves according to the slope of
the road.
If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-
ditions required by the Auto Hold function is
impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's
control light goes out
›››
Fig. 195. The elec-
tronic parking brake connects automatically,
if necessary, to park the vehicle safely
›››
.
Conditions f
or k
eeping the vehicle station-
ary with the Auto Hold function
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The engine is running.
Switching the Auto Hold function on and
off
Press the
›››
button. The control
l
amp on the butt
on goes out when the Auto
Hold function is switched off.
Automatically engaging and disengaging
the Auto Hold function
If the Auto Hold function was switched on with
the button before switching off the
ignition, the function will remain on the next
time the ignition is switched on.
If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,
it will automatically remain off next time the
ignition is engaged.
The Auto Hold function connects automat-
ically if the following conditions are met
(all points must be met at the same time
›››
):
The v
ehicl
e is kept stationary with the
brake pedal on a flat surface or on a
slope.
The engine rotates “correctly”.
The Auto Hold function is automatically
turned off if the following conditions are
met:
If any of the conditions mentioned on
›››
page 269, Conditions for keeping
the vehicle stationary with the Au-
to Hold function are no longer met.
»
1.
2.
1.
269
Driving
If the engine is running irregularly or an
anomaly is det
ect
ed.
If the engine is turned off or stalls.
Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac-
celerator are pressed at the same time.
Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is
pressed
Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres
has only minimal contact with the
ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula-
tion.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the Auto Hol
d function cannot defy the
laws of physics; it only works within the lim-
its of the system. The greater convenience
provided by the Auto Hold function should
never tempt you to take any risk that may
compromise safety.
●
Never leave the vehicle running and with
the Auto Hold function switched on.
●
The Auto Hold function cannot always
keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-
hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on
slippery or frozen surfaces.
Note
Before entering a car wash, always switch
off the Auto Hol
d function, because if the
electronic parking brake is automatically
connected, it may cause damage.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stabilisation and brake as-
sist
ance syst
ems
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by
the system.
The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the
ABS fails, the lamp also lights up.
Flashes
ESC or ASR activated.
It lights up
ASR switched off manually.
Or: ESC in Sport mode
›››
page 272.
It lights up
ABS faulty or does not work.
The control lamps light up together when the
ignition is s
wit
ched on and should turn off af-
ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time
taken for the function check.
Brake assist systems
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC helps to impr
ove safety. It reduces
the tendency to skid and improves the stabili-
ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC
detects critical handling situations, such as
vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin
on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle
by braking individual wheels or by reducing
the engine torque. The warning lamp will
flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is
intervening .
The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system
(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the
traction control system (ASR), electronic dif-
ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control
(XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.
ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by
changing the torque.
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin
is desirable
›››
page 272.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-
der braking until the vehicle has reached a
virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the
vehicle even when the brakes are on full.
Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not
pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal
pulsate while the ABS is working.
270
Braking and parking
If the running gear or brake system is modi-
fied, the eff
ectiv
eness of the ABS could be se-
verely limited.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
The brake assist system can reduce the re-
quired braking distance. The braking force is
automatically boosted if you press the brake
pedal quickly in an emergency. You must
keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-
ger has passed.
Traction control system (ASR)
In the event of the wheels spinning, the ASR
reduces the engine torque to adapt to the
road condition. This helps the car to start
moving, accelerate or climb a gradient.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes
the spinning wheel and directs the power to
the other driven wheel. This function is active
up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel
from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on
again automatically when the brake has
cooled down.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*
If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control
the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.
When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the
vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-
matically brake the towing vehicle within the
limits of the system and mitigate the sway.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available
in all countries
›››
page 303.
Electronic engine torque management
(XDS)
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher
speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the
wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-
ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.
This may mean that in certain situations the
torque delivered to the inner wheel is too
high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other
hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower
drive torque than it could transmit. This can
cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this
case the front axle, which results in under-
steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
The XDS can detect and correct this effect
via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside
wheel and counter the excess driving torque
of that wheel. This means that the requested
trajectory is much more precise.
XDS works in combination with the ESC and is
always active, even when ASR is switched off,
or when the ESC is in Sport mode or discon-
nected.
Multi-collision brake
The multi-collision brake consists of automat-
ic braking activated by the Airbag control
unit. It is activated when, in the event of an
accident, the Airbag control unit detects de-
celerations above the activation level, and
braking is managed by the ESC system.
In the event of an accident, the multi-collision
brake can help the driver by braking to avoid
the risk of skidding during the accident and
causing other collisions.
The following actions control automatic brak-
ing during the accident:
●
When the driver presses the accelerator,
the automatic braking does not take place.
●
When the braking pressure through press-
ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-
tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake
automatically.
●
Multi-collision braking will not be available
if there is an anomaly in the ESC system.
WARNING
Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet
ground can r
esult in loss of vehicle control
»
271
Driving
and serious injury to the driver and passen-
gers.
●
The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS or electronic tor-
que management are not in a position t
o
overcome the limits imposed by physics.
Always bear this in mind, especially on wet
or slippery roads. If you notice the systems
cutting in, you should reduce your speed
immediately to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not be encouraged to take
risks by the presence of more safety sys-
tems. If you do, an accident may occur.
●
Please remember that the accident risk
always increases if you drive fast, espe-
cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if
you follow too close behind the vehicle in
front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,
EDS and the electronic torque control sys-
tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-
dents!
●
Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-
faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).
Despite the control systems, the driven
wheels could spin, affecting the stability of
the vehicle: risk of accident!
Note
●
The ABS and ASR will only operat
e cor-
rectly if the four wheels have identical
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius
of the tyr
es can cause the system to re-
duce engine power when this is not desired.
●
The regulating processes of the systems
can make noises due to their operation.
●
If the warning lamp or lights up,
there could be a fault
›››
page 82.
●
Any modifications made to the vehicle
(for example, to the engine, brake system,
running gear or to the combination of
wheels and tyres) may affect the operation
of the ABS, ASR and EDS.
Connecting and disconnecting the
ESC and ASR
The ESC is switched on automatically when
the engine is st
art
ed, and only works when
the engine is running and includes the ABS,
EDS and ASR systems.
The ASR function should only be switched off
in situations where traction is insufficient.
Depending on the finishes and versions, it is
possible to only switch off the ASR, or to
switch on the ESC in “Sport” mode.
Switching the ASR off and on
●
The ASR can be switched off and on using
the infotainment system
›››
page 84. In vehi-
cles with a driver information system* the
corresponding indication will be displayed.
When the ASR is switched off, the indicator
lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in
“Sport” mode
●
In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be discon-
nected and connected using the infotainment
system
›››
page 84. In vehicles with a driver
information system* the corresponding indi-
cation will be displayed.
When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter-
ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,
and the anti-slip regulation (ASR
1)
) interven-
tions are limited. In addition, the control
lamp lights up on the instrument panel.
ESC in “Offroad” mode
2)
Turn the Driving Experience button to select
the Offroad mode and connect it
›››
page 233. The interventions of the ESC, as
well as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt to
irregular terrain.
1)
In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the ASR is dis-
connected compl
etely
›››
.
2)
Only for 4Drive models.
272
Braking and parking
In the following exceptional situations it may
mak
e sense t
o activate the Offroad mode to
allow the wheels to spin:
●
When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un-
stuck.
●
Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.
●
When driving on rough terrain with much of
the car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle
articulation).
●
Steep descents with braking on unpaved
terrain.
For your safety we recommend that you turn
off the Offroad mode when it is not absolute-
ly necessary.
To disconnect the “Offroad” mode, select a
different driving mode.
ESC in “Snow” mode
1)
Turn the Driving Experience button to select
the “Snow” mode and connect it
›››
page 233. Traction control system (ASR)
interventions adjust to the adhesion of snowy
roads.
To disconnect the “Snow” mode, select a dif-
ferent driving mode.
WARNING
The ESC Sport mode should be activated
only when traffic conditions and the abilit
y
of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!
●
With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising
function will be limited to allow for a sporti-
er drive. The driving wheels could spin and
the vehicle could skid.
WARNING
You should only activate the Offroad Mode
or disable the ASR if the driv
er is experi-
enced and if permitted by the traffic condi-
tions. Danger of skidding!
●
The stabilisation function is limited when
the Offroad profile is switched on. In partic-
ular, if the road is too smooth and slippery,
the driving wheels could spin and the vehi-
cle could skid.
Note
If the ASR is switched off or the Sport mode
is select
ed, the cruise control* is switched
off.
Parking
T
o park the v
ehicle
When parking your vehicle, all legal require-
ments should be observ
ed.
Always note the following points when park-
ing the vehicle:
●
Park the vehicle on a suitable surface
›››
.
●
Connect the electronic parking brake
››
›
page 267.
●
For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-
tor l
ever to position P.
●
Stop the engine and turn off the ignition.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the
steering lock.
●
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear
on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse
gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.
●
When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with
you.
Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines
Before switching off the engine, rotate the
steering wheel so that if the vehicle should
move, it will be held by the kerb.
»
1)
Only for 4Drive models.
273
Driving
●
On sl
opes, t
urn the front wheels so that
they are against the edge of the kerb.
●
Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of
the road.
WARNING
●
Avoid parking the v
ehicle where the hot
exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes,
spilt fuel or flammable materials.
●
Do not leave passengers inside a closed
vehicle, they may not be able to open
doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the
possibility of a rescue.
●
Children should not be left alone in the
vehicle. They could tamper with the hand-
brake or the gears, which could cause the
vehicle to move without control.
●
Depending on weather conditions, it may
become extremely hot or cold inside the
vehicle. This can be fatal.
Help with parking and ma-
noeuvring
Assist
ed parking syst
em
(Park Assist)*
Introduction
The parking assist system is an additional
function of the ParkPil
ot
›››
page 280 and
helps the driver find a suitable parking space
from among the following types:
●
park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-
dicular and par
allel spaces,
●
park driving forwards in suitable perpendic-
ular spaces,
●
exit a parking space driving forwards from a
parallel space.
In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-
tory infotainment system, the front, rear and
side areas are represented, and the position
of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.
The Park Assist system is subject to certain
limitations inherent to the system and its use
requires special attention by the driver
›››
.
WARNING
The technology used in the park assist sys-
tem inv
olves a series of limitations inherent
in the actual system and in the use of ultra-
sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist shoul
d
never tempt you to take any risk that may
compromise safety. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Any accidental movement of the vehicle
could result in serious injury.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and gar-
ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-
sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at
least correctly, these objects or people
wearing such clothes.
●
Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-
ted by external sound sources. In certain
circumstances this may prevent them from
detecting people or objects.
●
The ultrasound sensors may have blind
spots in which obstacles and people are
not detected.
●
Monitor the area around the vehicle at all
times, since the ultrasound sensors do not
detect small children, animals or certain
objects in all situations.
WARNING
Quick turns of the steering wheel when
parking or exiting a parking space with
P
ark Assist can cause serious injury.
274
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
Do not hold the st
eering wheel during
manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space
until the system requests it. Doing so disa-
bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-
sulting in the parking being cancelled.
CAUTION
●
In cer
t
ain circumstances, the ultrasonic
sensors do not detect objects such as trail-
er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,
or an open (or opening) rear lid, which
could damage the vehicle.
●
Retrofitting of certain accessories to the
vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-
fere with the operation of the Park Assist
system and cause damage.
●
The Park Assist system uses as a refer-
ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-
jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels
are not damaged while parking. If necessa-
ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-
noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.
●
The ultrasound sensors on the bumper
may be damaged or shifted in the event of
a collision, for example, when entering or
exiting a parking space.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do
not apply it directly unless very briefly and
always from a distance of more than 10 cm.
●
A registration plate or plate holder on the
front with larger than the space for the reg-
istration plate, or a registration plate that is
curved or w
arped can cause:
–
False detections.
–
The sensors to lose visibility.
–
Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre
or defective parking.
●
If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-
aged, the area corresponding to that group
of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and
cannot be activated until the fault is cor-
rected. However, you can still use the sen-
sors of the other bumper as per usual. If
there is a fault in the system, consult a spe-
cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership for this.
Note
●
In order t
o guarantee good system oper-
ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the
bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do
not cover them with adhesives or other ob-
jects.
●
Certain sources of noise, such as rough
asphalt or paving stones and the noise of
other vehicles can induce the Park Assist
system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-
ings. The presence of metal objects can al-
so affect the manoeuvre.
●
In order to become familiar with the sys-
tem and its functions, SEAT recommends
that you practice operating the Park Assist
system in an area where there is not too
much traffic or in a car park.
Description of the parking assist
syst
em
Fig. 196
In the upper part of the centre con-
sol
e: butt
on to switch on the Park Assist system.
The components of the Park Assist system
ar
e the ultr
asonic sensors located in the front
and rear bumpers, the
›››
Fig. 196 to switch
the system on and off and the messages on
the instrument cluster display.
Prerequisites for parking
●
The traction control system (ASR) must be
turned on
›››
page 272.
●
Speed when passing next to the parking
space (parallel parking): do not exceed ap-
prox. 40 km/h (25 mph).
●
Speed when passing next to the parking
space (angle parking): do not exceed approx.
20 km/h (12 mph).
»
275
Driving
●
K
eep a dist
ance between 0.5 and 2.0 me-
tres when driving past the parking space.
●
Space length (parallel parking): vehicle
length + 0.8 meters.
●
Space width (angle parking): vehicle width
+ 0.8 meters.
●
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h
(4 mph) when parking.
Requirements for leaving the parking
space (only for parallel parking)
●
The traction control system (ASR) must be
turned on
›››
page 272.
●
Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5
metres.
●
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h
(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.
Prematurely stopping or automatically in-
terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or
exiting a parking space
Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for
parking or exiting a parking space in any of
the following cases:
●
Press the button.
●
The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h
(4 mph).
●
The driver takes control of the steering
wheel.
●
The parking manoeuvre does not end within
6 minutes from the activation of automatic
steering.
●
There is a fault in the system (the system is
temporarily unavailable).
●
The ASR is disconnected.
●
ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.
●
The driver door is opened.
To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that
none of these things occur and that the
button is pressed again.
Special characteristics
The Park Assist system is subject to certain
limitations inherent to the system. For exam-
ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit
a parking space on sharp bends.
While entering or exiting a parking space, a
brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to
change between forward and reverse gears
(depending on the case). In successive ma-
noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to
change gears, at the latest, when the contin-
uous audible signal is given (object present at
a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.
When the Park Assist system turns the steer-
ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-
strument panel also displays the symbol .
Keep the brake pedal depressed while the
symbol remains on the dash panel display to
turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This
way, the system will require fewer manoeu-
vres to complete the parking action.
Trailer mode
The Park Assist system cannot be switched
on if the factory-fitted towing bracket
›››
page 297 is electrically connected to a
trailer.
After changing a wheel
If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops
entering and exiting parking spaces correct-
ly, the circumference of the new wheel may
be different and the system may need to
adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and
takes place during driving. Making turns slow-
ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph])
for a few minutes may contribute to this
adaptation process
›››
in Introduction on
page 27
4
.
276
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Selecting a parking mode
Fig. 197
On the instrument panel display: view
of the parking assist syst
em with r
educed view.
Fig. 198 On the instrument panel display: indi-
cation of parking modes.
Parking assist has the following 3 parking
modes:
Reverse parallel parking.
R
e
verse angle parking.
Forward angle parking.
Selecting a parking mode after passing in
front of the space
After activating the Park Assist system and af-
ter detecting a parking space, the display on
the instrument panel proposes a parking
mode. The Park Assist system selects the
parking mode automatically. The selected
mode is shown on the instrument panel dis-
play
›››
Fig. 197. The reduced display of other
possible parking modes is also shown
›››
Fig. 198. If the mode selected by the sys-
tem does not correspond to the desired
mode, you can select another mode by
pressing the button
›››
Fig. 196.
●
The necessary conditions to park with Park
Assist have to be met
›››
page 275.
●
Press the button.
●
A control lamp on the button lights up
when the system is switched on. Additionally,
the selected parking mode is shown on the
instrument panel display and the reduced
display shows another parking mode it can
be changed to.
●
Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-
wards the side of the road where you are
parking. The instrument panel displays the
side corresponding to the road. By default, if
the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in
the direction of traffic.
●
If necessary, press the button again to
change to the next parking mode.
●
Once you have switched to all possible
parking modes, if the button is pressed
again, the system switches off.
●
Press the button again to switch the sys-
tem back on.
●
Follow the instructions displayed on the in-
strument panel while paying attention to traf-
fic and drive the vehicle past the parking
space.
Special case of perpendicular parking
space to park forwards without driving
past first
●
The necessary conditions to park with Park
Assist have to be met
›››
page 275.
●
Drive forward towards the parking space
while paying attention to traffic and stop the
vehicle.
●
Press the button once.
●
A control lamp on the button lights up
when the system is switched on. Additionally,
the selected parking mode is shown on the
instrument panel display without reduced
display.
●
Release the steering wheel
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 27
4
.
277
Driving
Parking with the parking assist system
Fig. 199 On the instrument panel display: paral-
lel parking. Finding a parking space
. Park-
ing position. Manoeuvring.
Fig. 200 On the instrument panel display: angle
parking. Finding a parking space. P
arking
position. Manoeuvring.
Message to move forwards
Y
our v
ehicle
Parking space detected
Message to park
Message to press the brake pedal
Progress bar
1
2
3
4
5
6
The necessary conditions have to be met to
park with P
ark Assist
›
››
page 275 and the
parking mode must be selected
›››
page 277.
Parking
●
Look at the display on the instrument panel
to see if the space has been detected as “ap-
propriate” and if the correct position for park-
ing has been reached
›››
Fig. 199
or
›››
Fig. 200 . The space is considered
“appropriate” if the display on the instrument
panel shows the message to park
4
.
●
Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause,
engage the r
e
verse gear.
●
Release the steering wheel
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 27
4
.
●
Please note the following message: Inter-
vention in active direction. Watch
your surroundings!. While you keep watch
278
Help with parking and manoeuvring
around you, carefully start accelerating up to
no mor
e than 7 km/h (
4 mph). During the
parking manoeuvre, the system only takes
charge of the steering. You, as the driver,
have to accelerate, engage the clutch if
necessary, change gears and brake.
●
Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-
nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to
move forward appears on the instrument
panel display
›››
Fig. 199 or
›››
Fig. 200
; OR: reverse until the Park Assist fin-
ished message appears on the instrument
panel display. The progress bar
6
indicates
the dist
ance t
o cover
›››
page 279.
●
Press the brake pedal until the parking as-
sist system completes the steering wheel
turns; OR: until the symbol goes out on the
instrument panel screen.
●
Select first gear.
●
Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot
signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-
verse indication appears on the instrument
panel display. The Park Assist system steers
the vehicle forward and back until it centres it
in the space
›››
Fig. 199 or
›››
Fig. 200 .
●
For best results, wait at the end of each
manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has
finished turning the steering wheel. The park-
ing manoeuvre ends when a corresponding
message is displayed on the instrument pan-
el and, in some cases, an acoustic signal
sounds.
Progress bars
The progress bar
›››
Fig. 199
6
and
›
›
›
Fig. 200
6
on the
scr
een of the instrument panel displ
ays the
relative distance to be covered. The greater
the distance, the fuller the progress bar.
When driving forward, the content of the pro-
gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-
versing, it decreases downwards.
Note
If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely
during parking, the result may not be the
best.
Leaving a parking space with the
parking assist syst
em (only f
or par-
allel parking)
Fig. 201 On the instrument panel display: exit
a par
all
el parking space.
Your vehicle in reverse gear
Message giving the pr
oposed manoeuvr
e
to exit the parking space
Progress bar to indicate the distance left
to cover
Leaving a parking space (parallel parking)
The necessary conditions to exit a parking
space with Park Assist have to be met
›››
page 276.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 196. A control
lamp on the button lights up when the sys-
tem is switched on.
●
Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-
wards the road you will enter when exiting the
parking space.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Release the steering wheel
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 27
4
. Please note the fol-
lowing message: Intervention in active
direction. Watch your surroundings!.
While you keep watch around you, carefully
start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h
(4 mph). When exiting the parking space, the
system only takes charge of the steering.
You, as the driver, have to accelerate, en-
gage the clutch if necessary, change
gears and brake.
●
Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-
nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument
panel display shows the forward indication.
»
1
2
3
279
Driving
The progress bar
›
›
›
Fig. 201
3
indicates the
dist
ance t
o cover
›››
page 279.
●
Press the brake pedal until the parking as-
sist system completes the steering wheel
turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the
symbol goes out on the instrument panel
screen.
●
Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot
signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-
verse indication appears on the instrument
panel display. The Park Assist system steers
the vehicle forward and back until it can exit
the space.
●
The vehicle can exit the space when a cor-
responding message is displayed on the in-
strument panel and, in some cases, an
acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the
steering with the turning angle set by the Park
Assist system.
●
Paying attention to the traffic, exit the park-
ing space.
Automatic operation of the brakes
by the parking assist system
Park Assist helps the driver by automatically
br
aking in cert
ain situations.
The driver is always responsible for braking in
time
›››
.
Automatic braking intervention to avoid
e
x
ceeding the speed limit
To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-
prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving
a parking space, the brakes may activate au-
tomatically. After automatically activating
the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a
parking space may continue.
The brakes are only automatically activated
once for each attempt to enter or exit a park-
ing space. If the speed of approximately
7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-
sponding operation is halted.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
Depending on certain conditions, the Park
Assist system can automatically brake the
vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly
actioning and holding down the brake ped-
al
›››
. Following this the driver must press
the br
ak
e pedal.
Automatic braking intervention to reduce
damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-
ishing.
WARNING
The automatic braking intervention by Park
Assist should ne
ver tempt you to take any
risk that may compromise safety. The sys-
tem is not a replacement for driver aware-
ness.
●
The Park Assist syst
em is subject to cer-
tain limitations inherent to the system. In
certain situations, the automatic braking
intervention may only work in a limited way
or not work at all.
●
Always be ready to use the brakes your-
self!
●
The automatic braking intervention will
end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-
wards, brake the vehicle yourself.
Parking aid parking and ma-
noeuvring (P
arkPil
ot)
Introduction
These assist systems help you when parking
and manoeuvring:
–
Plus Parking Aid
›
›
›
page 282. It is an as-
sist system that provides a visual and audio
warning of obstacles detected in front and
behind the vehicle .
–
Rear Parking Aid
›››
page 285. This is an
assistant that gives a visual and audio
warning of obstacles detected behind the
vehicle
›››
page 285.
WARNING
●
Alw
ays pay attention, by looking directly,
to traffic and the area around the vehicle.
280
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Assistance systems are not a replacement
for driv
er awareness. Responsibility always
lies with the driver.
●
The sensors have blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not detected. Pay
special attention to children and animals.
●
Always keep visual control of the sur-
roundings: use the mirrors for additional
help.
CAUTION
Parking distance warning system functions
can be aff
ect
ed by different factors that
can cause damage:
●
Under certain circumstances, the system
does not detect or display certain objects:
–
Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,
posts and thin trees.
–
Objects that are located above the
sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.
–
Objects with certain surfaces or struc-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-
der snow.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and gar-
ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-
sors' signals. The system cannot detect
these objects or people wearing such
clothes correctly.
●
Sensor signals may be affected by exter-
nal sound sources. This may prevent them
from detecting people or objects.
●
If the system w
arns you of the proximity
of a low obstacle, please note that after
being detected by the system, the obstacle
in question may disappear from the meas-
urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos-
er, and the system will no longer warn of its
presence. In certain circumstances, ob-
jects such as high kerbs that could damage
the underside of the vehicle are not detec-
ted.
●
If the parking distance warning system is
ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-
ble damage.
●
Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can
modify the orientation of the sensors. This
can affect the parking aid function. Have
the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
●
A number plate or number plate holder
with dimensions that exceed the space for
the number plate, or a cured or deformed
number plate can cause false detections or
a loss of visibility for the sensors.
Note
●
The display on the Inf
otainment system
screen shows a slight time delay.
●
In certain situations, the system can give
a warning even though there is no obstacle
in the detected area:
–
Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces
with long grass.
–
External ultr
asound sources, such as
other vehicles equipped with ultra-
sound systems.
–
Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex-
haust gases.
–
If the number plate is not properly se-
cured to the surface of the bumper.
–
Gradient changes.
●
In order to guarantee good operation,
keep the sensors clean, free of snow and
ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
other objects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
unless you do so very briefly, and always
keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
●
Fitting certain accessories to the front of
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
vertising, may interfere with the operation
of the Park Assist.
●
We recommend that you practice park-
ing in an area without traffic.
●
The volume and tone of the signals and
indications can be changed
›››
page 286.
●
Please observe information on towing a
trailer
›››
page 286.
281
Driving
Parking System Plus*
Description
Fig. 202
Parking aid view on the Infotainment
syst
em displ
ay.
Parking aid plus assists the driv
er by giving
visual and audio w
arnings about obstacles
detected in front of and behind the vehicle.
The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an
obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible
signals and in the Infotainment system
›››
Fig. 202.
When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi-
ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve-
hicle or behind it by choosing different
sounds.
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
1.20 m
A
1.60 m
0.90 m
As you appr
oach the obst
acle, the frequency
of the audible signals will increase. The signal
will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:
Stop!
If the separation is maintained, the warning
volume is reduced after about 4 seconds.
In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-
hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me-
tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing
areas are screened and obstacles at the
sides of the vehicle are displayed
C
.
Special f
eat
ures of ParkPilot with Area
View
In the following situations the screened area
on the side of the vehicle is automatically hid-
den:
●
When a vehicle door is opened.
●
When the ASR is switched off.
●
When there is ASR or ESC regulation.
●
If the vehicle remains stationary for more
than approximately 3 minutes.
B
C
Parking Aid operation
Fig. 203
Centre console: parking aid button.
Manually connecting and disconnecting
the parking aid
●
Press the butt
on
once.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-
play (the audible sounds remain active)
●
Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
tory-assembled infotainment system.
●
OR press the BACK function button.
Automatic connection of Parking Aid
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: If you drive forward at a speed of less
than 15 km/h (9 mph) and an obstacle is en-
countered, it is detected when it is approx.
less than 95 cm. away. If the automatic con-
nection is activated, a reduced view is shown.
●
OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.
282
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
●
Move the selector lever to position P.
●
OR: driv
e forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) or
f
aster.
Temporary suppression of sound in Park-
ing Aid
●
Press the function button.
Change from reduced view to full view
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.
Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear
View Camera “RVC”)
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR press the RVC function button.
A short confirmation signal will be heard and
the button symbol will light up when the sys-
tem is switched on.
Automatic activation
When the Plus P
arking Aid
connects auto-
matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the
segments will appear on screen.
It only operates every time the speed is re-
duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first
time.
If it is switched off using the button, one of
the following actions must be taken for it to
reactivate automatically:
●
Switch off the ignition and switch it on
again.
●
OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)
approx.
●
OR: move the lever into position P and pack
again.
●
OR: switch the automatic activation on and
off in the Infotainment system.
Automatic activation of the park assist can be
switched on and off in the infotainment sys-
tem
›››
page 88:
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the function button > SETTINGS
> Parking and manoeuvring.
●
Select Automatic activation. If the box is
checked, the function is connected.
If activated automatically, an audible sound
warning will only be given when obstacles in
front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-
prox.
CAUTION
The automatic connection of the Parking
Aid only works when you ar
e driving slowly.
If driving style is not adapted to the circum-
stances, an accident and serious injury or
damage may be caused.
Visual indication segments
Fig. 204
Parking aid view on the Infotainment
syst
em displ
ay.
The optical indication of the segments works
as f
oll
ows:
White and grey: the obstacle is more
than approx. 30 cm away from the path
or in the direction opposite to travel.
They are also displayed when the elec-
tronic parking brake is activated.
Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on
the vehicle’s path and are at a distance
of less than approx. 30 cm away.
Segmentos rojos: obstacles are less
than approx. 30 cm away.
»
–
–
–
283
Driving
A wake will indicate the anticipated forward
or backw
ar
d trajectory, depending on the en-
gaged gear.
If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,
the corresponding audible warning will
sound.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In
the collision zone, the obstacles are repre-
sented in red (including those out of the
path). Stop the vehicle!
›››
in Introduction
on page 280,
›
›
›
in Introduction on
page 281 !
In the e
v
ent the car is equipped with the Top
View Camera system, Park Assist visual guid-
ance will appear in accordance with the view
selected in the Top View Camera system.
Setting the indications and audio
signals
The audio indications and signals are set in
the inf
ot
ainment system
›››
page 84:
Setup
Automatic activa-
tion
On/off
Front volume*
Volume in the front and rear
area.
Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.
Setup
Adjust volume
When the parking aid is
swit
ched on, the volume of
the audio source will be re-
duced, depending on the se-
lected option.
Front sound set-
tings/sharpness*
Sound tone in the front area.
Rear sound set-
tings/sharpness*
Sound tone in the rear area.
Error messages
If a an error or fault message appears on the
instrument clust
er in P
ark Assist, there is a
fault.
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
necting the ignition, it will not be indicated
next time the parking aid is connected.
If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in
area
A
are displayed
›
›
›
Fig. 202. If a front
sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area
B
are displayed. Symbol is displ
ayed.
W
e recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-
alised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Trailer mode
Fig. 205
Parking assist display on the screen
with tr
ail
er attached.
On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch,
when the tr
ail
er is connected, the rear sen-
sors will not activate when reverse gear is en-
gaged or button is pressed. Therefore, any
objects behind or to the side of the vehicle
will not be indicated on the screen and no
audio signals will sound.
The screen will only display objects detected
at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will
be hidden.
Manoeuvre braking function*
The emergency braking function is used to
minimise damage in the e
v
ent of a collision.
Depending on the equipment, if the Parking
Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring
284
Help with parking and manoeuvring
function activates emergency braking when it
det
ects an obst
acle in the vehicle’s path that
could cause a collision, driving forwards or in
reverse.
The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is
activated automatically. For the system to
operate, manoeuvring speed must be be-
tween 2.5-10 km/h (1.5-6 mph) for the front
area and between 1.5-10 km/h (1-6 mph) for
the rear.
Following an intervention, the braking while
manoeuvring function will be inactive in the
same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once
the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s
position is changed, the function will be ac-
tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.
The manoeuvre brake function (RBF) can be
set in the infotainment system using the func-
tion button > SETTINGS > Parking and
manoeuvring.
●
on – permits the use of the braking whil
e
manoeuvring function.
●
off – does not permit the use of the
braking while manoeuvring function.
Temporary suppression of emergency
braking
●
When the function is deactivated with the
Braking whil
e manoeuvring button that ap-
pears on the Parking aid screen of the Info-
tainment system.
●
Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or
bonnet are opened.
Rear parking aid*
Description
The rear parking aid is an optical and audi-
bl
e assistant that warns of obstacles located
behind the vehicle.
There are sensors integrated in the rear
bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you
are alerted by audible and visible warnings
on the Infotainment system.
If the Top View Camera* system is installed,
the rear parking aid will give an audible warn-
ing of objects in the vicinity of the rear of the
vehicle and the infotainment system’s screen
will display the image from the Top View
Camera*, which provides a real-time image
of objects located around the vehicle.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and
the like, as this could affect the system's op-
eration. Cleaning instructions
›››
page 343.
The approximate measurement range of the
rear sensors is:
●
Side area: 0.60 m
●
Central area: 1.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the frequency
of the audible signal
s will increase. The signal
will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:
Stop!
›››
in Introduction on page 280,
›
›
›
in Introduction on page 281!
If the separ
ation is maint
ained, the warning
volume is reduced after about 4 seconds.
Parking Aid operation
Parking Aid connection
●
Select reverse gear.
P
arking Aid disconnection
●
Pl
ace the selector level in position P, N or D
(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-
verse (for manual gearboxes).
Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain
the system active for approximately 8 sec-
onds before switching off. During that time,
Parking assist will switch off if:
●
The selector lever is moved to position P.
●
OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx.
15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.
If the Top View Camera* is installed, rear
parking aid will be automatically deactivated
when disengaging reverse gear.
»
285
Driving
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-
pl
ay (the audibl
e sounds remain active)
●
Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
tory-assembled infotainment system.
●
OR press the BACK function button.
Temporary suppression of sound in Park-
ing Aid
●
Press the function button. If you have the
Top View Camera* system installed, you can-
not use the temporary suppression of sound
in Parking Aid.
Change from reduced view to full view
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist
(Rear View Camera “RVC”) click on the car
icon of the reduced display.
Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear
View Camera “RVC”)
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: press the RVC function button.
Setting the indications and audio signals
The indications and audio signal settings are
in the infotainment system
›››
page 84.
●
Rear volume*: volume in the rear area.
●
Rear sound settings/treble*: sound
tone in the rear area.
●
Lower volume: when the parking aid is
switched on, the volume of the audio source
will be reduced, depending on the selected
option.
Error messages
If a an error or fault message appears on the
instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a
fault.
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
necting the ignition, it will not be indicated
next time the parking aid is connected.
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is
displayed on the infotainment system display.
We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-
alised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Towing device
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
device from the factory, when the trailer is
connected, the parking aid will not be activa-
ted when reverse gear is engaged.
Visual indication segments
Fig. 206
Parking aid view on the Infotainment
syst
em displ
ay.
The distance to the obstacles can be estima-
t
ed with the help of the segments at the r
ear
of the vehicle.
The optical indication of the segments works
as follows:
White segments: the obstacle is more
than approx. 30 cm away from the path
or in the direction opposite to travel.
They are also displayed when the elec-
tronic parking brake is activated.
Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on
the vehicle’s path and are at a distance
of less than approx. 30 cm away.
Segmentos rojos: obstacles are less
than approx. 30 cm away.
–
–
–
286
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-
cl
e
’s direction of travel, the corresponding
audible warning will sound.
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
this means that the vehicle has reached the
collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-
cles are represented in red (including those
out of the path). Do not continue to reverse
›››
in Introduction on page 280,
›
›
›
in
Intr
oduction on page 281
!
If you are equipped with the Top View
Camera*
Segments are not displayed when the vehicle
is equipped with Top View Camera*.
The Parking Aid system will issue an audible
warning for objects that are near the rear of
the vehicle, and the Top View Camera* im-
age will be available on the screen, giving a
real image of the objects around the car.
Trailer Assist
Introduction
Trailer assist helps the driver to reverse and
manoeuvr
e with a tr
ailer.
By moving the rotary knob of the exterior mir-
rors, the trailer assist directs the trailer that is
hitched. The driver has to accelerate, change
gears and brake!
System limitations
Under certain circumstances, the camera
does not detect objects such as trailer draw
bars, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an
open (or opening) rear lid, which could dam-
age the vehicle.
In order to guarantee good system operation,
keep the camera clean, free of snow or ice,
and do not cover it with adhesives or other
objects. Do not allow the draw bar to be cov-
ered by external influences.
Use the trailer manoeuvre assistant only
when the rear lid is closed correctly.
CAUTION
The trailer maneuver assistant does not
tak
e the vehicle’s surrounding as a refer-
ence. No obstacle detection takes place.
The driver alone has to assess whether it is
possible to manoeuvre safely with the tow
vehicle and trailer set.
●
Always observe the movement of the
trailer and, if necessary, actively interrupt
the manoeuvre to avoid damage. Even if
the trailer manoeuvring assistant is operat-
ed correctly, on rare occasions the trailer
may move in a different way to the setting.
●
Do not rely sol
ely on the indications on
the instrument cluster display.
Note
The trailer manoeuvre assistant automati-
cally s
wit
ches off approx. 10 minutes after
being activated. The assistant is also deac-
tivated if the driver does not perform any
action over the course of approx. 3 mi-
nutes.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met for
the tr
ail
er manoeuvre assistant to work:
●
The engine is running.
●
The ESC must be connected.
●
The driver's door and the rear lid are
closed.
●
The exterior mirrors are not folded.
●
There is a non-articulated one or two axle
trailer hitched and electrically connected.
●
Both the tow vehicle and trailer are stop-
ped.
●
The maximum bending angle has not been
exceeded.
●
The length of the trailer’s drawbar has been
determined.
»
287
Driving
Determine the length of the trailer's draw-
bar
In or
der f
or the trailer manoeuvre assistant to
determine the length of the trailer’s drawbar,
drive the vehicle-trailer set through some
turning manoeuvres or curves. The more pre-
cisely the length of the drawbar is deter-
mined, the wider the angles that will be avail-
able when manoeuvring. The assistant subdi-
vides the maximum available end stops of the
angle indicator into four levels: approx. 30°,
45°, 60° and 75°.
Note
For technical reasons, the trailer manoeu-
vre assist
ant cannot always correctly de-
tect trailers with LED technology taillights.
Operating
Fig. 207
Rotary exterior mirror controls.: adjust
the tr
ail
er angle.
Fig. 208 Instrument panel display: engage re-
verse gear
Key of the Fig. 207,
›
›
›
Fig. 208:
Rotary exterior mirror controls.
Trailer orientation to the left
Trailer orientation to the right
Move the vehicle in the direction of the
towing device.
Actual trailer position
Target trailer position
Angle indicator zero position
Manoeuvre with the tow vehicle and trailer
set
The system requirements must be met
›››
page 287.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Press button .
●
Release the steering wheel
›››
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
●
T
ilt the r
otary control until the desired di-
rection is reached
›››
Fig. 207. A representa-
tion of the tow vehicle and trailer set is shown
on the instrument cluster screen for guidance
purposes
›››
Fig. 208.
●
Reverse by accelerating slowly. Pay atten-
tion to your surroundings!
●
If necessary, correct the angle with the ro-
tary control. Press the control towards the left
or right: the set will move to the left or right.
Press the control backwards: the vehicle will
follow the trailer.
●
Reverse and move forwards until the de-
sired position is reached.
●
The manoeuvre ends when a message is
displayed on the instrument cluster display
and, in some cases, an audio signal sounds.
Automatic brake operation
The trailer manoeuvre assistant helps the
driver by automatically operating the brakes
in certain situations.
The driver is responsible for braking in
time
›››
.
The br
ak
es may be applied automatically
and the function deactivated in the following
situations:
●
A certain speed is exceeded.
●
The steering wheel is grabbed. The vehicle
brakes automatically until it stops.
288
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
If the k
ey
is pressed during the manoeu-
vre or the driver’s door opens.
WARNING
The quickly turning steering wheel can
cause serious injuries.
●
Do not hold the steering wheel during the
manoeuvre until the syst
em requests it.
●
Exception: If a dangerous situation oc-
curs, intervene and take over the steering.
WARNING
Never allow the automatic operation of
brak
es to lead you to take any risk that
compromises safety. The system is not a
replacement for driver awareness.
●
The manoeuvre assist system is subject
to certain limitations inherent to the sys-
tem. In certain situations, the automatic
braking intervention may only work in a
limited way or not work at all.
●
Always be ready to use the brakes your-
self!
●
Automatic brake operation ends after 1.5
seconds approx. if the vehicle is stopped.
After this, brake the vehicle yourself.
Note
The exterior mirrors cannot be adjusted
while the assist
ant is active. The saved set-
ting for the passenger’s mirror can be acti-
vated
›››
page 124.
Troubleshooting
Camera with no visibility, fault message,
the system disconnects
●
Cl
ean the camera or remove possible ad-
hesives or accessories from it
›››
page 344.
●
Check for visible damage.
The system behaves differently than ex-
pected
There can be several causes:
●
The camera is dirty
››
›
page 344. In addi-
tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be
reduced by detergent residue or any type of
coating.
●
The system requirements must be met
›››
page 287.
●
The camera is covered with water.
●
The vehicle has some type of damage in
the camera area, e.g. due to a parking im-
pact.
●
The field of view of the camera is blocked
by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier sys-
tem.
●
Changes have been made to the paint in
the camera area and structural modifications
have been made, e.g. to the front part of the
vehicle and the running gear.
Solution for all cases
●
Temporarily disconnect the system.
●
Check if one of the causes indicated above
has occurred.
●
Once the source of the problem has been
eliminated, the system may be reconnected.
●
If the system still behaves unpredictably,
have it checked by a specialised workshop.
Peripheral view system (Top
View Camera)*
Introduction
Using 4 cameras, the system generates a
r
epr
esentation that is shown on the infotain-
ment system display. The cameras are loca-
ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors
and the rear lid.
The functions and representations of the Area
View system may vary depending on whether
or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.
WARNING
The image from the cameras does not
make it possibl
e to calculate the distance
to the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.)
precisely, so using them could cause seri-
ous accidents and injury.
●
The camera lenses augment and distort
the visual field and the objects on the
»
289
Driving
screen are seen differently and imprecise-
ly.
●
Certain objects may not be shown or may
not be shown v
ery clearly, for example,
posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu-
tion or if light conditions are insufficient.
●
The cameras have blind spots in which
obstacles and people are not registered.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the T
op Vie
w Camera* system cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics and it only works within the limits of
the system. The greater convenience provi-
ded by the Area View system should never
tempt you to take any risk that may com-
promise safety. If used negligently or invol-
untarily, it may cause serious accidents
and injuries. The system is not a replace-
ment for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Do not be distracted from the traffic by
looking at the screen.
●
Monitor the area around the vehicle at all
times, since the cameras do not capture
small children, animals and certain objects
in all situations.
●
The system will probably be unable to
represent all areas clearly.
CAUTION
●
The camera images ar
e only two-dimen-
sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, ob-
jects that jut out or holes on the road, for
example, are more difficult to detect or
may not be seen at all.
●
In certain circumstances, the camera
does not capture objects such as beams,
fences, posts or thin trees, which could
damage the vehicle.
●
The system displays the auxiliary lines
and boxes regardless of the vehicle's envi-
ronment, no objects are detected. The driv-
er is responsible for determining that the
vehicle will fit in the parking space.
Area View system
Fig. 209
Viewing the top view system: aerial
vie
w
.
There are four different views to choose from:
Front camera area
Right camer
a ar
ea
Rear camera area
Left camera area
Function buttons:
Exit the current display.
Adjust the display: bright, contrast and
colour.
Three-dimensional views
Depending on the equipment: connect-
ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot
sound.
The aerial view is generated by combining
the images from all the cameras
›››
Fig. 209. The aerial view can be selected
by pressing the vehicle in the area.
Select the corresponding view by pressing
the different areas
›››
Fig. 209
A
to
D
of the
aerial vie
w or the r
educed aerial view.
Conditions necessary for the use of the
Area View system
●
The doors and the rear lid must be closed.
●
The image must be reliable and clear. For
this reason, for example, the camera lens
must be clean.
●
The area around the vehicle must be clear-
ly and totally visible.
A
B
C
D
290
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
The ar
ea f
or parking or manoeuvring
should be a flat surface.
●
The vehicle should not be loaded very
heavily at the rear.
●
The driver must be used to the system.
●
There should be no damage to the vehicle
in the camera area. If the position or installa-
tion angle of the cameras have been
changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the
system should be checked by a specialised
workshop.
Special characteristics
The images on the area view system cameras
are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of
spatial depth, it is difficult or impossible to
make out on-screen any holes there may be
on the ground, objects jutting out from the
ground or parts protruding from other vehi-
cles.
Situations in which the objects or other vehi-
cles appear to be further away or closer than
they really are:
●
On moving from a horizontal plane to a
slope.
●
On moving from a slope to a horizontal
plane.
●
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
●
If the vehicle approaches protruding ob-
jects. These objects may be outside the cam-
eras' angle of visibility.
Trailer mode
The Area View system conceals, in the rear
camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines
when the factory-fitted towing bracket is
connected electrically to a trailer
›››
page 297.
Note
In order to become familiar with the system
and its functions, SEAT recommends that
you pr
actice handling the Area View sys-
tem in an area where there is not too much
traffic or in a car park.
Connecting and disconnecting
Fig. 210 Centre console: button to manually
activ
at
e/deactivate the peripheral vision sys-
tem when combined with the park assist sys-
tem.
Manual activation
●
Press button once
›
›
›
Fig. 210.
The infotainment system screen displays the
aerial view
›››
Fig. 209. If you press the
button when driving at over 15 km/h (9 mph),
the image will not be displayed.
Automatic activation
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: The vehicle moves backwards.
The view of the image of the vehicle's rear
camera is shown in parallel parking mode
with the reduced aerial view.
Manual disconnection
●
Press button again
›››
Fig. 210.
●
OR: press a button on the factory-equip-
ped infotainment system, for example the
button.
●
OR: press the function button.
Automatic off
●
Drive forwards at over 15 km/h (9 mph) ap-
proximately.
●
OR: switch off the ignition. The Area View
system menu disappears immediately.
291
Driving
Views of the peripheral vision sys-
t
em (modes)
Fig. 211
Display on the top view system
scr
een:
Fr
ont camera: off-road view.
Rear
camera: off-road view.
Depending on the equipment: connect-
ing and disconnecting the P
arkPil
ot
sound.
Exiting the Area View system screen:
Adjust the display: bright, contrast and
colour.
The selected view is displayed on the right
side of the screen. The reduced aerial view
shown on the right side displays the view
framed in yellow. In addition, the right margin
of the screen displays the menu options pos-
sible and the views (the so-called “modes”)
of the camera in question. The active view
(mode) at the time is highlighted.
The red lines are indicate a distance of ap-
prox. 40 cm away from the vehicle.
Aerial views (bird's eye view)
Main mode:
The vehicle and its immediate vicinity
seen from above are shown. Depending
on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path
may also be displayed.
Three-dimensional views:
The vehicle and its vicinity seen from
above are shown.
The vehicle and its vicinity seen from
above are shown obliquely.
The vehicle and its vicinity seen obli-
quely are shown.
Swipe the infotainment system display with
your finger in the direction of the arrows to
change the angle of vision in the three-di-
mensional views of the vehicle and its vicinity.
Front camera views (front view)
Cross traffic. This visualization helps to
monitor traffic to the left, front and right
of the vehicle and can be used, for ex-
ample, when exiting garages or narrow
exits.
Angle parking. The area in front of the
vehicle is shown. Orientation lines are
shown to give guidance.
Off-road. The area directly in front of the
vehicle seen from above is shown. For
example, on a slope, in order to see the
area directly in front of the vehicle.
Side camera views (side view)
Right and left sides. The areas located
directly to the side of the vehicle seen
from above are represented in order to
navigate possible obstacles more pre-
cisely.
The driver’s or passenger's side seen
from above is shown. This makes it
possible to visualize the blind spots
along the vehicle.
Rear camera views (rear view)
Angle parking. The area behind the vehi-
cle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shown to
give guidance.
Parallel parking. The area directly be-
hind the vehicle is shown. The coloured
boxes and auxiliary lines serve as orien-
tation.
Off-road or hitching a trailer function.
The vehicle's rear is presented.
292
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Green and red semicircular auxiliary
lines ar
e displ
ayed in vehicles with a fac-
tory-fitted towing bracket. The auxiliary
lines indicate the distance from the tow-
ing bracket. The distance between the
auxiliary lines (green and red) is approx.
30 cm The orange auxiliary line indi-
cates, according to how the steering
wheel is turned, the precalculated direc-
tion of the towed device.
Cross traffic. This visualization helps to
monitor traffic to the left, front and right
of the vehicle and can be used, for ex-
ample, when exiting garages or narrow
exits.
Reverse Assist (Rear View
Camera)*
Operating and safety warnings
WARNING
●
The re
verse assist does not make it possi-
ble to precisely calculate the distance from
obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-
tem's own limits, hence its negligent use
may cause serious accidents and injuries if
used without due care. The driver should be
aware of his/her surroundings at all times
to ensure safe driving.
●
The camera l
ens expands and distorts
the field of view and displays the objects
on the screen in a way that is different from
reality. Distance perception is also distor-
ted.
●
Due to the screen resolution or light con-
ditions, some items may be blurry or not
displayed at all. Take care with thin posts,
fences, railings or trees that might not be
seen on the screen and could damage the
vehicle.
●
The reverse assist has blind spots where
it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the
vehicle's surrounding area at all times.
●
The system is not a replacement for driv-
er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-
noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area
at all times.
●
Do not be distracted from the traffic by
looking at the screen.
●
The images are only two-dimensional.
Protruding objects or holes in the road, for
example, are more difficult to detect or
may not be seen at all.
●
Vehicle load modifies the representation
of the guide lines. The width represented
by the lines decreases with vehicle load.
Pay special attention to the surroundings
when the inside of the vehicle of the lug-
gage compartment are loaded.
●
In the following situations, objects or oth-
er vehicles appear to be further away or
closer than they actually are. Pay special
attention:
–
If mo
ving from a flat surface to a slope
and vice-versa.
–
If the vehicle is heavily loaded.
–
When the vehicle approaches objects
that are not on the ground surface or
that protrude from it. These objects
may be outside the camera angle when
reversing.
Note
●
It is impor
t
ant to take great care and pay
special attention if the driver is not familiar
with the system.
●
The reverse assist reference lines disap-
pear when the rear lid is open.
Introduction
A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-
sists the driv
er with r
everse parking or ma-
noeuvring
›››
page 240.
The camera image is viewed together with
orientation lines projected on the Infotain-
ment system screen. Part of the bumper can
be seen at the bottom, which can be used by
the driver as a reference point.
»
293
Driving
Reverse assist modes
Depending on the equipment, the f
oll
owing
modes are available:
●
Angle parking: reverse parking perpendic-
ular to the road.
●
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel
to the road.
●
Assistance function for hitching a trailer:
helps to hitch a trailer.
●
Cross traffic: traffic is monitored in a trans-
verse direction.
Connecting and disconnecting
Connect the reverse assist
●
Select reverse gear.
●
OR: pr
ess button .
Disconnect the r
everse assist
Drive forward at least 15 km/h (9 mph).
Shown on the display
The system’s functions and representations
may v
ary depending on the equipment.
The assist
ant's image view changes when the
factory-fitted tow hitch is electronically con-
nected to a trailer
›››
page 304.
Reverse assist functions and symbols
When the reverse assist is connected, you
can make adjustments using the function but-
tons. Some adjustments are equipment-de-
pendent.
Exit the current display
Switch to angle parking
›››
page 295
Switch to parallel parking
›››
page 296
Switch to the trailer hitching assistance
function
Switch to cross traffic
Adjust the display: brightness, contrast
and colour.
Switch to park assist
›››
page 280
Display the parking aid view
Hide the parking aid view
Turn the steering wheel (parallel park-
ing)
Stop the vehicle (parallel parking)
Guide lines
Green horizontal lines: extension of the vehi-
cle.
Red lateral line: when the steering wheel
needs to be turned the other way, a yellow
line turns red (parallel parking).
Yellow lines: vehicle path depending on the
steering angle.
Yellow auxiliary boxes: front and rear delimi-
tation of the parking space (parallel parking).
Green lateral line: point for turning the other
way when parking (parallel parking).
Red and green frame: outline of the vehicle
(parallel parking).
Assistance function for hitching a trailer
On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing de-
vice, this function can be used to move the
vehicle close to a tow bar. Due to the high
level of magnification of the image in this
mode, objects behind the vehicle are seen
very late.
Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainment
system.
Red lines: position of the tow hitch.
Green lines: distance to the tow hitch. The
distance between the lines is approx. 0.1 m
Orange line: precalculated direction of the
tow hitch depending on steering wheel rota-
tion.
Cross traffic
This visualization helps to monitor traffic be-
hind the vehicle and can be used, for exam-
ple, when exiting garages or narrow exits.
294
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Requirements
To park with reverse assist, the following re-
quirements must be met:
●
Do not e
xceed a speed of approx. 15 km/h
(9 mph).
●
Parking space width: vehicle width + 0.2 m
●
Distance: approx. 1 meter from the parking
space (parallel only).
●
Length of the parking space: approx. 8 m
(parallel only)
To display a real image, the following require-
ments must be met:
●
The luggage compartment rear door is
closed.
●
The surr
oundings are on a flat surface.
●
The vehicle should not be loaded very
heavily at the rear.
Parallel parking
Fig. 212 Display on the Infotainment system
scr
een.: parking with r
everse assist.
Key to the Fig. 2
12
:
Finding a parking space
Go to the selected parking space
Centre the vehicle inside the parking
space
Road
Parking space
Lateral boundary of the parking space
Rear boundary of the parking space
1
2
3
4
Parking
●
Press the or butt
on bef
ore passing in
front of the selected parking space.
●
With reverse assist connected and in work-
ing order, press the function button .
●
Place the vehicle in front of the parking
space
›››
Fig. 212
two
.
●
Reverse while turning the steering wheel so
that the yell
o
w lines enter the parking space.
The green and yellow lines must match the
side boundary lines
3
.
●
Stop the vehicle when the red line has
r
eached the r
ear boundary
4
.
295
Driving
Parallel parking
Fig. 213 Display on the Infotainment system
scr
een.: R
everse assist, mode 2.
Key to the Fig. 2
13
:
Finding a parking space
Go to the selected parking space
Centre the vehicle inside the parking
space
Road
Obstacle or auxiliary box
Lateral boundary of the parking space
Obstacle or auxiliary box
1
2
3
4
Parking
●
If necessary, press the butt
on bef
ore
passing in front of the selected parking
space.
●
With reverse assist connected and in work-
ing order, press the function button .
●
Turn on the corresponding turn signal on
the side of the road where you want to park.
●
Place the vehicle parallel to the parking
space, approx. 1 meter away.
●
If obstacles protrude from the auxiliary box-
es, find another parking space or realign the
vehicle.
●
Select reverse gear. A red frame represents
the target position of your vehicle.
●
Turn the steering wheel until the red frame
is between the auxiliary boxes and has
changed to green. Keep the steering wheel in
this position and start driving slowly.
●
When an arrow appears, reverse. A yellow
line and a green line appear. The arrow indi-
cates the distance that still has to be cov-
ered.
●
While reversing, keep the steering wheel in
the adjusted position. Adjust the steering
wheel rotation correctly when an indication
appears on the steering wheel symbol .
●
Reverse until the STOP signal is shown or
until the green line matches up with the later-
al boundary of the parking space.
●
Stop the vehicle. Turn the steering wheel as
far as it’ll go in the opposite direction.
●
Reverse until the STOP signal is shown or
until the red line reaches the rear boundary.
Troubleshooting
The system behaves differently than ex-
pected
Ther
e can be several causes:
●
The camera is dirty
››
›
page 344. In addi-
tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be
reduced by detergent residue or any type of
coating.
●
The system requirements must be met
›››
page 295.
●
The camera is covered with water.
●
The factory-fitted towing bracket must not
be electrically connected to a trailer
›››
page 304.
●
The vehicle has some type of damage in
the camera area, e.g. due to a parking im-
pact.
●
The field of view of the camera is blocked
by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier sys-
tem.
●
Changes have been made to the paint in
the camera area, or structural modifications
have been made to a component such as the
running gear.
296
Towing bracket device*
Camera with no visibility, fault message,
the syst
em disconnects
●
Cl
ean the camera or remove possible ad-
hesives or accessories from it
›››
page 344.
●
Check for visible damage.
Possible solution
●
Temporarily disconnect the system.
●
Check if one of the causes indicated above
has occurred.
●
Once the source of the problem has been
eliminated, the system may be reconnected.
●
If the system still behaves unpredictably,
have it checked by a specialised workshop.
Towing bracket device*
T
r
ailer mode
Introduction
Take into account country-specific regula-
tions about driving with a trail
er and the use
of a towing bracket.
The vehicle has been developed primarily for
carrying people, although it can also be used
to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding
technical equipment. This additional load has
an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption
and vehicle performance and in some cases
can reduce the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from
the vehicle, and thus more concentration
from the driver.
In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both
the vehicle and the trailer.
Maximum vertical load technically permit-
ted on the coupling device
The maximum technical permitted vertical
load of the trailer's towing bracket on the
hook of the tow-bar is 100 kg.
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing
bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the
Start-Stop system operates as normal. No
special charact
eristics need to be taken into
account.
If the system does not recognise the trailer or
the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by
SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-
nected by pressing the corresponding button
in the lower part of the centre console before
driving with the trailer, and it should remain
off for the rest of the journey
›››
.
V
ehicl
es with driving profile selection
If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use
of the Eco driving profile is not recommen-
ded. You are advised to select another of the
available driving profiles before beginning to
drive with a trailer.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If
you do not load the trailer up to the maximum
permitted trailer weight, you can then climb
correspondingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above
sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-
gine performance and the ability to climb
slopes, the tow load decreases proportional-
ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-
bination must be reduced by 10% for every
1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate
the trailer with the maximum authorised
»
297
Driving
drawbar load on the ball joint of the t
o
wing
bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-
it.
WARNING
Never use the trailer to transport people,
since it woul
d put their life in danger and is
also prohibited.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may
cause injury and accidents.
●
Only use the towing bracket if it is in a
perfect st
ate of repair and is properly se-
cured.
●
Never modify or repair the towing bracket
in any way.
●
In order to reduce the danger of injury in
the event of rear-end collisions and to
avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists
when parking the vehicle, cover or remove
the tow hook when you are not using a trail-
er.
●
Never fit a towing bracket “with weight
distribution” or “load compensation”. The
vehicle has not been designed for this type
of towing bracket. The towing bracket
could fail and the trailer could be released
from the vehicle.
WARNING
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or lar
ge objects can affect driving
properties and even cause an accident.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in
good condition.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
more likely to overturn than those with a
low one.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Take great care when overtaking.
●
Reduce speed immediately if you notice
that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never drive at more than 80 km/h
(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more
than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-
cumstances). This also applies in countries
where driving at higher speeds is permit-
ted. Take into account the speed limit for
vehicles with trailers in the corresponding
country, as it could be less than the speed
limit for vehicles without a trailer.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
WARNING
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted
by a non-SEAT workshop
, the Start-Stop
system must be disconnected manually
whenev
er driving with a trailer. Otherwise
the brake system could be damaged and
could consequently cause a serious acci-
dent or injury.
●
Always disconnect the Start-Stop system
manually when using a towing bracket that
has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.
Note
●
Bef
or
e hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-
ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm
›››
page 92. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could
cause the alarm to go off.
●
Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's
first 1000 km
›››
page 234.
●
SEAT recommends that, if possible, the
tow hook be removed or covered when it is
not going to be used. In the event of a rear-
end collision, the damage to the vehicle
could be greater if the tow hook is fitted.
●
Some retrofitted towing brackets cover
the rear towing eye. In these cases, the
towing eye should not be used for tow-
starting or for towing other vehicles. For
this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-
ted with a towing bracket, always keep the
tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.
298
Towing bracket device*
Technical requirements
Vehicles that are fact
ory-mounted with a
towing device meet all the technical and le-
gal requirements for driving with a trailer
›››
page 304.
If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing
bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for
the maximum authorised load of the trailer
that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing
bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and
the trailer and must be properly secured to
the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing
bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for
this vehicle. Always check and take into ac-
count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-
structions.
Towing bracket fitted on the bumper
Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to
the area where the bumper is mounted. The
towing bracket should not impair the bum-
per's function. Do not make modifications or
repairs to the exhaust system or the brake
system. Make regular checks to ensure that
the towing bracket is secure.
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer increases the load on the
engine and cooling system. The cooling sys-
tem should have sufficient coolant and be
prepared for the additional effort involved in
driving with a trailer.
Trailer brakes
If the trail
er has its own brake system, please
take the relevant legal requirements into ac-
count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-
tem to the vehicle's brake system.
Tow cable
Always use a cable between the vehicle and
the trailer
›››
page 300.
Trailer tail lights
The trailer's rear lights should comply with
the statutory safety regulations
›››
page 300.
Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly
to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not
sure that the trailer's electrical connection is
correct, have it checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
Exterior mirrors
If you cannot see the area behind the trailer
with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,
additional mirrors will have to be installed in
accordance with the regulations of the coun-
try in question. The exterior mirrors should be
adjusted before you start driving and must
provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.
Trailer maximum electricity consumption
Never exceed the values indicated!
Europe, Asia, Africa, South America and Central
America
Brake lights (total) 84 Watts
Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts
Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts
Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts
Rear fog light 42 Watts
Australia
Brake lights (total) 108 Watts
Turn signal (on each side) 54 Watts
Side lights (on each side) 100 Watts
Reverse lights (in total) 54 Watts
Rear fog light 54 Watts
WARNING
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is
not the right one, the tr
ailer could become
detached from the vehicle and cause seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
●
If the rear lights of the tr
ailer are not cor-
rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
●
If the trailer absorbs excessive electric
current, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged.
»
299
Driving
●
Nev
er connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem directly to the electrical connections
of the tail lights or any other power sour-
ces. Only use the connections intended for
providing electric current to the trailer.
Hitching and connecting a trailer
Fig. 214 Schematic representation: assign-
ment of the pins of the tr
ail
er's electrical sock-
et.
Pin Meaning
1 Left turn signal
2 Rear fog light
3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
4 Right turn signal
5 Rear light, right
6 Brake lights
Pin Meaning
7 Rear light, left
8 Reverse lights
9 Permanent live
10 Live charge cable
11 Earth for pin 10
12 Unassigned
13 Earth for pin 9
Power socket for trailer
The v
ehicl
e is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the connection between the trailer
and the vehicle. With the engine running,
electrical devices on the trailer receive power
from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin
10 of the trailer power socket).
If the system detects that a trailer has been
connected, the consumers on the trailer will
receive electricity through this connection
(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.
This powers, for example, the trailer's interior
lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in
a caravan only receive electrical power if the
engine is running (through pin 10).
To avoid overloading the electrical system,
you cannot connect the ground wires of pin
3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you
will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not
be available.
Tow cable
The tow rope must always be securely fixed
to the towing vehicle and loose enough so
that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.
However, make sure that the cable does not
rub on the ground while driving.
Trailer tail lights
Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure
they are working correctly and that they
comply with the relevant safety regulations.
Make sure that the maximum permissible
power that can be absorbed by the trailer is
not exceeded
›››
page 299.
Include in the anti-theft alarm
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system
if the following conditions are met:
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an
anti-theft alarm and towing bracket.
●
If the trailer is electrically connected to the
towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-
et.
●
If the electrical systems of the vehicle and
trailer are in perfect condition and have no
faults or damage.
300
Towing bracket device*
●
If the v
ehicl
e is locked with the key and the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-
gered if the electrical connection with the
trailer is cut off.
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always
turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt
sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
Trailers with LED tail lights
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED
rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-
theft alarm system.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does
not go off when the electrical connection
with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with
light-emitting diodes.
If the Eco driving profile was selected when
hitching the trailer, this will automatically
switch to the Normal profile. If the system
cannot detect the attached trailer or if the
towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-
to repair shop other than SEAT, you must
manually select the Normal profile before
you start driving with a trailer attached. To re-
connect the Eco profile once the trailer has
been unhitched, switch the ignition off and
back on once.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connected, it may l
ead to an excessive
amount of current supplied to the trailer,
which can cause abnormalities in the entire
vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
Ensure that any repairs that need to be
carried out on the electrical system are
carried out by a specialised workshop.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem directly to the electrical connections
of the tail lights or any other power sour-
ces.
WARNING
Contact between the pins of the trailer
pow
er socket can cause short circuits,
overloading of the electrical system or fail-
ure of the lighting system, and consequent-
ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-
er socket to each other.
●
Make sure any work on bent pins is car-
ried out by a specialised workshop.
CAUTION
Do not leave the trailer connected to the
vehicl
e when parked; place it on its support
wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or
falls due, for example, to a variation of the
load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will
be placed on the towing bracket and the
trail
er, and both the vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
Note
●
In case of anomalies in the el
ectrical sys-
t
ems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in
the anti-theft alarm system, have them in-
spected by a specialised workshop.
●
If the trailer accessories consume energy
through the power socket to the trailer and
the engine is turned off, the battery will dis-
charge.
●
If the 12-volt vehicle battery is running
low, the electrical connection with the trail-
er will be automatically cut off.
Trailer loading
Technically permissible maximum trailer
w
eight and v
ertical load on the coupling
device
The technically permissible maximum trailer
weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow
›››
. The vertical load on the coupling is ex-
ert
ed v
ertically from above on the hook of the
towing bracket.
The information on the maximum trailer
weight and vertical load on the coupling de-
vice contained in the type plate of the towing
bracket are experimental values only. The
»
301
Driving
correct figures for your specific model, which
may be l
o
wer than these figures, are given in
the vehicle documentation. The information in
the vehicle documentation takes precedence
at all times.
To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-
mends making the most of the maximum ver-
tical load technically permissible on the
coupling device
›››
page 297. An insufficient
vertical load has a negative influence on the
behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
The vertical load increases the weight on the
rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-
pacity.
Gross combination weight of the towing
vehicle and trailer
The gross combination weight is the actual
weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual
weight of the loaded trailer.
In some countries trailers are classified into
distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-
taining information from a specialised work-
shop regarding which type of trailer is most
suitable for your vehicle.
Trailer loading
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
must be balanced. In order to do this, the
load must be as close as possible to the max-
imum vertical load technically permissible on
the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-
tributed between the back and front of the
trailer:
●
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible or
above it.
●
Secure the trailer load properly.
Tyre pressure
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-
cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-
ommendations.
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the
towing vehicle with the maximum allowable
pressure
›››
page 331.
WARNING
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the
maximum load t
echnically permissible on
the coupling point, the maximum author-
ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-
tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
are exceeded, accidents and serious inju-
ries may occur.
●
Never exceed the values indicated!
●
The actual weight on the front and rear
axles must never exceed the maximum per-
missible axle weight. The weight on the
front and rear axles must never exceed the
maximum permissible weight.
WARNING
A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-
ity and securit
y of the towing vehicle and
trailer, which could lead to accidents and
serious injuries.
●
Always load the trailer correctly.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in
good condition.
Driving with a trailer
Adjusting the headlights
The fr
ont part of the v
ehicle may be raised
when the trailer is connected and the light
may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Specific features of driving with a trailer
●
If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake
gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-
vent the jerking that can be caused by the
locking of trailer wheels.
●
Due to the gross combination weight of the
towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-
tance increases.
●
When going down a slope, go into a lower
gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-
tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-
vantage of the braking power provided by the
engine. Otherwise, the braking system could
overheat and even fail.
302
Towing bracket device*
●
The tr
ail
er weight, as well as the gross com-
bination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, change the centre of gravity and the
properties of the vehicle.
●
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
is loaded, then the load distribution is incor-
rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and
with extra caution.
Hill starts with a trailer
Depending on the slope of the hill and the
combination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-
wards slightly when you first start up.
For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:
●
Press and hold the brake pedal.
●
Press the button once to disconnect the
electronic parking brake
›››
page 267.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual
gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way
down.
●
Engage first gear or move the selector lever
to the position D/S.
●
Pull out the button and hold it in that po-
sition to immobilise the towing vehicle and
trailer with the electronic parking brake.
●
Release the brake pedal.
●
Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of
a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch
pedal.
●
Do not release the button until the en-
gine has sufficient power to start driving.
WARNING
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may
lead t
o loss of control of the vehicle and
serious injury.
●
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or large objects will change the ve-
hicle handling and braking distances.
●
Always drive cautiously and carefully.
Brake earlier than usual.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions. Slow down, especially
when driving down hills or slopes.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-
vres.
●
Take great care when overtaking. Reduce
speed immediately if you notice that the
trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
●
Take into account the speed limit for vehi-
cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than
for vehicles without a trailer.
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle
and tr
ail
er combination
The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer
combination is an additional function of the
electr
onic stability control (ESC).
If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation system
detects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac-
tion on the steering control to reduce the
weaving of the trailer.
Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-
tion requirements
●
The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-
ing brack
et or has been retro-fitted with a
compatible towing bracket.
●
The ESC and the ASR are switched on. The
control lamp or is not lit up on the instru-
ment cluster.
●
The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-
cle through the trailer power socket.
●
The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h
(approx. 37 mph).
●
The maximum vertical load technically per-
missible is not being exceeded on the cou-
pling device.
●
The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
●
If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped
with a mechanical overrun brake.
»
303
Driving
WARNING
The enhanced safety provided by the elec-
tric stabilit
y control of the vehicle and trail-
er should not lead you to take any risks that
could compromise your safety.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Accelerate with caution when the road is
slippery.
●
When adjusting any settings, stop accel-
erating.
WARNING
The electric stability control for the vehicle
and trail
er may not correctly detect all
driving conditions.
●
When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-
sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-
so switched off.
●
The stability system does not always de-
tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise
these correctly.
●
When driving on surfaces with poor grip,
the trailer can even interfere with the sta-
bility system.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity can
tip over without having previously weaved.
●
If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-
tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.
installation of a bicycle rack with lights),
repeated automatic braking may occur in
extr
eme driving conditions.
Electrically unlocking trailer
hook*
Description
Fig. 215
On the right side of the luggage com-
partment: butt
on f
or unlocking the tow hook.
The towing bracket’s hook is located in the
bumper
. T
ow hooks for electrical unlocking
cannot be removed.
There should be no person, animal or object
in the path of the tow hook
›››
.
Unl
ocking the t
ow hook and removing it
●
Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic
parking brake
›››
page 267.
●
Switch off the engine.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 215 button briefly. The tow
hook unlocks electrically and automatically
turns outwards. The button's control lamp
flashes.
●
Finish remove the tow hook by hand until
you feel and hear that it has engaged and
the control lamp on the button stays on.
●
Close the rear lid.
●
Hitching and connecting a trailer
›››
page 300.
Retracting the tow hook
●
Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic
parking brake.
●
Switch off the engine.
●
Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-
cal connection between it and the vehicle. If
you are using an adapter, remove it from the
trailer's power socket.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 215 button briefly. The tow
hook unlocks electrically.
●
Turn the tow hook under the bumper with
your hand until you feel and hear that it en-
gages and the control lamp on the button re-
mains on continuously.
●
Close the rear lid.
304
Towing bracket device*
The control lamp
●
If the warning light on the button
›
›
›
Fig. 215
flashes, this means that the tow hook has
not been attached properly or is damaged
›››
.
●
If the warning lamp
›
›
›
Fig. 215 remains
on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is cor-
rectly in place both when extracted and
when covered.
The control light of the lamp switches off ap-
proximately 1 minute after closing the read lid.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may
cause injury and accidents.
●
Only use the tow hook if it is properly en-
gaged.
●
Always ensure that no person, animal or
object is t
o be found in the path of the tow
hook.
●
Never use a tool or instrument while the
tow hook is moving.
●
Never press the
›››
Fig. 215 button when
there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or
when a carrier system or other accessories
are mounted on the tow hook.
●
If the tow hook is not attached properly,
do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised
workshop and have the towing bracket
checked.
●
If you detect any f
ault in the electrical
system or in the towing bracket, contact a
specialised workshop and ask them to
check it.
●
If the ball has a diameter of less than 49
mm at any one point, do not use the towing
bracket under any circumstances.
CAUTION
If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure
or st
eam de
vices, do not point the jet di-
rectly towards the retractable tow hook or
the trailer power socket, as this may dam-
age the joints or remove the grease neces-
sary for lubrication.
Note
At extremely low temperatures, the tow
hook may be impossible t
o operate. In this
case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca-
tion (for example, a garage).
Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re-
tr
act
able towbar
The maximum permitted weight of the roof
r
ack syst
em, including the load, is 75 kg. The
carrier system should not protrude more than
700 mm backwards from the spherical head.
Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes
can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicy-
cles must be mounted as close to the vehicle
as possible (tow hook).
WARNING
The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-
cycle r
ack mounted on the tow hook can
cause accidents and injury.
●
Never exceed the maximum weight or the
limits indicated above.
●
The bicycle rack may not be mounted to
the neck of the hook below the ball be-
cause, due to the shape of the neck and
depending on the rack model, the rack
could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-
cle.
●
Always read and take the manufacturer
assembly instructions into account.
CAUTION
If the maximum weight and limits indicated
abov
e are exceeded, the vehicle may suf-
fer considerable damage.
●
Never exceed the values indicated!
Note
SEAT recommends removing, as far as pos-
sible
, all removable parts of the bicycles
before setting off. These parts include, for
example, baskets and saddlebags, child
seats or batteries. This improves aerody-
namics and the centre of gravity of the rack
system.
305
Driving
Retrofitting a towing bracket
Description
Fig. 216
Limits and attachment points for ret-
r
ofitting a t
owing bracket.
SEAT recommends that towing brackets be
r
etr
ofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-
ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-
just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-
tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership for this.
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance
specifications should always be kept in mind.
The distance between the centre of the ball
head and the road
›››
Fig. 216
D
must never
be l
ess than indicat
ed. This also applies when
the vehicle is fully loaded, including the tech-
nically permissible maximum vertical load on
the coupling device.
Distance specifications
›››
Fig. 216:
Mounting points on the vehicle
1090 mm
65 mm (minimum)
391 mm
348 mm
595 mm
1,050 mm
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connected, this may l
ead to malfunctions
in the entire vehicle electronic system, as
well as to accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem to the electrical connections of the tail
lights or any other unsuitable power sour-
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-
nect the trail
er.
●
The towing bracket should be retrofitted
only at a specialised workshop.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-
suit
abl
e, the trailer may separate from the
vehicle while driving. This could cause seri-
ous accidents and fatal injuries.
Note
●
Only use to
wing brackets that have been
approved by SEAT for the model in ques-
tion.
●
In some versions, the fitting of a conven-
tional towing hook solution is not recom-
mended. Please consult your Technical
Service.
306
Checking and refilling levels
Practical tips
Checking and r
efilling l
ev-
els
Refuelling
Refuelling
Fig. 217
Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.
The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the
v
ehicl
e.
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
and locked automatically using the central
locking.
●
Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on it.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
●
Place it in the space on the hinge of the
open flap
›››
Fig. 217.
●
Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as
the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel
supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the
nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion
chamber in the fuel tank.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
●
Close the lid.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at
›››
page 308.
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-
en in
›››
page 355.
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-
rious burns and other injuries.
●
When refuelling, turn off the engine, the
auxiliary heater
›
››
page 164 and turn off
the ignition for safety reasons.
●
Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or
a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in
the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
●
Observe legislation governing the use,
storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-
ter in the vehicle.
●
For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-
cle. In an accident the canister could be
damaged and could l
eak.
●
If, in exceptional circumstances, you
have to carry a spare fuel canister, please
observe the following points:
–
Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-
ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.
This could cause an explosion. Always
place the canister on the ground to fill
it.
–
Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-
ble into the spare fuel canister.
–
If the spare fuel canister is made of
metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-
tact with the canister during filling. This
helps prevent an electrostatic charge
building up.
–
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is
explosive. Risk of fatal accident!
CAUTION
●
If any fuel is spilt onto the v
ehicle, it
should be removed immediately. It could
otherwise damage the paintwork.
●
Never run the tank completely dry. The
catalytic converter can be damaged.
●
When filling the fuel tank after having run
it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel
engine, the ignition must be switched on for
at least 30 seconds before starting the en-
gine. When you then start the engine it may
»
307
Practical tips
take longer than normal (up to one minute)
to st
art firing.
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause
the fuel t
o o
verflow if it becomes warm.
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual rel
ease of the fuel tank flap. If nec-
essary, request assistance from special-
ised personnel.
Note
Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective
device that pr
events the insertion of the
wrong fuel hose
1)
. It is only possible to re-
fuel with Diesel nozzles.
●
If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if
it is very small, it is possible that it will not
be able to open the protective device. Be-
fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by
turning it, try a different pump or request
specialist help.
●
If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-
ister, the protective device will not open.
One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in
very sl
owly.
Fuel types
Identification of fuels
1)
Fig. 218
Identification of fuels according to
Eur
opean Union (EU) Dir
ective 2014/94/
Fuels are identified by different symbols on
the pump and on your v
ehicl
e's tank flap. The
identification serves to prevent confusion
when choosing the fuel.
Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-
nol). The number indicates the percent-
1
age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,
f
or e
xample, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.
Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-
diesel). The number indicates the per-
centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”
means, for example, a proportion of bio-
diesel of max. 7%.
Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed
Natural Gas.
Type of petrol
3 Valid f
or: vehicles with petrol engines
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the
fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
verter and must only be run on unleaded
petrol. The petrol must comply with the
standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels
with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled
(E10)
2)
. The types of petrol are differentiated
by using the octane numbers (RON) or via
the anti-knock index (AKI).
2
3
1)
Depending on country
2)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
308
Checking and refilling levels
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or
normal 91 oct
ane petr
ol at least
We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-
tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91
octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power
loss) may be used.
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at
least
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91
AKI) at least.
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or
super 95 octane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super plus 98
octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super
95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power
loss).
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
CAUTION
●
Fuels high per
centage of ethanol, e.g.
E30 - E100 button must not be used. The
fuel system would be damaged. Exception:
vehicles with Totalflex engine
›››
page 309,
Ethanol fuel.
●
A single refuelling with leaded fuel or
other metal additives entails a permanent
deterioration of the effectiveness of the
catalytic converter.
●
Only use fuel additives that have been
approved by SEAT. The products that con-
tain substances to increase the octane rat-
ing or decrease knocking may contain met-
al additives that damage the engine and
catalytic converter. This type of products
must not be used.
●
Do not use fuels shown in the pump as
containing metals. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Risk of engine damage!
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with
an octane rating lower than the correct
grade for the engine.
Note
●
Fuel with an octane r
ating higher than the
one required by the engine can be used.
●
In countries in which there is no sulphur
-
free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-
phur content fuel.
Ethanol fuel
3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines
Y
ou can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-
gines
1)
by label on the fuel tank lid with with
the marking “Petrol/ethanol”.
Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with
unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-
ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high
percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-
led in the same way as petrol refuelling.
Also consider that
›››
page 308, Type of pet-
rol
Note
SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-
sively with petr
ol every 10,000 km to de-
crease impurities that using E100 ethanol
fuel might have left in the engine.
1)
This motor is only available in some markets.
309
Practical tips
Diesel
3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines
Pl
ease note the information on the inside of
the fuel tank flap.
We recommend you use Diesel according to
standard EN 590.
The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-
tures, thus affecting the start or operation of
the engine. Ask your service station attendant
if their diesel is suitable for winter use.
Water in the fuel filter
1)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is
equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-
arator, the instrument panel may display the
following warning:
Water in the fuel
filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop so that they can
drain the fuel filter.
CAUTION
●
Nev
er use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,
heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents
as they can cause severely damage the
fuel system and the engine.
●
If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not
start the engine under any circumstances.
Risk of damaging the fuel system and the
engine! Obtain t
echnical assistance.
AdBlue®
Information about AdBlue®
AdBlue® consumption depends on your per-
sonal driving styl
e, the temperature of the
system and the outdoor temperature when
the vehicle is used.
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C
(+13°F). The system has heating elements
that guarantee its operation even at low tem-
peratures.
The AdBlue® tank has a capacity of approx.
18 litres.
When the range is less than 2400 km the
instrument cluster screen displays a message
requesting an AdBlue® refill.
If this message is ignored, the yellow warning
lamp will come on when the remaining
range is less than 1000 km. . The indica-
tion that in XXX km it will no longer be possible
to restart the engine will appear on the instru-
ment panel display.
If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when
remaining r
ange of 0 km is displayed, it will
no longer be possible to restart the engine.
The red warning lamp will light up .
AdBlue® is a registered trademark of the Ger-
man Association of the Automotive Industry
(VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF
(Diesel Exhaust Fluid).
CAUTION
Overfilling with AdBlue® can cause dam-
age to the t
ank system.
Control and warning lamps
It lights up red
The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue le
vel
is too low.
Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then
top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue
›››
page 311.
and
They light up red
The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the
AdBlue syst
em.
Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system
checked there.
1)
Depending upon country.
310
Checking and refilling levels
It lights up yellow
The AdBlue reserve is low.
Refill AdBlue within the ne
xt kilometres (or miles) that
are indicated
›››
page 311. SEAT recommends con-
tacting a specialised workshop.
and
They light up yellow
There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable
AdBlue fluid has been used.
Contact a specialised w
orkshop. Have the system
checked there.
Several warning and control lamps should
light up f
or a f
ew seconds when the ignition is
switched on, signalling that the function is be-
ing verified. They will switch off after a few
seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
Fill AdBlue®
Fig. 219
AdBlue tank cap.
Operations prior to refilling
P
ark the v
ehicle on a flat surface and turn off
the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a
curb, the level indicator may not detect the
refill properly.
If an AdBlue® warning message is shown on
the instrument cluster display, fill with at
least the minimum required amount (ap-
prox. 5 litres). Only after adding this amount
will the system detect that AdBlue® has been
added and you will be able to start the en-
gine again. The maximum amount that can
be refilled is 11 litres.
Fill with a refill bottle
Only use AdBlue® that complies with the
ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original
containers.
●
Open the tank cover
›››
Fig. 219.
●
Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-
ti-clockwise direction.
●
Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-
tions, indicated on the refill bottle.
●
Check the expiry date.
●
Remove the cap of the refill bottle.
●
Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler
neck vertically and screw the bottle on by
hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.
●
Press the refill bottle in the direction of the
filler neck and hold it in this position.
●
Wait until the contents of the refill bottle
have been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Do
not compress or break the bottle!
●
Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-
rection and gently pull it upwards
›››
.
●
The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liq-
uid comes out of the bottl
e
.
●
Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-
tion until it is tightly closed.
●
Close the fuel tank flap.
Operations before driving
●
After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-
nition.
●
Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-
onds for the system to detect the fluid load.
●
Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds
before starting the engine!
»
311
Practical tips
Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue
V
alid f
or vehicles with selective catalytic re-
duction.
●
Open the tank cap.
●
Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise
›››
Fig. 219.
●
Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the
first time.
●
Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise
until you hear a click.
WARNING
AdBlue® should only be stored in its origi-
nal container
, which should be tightly
closed and kept in a safe place.
CAUTION
●
When refilling, the no
zzle grip should be
aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle
will not connect automatically.
●
Do not try to add any more additive after
the nozzle has stopped for the first time.
The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue
could spill out.
●
Only use AdBlue® that complies with the
ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original
containers.
●
Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad-
ditives. Any type of damage caused by
such a mixture will not be covered by the
warranty.
●
Nev
er pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank!
This could result in engine damage.
●
Do not carry the refill bottle inside the
vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-
ture changes or damage to the bottle), the
AdBlue® may damage the vehicle's interior.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-
ment
-friendly manner
.
Note
Suitable AdBlue® refill bottles can be pur-
chased from SEAT deal
erships.
Engine management and
emissions contr
ol syst
em
Introduction
WARNING
●
Due to the high t
emperatures reached by
the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you
should not park your vehicle near a surface
that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!
●
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the emission control system.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
Flashes
Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic
convert
er.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
It lights up
Particulate filter blocked
››
›
page 313.
It lights up
Fault in the petrol engine management.
Have the engine check
ed as soon as possible by a
specialised workshop.
When the ignition is switched on, the (Electr
onic
Power Control) lights up and should go off once the
engine has started.
It lights up
Diesel engine preheating system.
The engine can be start
ed straight away when the
lamp switches off.
312
Checking and refilling levels
Flashes
Fault in the diesel engine management.
Have the engine check
ed as soon as possible by a
specialised workshop.
Note
While the control lamps , , or are
on, ther
e might be faults in the engine, fuel
consumption may go up and the engine
might lose power.
Catalytic converter
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic
conv
er
ter
●
Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-
gines.
●
Never run the fuel tank dry.
●
When changing or adding engine oil, do not
exceed the necessary amount
›››
page 319,
Topping up the engine oil.
●
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary
›››
page 52.
If you should notice misfiring, uneven running
or loss of power when the car is moving, have
the vehicle inspected by a specialised work-
shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp
will light up when any of these symptoms
occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can
enter the exhaust system and escape into the
atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also
be damaged by overheating.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause an irregul
ar fuel supply can cause
ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to
enter the exhaust system, which could
cause overheating and damage the cata-
lytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is
working perf
ectly, there may be a smell of
sulphur from the gases on occasions. This
depends on the sulphur content of the fuel
used. This can quite often be avoided by
changing to another brand of fuel.
Particulate filter
3 Valid f
or: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu-
late filters
The particulate filter eliminates most of the
soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-
mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If
the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short
journeys are made continuously), it becomes
blocked with soot and the following indica-
tion is displayed to the driver: Particu-
late filter: cleaned while the vehi-
cle is moving. See Manual. The partic-
ulat
e filter needs cleaning (regeneration).
Regeneration of the petrol particulate fil-
ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines)
Requirements for the regeneration journey:
the engine is at operating temperature.
●
Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h
›››
●
Completely remove your foot from the ac-
cel
er
ator pedal for a few seconds to let the
vehicle roll with the gear engaged.
●
Consider the legal speed limits as well as
the recommended gears.
●
Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let
roll) until the control lamp turns off.
This procedure involves an autonomous par-
ticulate filter cleaning process and may take
some time.
If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im-
mediately to a specialised workshop to repair
the fault.
Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI
2.0l engine) and diesel particulate filter
Requirements for the regeneration journey:
the engine is at operating temperature.
●
Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h
(31-75 mph). This increases the temperature
and burns the soot in the filter
›››
.
»
313
Practical tips
●
Consider the l
egal speed limits as w
ell as
the recommended gears.
●
End the regeneration journey once the con-
trol warning lamp has gone out.
If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes
of running in regeneration mode, have a spe-
cialised workshop repair the fault
WARNING
Always adjust your speed to suit the weath-
er conditions, roads, br
aking distance and
traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen-
eration phase. Route recommendations
should never make you disregard each
country's specific traffic regulations.
CAUTION
●
When the exhaust syst
em detects that
the particulate filter is close to saturation,
the self-cleaning function of this system
recommends optimal driving for this func-
tion.
●
Due to the high temperatures caused by
the regeneration of the particulate filter, it
is possible that the radiator fan will acti-
vate after stopping the engine, even it its
operating temperature has not been
reached.
●
Noise, smells and high idle speeds can
occur during regeneration.
●
Always use the correct engine oil and the
correct fuel to make sure the useful life of
the particulate filter is not affected. Also
avoid making shor
t trips all the time.
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compar
t-
ment
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scalding as w
ell as the risk of accident or fire
when working in the engine compartment
(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).
Always observe the warnings listed below
and follow all general safety precautions.
The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-
tentially hazardous area
›››
.
WARNING
When work is done in the engine compart-
ment, injuries, burns, accidents and ev
en
fires can occur.
●
Turn off the engine, disconnect the igni-
tion e and apply the electronic parking
brake. If the vehicle has a manual gearbox,
place the lever in neutral; if it has an auto-
matic gearbox, place the selector lever in
position P. Wait for the engine to cool down.
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam
or drips of coolant being released from the
engine compartment. Wait until no steam
or coolant can be seen before opening the
bonnet.
●
Keep children away from the engine
compartment.
●
Ne
ver spill liquids used for vehicle opera-
tion on the engine compartment, as these
may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-
ant).
●
Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-
trical system, particularly at the points
where the jump leads are attached
›››
page 52. The battery could explode.
●
If working inside the engine compart-
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury.
●
Never cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant
expansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure.
●
Protect face, hands and arms by cover-
ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect
against escaping coolant and steam.
●
Always make sure you have not left any
objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in
the engine compartment.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehi-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for
314
Checking and refilling levels
securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
●
If any work has to be performed when the
engine is star
ted or with the engine running,
there is an additional, potentially fatal,
safety risk from the rotating parts, such as
the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,
and from the high-voltage ignition system.
You should also observe the following:
–
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
–
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing
and long hair do not get trapped in ro-
tating engine parts. Danger of death.
Before starting any work remove jewel-
lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear
tight-fitting clothes.
–
Never accelerate with a gear engaged
without taking the necessary precau-
tions. The vehicle could move, even if
the handbrake is applied. Danger of
death.
●
Observe the following additional warn-
ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-
trical system is necessary:
–
Always disconnect the 12-volt vehicle
battery from the on-board network.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always keep an approved fire extin-
guisher immediately available.
For the sake of the environment
●
Inspect the ground underneath your v
ehi-
cle regularly so that any leaks are detec-
ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil
or other fluids in the area where it was
parked, have your vehicle inspected at the
workshop.
●
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-
vironment. For this reason you should make
regular checks on the ground underneath
your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a
specialised workshop.
Note
In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake
fluid reserv
oirs are on the other side of the
engine compartment
›››
Fig. 222.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 220
Release lever in the driver's footwell
ar
ea.
Fig. 221
Cam under the bonnet
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is r
el
eased from inside the vehi-
cle.
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that
the windscreen wiper arms are in place
against the windscreen.
»
315
Practical tips
●
Open the door and pull the l
e
ver under the
dashboard
›››
Fig. 220
1
.
●
To lift the bonnet, press the release catch
under the bonnet up
w
ards
›››
Fig. 221
2
. The
arr
est
er hook under the bonnet is released.
●
The bonnet can be opened. Release the
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-
signed for this in the bonnet.
Closing the bonnet
●
Slightly lift the bonnet.
●
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its
support.
●
At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall
so it locks.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press
downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
mentioned above.
WARNING
Make sure that the bonnet is properly
closed. If it opens when driving, it can
cause an accident.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the
windscreen wiper arms, only open it when
the windscr
een wipers are in place against
the windscreen.
Checking levels
Fig. 222
Diagram for the location of the various el-
ements.
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluids in the v
ehicl
e must be checked. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
›››
page 320
Engine oil level dipstick
›››
page 318
1
2
316
Checking and refilling levels
Engine oil filler cap
›
›
›
page 319
Brake fluid reservoir
›››
page 322
Battery (under the cover)
›››
page 323
Windscreen washer reservoir
›››
page 322
Note
The layout of parts may vary depending on
the engine.
Engine oil
Gener
al not
es
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year r
ound.
Because the use of high-qualit
y oil is essen-
tial for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
We recommend that the oil change be done
by a technical service or specialised work-
shop.
If the engine oil level is too low
You can get information about the correct en-
gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.
3
4
5
6
If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
bl
e
, in the event of an emergency you can
change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L
of the next oil until the next oil change:
Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,
VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or
API SN.
Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,
VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.
Have the oil changed by a specialised work-
shop.
Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW
504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00
could increase consumption and the vehicle’s
CO
2
emissions.
SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to
guarantee high SEAT engine performance.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
CAUTION
Take the following into account if you have
refill
ed with an engine oil different to those
specified in the aforementioned standards,
or by your SEAT technical service centre:
●
There is no way of completely avoiding
the danger of causing damage to the en-
gine and particulate filter*.
–
–
●
You can continue driving with the v
ehicle
if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine
oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon
as possible and request an oil change. Oth-
erwise, there is a danger of engine dam-
age.
●
If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of
engine oil, drive with the engine at low load
levels and within the medium RPM range as
a maximum. Do not drive at more than 80
km/h and do not travel more than 300 km
(approximately). Go to a specialised work-
shop as soon as possible and request an oil
change. Otherwise, there is a danger of en-
gine damage.
●
You are responsible for the risk of possi-
ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust
system). If in doubt, do not start the engine
and request assistance from the technical
service centre.
●
Do not start the engine if you have top-
ped up with a fluid other than engine oil.
Request assistance from the technical
service centre. Danger of engine damage!
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conforms t
o the corre-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
317
Practical tips
Warning lamp
It lights up red
Do not carry on driving!
Engine oil pressure too low.
Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.
If this warning lamp starts t
o flash, and is accom-
panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en-
gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more
oil
›››
page 319.
If the warning lamp flashes although the oil l
evel
is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at
idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.
It lights up yellow
Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.
Repl
ace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to
do so
›››
page 319.
It flashes yellow
Fault in the oil level sensor.
Have the check done by a specialised w
orkshop. Un-
til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time
you refuel.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
Checking the engine oil level
Fig. 223
Engine oil dipstick.
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of
the oil.
Checking oil l
e
vel
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the
operating temperature is reached and then
stop.
–
Wait for about two minutes.
–
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
in as far as it will go.
–
Then pull it out once more and check the oil
level
›››
Fig. 223. Top up with engine oil if
necessary.
The oil must leave a mark between zones
A
and
C
. It can never go above zone
A
.
●
Z
one
A
: do not add oil.
●
Zone
B
: you can add oil but keep the level
in that z
one
.
●
Zone
C
: add oil until zone
B
.
Depending on ho
w you driv
e and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine com-
partment or on the engine must be carried
out cautiously.
●
When w
orking in the engine compart-
ment, always observe the safety warnings
›››
page 314.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above area
A
, do not start
the engine. This coul
d result in damage to
the engine and catalytic converter. Con-
tact a Technical Service.
318
Checking and refilling levels
Topping up the engine oil
Fig. 224
In the engine compartment: Engine
oil fill
er cap
.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the w
arnings
›
››
in Working in the engine
compar
tment on page 314
.
Topping up engine oil
●
Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening
›››
Fig. 224.
●
Carefully add oil in small quantities (no
more than 0.5 l).
●
To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you
add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes
and recheck the oil level
›››
page 318.
●
If necessary, add some more oil.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
›››
Fig. 223
B
, unscrew the engine oil filler
cap car
efully
›
››
.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown
in the corr
esponding engine compartment il
-
lustration
›››
page 316.
Engine oil specification
›››
page 317.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes into cont
act with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above area
››
›
Fig. 223
A
,
do not star
t the engine. This could result in
damage to the engine and catalytic con-
verter. Contact a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above zone
››
›
Fig. 223
A
. Otherwise oil can be drawn
in through the cr
ankcase breather and leak
into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-
tem.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conforms t
o the corre-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
Engine oil change
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed by a Technical Service
.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
have the specialist kno
wledge required!
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings
›››
page 314.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
may cause burn injuries.
●
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,
such as acid burns, caused by splashes of
oil.
●
When removing the oil drain plug with
your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to
help prevent oil from running down your
arm.
●
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
●
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of
children.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil.
This could r
esult in engine damage. Any
damage caused by the use of such addi-
tives would not be covered by the factory
warranty.
»
319
Practical tips
For the sake of the environment
●
We r
ecommend that you change the en-
gine oil and the filter at a technical service
centre.
●
Never pour oil down drains or into the
ground.
●
Use a suitable container when draining
the used oil. It must be large enough to hold
all the engine oil.
Cooling system
Cool
ant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the f
act
ory with a specially treated mixture of
water and at least 40 % of the additive
G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture
gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy
parts of the engine cooling system against
corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-
siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-
ant.
To protect the cooling system, the percent-
age of additive must always be at least 40 %,
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
tection is not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is
necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
additive G12evo for optimal protection
against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13
(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-
tection again corrosion and should be avoi-
ded.
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the
coolant syst
em, the engine may fail lead-
ing to serious damage.
●
Ensure that the percentage of additive is
correct for the lowest expected ambient
temperature in the zone in which the vehi-
cle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very
low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-
cle would be immobilised.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be
mixed with cool
ants which are not ap-
proved by SEAT.
●
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not
purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-
cates that the G12evo additive has been
mixed with an inadequate coolant. The
coolant must be changed as soon as possi-
bl
e if this is the case!
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate
the envir
onment. If any fluids ar
e spilled,
they should be collected and correctly dis-
posed of, with respect to the environment.
320
Checking and refilling levels
Refilling coolant
Fig. 225
In the engine compartment: marking
on cool
ant e
xpansion tank.
Fig. 226
Engine compartment: coolant expan-
sion t
ank cap
.
The coolant tank is located in the engine
compartment
›
›
›
page 316.
Top up coolant when the level is below the
(minimum) mark.
Checking coolant level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be between the marks
›››
Fig. 225. When the engine is hot, it may
be slightly above the upper mark.
Topping up coolant
–
Wait for the engine to cool down.
–
Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with
a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left
›››
.
–
Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-
ant in the e
xpansion t
ank, otherwise you
could damage the engine. If there is no
coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-
tinue driving. You should obtain professional
assistance
›››
.
–
If there is still some coolant in the expansion
t
ank
, top up to the upper mark.
–
Top up with coolant until the level becomes
stable.
–
Screw the cap back on correctly.
If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-
cialised workshop to have the cooling system
examined.
WARNING
●
The cooling system is under pr
essure. Do
not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-
sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
burns!
●
Store the antifreeze in its original con-
tainer and keep it out of reach of children.
●
If working inside the engine compart-
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury.
CAUTION
If you run out of coolant in the expansion
tank
, park the car in a safe place and do
not continue driving. Obtain technical as-
sistance.
321
Practical tips
Brake fluid
Check and r
efill the br
ake fluid
Fig. 227
Engine compartment: brake fluid res-
erv
oir cap
.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment
›
›
›
page 316.
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the
and markings.
However, if the brake fluid level goes down
noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
mark, there may be a leak in the brake
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning
light on the instrument panel display monitors
the brake fluid level
›››
page 82.
In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid
reservoir is on the other side of the engine
compartment.
Changing brake fluid
We recommend that you have the brake fluid
changed by a Technical Service.
WARNING
If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-
ble/ol
d brake fluid is used, the brake sys-
tem may fail or braking power may be re-
duced.
●
Check the brake system and the brake
fluid level regularly!
●
When the brake fluid is used and brakes
are subjected to extreme braking forces,
bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-
tem. These bubbles can significantly re-
duce braking power, notably increasing
braking distance, and could result in the to-
tal failure of the brake system.
●
Be sure to always use the correct brake
fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly
meets the VW 501 14 standard.
●
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake
fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official
Service. If none is available, use only high-
quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925
CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards
FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
●
The replacement brake fluid must be
new.
●
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
original container in a safe place out of
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
CAUTION
Brake fluid should not come into contact
with the vehicl
e paintwork, as it is abrasive.
For the sake of the environment
Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.
Collect any spilt service fluids and all
ow a
professional to dispose of them.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Checking the l
e
vel of the window
washer tank and refilling it
Fig. 228 In the engine compartment: window
w
asher t
ank cap.
The window washer tank is in the engine
compartment
›
›
›
page 316.
322
Checking and refilling levels
Check the water level in the windscreen
w
asher r
eservoir regularly and top up as re-
quired.
The window washer tank contains liquid de-
tergent for the windscreen and rear window.
●
Open the bonnet
›››
page 314.
●
The window washer tank is marked with the
symbol on the cap.
●
Check there is enough windscreen water in
the reservoir.
Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-
screen and headlights. We recommend that
you always add a product to the windscreen
washer fluid.
Recommended windscreen wipers
●
For the hottest seasons we recommend
summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-
tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:
1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-
ter).
●
All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.
Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,
up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2
parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of
mixture in the washer fluid tank.
The capacity of the window washer tank can
be found in
›››
page 355.
CAUTION
If the water from the windscreen washer
does not contain enough anti-fr
eeze, it may
freeze on the windscreen and rear window,
reducing forward and rear visibility.
●
In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
contains enough anti-freeze.
●
In cold conditions, you should not use the
windscreen wiper system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the ventila-
tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on
the windscreen and reduce visibility.
CAUTION
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
similar additiv
es with the windscreen wash-
er water. A greasy layer may be formed on
the windscreen which will impair visibility.
●
Use clean water with a window cleaner
recommended by SEAT.
●
If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
the water in the reservoir.
CAUTION
●
Do not mix cleaning pr
oducts recommen-
ded by SEAT with other products. This
could lead to flocculation and may block
the windscreen washer jets.
●
When topping up service fluids, make ab-
solutely certain that you fill the fluids into
the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-
ids could cause serious malfunctions and
engine damage!
●
Lack of window washer fluid causes the
view thr
ough the windscreen to be ob-
scured.
12-volt battery
General inf
ormation
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment and is almost maint
enance-fr
ee. It is
checked as part of the Inspection Service.
Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean
and have the correct tightening torque, espe-
cially in summer and winter.
All work on batteries requires specialist
knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official
Service or a workshop specialising in batter-
ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!
The battery must not be opened. Never try
to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-
erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-
tery that could cause an explosion.
Battery warning indications
Wear eye protection.
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-
tectiv
e gloves and eye protection. Rinse any
splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.
»
323
Practical tips
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are
prohibit
ed.
The battery should only be charged in a well-
ventil
ated zone. Risk of explosion!
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
Always follow the instruction manual.
Disconnecting the battery
The battery shoul
d only be disconnected in
exceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
connected, some of the vehicle's functions
are lost. These functions will require resetting
after the battery is reconnected.
When disconnecting the battery from the ve-
hicle on-board network, disconnect first the
negative cable and then the positive cable.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you
disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm
will be triggered.
If the vehicle is not used for long periods
The vehicle has a system for monitoring the
current consumption when the engine is left
unused for long periods of time
›››
page 326.
Some functions, such as the interior lights, or
the remote door opening, may be temporarily
disabled to prevent the battery from running
flat. These functions will come back on as
soon as the ignition is switched on and the
engine started.
Winter conditions
During the winter
, the starting power may be
reduced, and if necessary, the battery should
be charged
›››
WARNING
Any work to be done on the 12-volt vehicle
battery or el
ectrical system can cause in-
juries, burns, accidents and fires:
●
Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,
skin and clothing from acid and particles
containing lead.
●
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection. Do
not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid
through the vents.
●
Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on
the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-
tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If
acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a
doctor immediately.
●
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking
are prohibited. When handling cables and
electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks
and electrostatic charge. Never short the
battery terminals. High-energy sparks can
cause injury.
●
A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
leased when the battery is under charge.
The batteries should be charged in a well-
ventilated room only.
●
Keep children away from acid and bat-
teries.
●
Befor
e working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical devices. The negative ca-
ble on the battery must be disconnected.
When a light bulb is changed, you need on-
ly switch off the light.
●
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-
locking the vehicle before you disconnect
the battery! The alarm will otherwise be
triggered.
●
When disconnecting the battery from the
vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
●
Switch off all electrical devices before
reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first
the positive cable and then the negative
cable. Never reverse the polarity of the
connections. This could cause an electrical
fire.
●
Never charge a frozen battery, or one
which has thawed. This could result in ex-
plosions and chemical burns. Always re-
place a battery which has frozen. A flat
battery can also freeze at temperatures
close to 0°C (+32°F).
●
Ensure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the battery.
●
Never use a defective battery. This could
cause an explosion. Replace a damaged
battery immediately.
324
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
The 12 volt battery is a subject to wear. A
reduction in batt
ery power can mean that
some important safety systems, such as
power steering, braking intervention, lights
or airbag systems, operate with limitations
or stop working entirely. This may cause
serious accidents and injuries. To avoid
this, it is necessary to take the following
safety measure:
●
Get a professional service centre to re-
place the 12-volt vehicle battery every four
years.
CAUTION
●
Do not expose the batt
ery to direct sun-
light over a long period of time, as the in-
tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the
battery housing.
●
If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-
ditions for a long period, protect the bat-
tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be
damaged.
Control lamp
It lights up red
Alternator fault.
The control lamp lights up when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on. It should go out when the engine
has started running.
If the indicator lamp lights up while driving,
the alternator is no longer charging the 12-
volt vehicle battery. You should immediately
drive to the nearest specialised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment
that is not absolutely necessary because this
will drain the battery.
Checking the battery electrolyte
level
Fig. 229 Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt
batt
ery (schematic r
epresentation).
The electrolyte level should be checked reg-
ul
arly in high-mil
eage vehicles, in hot coun-
tries and in older batteries.
●
Open the bonnet and then lift the cover
that protects the front part of the battery
›››
in Working in the engine compart-
ment on page 314.
●
Check the colour display in the "magic eye"
on the t
op of the batt
ery. Ensure sufficient
lighting to clearly identify the colour shown in
the battery window. Never use flames or ob-
jects that burn without a flame as a light
source.
●
If there are air bubbles in the window, tap
the window gently until they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the
corresponding engine compartment diagram
›››
page 316.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on
the charge state and electrolyte level of the
battery.
There are two different colours:
The battery's electrolyte
level is too low. Go to a specialised work-
shop to have the battery checked and
replaced if necessary.
The battery’s electrolyte level is cor-
rect.
Yellow or colourless:
Black:
325
Practical tips
Charging or changing the battery
If you often drive short distances or if the ve-
hicle is not driv
en for long periods, the 12-volt
battery should be checked by a specialised
workshop more frequently than the service
intervals.
If the battery has discharged and you have
problems starting the vehicle, the battery
might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-
ommend you have the vehicle battery
checked by a Technical Service where it will
be re-charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a
specialised workshop only, as batteries using
special technology have been installed and
they must be charged in a controlled environ-
ment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The 12-volt vehicle battery has been de-
signed to suit its location and has special
safety features. If you need to change the
battery, please go to a service centre before
buying a new one to get information about
the electromagnetic compatibility, size and
maintenance requirements, performance and
safety of your vehicle’s new battery. SEAT
recommends you have the battery replaced
by a technical service.
Start-Stop systems (
››
›
page 219) are equip-
ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must
only be replaced with a battery of the same
specifications.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
power management system to control the
distribution of electrical energy
›››
page 326.
The power management function ensures
that the battery is charged much more effi-
ciently than on vehicles without a power
management system. To maintain this func-
tion after replacing the battery, we recom-
mend that the replacement battery used is of
the same make and type as the original fitted
battery. To make proper use of the power
management function after the battery has
been changed, have the battery coded to the
power management mode at a specialised
workshop.
WARNING
●
Alw
ays use only maintenance free bat-
teries that do not run flat alone and whose
properties, specifications and size corre-
spond to the standard battery. The specifi-
cations are indicated on the battery case.
●
Before starting any work on the batteries,
you must read and observe the warnings
›››
in General information on page 324.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such
as sulphuric acid and l
ead. They must be
disposed of appropriately and must not be
disposed of with ordinary househol
d waste.
Energy management
Optimisation of the star
ting ca-
pacity
The power management controls the distri-
bution of electrical ener
gy and thus helps to
ensure that there is always enough power
available to start the engine.
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-
tem is left parked for a long time, the battery
will gradually lose its charge because certain
electrical devices, such as the electronic
gearbox lock continues to draw current even
when the ignition is off. In some cases there
may not be enough power available to start
the engine.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
power management system to control the
distribution of electrical energy. This signifi-
cantly improves reliability when starting the
engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the
battery.
The main functions incorporated in the power
management system are battery diagnosis,
residual current management and dynam-
ic power management.
326
Checking and refilling levels
Battery diagnosis
The batt
ery diagnosis function const
antly
registers the condition of the battery. Sensors
detect the battery voltage, battery current
and battery temperature. This enables the
system to calculate the current power level
and charge condition of the battery.
Residual current management
The residual current management reduces
power consumption while the vehicle is
parked. It controls the supply of power to the
various electrical devices while the ignition is
switched off. The system takes the battery di-
agnosis data into consideration.
Depending on the power level of the battery,
switch off the individual electrical devices
one after the other to prevent the battery
from losing too much charge and to ensure
that the engine can be started reliably.
Dynamic power management
While the vehicle is moving, this function dis-
tributes the available power to the various
electrical devices and systems according to
their requirements. The power management
ensures that on-board systems do not con-
sume more electrical power than the alterna-
tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-
mum possible battery power level.
Note
●
Neither is the pow
er management system
able to overcome the given physical limits.
Please remember that the power and use-
ful life of the battery are limited.
●
When there is a risk that the vehicle will
not start, the alternator power failure or
low battery charge level warning lamp will
be shown
›››
page 82.
Flat battery
Starting ability has first priority.
Short trips, cit
y tr
affic and low temperatures
all place a heavy load on the battery. In
these conditions a large amount of power is
consumed, but only a small amount is sup-
plied. The situation is also critical if electrical
devices are in use when the engine is not run-
ning. In this case power is consumed when
none is being generated.
In these situations you will be aware that the
power management system is intervening to
control the distribution of electrical power.
When the vehicle is parked for long peri-
ods
If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of
several days or weeks, the power manage-
ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-
vices one by one or reduce the amount of
current they are using. This limits the amount
of power consumed and helps to ensure reli-
able starting even after a long period. Some
convenience functions, such as remote vehi-
cle opening, may not be available under cer-
tain circumstances. These functions will be
restored when you switch on the ignition and
start the engine.
With the engine switched off
For example, if you listen to the sound system
with the engine switched off the battery will
run down.
If the energy consumption means there is a
risk that the engine will not start, a text will
appear in vehicles with a driver information
system*.
This driver indicator tells you that you must
start the engine so that the battery can re-
charge.
When the engine is running
Although the alternator generates electrical
power, the battery can still become dis-
charged while the vehicle is being driven. This
can occur when a lot of power is being con-
sumed but only a small amount supplied, es-
pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini-
tially.
To restore the necessary energy balance, the
system will then temporarily shut off the elec-
trical devices that are using a lot of power, or
»
327
Practical tips
reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-
ing syst
ems in particul
ar use a large amount
of electrical power. If you notice, for instance,
that the seat heating* or the rear window
heater is not working, they may have been
temporarily switched off or regulated to a
lower heat output. These systems will be
available again as soon as sufficient electri-
cal power is available.
You may also notice that the engine runs at a
slightly faster idling speed when necessary.
This is quite normal, and no cause for con-
cern. The increased idling speed allows the
alternator to meet the greater power require-
ment and charge the battery at the same
time.
Wheels
Wheel
s and t
yres
General notes
–
When driving with new t
yres, be especially
careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).
–
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as
possible at a right angle to the obstacle.
–
Check from time to time if the tyres are
damaged (punctur
es, cuts, cracks or
dents). Remove any foreign objects em-
bedded in the treads.
–
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately.
–
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
–
Replace any missing valve caps as soon as
possible.
–
Mark the wheels before taking them off so
that they rotate in the same direction when
put back.
–
When removed, the wheels or tyres should
be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
Low profile tyres
Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger
wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.
Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres, for instance due to
strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and
kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important
›››
page 331.
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive
with special care when driving on roads in
poor condition.
Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.
If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-
pact or have been damaged, have a special-
ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-
essary to change the tyre.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the
car pulling to one side, this may indicate
that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce
speed immediately if there is any reason to
suspect that damage may have occurred. In-
spect the tyres for damage. If no external
damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully
to the nearest specialised workshop and
have the car inspected.
328
Wheels
Foreign objects inserted in the tyre
●
Do not remove foreign bodies if they have
penetr
at
ed through the tyre wall!
●
If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility
system, where necessary seal the damaged
tyre as shown in section
›››
page 44. Use a
specialised workshop for repair or replace-
ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread
wraps around the foreign body and provision-
ally seals the tyre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-
ways note the direction of rotation indicated
when mounting the wheel. This makes sure
that optimal use is made of tyre properties in
terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise
and wear.
Subsequent fitting of accessories
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or
wheel trims, we recommend that you consult
with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice
regarding current techniques.
Speed symbols
The speed rating indicates the maximum
speed permitted for the tyres.
max. 150 km/h (93 mph)
max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
max. 170 km/h (106 mph)
max. 180 km/h (112 mph)
max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
max. 200 km/h (124 mph)
max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
max. 270 km/h (168 mph)
max. 300 km/h (186 mph)
Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for
tyres with a maximum authorised speed
above 240 km/h (149 mph).
WARNING
●
New t
yres do not have maximum grip dur-
ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly
carefully to avoid possible accidents.
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. This
may cause an accident.
●
If you notice unusual vibrations or if the
vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop
P
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
Z
W
Y
the vehicle immediately and check the
tyr
es.
●
Never use old tyres or those with an un-
known history of use.
New wheels and tyres
It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced
by a specialised workshop
. There they have
the required knowledge, the special tools and
the corresponding spare parts.
●
Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you
have inst
alled new tyres, drive the first 500
km carefully and at a moderate speed.
●
All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of
the same type, size (rolling circumference)
and, if possible, tread pattern.
●
When changing tyres, do not change just
one; change at least two on the same axle.
●
If you want to equip your vehicle with a
combination tyres and rims that are different
to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-
cialised workshop before purchasing them
›››
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for
your v
ehicl
e are listed in the vehicle docu-
mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity
»
329
Practical tips
or COC document
1)
). The v
ehicl
e documen-
tation varies depending on the country of res-
idence.
If the type of spare wheel is different form the
normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter
tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare
wheel should only be used temporarily in the
event of a puncture, and the vehicle should
be driven with care. Refit the normal road
wheel as soon as possible.
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels
must be fitted with tyres of the same brand,
type and tread so that the traction system is
not damaged by a difference in the number
of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event
of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the
same perimeter as normal tyres should be
used.
Manufacturing date
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the
wheel):
DOT ... 2218 ...
it means, for example, that the tyre was man-
ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.
WARNING
●
Use only combinations of tyr
es and rims,
as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by
SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-
aged, causing an accident.
●
For technical reasons it is not possible to
use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases
not even wheels from the same vehicle
model should be used.
●
Always ensure that the tyres you have
chosen have adequate clearance. When
selecting replacement tyres, do not rely
entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on
the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-
fer significantly depending on the manu-
facturer. Lack of clearance can damage
the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-
danger road safety. Risk of accident!
●
Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in
an emergency, and drive with due care.
●
The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-
ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-
hibited use can cause accidents or can
damage your vehicle.
●
If decorative hubcaps are subsequently
fitted, make sure that they allow enough air
in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
Models with aerodynamic wheel rims
and/or with bolt-on plastic elements (more
closed design) increase the likelihood of
ice and snow accumul
ating on the inside.
This should be taken into account, depend-
ing on the driving situations, as snow or ice
accumulated in the wheels can cause vi-
bration in the vehicle when it drives at over
40 km/h. It is advisable to remove ice and
snow from the inside of the wheels using
hot water.
●
If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, the
likelihood of stones becoming trapped in-
side wheel rims with plastic elements in-
creases when driving at high speed or in a
sporty manner. If you see that there are
stones trapped between the aluminium
wheel rim and the insert, you can attempt
to remove them using pressurised water.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the laws in the country concerned.
Note
●
A SEAT Service Centre shoul
d be consul-
ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of
different sizes to those originally fitted by
SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about
the combinations allowed between the
front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
1)
COC = certificate of conf
ormity.
330
Wheels
●
Nev
er mount used tyres if you are not
sure of their “previous history”.
Tyre life
Fig. 230 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-
ing habits will incr
ease the useful lif
e of your
tyres.
●
Check tyre pressure at least once a month,
and also prior to any long trip.
●
The tyre pressure should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
pressure of warm tyres.
●
Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-
ried by the vehicle
›››
Fig. 230.
●
In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,
save the modified tyre pressure
›››
page 335.
●
Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
●
Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from
time to time.
Tyre pressure
The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a
sticker on the rear of the front left door frame
›››
Fig. 230.
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-
duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-
ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-
rect inflation pressures are very important,
especially at high speeds.
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can
be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-
ing comfort (tyre pressure
›››
Fig. 230).
When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel
consumption may increase slightly.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-
ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the
vehicle is going to carry the maximum load,
the tyre pressure should be increased to the
maximum value indicated on the sticker
›››
Fig. 230.
Do not forget the spare wheel when checking
the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-
flated to the highest pressure required for the
road wheels.
In the case of a minimised temporary spare
wheel (), inflate to a pressure of 4.2 bar as in-
dicated on the tyre pressure label
›››
Fig. 230.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre
wear.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, certain circumstances may lead to
imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
brations in the steering wheel.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,
as they otherwise cause excessive wear on
steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-
ficial Service.
»
331
Practical tips
WARNING
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and
tyr
es may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-
ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-
out.
●
The driver is responsible for ensuring that
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-
ted to the right pressure. The recommen-
ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label
›››
Fig. 230.
●
Check tyre pressures regularly and en-
sure they are maintained at the pressures
indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low
could cause overheating, resulting in tread
detachment or even burst tyres.
●
When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure
should be that indicated on the label
›››
Fig. 230.
●
Regularly check the cold inflation pres-
sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the
tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they
are cold.
●
Regularly check your tyres for damage
and wear.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speed or loads specified for the type of
tyre fitted on your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
Tread wear indicators
Fig. 231
Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.
Fig. 232 Interchanging tyres.
Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be
f
ound on the base of the original t
yre treads,
ordered at regular intervals and running
across the tread
›››
Fig. 231. The letters "TWI"
or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark
the position of the wear indicators.
The minimum permitted profile depth
1)
have
been reached when the tyres have worn
down to the wear indicators. Replace the
tyres with new ones
›››
.
Changing wheel
s ar
ound
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
the wheels should be changed round from
time to time according to the system
›››
Fig. 232. The useful life of all the tyres will
then be about the same time.
1)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
332
Wheels
WARNING
The tyres must be replaced at the latest
when the tread is w
orn down to the tread
wear indicators. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
Particularly in difficult driving conditions
such as wet or icy roads. It is important that
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and
be approximately the same on the tyres of
both the front and the rear axles.
●
The scant driving safety due to insuffi-
cient tread depth is particularly evident in
vehicle handling, when there is a risk of
“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water
and when driving through corners, and
braking is also adversely affected.
●
The speed has to be adapted according-
ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control
over the vehicle.
Wheel nuts
The wheel nuts ar
e mat
ched to the rims.
When installing different wheels (for instance
alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is
important to use the correct wheel nuts with
the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-
curely and that the brake system functions
correctly.
The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-
theft wheel nuts*
›››
page 47.
WARNING
Wheel nuts should never be greased or
oiled.
●
Use only wheel nuts which bel
ong to the
wheel.
●
If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts
is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the
tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts
and threads can be damaged.
CAUTION
See
››
›
page 50 to find out the recommen-
ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for
steel and alloy rims.
Winter tyres
–
Winter tyres must be fitted on all f
our
wheel
s.
–
Only use winter tyres that are approved for
your vehicle.
–
Please note that the maximum permissible
speed for winter tyres may be lower than
for summer tyres.
–
Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
fective when the tread is worn down.
–
After fitting the wheels you must always
check the tyre pressures. When doing so,
take into account the correct tyre pressures
listed on the rear of the front left door frame
›››
page 331.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-
siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-
sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
equipped with wide section tyres or with
high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on
the sidewall).
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents
(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC
1)
).
The vehicle documentation varies depending
on the country of residence.
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
»
1)
COC = certificate of conf
ormity.
333
Practical tips
The performance of winter tyres is also se-
v
er
ely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is
still much deeper than 4 mm.
A code letter indicating the speed limit is
stamped on all winter tyres
›››
page 329.
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
must have an appropriate sticker attached
so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-
ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-
ice and specialised workshop. Please note
the regulations to this effect in your country.
“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead
of winter tyres.
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable
240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres
with the letter V is subject to technical re-
strictions; the maximum permissible speed
for your vehicle may be significantly lower.
The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-
pends directly on the maximum axle weights
for your car and on the listed weight rating of
the tyres being used.
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to
check the maximum speed which is permissi-
ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on
the basis of this information.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted
for the wint
er tyres fitted on your car can
cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-
trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
When winter is over, change back to sum-
mer tyr
es at an appropriate moment. In
temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-
ance will be improved if summer tyres are
used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises
while driving will all be reduced.
Snow chains
Snow chains must only be fitted t
o the fr
ont
wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel
drive.
●
Check that they are correctly seated after
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
turer's fitting instructions.
●
Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
If there is a danger of being trapped de-
spite having mounted the chains, it is best to
disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
›››
page 272, Connecting and disconnect-
ing the ESC and ASR.
Snow chains will improve braking ability as
well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
combination.
Tyres Wheel rim Chains
215/65 R17 6.5x17 ET38
Max. link 13.5
mm
215/65 R17 7x17 ET40 Max. link 9 mm
Other dimensions do not allow chains
Remove any central wheel trims before fitting
sno
w chains.
WARNING
The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted
chains could l
ead to serious accidents and
damage.
●
Always the appropriate snow chains.
●
Observe the fitting instructions provided
by the snow chain manufacturer.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speeds when driving with snow chains.
CAUTION
●
Remo
ve the snow chains to drive on
roads without snow. Otherwise they will im-
pair vehicle handling, damage the tyres
and wear out very quickly.
334
Wheels
●
Wheel rims may be damaged or scrat
ch-
ed if the chains come into direct contact
with them. SEAT recommends the use of
covered snow chains.
Tyre pressure monitor sys-
tem
Contr
ol lamp
It lights up
The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much
lo
wer than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has
structural damage.
In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text
message is displayed on the instrument panel
screen.
Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace
any damaged tyres.
Flashes
System fault
The control l
amp flashes for approximately 1 minute
and then lights up permanently.
If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off
and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitor
indicator
›››
page 335. If the fault continues, go to a
specialised workshop.
Several control and warning lamps light up
f
or a f
ew seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on while the function is verified. They will
switch off after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
››
›
in Con-
trol and w
arning lamps on page 83.
Tyre pressure monitor system
Fig. 233
Instrument panel: warning of loss of
t
yr
e pressure.
The tyre pressure monitoring system com-
par
es the individual speeds of each wheel
and thus the dynamic r
adius with the help of
the ABS sensors.
If the rolling circumference of one or more
wheels has changed, the tyre pressure moni-
toring indicator will indicate this on the instru-
ment panel through a warning lamp and a
warning to the driver
›››
Fig. 233. When only
one specific tyre is affected, its position within
the vehicle will be indicated.
Loss of pressure: Check left
tyre pressure!
Wheel tread change
The wheel diameter changes when:
●
Tyre pressure is changed manually.
●
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
●
The tyre structure is damaged.
●
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a
load.
●
The wheels on an axle are subject to a
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).
●
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
●
The wheel on one axle is changed.
There may be a delay in the reaction of the
tyre pressure monitoring indicator or it may
not indicate anything under certain circum-
stances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or
unpaved roads, or when driving with snow
chains).
Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in-
dicator
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni-
toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the
»
335
Practical tips
same, for example, when the front and rear
wheel
s ar
e swapped.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Save the new inflation pressure in the Info-
tainment system: function button > SET-
TINGS > Tyres
›››
page 88.
When driving, the system self-calibrates the
tyre pressure provided by the driver and the
wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied
speeds the programmed values are collected
and monitored.
With the wheels under very heavy loads, the
tyre pressure must be increased to the total
recommended tyre pressure before calibra-
tion
›››
Fig. 230.
WARNING
When the tyres are inflated at different
pressur
es or at a pressure that is too low
then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a
loss of control of the vehicle and a serious
or fatal accident.
●
If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-
mediately and avoid any sudden turning or
braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,
and check the tyre pressure and status.
●
The tyre pressure monitoring system can
only operate correctly if all of the tyres are
inflated to the correct pressure when cold.
●
If a tyre has not been punctured and it
does not have to be changed immediately,
drive to the nearest specialised workshop
at a moderat
e speed and have the tyre
checked and inflated to the correct pres-
sure.
Note
●
Driving f
or the first time with ne
w tyres at
a high speed can cause them to slightly ex-
pand, which could then produce an air
pressure warning.
●
If excessively low tyre pressure is detec-
ted with the ignition on, an audible warning
will sound. In the event that there is a fault
in the system, an audible warning will
sound.
●
Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of
time or driving in a sporty style can tempo-
rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control
lamp shows a fault, but disappears when
road conditions or the driving style change.
●
Do not only rely on the tyre pressure
monitoring system. Regularly check your
tyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is cor-
rect and that the tyres are not damaged
due to puncture, cuts, tears and im-
pacts/dents. Remove objects from the
tyres only when they have not pierced the
tyres.
●
The tyre pressure monitoring indicator
does not function when there is a fault in
the ESC or ABS
›››
page 270.
Spare wheel
L
ocation and use of the t
emporary
spare wheel
Fig. 234
In the luggage compartment: load
fl
oor r
aised.
336
Wheels
Fig. 235
In the luggage compartment: remove
the sub
w
oofer.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under
the fl
oor panel in the luggage compartment
and is att
ached by a thumbnut.
The temporary spare wheel has been de-
signed to be used for short periods of time.
Have the tyres checked and replaced as
soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or
at a specialised workshop.
The spare wheel must not be switched for a
spare wheel from another vehicle.
Removing the temporary spare wheel (5-
seat vehicles)
●
Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove
the temporary spare wheel
›››
page 141.
●
Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise
›››
Fig. 234.
●
Take out the temporary spare wheel.
Removing the temporary spare wheel (7-
seat vehicles)
●
Remove the luggage compartment floor.
●
Pull up on the bottom, side cords of the 3rd
row of seats until latching in the upper posi-
tion.
●
Remove the transversal side wall.
●
Turn the thumb wheel anticlockwise
›››
Fig. 234
1)
.
●
Take out the temporary spare wheel.
●
To put the temporary spare wheel back in
place, proceed in the reverse order.
Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles
with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub-
woofer)*
To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-
move the subwoofer.
●
Lift and secure the luggage compartment
floor as explained in
›››
page 141.
●
Disconnect the subwoofer
›››
Fig. 235
1
speaker cable.
●
Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-
wise dir
ection
›
››
Fig. 235
2
.
●
Remove the sub
w
oofer speaker and the
spare wheel.
●
When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the
subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with
care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”
arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.
●
Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-
tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the
subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in
place.
Chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not
be used on the temporary spare wheel.
»
1)
If the vehicle is outfitted with the Beats Audio
system with a sub
woofer*, before removing the
spare wheel, proceed as instructed in
›››
page 337.
337
Practical tips
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheel
s when using sno
w chains, fit the tem-
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the
punctured front wheel with this wheel.
WARNING
Keep in mind that the standard wheel is
wider than the emergency spar
e wheel, so
the 3rd row of seats cannot be completely
lowered when that standard wheel is
placed in the emergency spare wheel well.
●
Do not drive if the 3rd row of seats is not
correctly fastened by the anchors. Risk of
serious injury.
WARNING
●
After fitting the t
emporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-
ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-
dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back
of the left front door frame
›››
Fig. 230.
●
Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when the temporary spare wheel is fitted
on the vehicle: risk of accident!
●
Never travel more than 200 km using a
temporary spare wheel.
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering: risk of accident!
●
Never use more than one temporary
spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-
dent.
●
No other type of t
yre (normal summer or
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
●
If you are driving using the spare wheel,
the ACC system could automatically
switch off during the journey. Switch off the
system when starting off.
338
SEAT Maintenance Programme
Maintenance
SEAT Maint
enance Pr
o-
gramme
Service intervals
Service work and the Digital Main-
tenance Plan
Log of services performed (“Digital Main-
t
enance Pl
an”)
The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-
shop records Service receipts in a central
system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-
mentation of the service history, it is possible
to reproduce the services performed any
time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service
receipt after every service carried out con-
taining all the services carried out on the sys-
tem.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is
replaced with a current one.
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-
able in some markets. In this case, your
SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-
rent documentation of the work.
Service works
In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT
authorised service or specialised workshop
documents the following information:
●
When each one of the services was carried
out.
●
Whether a specific repair has been sugges-
ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near
future.
●
If you have expressed a special request for
the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will
write the work order.
●
The components or fluids that were
changed.
●
The date of the next service.
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until
the next inspection. This information is docu-
mented in all checks performed.
The type and the volume of the service may
vary from one vehicle to another. A special-
ised workshop will be able to provide specific
information on the jobs for your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
formed and if the service int
ervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic cause an accident and severe in-
juries.
●
Make sur
e that any repairs are carried
out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-
alised workshop.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
t
o the v
ehicle due to insufficient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Note
Regular services on the vehicle not only
maintain its v
alue, but also its correct oper-
ation and road safety. For this reason, con-
duct the services in accordance with SEAT
guidelines.
Set Service or Flexible Service In-
t
erv
als
Services are classified as oil change service
and inspection. The service int
erv
al display
on the instrument panel display serves as a
reminder of the next service.
Depending on the features, the engine and
the conditions of use of the car, either the
Fixed service or the Flexible service will be
applied for an oil change service..
»
339
Maintenance
How to know which type of service needs
t
o his v
ehicle
●
Check the tables below:
Oil change service
a)
PR No.
Type of
service
Service interval
QI1
Fixed
Every 5000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI2
Every 7500 km or after
1 year
b)
QI3
Ev
ery 10000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI4
Ev
ery 15000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI6 Fl
exible
According to the service in-
t
erv
al display
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
b)
Whatever happens first.
Inspection Service
a)
According to the service interval display
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
P
ar
ticular characteristics of the Flexible
Service
Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil
change service only has to be performed
when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when
you have to carry out this service, take into
account the individual conditions of use and
personal driving style. A major component of
the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-
stead of conventional engine oil.
Bear in mind the information about the speci-
fications of the engine oil according to the
VW standard
›››
page 317.
If you do not want to the flexible service
you can select the fixed service However,
a fixed service may affect service costs
The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.
Service interval display
At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-
ted by the service interval display on the in-
strument panel
›››
page 79 or in the Vehicle
settings menu of the infotainment system
›››
page 88.
The service interval display gives information
for service dates that involve an engine oil
change or an inspection. When the time for
the corresponding service comes, additional
work required, such as the change of brake
fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.
Information about the terms of use
The service intervals and groups are usually
based on normal conditions of use.
If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-
v
erse conditions of use
, some of the work
must be carried out before the next service
period or even between service intervals.
Conditions of use adverse include:
●
The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
●
Frequent short trips.
●
Letting the engine idle for a long period of
time, as in the case of taxis.
●
Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.
●
Frequent driving with a trailer (depending
on equipment).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a
lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in winter.
This applies especially for the following
parts (depending on equipment):
●
Dust and pollen filter
●
Air Care allergen filter
●
Air filter
●
Toothed chain
●
Particulate filter
●
Engine oil
The Service Advisor of your specialised
workshop will gladly inform you about the
need of performing service work between
340
SEAT Maintenance Programme
normal service intervals, always considering
the conditions of use of your v
ehicl
e.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
formed and if the service int
ervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic and cause accidents and severe
injuries.
●
Have the services conducted at author-
ised SEAT services or specialised work-
shops.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
to the v
ehicle due to insufficient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Service sets
Sets of services include all the maint
enance
w
orks needed to ensure the safety and the
smooth running of the vehicle (depending on
the conditions of use and the features of
the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or
operating fluids). Maintenance services are
divided into inspection and review services.
Consult the details of the jobs required for
your vehicle at:
●
Your SEAT authorised service
●
Your specialised workshop
Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-
opment of components) the sets of services
may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or
specialised workshop is always receiving up-
dates in time.
Additional service offers
Approved spare parts
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-
ceiv
ed f
or their vehicles and approved by
SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.
These parts correspond exactly to the manu-
facturer's requirements in terms of design,
accuracy of the measurements and materi-
als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been
conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this
reason, we always recommend the use of
Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be
held liable for the safety and suitability of
parts from other manufacturers.
Approved spare parts
Approved spare parts, following the manu-
f
act
urer's requirements, are an additional
service to you, offering the possibility of re-
placing complete sets, such as: light engine,
gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical
components, etc.
These parts are, approved parts, and are the
same as the factory parts, which are also ap-
proved spare parts.
Original accessories
We recommend you only use SEAT Original
Accessories and SEAT appro
ved accessories
for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and
suitability of these accessories have been in-
spected specifically for this type of vehicle.
SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and
suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
SEAT Service Mobility
Since the moment you purchase your SEAT
v
ehicl
e you will be able to enjoy the benefits
and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.
For the first two years after the purchase,
your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-
ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-
ditional costs.
If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-
od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as
you carry out the recommended Inspection
and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-
ised Service.
»
341
Maintenance
If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a
f
ault or an accident, our assist
ance services
will help you keep moving.
Take into account that the SEAT Mobility
Service differs depending on the country in
which the vehicle was purchased. For further
information ask your SEAT dealership or the
SEAT website in your country.
Warranty
Fault-free operation warranty
SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect
condition of ne
w v
ehicles. Check the pur-
chase agreement or complementary addi-
tional documentation provided by your Tech-
nical Service to see the conditions and the
terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-
mation in this regard in your SEAT Official
Service.
Vehicle maintenance
Maint
enance and cl
eaning
Basic observations
Regular and careful care helps to maintain
the value of your v
ehicle. In addition, it may
become a prerequisite to demand the war-
ranty in the event of corrosion damage and
deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-
work.
Specialised workshops have the necessary
care products. Please follow the instructions
for application on the packaging.
WARNING
●
Cleaning pr
oducts and other materials
used for car care can be damaging to your
health if misused.
●
Always keep care products in a safe
place, out of the reach of children. Danger
of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
●
When purchasing car car
e products,
chose products that are compatible with
the environment.
●
The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste.
Washing the vehicle
The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.
remains of insects, bir
d excrements, tree resin
or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the
more damage it can cause to the surface.
High temperatures, for instance strong sun-
light, further intensify the damage.
Before washing the car, soften the dirt using
plenty of water.
To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird
droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and
a microfibre cloth.
Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-
ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.
High pressure cleaning equipment
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
structions for the equipment. This applies
particularly to the operating pressure and the
distance between the spraying water. Do not
aim the jet directly to the side window gas-
kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-
roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-
ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or
camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least
40 cm.
Do not remove snow and ice with a high-
pressure cleaner.
342
Vehicle maintenance
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out
in a dir
ect str
eam or one that has a rotating
jet for forcing off dirt.
The water temperature must not exceed
60°C.
Automatic car washes
Spray the vehicle before starting the car
wash.
Make sure that the windows and the panor-
amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen
wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-
structions of the car wash tunnel operator,
especially if your vehicle has detachable
parts.
Use of car washes without brushes if possible.
Washing by hand
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a
soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-
ing products that do not contain solvents.
Washing vehicles with a matte paint by
hand
To prevent damage to the vehicle when
washing it, first remove the thicker dust and
dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and
fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner
for matte paint.
Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To
avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do
not apply too much pressure.
Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with
a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-
bre cloth.
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water
and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of
water with a leather cloth.
WARNING
●
Only wash the v
ehicle with the ignition
switched off or according to the specifica-
tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk
of accident!
●
When cleaning the underbody or the in-
side of the wheel arches, protect yourself
from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of
cut!
●
After cleaning the brakes could act more
slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice
on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-
dent! In this case the brakes should be
dried by pressing the brake pedal several
times.
CAUTION
●
Befor
e washing the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them
from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-
view mirrors must always be folded/de-
ployed el
ectrically!
●
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Risk of damaging the paint job!
●
Do not use sponges, abrasive household
sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
Risk of damaging the surface!
●
Vehicle parts with matte paint:
–
Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of
damaging the surface!
–
Never select washing programs that in-
clude the use of wax. This could dam-
age the appearance of matte paint.
–
Do not put stickers or magnets on parts
with matte paint, as removing them
may damage the paint.
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special
wash bays. These pl
aces are prepared to
prevent oily water from getting into the
public drains.
Cleaning and maintenance instruc-
tions
The cleaning and maintenance of individual
components of the v
ehicl
e can be checked in
the following tables. The contents should be
understood merely as a recommendation. Go
to your specialised workshop if you have
»
343
Maintenance
special questions or parts that are not listed.
T
ak
e he general considerations into account
›››
in Take special care with... on
page 347.
Cleaning the exterior
Windscreen wipers
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with wipers
Headlights / Tail lights
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
ater
Sensors / Camera lenses
Problem Solution
Dirt
Sensors: soft cloth with a sol
-
vent-free cleaning product
Camera lenses: soft cloth with
an alcohol-free cleaning prod-
uct
Snow/ice
Hand brush/Anti frost spray
with no solv
ents
Wheels
Problem Solution
Antifreeze salt Water
Brake abrasion
dust
Acid-free special cleaning
product
End exhausts
Problem Solution
Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-
uct is requir
ed
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if a
steel cl
eaning product is re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
ater
Paint
Problem Solution
Paint flaws
Check the paint's colour code
in an authorised service and re-
st
ore with a touch-up pencil
Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water
Environmental rust
tank
Apply rust r
emover and then
apply hard w
ax. Go you your
specialised workshop if you
have any queries
Problem Solution
Corrosion
Have your specialised work-
shop tak
e care of this
The water does
not creat
e drop-
lets on the clean
paint
Maintain with hard wax (at
least 2 times a year)
No shine de-
spite sober main-
t
enance/paint
Treat with suitable wax and ap-
ply paint preserv
ative after-
wards if the wax used does not
contain preservative ingredi-
ents
Tanks, e.g. insect
remains, bir
d
droppings, tree
sap, road salt
Immediately soften with water
and remove with a microfibre
cloth
Fat-based dirt,
e.g. cosmetic
products or
sunscreen
Delete immediately with a neu-
tral soap solution
a)
and a soft
cloth
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
ater
Carbon fibre parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean the same way as pain-
ted parts
›
››
page 342
344
Vehicle maintenance
Decoration slides
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of w
ater
Interior cleaning
Windows
Problem Solution
Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and
then dry with a cloth
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
ater
Plastic parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Damp cloth
Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if pos-
sible solvent-free plastic clean-
er
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
ater
Displays/instrument panel
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal
display cl
eaner
Control panels
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with
neutral soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of w
ater
Seat belts
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, al-
l
owed to dry before retracting
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
ater
Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather
Problem Solution
Particles of dirt
stuck t
o surfaces
Vacuum cleaner
Water-based dirt,
e.g. coff
ee, tea,
blood etc.
Absorbent cloth and neutral
soap solution
a)
Problem Solution
Grease-based
dirt, e.g. oil
, make-
up, etc.
Apply a neutral soap solution
a)
.
Absorb the dissolved grease
and paint particles drying with
an absorbent cloth, in case you
must treat it with water after-
wards
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cream et
c.
Special stain remove: dry with
an absorbent cloth, if applica-
ble, apply neutral soap solution
afterwards
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
ater
Natural leather
Problem Solution
Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap
solution
a)
Water-based dirt,
e.g. coffee, tea,
blood etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
Dry stains: stain remover suita-
ble for leather
Grease-based
dirt, e.g. oil
, make-
up, etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
and suitable stain remover for
leather
Dry stains: grease solvent
spray
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cream et
c.
Stain remover suitable for
leather
»
345
Maintenance
Problem Solution
Care Apply preservative cream regu-
larly t
o protect from sunlight.
Use a colour preservative if re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of w
ater
Carbon fibre parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean like plastic parts
Take special care with...
Headlights/tail lights
●
Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with
a dry cl
oth or sponge
.
●
Do not use cleaning products that contain
alcohol. Risk of cracks!
Wheels
●
Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive
products.
●
If the protective coating on the paint of the
rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,
scratches, etc., the damage should be re-
paired immediately.
Camera lenses
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of
cracking the lens!
●
To clean the camera lens, never use abra-
sive cleaning products or products with alco-
hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!
Windows
●
Remove snow and ice from windows and
exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches, the scraper should only be
pushed in one direction and not moved to
and fro.
●
Never remove snow or ice from windows
and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.
Risk of cracks on the windows!
●
To prevent damage to the heating of the
rear window, do not put stickers over the
heating elements.
Covers/trims
●
Do not use cleaning products or chrome
based cleaning agents.
Paint
●
The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust
before applying wax or care products. Risk of
scratches!
●
Do not apply wax or care products if the
vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of
damaging the paint job!
●
The ambient rust deposits must not be re-
moved through friction. Risk of damaging the
paint job!
●
Remove cosmetic products and sunlight
immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
Displays/instrument panel
●
The screens, the instrument panel and the
trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of
scratches!
●
Make sure that the instrument panel is
switched off and cooled down before clean-
ing.
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks between the
instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-
age!
Control panels
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-
trol panels. Risk of damage!
Seat belts
●
Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.
●
Seat belts and their components must nev-
er be cleaned with chemical products, nor
should they be allowed to come into contact
with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-
jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!
●
If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
ask your specialised workshop to replace the
belt in question.
346
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle
Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-
er
●
Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara
l
eather with l
eather care products, solvents,
floor wax, shoe polish, stain removers or simi-
lar products.
●
If the stain is very hard to remove, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it
removed there. This will prevent damage.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the
seats.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage
the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro
fasteners are closed.
Natural leather
●
Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
spot removers or similar products on leather.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the
seats.
●
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for
long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose
some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-
longed period in the bright sun, it is best to
cover the leather.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the
windscreen. In bad visibilit
y conditions
such as humid weather, darkness or when
the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may
be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-
ings can also cause the windscreen wiper
blades to make noise.
Note
●
Remains of insects can be r
emoved much
more easily with previously treated paint.
●
Regular car care treatments can prevent
deposits of ambient rust.
Remove the vehicle from traffic
If you want to leave your vehicle stationary
f
or a l
ong period of time, contact a qualified
workshop. They will gladly inform you about
the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-
sion protection, Service and storage.
Also take into account instructions regarding
the 12-volt vehicle battery
›››
page 323.
Accessories and modifi-
cations t
o the v
ehicle
Accessories, spare parts and
repair work
Introduction
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer
for advice bef
ore purchasing accessories
and replacement parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-
ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-
son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-
cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-
ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official
Service has the latest information from the
manufacturer and can recommend accesso-
ries and replacement parts which are suita-
ble for your requirements. They can also an-
swer any questions you might have regarding
official regulations.
We recommend only using SEAT accesso-
ries and genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has
tested these parts and accessories for suita-
bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official
Services have the necessary experience and
facilities to ensure that the parts are installed
correctly and professionally.
»
347
Maintenance
Any r
etro-fitted equipment which has a di-
r
ect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is
driven, such as a cruise control system or
electronically-controlled suspension, must
be approved for use in your vehicle and bear
the e mark (the European Union's authorisa-
tion symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fit-
ted which do not serve to control the vehicle
itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop
or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the
sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in
the European Union).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone hold-
ers or cup holders, shoul
d never be fitted
on the covers, or within the working range
of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger
of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-
dent.
Technical modifications
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic
components, softw
ar
e, wiring or data transfer
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership
cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work per-
formed incorrectly.
For this reason we recommend asking official
SEAT service centres to do any necessary
work using genuine SEAT parts®.
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or
other work on your v
ehicle can lead to mal-
functions and cause accidents.
Radio telephones and office equip-
ment
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
Any r
etr
ofit installations of radio transmitters
in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT
generally authorises in-vehicle installations
of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
ded that:
●
The antenna is installed correctly.
●
The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
vehicle (and shielded cables are used to-
gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).
●
The effective transmitting power does not
exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-
shop will be able to inform you about options
for installing and operating radio transmitters
with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile radio transmitters
Commercial mobile telephones or radio
equipment might interfere with the electron-
ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
This may be due to:
●
No external aerial.
●
External aerial incorrectly installed.
●
Transmitting power more than 10 W.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
nal aerial
›››
.
Pl
ease not
e also that the maximum range of
the equipment can only be achieved with an
external aerial.
Business equipment
Retrofit installation of business or private
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
driver's immediate control of the vehicle and
that any such equipment carries the mark.
Any retrofit equipment that could influence
the driver's control of the vehicle must have a
type approval for your vehicle and must carry
the e mark.
WARNING
Mobile telephones or radio equipment
which is operat
ed inside the vehicle without
348
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle
a properly installed external aerial can
creat
e excessive magnetic fields that
could cause a health hazard.
Note
●
The post
erior fitting of el
ectric and elec-
tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its
licence and could lead to the withdrawal of
the vehicle registration document under
certain circumstances.
●
Please use the mobile telephone/radio
operating instructions.
349
Information for the user
Information for the user
Inf
ormation f
or the user
Information stored by the
control units
Storage of accident data (Event
Data Recorder)
Your vehicle has an event data recorder
(EDR).
The EDR’
s function is t
o record data in the
event of a mild or serious accident. These da-
ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-
ferent vehicle systems behaved.
The EDR records, over a reduced time range
(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-
ing data and data from the restraint systems,
such as:
●
How different vehicle systems worked.
●
Whether the driver and the occupants were
wearing their seat belts.
●
How hard the acceleration or brake pedal
was pressed.
●
Vehicle speed.
These data will provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances of the accident.
Data from the driving assist systems are also
recorded. This includes data such as whether
the systems were inactive or active and if
such action had an impact on the vehicle’s
dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the
aforementioned situations, accelerating or
decelerating the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-
cludes data from systems such as:
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
●
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist).
●
Park Pilot system
●
Parking aid system (Park Assist).
●
Lane Assist
The EDR data are only recorded in specific
accident situations. No data are recorded in
normal driving conditions.
No audio or video data inside or around the
vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-
ces are personal data such as name, age, or
gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties
(such as criminal proceedings authorities)
may relate the contents of the EDR data to
other data sources and create a personal
reference in the context of an accident inves-
tigation.
In order to read the EDR data it is necessary
to access (if legally permitted to do so) the
vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-
face while the vehicle is switched on.
SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless
the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee
or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-
ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-
tractual provisions.
Due to legal requirements in safety-related
products, SEAT may use the EDR data for
field research and in order to improve vehicle
system quality. Any data used for the purpo-
ses of research will be treated anonymously
(in other words, no reference will be made to
the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).
Other important information
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, choice of mat
erial
s and manufac-
ture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage re-
cycling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling.
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling.
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
350
Information for the user
●
Pl
astic parts and el
astomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
●
Use of recycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, including
odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-
cle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Recycling of electrical or electron-
ic devices
All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that
are not permanently fitt
ed in the vehicle must
be marked with the following symbol:
This symbol indicates that EED must not be
discarded as home waste but through selec-
tive waste collection.
Information about the EU Di-
rectiv
e 2014/53/EU
Simplified EU compliance declara-
tion
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manuf
act
urers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Directive
2014/53/EU when legally required.
The full text of the EU compliance declaration
is available online at the following address:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
Addresses of the manufacturers
According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all
rel
evant components must include the ad-
dress of the manufacturer.
The address of the manufacturers of compo-
nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot
include a sticker are listed below, as long as it
is legally required:
Radioelectrical
equipment fitted
in the v
ehicle
Addresses of the
manufacturers
Radiofrequency remote
control k
ey
Della KGaA Hueck & Co.
Rixbecker Str
aße 75
59552 Lippstadt,
GERMANY
Radio frequency re-
mote contr
ol (auxiliary
heater)
Transmitted-Receiver
(independent heating)
Digades GmbH
Äußere W
eberstraße 20
02763 Zittau, GERMANY
Webasto Thermo &
Comfort SE
Friedrichshaf
ener Str. 9
82205 Gilching, GERMANY
»
351
Information for the user
Radioelectrical
equipment fitted
in the v
ehicle
Addresses of the
manufacturers
Radar sensors for as-
sistance syst
ems
ADC Automotive Distance
Control Syst
ems GmbH
Peter-Dornier-Straße 10
88131 Lindau, GERMANY
Robert Bosch GmbH
Postf
ach 16 61
71226 Leonberg,
GERMANY
Frequency bands, station power
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)
433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)
All SEAT models
433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW
868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW
434.42 MHz 32 µW
Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary
heater)
868.
7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW Alhambra
Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating)
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW Alhambra
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Bluetooth
2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm
All SEAT models
2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm
352
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Connection to the external antenna of the car
GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm
Leon, Ateca, Alhambra and TarracoGSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm
WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm
WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm
Tarraco and Leon
WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm
LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm
Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Radar sensors for assistance systems
76 GHz-77 GHz
28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra
35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco
24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra
Wireless charging
110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
111-120 kHz 10 W New Leon
Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m
Ibiza, Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and
Alhambr
a
»
353
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Online Connectivity Unit
EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm
Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm
UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm
UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm
UMTS FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 24 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862 MHz 23.5 dBm
E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748 MHz 23.0 dBm
a)
The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.
Hereby, Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH de-
cl
ar
es that the radio equipment type LTE-
MBC-EU2 is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declara-
tion of conformity is available at the following
internet address:
http://www.molex.com/doc
354
Indications about the technical data
Technical data
Indications about the
t
echnical dat
a
Important information
Introduction
The values indicated in the technical data
may diff
er depending on optional equipment
or v
ersion of the model, as well as in the case
of special vehicles and equipment for certain
countries.
The information in the official vehicle docu-
mentation takes precedence at all times.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-
fications section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly
used to denot
e engine power.
rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the die-
sel combustion pow
er.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock resist
ance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle ID number
The vehicl
e ID number can be found in the
following places:
●
In the infotainment system, using the func-
tion button > SETTINGS > Service >
Vehicle identification number.
●
One the vehicle's data label.
●
In front, under the windscreen.
●
To the right in the engine compartment.
Type pl
ate
The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right
hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export
countries do not have a type plate.
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived
fr
om measur
ements performed or supervised
by certified EU laboratories, according to the
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions can be found in the documen-
tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-
cle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions de-
pend on the equipment/features of each indi-
vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,
road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-
mental conditions, load or number of passen-
gers.
Filling capacities
Tank level
Vehicles with front-wheel
drive:
58 l
, of which approx. 7l
reserve
Vehicles with four-wheel
drive:
60 l
, of which approx.
8.5 l reserve
Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-
t
ainer
approx. 3.2 litres
Weights
Load on the roof
The maximum authorised l
oad on the r
oof of
your vehicle is 75 kg.
»
355
Technical data
Empty weight, total weight, axle loads
The empt
y w
eight of the vehicle with driver
(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)
1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can
increase the empty weight, which means that
the possible useful load decreases propor-
tionally.
Trailer weight
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the
ball head of the towing bracket is 80 kg.
WARNING
The values indicated for the maximum per-
mitted w
eights must not be exceeded.
There is a risk of accident and damage!
356
Indications about the technical data
Engine specifications
Petrol engines 1.4 TSI 1.5 TSI Start-Stop ACT® 2.0 TSI Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 140 (190)/4,200-6,000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 250/1,500-3,500 320/1,500-4,100
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,395 4/1,498 4/1,984
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox DSG manual DSG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 199 (5) 201 (5) 201 (5) 211 (6)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.4 9.7 9.7 8
Maximum authorized weight (kg) (5/7 seats) 2,170/2,350 2,150/2,320 2,180/2,360 2,360/2,500
Diesel engines 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/3,250-4,200 110 (150)/3,000-4,200 147 (200)/3,600-4,100
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 340/1,600-3,000 360/1,600-2,750 400/1,750-3,500
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,968 4/1,968 4/1,968
Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN
Gearbox manual DSG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 202 (6) 198 (6)
a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 9.8
a)
Maximum authorized weight (kg) (5/7 seats) 2,230/2,400 2,380/2,530 2,380 / 2,520
a)
Data not available as this edition goes to print.
357
Technical data
Dimensions
Fig. 236
Dimensions.
358
Indications about the technical data
›››
Fig. 236 TARRACO
A Front projection (mm) 926
B Rear projection (mm) 1,019
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,790
D Length (mm) 4,735
E Front
a)
track (mm) 1,585
F Back
a)
track (mm) 1,57
4
G Width (mm) 1,839
H Height at kerb weight (mm)
1,658
b)
1,6
74
c)
I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 192
J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.1°
K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 21.4°
Turning radius (m) 11.9
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. Values for wheel 215/65 R17 ET38.
b)
Distance to the roof.
c)
Dimension to the roof bars.
359
Index
Index
Numbers and Symbol
s
12-v
olt battery
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 323
electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
A
ABS
see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Access aid for the third row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 347
Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Active cylinder management (ACT)
status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
AdBlue
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Additional heating
see Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Adjust
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 133
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
seat with memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
for the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
for the knees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Air conditioning
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Alternator
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Android Auto™
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 44
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301
Anti-trap function
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Apple CarPlay
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
361
Index
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
special char
act
eristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Aspects to think about before starting the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ASR
see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Assistance systems
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 274
Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 245
front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
hill descent control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 260
parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
peripheral view system (Top View Cam-
era) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
rear camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . 260, 264
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
rear radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 74
safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
ultrasound sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Audible warning
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . 269
Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 113
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
emergency release of the selector lever. . . 229
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
parking lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 224
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 224
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
electricity consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
radio-operated remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
B
Backrest of the rear seat
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 152
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
change on the remote control (independ-
ent heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Bicycle carrier
fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . 305
max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Blown bulbs
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 316
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
362
Index
Braking system
w
arning l
amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
C
Camera
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Care
see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
unlock and lock the vehicle (Keyless Ac-
cess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Check lists
requirements for Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . 186
requirements for MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Childproof locks
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Child seats
group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ISOFIX/i-Size system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 39
Cleaning the vehicle
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 342
special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Climate control
auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Clocks
set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Connectors
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 272
audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 272
fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . . 261
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 313
press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 248
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 307
remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 166
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
363
Index
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
st
eering column l
ock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Controls
rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Controls and displays
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Convenience close function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Convenience open function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cooling system
check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . . 169
D
Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . . 184
Deactivation of cylinders
see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 68
Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Diesel
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Display of road signs on the instrument panel
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Disposal
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Distance control
see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Drink holder
bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
in the rear central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Driving
driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 237
with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
E
e-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Easy Open
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
EDL
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Electric
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Electrical accessories
see Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Electronic engine torque management (XDS) . 271
Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 217
Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
364
Index
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
emer
gency br
ake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
see also Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 238
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emergency locking of the front passenger
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Emergency opening
driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Emergency operation
front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Emissions control system
AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Engine
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
start (driver instructions with the mechani-
cal contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Engine and ignition
automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 215
emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 216
switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 316
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 321
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Engine failure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Engine oil
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319
checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Environment
ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Environmental tip
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Equipment
telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
ESC
electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 270
multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
365
Index
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
Ext
erior lighting
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Exterior mirrors
driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
external audio sources
adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
F
Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Factors that have a negative influence on
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Filling capacities
AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 117
Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Front Assist
see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 245
Fuel
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fuel consumption
inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 312
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fuel tank cap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 60, 61
preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
G
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Gearbox DSG
see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Gear change
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Glasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
H
Handbrake
see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
HDC
see Hill descent control (HDC). . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 19
Headlights
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129, 130
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Hill descent control (HDC).
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
I
Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Identifying letters on engine (LDM) . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Identity accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 169
adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
before first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
366
Index
drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
e
x
ecuting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Infotainment system
see Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 339
Inspection reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70
menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
use with the multifunction steering wheel . . 80
Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Interior mirror
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
iPod adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
K
Keyless Access
Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 95
Keyless Access lock and ignition system:
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Keys
assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
instructions for the driver (mechanical con-
tact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 102
vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Kick-down
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
L
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Lane Assist Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Lane Assist system
see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 226
Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Leaving a parking space with the parking as-
sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
367
Index
coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
contr
ol and w
arning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . . 117
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Loading the luggage compartment
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 137
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
trapdoor for long loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Lock and unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 137
cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
features of the electric rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
opening and closing controlled by sensors
(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
placing the third row of seats in the cargo
floor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
unfolding and folding the net partition. . . . . 145
Luggage compartment floor
7-seater vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
variable (5-seater vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Luggage compartment shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
M
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Maintenance
see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Malfunctions
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 274
clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
MirrorLink®
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Mirrors
adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 214
favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
use streaming services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
N
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
detailed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
368
Index
enter an address for a guide destination . . 204
f
av
ourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
frequent destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
managing the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 205
navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 207
saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
use the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
use the map to enter the destination . . . . . . 205
Net bag
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Net for luggage
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
unfolding and folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Noise
auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 333
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
O
Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
rear lid with electric opening and closing . . 104
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Operating fault
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Operation in winter
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
P
Painting the vehicle
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Panoramic roof
see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Park Assist
see the assisted parking system (Park As-
sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
at an angle with the reverse assist . . . . . . . . 295
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
in parallel with the reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . 296
with the assisted parking system (Park As-
sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Parking aid
automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286
parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
see the assisted parking system (Park As-
sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
setting the indications and audio sig-
nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286
surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
369
Index
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
283, 286
P
arking aid system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 282, 285
Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 279
leaving a parking space (only when paral-
lel parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Parking distance warning system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 282, 285
Parking lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ParkPilot
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 282, 285
Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 16
Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . 289
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Petrol
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Power socket
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Power steering
see Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
selecting the driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Preheating system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Press & Drive
start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
R
Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
(TP) Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Radio-operated remote control
see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . 260
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . 260, 264
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 107
see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 104
Rear mounting
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Refuelling
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote control key
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . . 166
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Reverse assist (Rear View)
angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
cross traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
hitching a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 296
370
Index
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
R
everse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 77
Road signs
shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Rotation direction
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Running in
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
S
S-PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Safety
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Save fuel
inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Screen
clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Seat belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 24
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
seat belt height adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Seat functions
access aid for the third row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Seats
access aid for the third row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
adjusting the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 133
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
third row seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Service
Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
371
Index
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Service int
erv
als . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Service Menu
identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 224
Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Special characteristics
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 304
MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
peripheral view system (Top View Camera) .291
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56
tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Speed limiter
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Start-Stop system
disconnect and connect manually . . . . . . . . 221
driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 219
the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
active cylinder management status (ACT) . 68
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 223
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 72
Steering
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Steering wheel
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 224
Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
glasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
in the front central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
in the roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
on the driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Storage compartment accessories
see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Storing objects
bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 133
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
372
Index
net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
positioning the l
oad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 147
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
trapdoor for long loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sunshade blind
anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Switching off
telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
T
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Telephone
contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Temperature indicator
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Third row of seats
place in the cargo floor position . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Time
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 77
Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 222, 224
To change the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 39
Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 39
Top View Camera
see the Peripheral view system (Top View
Camera) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Torque
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Touch zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Towable loads
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300
Tow hook
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Towing device
fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 304
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56
rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56
tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Traffic programme
see Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286
power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-
er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300
technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
373
Index
towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
t
o
wing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300
Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . . 304
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . 297, 301
Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
see Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Trailer mode
see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Trapdoor for long loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Travel Assist
see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Trips abroad
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Troubleshooting
Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Tyre Mobility System
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Tyre pressure monitor systems
Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tyres
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
for winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
U
Unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 214
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Vehicle
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . . 95
vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Vehicle care
wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Siri™ (Apple CarPlay™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Volume
set for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
W
Warning symbols
see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Washing the vehicle
conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 342
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 342
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
374
Index
Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 333
anti-theft de
vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Wheels
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 49
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Wheel trim
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Windows
automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Window washer
window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Window washer water
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Windscreen
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 162
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Winter conditions
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Wiper and rear window wiper blades
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 344
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
X
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
375
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.20
Vehicle identification da a
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of eceipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Tarraco
Owner’s manual
5FJ012720BE
Inglés
5FJ012720BE (07.20)
SEAT Tarraco Inglés (07.20)
